Are you wondering how to choose an IELTS course?

Today we’ll give you our top 6 tips for choosing a great course that will help you get to your goal!

#1) Think about your priorities:  What is important to you? What do you need? What are you looking for? Do you want to save money? Are you willing to spend more money to get quality? Are you willing to drive across your city to a school? Do you have time to do homework? If traffic is terrible in your city then consider an online course.

#2) Consider both online and offline options: The possibilities with online learning are enormous. The goal of an online course is usually to save your time and the goal of an offline course is to fill your time. Which makes more sense?  A teacher in an in-person course might waste your time. They may fill the time with activities that aren’t related to the test because they have teaching hours to fill. We like the fact that online courses give you control over the content. You can go at your own pace. You can listen to a lecture more than once to make sure you understand it. It’s important to know yourself. If you study online there is more responsibility so make sure that you are self motivated and committed to your course if you choose the online option.

#3) Find a clear study system with simple steps to follow:

  • Strategies: You must have clear and simple strategies to approach the test.
  • Step by step plan: The course should give you a step-by-step plan. It should be organized into the sections of the test. The writing module should be dense. You need a lot of skills for that part of the test and it should have examples for all of the different types of writing questions. If you rely only on free materials you will not get this step-by-step strategy system and you will get on the wrong track. When you invest in a course, you are investing in a clear system.
  • Created by an IELTS specialist: Make sure the people who create the course know the test.  There are a lot of people out there who say they know IELTS but they don’t. They can’t know IELTS if they also know TOEFL, TOEIC, etc. You need an IELTS specialist.  IELTS is complicated. The teacher needs to know strategies, timing, what the examiner is looking for. There is a lot to know before you can teach it. Don’t hire the wrong teacher. It will be reflected in your score.
  • Balanced practice: Be willing to spend money and invest in a good course that offers balanced practice. This means that the course should assign you work that helps you build your general English as well as your test strategies and knowledge.
  • Daily learning plan: The course should tell you exactly what to do each day to get the practice and preparation that you need.

#4) The course should have documented results or a guarantee: Do they stand behind their material by offering a score increase guarantee if you do all of the work? Are there testimonials of people who have taken the course before and have achieved their target score? Look for social proof! Talk to people who have taken it.

#5) Make sure there is a community of test takers: This can be online or offline. For an online course it’s great to have a private Facebook group where you can ask questions, share your target score, and get support from other test takers. Be careful with the large textbook publishers who put their courses online. They aren’t adding the extras that you need when you are online like the community. In many cases they are just taking their textbook content and putting it online. They are selling you the download without much support.

#6) Make sure there is good support: Some of the bigger names are test- taking factories. If you email someone for support you won’t talk to a teacher. You will talk to a customer service person who won’t give you a personalized answer and the person will not know IELTS. They will just refer you back to a part of the course. Is there someone you can go to personally and ask for advice. Don’t get fooled by the big brand names! They don’t always offer the support that you need.

What courses are you currently considering?

What questions do you have about our tips today?

Beware of the Over-prepare! Here is a story of a student who got on the wrong track!

Once upon a time, there was student.

This student wanted desperately to get a 7.5 on the IELTS exam.

In fact, this student, let’s call him Biff, was a quite high-level English student, having completed every level in the local language school.

Any teacher who spoke with Biff was sure he was at the upper-intermediate to advanced level in his English abilities.

Biff had big dreams.

He wanted to study marketing in a respected university in England, then take his degree back to his home country.

With these skills, knowledge of Western culture and business practices, as well as being fluent in English, he would definitely land a dream job, making his parents and future wife proud.

He would also be able to provide an enviable life for his future wife and children.

However, in order to achieve these dreams, Biff needed, first, to pass the IELTS exam with at least an overall band score of 7.

Of course, Biff is an overachiever by nature, so he is aiming for a 7.5.

Seeing as Biff is already confident in his English ability, he decides that all he really needs is test practice.

So, he goes to a bookstore and purchases 10 test preparation books.

Actually, these books are not really test preparation, as they only have sample tests and no tips or strategies.

Biff works through the first couple books, and is pretty happy with his results.

On the reading and listening portions, he is consistently getting at least 34 out of 40 answers correct.

He decides to just go for the exam.

So, he pays his fees and takes the test.

Two weeks later, he gets his scores: Writing 6, Speaking 7, Reading 6.5, Listening 6.

“What!” he thinks.

How is this possible?

Biff decides he needs to practice more.

So, he goes through all 10 books, many times.

He does at least 2 full tests a day.

After a week or so, he finds that his scores are actually going down!

He is now only getting 25-30 out of 40.

But, how is that possible?

He’s practicing so much!

Shouldn’t he improve?!

What is Biff doing wrong?

He is not approaching his preparation correctly.

It doesn’t matter what level of English you have, or how advanced you think you are.

If you do too much test practice, your scores will go down.

I’ve seen it a million times!

What you must have, in order to get the score you need on IELTS and, ultimately, achieve your dreams, is a BALANCED IELTS study plan.

You must work on your weaknesses, maintain confidence in your strengths, and work on you testing skills AND your overall English ability.

In our course, 3 Keys IELTS Success System, we provide you with a 30 day and a 60 day study plan.

For 5-6 days a week, you are given one activity that improves your testing skills, along with one activity that improves your overall English.

Every task and activity in this course is aimed at improving your testing confidence and your English ability.

The modules provide simple strategies for even the most difficult parts of the test, such as answering Y/N/NG questions, and also give you the motivation you need to work hard and keep increasing your testing and language skills.

So, don’t be like Biff!

Don’t over-prepare on one side, and actually make your scores decrease.

Improve your scores AND your English ability with a balanced study plan and a solid course.

Have you prepared for IELTS like Biff?

Let us know in the comments!

How are you doing it differently now?

Find out how to score a 9 with these sample Part 3 IELTS Speaking test answers.

Today Lindsay and Jessica will demonstrate great ways to answer common speaking questions using idioms, expressions, interesting vocabulary, and great intonation.

Q: What is your opinion on the way that languages are taught in schools today?

Listen to the episode at 4:00 to hear the sample response.

In this example Jessica weighed two different sides of the topic, gave details, and was specific.

She also gave strong opinions which is important for a high score on IELTS Speaking Part 3.

Q: Why do you think different cultures have different table manners?

Listen to the example at 6:30.

In this example Lindsay used adjectives such as “striking” and “fascinating.”

She gave a personal example which is a great way to answer Speaking Part 3 questions.

Q: How are eating habits now different from eating habits in your country in the past.

Listen to her example at 8:00

In this example Jessica told a personal story and compared two examples.

Q: Is water pollution a problem in your country?

Listen to the sample response at 10:00

Lindsay used idioms such as “sick as a dog.” You need to find a way to insert idioms in this part of the Speaking test.

One thing to remember: Slow down when you respond to Speaking Part 3 questions so that you can include idioms and expressions that might not come to your mind immediately.

There is nothing wrong with a few seconds of silence.

What are your questions from today’s episode?

Let us know in the comments below.

Are you making this huge mistake when you ask for directions in English?

Stop making this mistake now!

What’s the mistake?

Many English learners approach English speakers and ask, “Charles River?” or “Brooklyn Bridge?”

It is lazy and can sound rude when you just use the name of your destination as your question.

You need to add more details and make your questions a bit more nuanced in order to come off as polite and friendly.

In today’s episode we’ll show you some better ways to ask for directions in English.

Here are some better ways to ask directions in English:

  • “Hi where is the Charles River?”
  • “How do I get to the Charles River?”
  • “What’s the best way to get to the Charles River?”
  • “Hi is the Charles River nearby?”

 

Leave us your sample sentences in the comments!

Ask us how to get somewhere and practice.

What should you do after you get your IELTS score?

What should you do if the scores you get are not as high as you wanted?

Today find out what to do and what NOT to do with Lindsay and Jessica.

We DO NOT recommend asking for a re-score if you aren’t happy with your score? Why? It costs a lot of money. You will probably not see a score change. Instead of asking for a re-score, the smarter thing to do is to spend that money on a course and use it to learn strategies that will guarantee you a better score next time.

Also if you didn’t get your target score, don’t waste your time feeling bad.

Most people don’t get the score they need the first time.

Focus on the positives. Maybe you got a 6.5 in Listening and 5 in Writing. So, your Listening is strong. Now you need to focus on Writing.

Figure out what was missing in your preparation before the test.

You could have done something differently to get a better score.

Don’t use the same study schedule and study activities again.

Change your study plan.

Be honest with yourself. Did you put in as much as effort as you should have in your daily study plan?

If you didn’t do enough, add on some extra time to your study schedule before your next exam.

Remember, you can’t teach yourself what you don’t know.

Find an IELTS professional who can tell you exactly what the examiner wants.

The professional or the course should be able to teach you solid strategies for the exam.

Don’t only use free content. If the content is free then there is probably a reason for that. It might not be the best content.

Make sure you have a clearly mapped out study plan.

You should know exactly what to do every single day to improve not only your testing skills but also your general English.

Also don’t be afraid to leave the classroom.

You don’t need to study in a traditional IELTS classroom.

Try an online IELTS course.

How are you going to change your strategy if you don’t get your target score the first time?

Let us know in the comments below.

How do you describe someone who is ambitious in English?

This summer and fall we have been teaching you how to go deeper when you describe personality.

We showed you how to describe someone who is an extrovert or introvert in English.

We also showed you how to describe a mean person in English.

Today we’ll show you four ways to talk about someone who has goals and dreams in English.

Someone who is ambitious:

  • Driven: Something is driving the person. Something is pushing them forward.
  • Motivated:
  • Goal oriented:
  • Hard working:
  • Determined: To stick to your guns, to keep following and moving towards your goal.

 

Someone who is not ambitious:

  • Lazy
  • A slacker
  • Passive
  • Lost

 

Now describe yourself or your friends and family members in the comments.

Who do you know who is motivated, determined, or goal oriented?

Your biggest IELTS worry will be solved today!

Do you worry that your mind will go blank on the IELTS Speaking test?

Are you afraid that the examiner will ask you a question and you will have no idea what to say?

Are you concerned that this will bring down your speaking score and your overall IELTS score?

Don’t let this happen to you!

Don’t worry!

We are here to help.

Today we’ll show you the best technique for what to do if your mind goes blank and how to use this technique to get your 7 or higher on the IELTS.

**Click the audio player above to meet Lindsay and Jessica and to listen to this episode!

Get the 7 Easy Steps to a 7 or Higher on IELTS!

Are you confused about where to start and how to prepare?

Get our 7 step checklist and make it easy!

Click here to get it now

Why does your mind go blank?

You are nervous.

You are anxious.

You are analyzing your answers while you are speaking then you hit a wall and you can’t be spontaneous.

You can no longer be confident.

Here is the strategy to use when your mind goes blank:

The problem is that you don’t know which direction to go in to think of ideas.

Instead of getting stuck there you should go straight to your personal examples.

Talk about yourself.

Tell your story and how it relates to the question.

If you practice this enough and get good at this strategy it will definitely help increase your score on the test.

Steps to use this strategy:

  • Step 2: Go straight to a personal story or something that has happened in your life. Tell what happened in your life, give your point of view, and add details. You can also add idioms, expressions, and interesting vocabulary here. It’s OK if you start by stumbling as long as you go straight into your personal experience quickly.

 If this happens to you then you need one direction to go into right away.

Start immediately talking about yourself with personal examples so that you don’t waste any time.

Go straight to your own life examples.

It’s easy to talk about yourself and it will increase your fluency instantly for a 7 or higher on Speaking. “

-Jessica Beck, IELTS Professional at All Ears English

Example #1:

Question: Why do we need role models?

Answer:In my personal experience we need role models because there are so many times when we don’t know which direction to take.

Personally, my dad is a great role model because he is also an entrepreneur and he has spent his life building up a successful business.

His example has helped me take my own direction in life. That’s the reason I think it’s important to have good role models.”

Key phrases from this example:

  • “In my personal experience…”
  • “Personally,…”

Example #2:

Question: How have shopping habits changed over recent years?

Answer: “Oh that’s a good question. Wow. Well, if I use myself as an example, I used to do all of my shopping in traditional stores.

I guess that’s true for most people in the world but these days I have bought an Amazon Prime membership and that’s a huge motivation for me to save time.

I spend two minutes, go on Amazon, buy something awesome, and it’s shipped to my house two days later so I’d say that’s how shopping habits have changed.”

Key phrases in this example:

  • “If I use myself as an example…”
  • “I used to…”

Example #3

Question: In your country why do people watch so much television?

Answer: “Oh that’s a good question. Well, in my opinion, the reason that people watch so much television is that they have a passive attitude.

So when I was a teenager, I used to watch a lot of TV.

I watched 90210.

That was a classic and a bunch of other shows that put garbage into my head. I just wanted to sit back and receive the ideas.

I think that’s the reason that people are watching a lot of TV.

They are lazy, not just in the physical sense but in the intellectual sense.”

Key phrases in this example:

  • “Well, in my opinion…”
  • “So when I was a teenager…”

Example #4:

Question: Do you think the types of sports that are popular will change in the future?

Answer: “Wow, that’s tough. I’m gonna say yeah. Just take my city, for example. If you look, I think in general, say, even five years ago, a lot of people in Portland were all about basketball.

I see a big change in the types of sports that people are into and passionate about. Soccer is becoming huge. Even women’s soccer.

After the women’s world cup our professional women’s team sold out every game. That would have been unthinkable last year.

I’m going to say more people are going to support women’s sports.”

Key phrases in this example:

  • “I’m going to say yeah…”
  • “Just take my city, for example…”
  • “I see a big change in….”

Lindsay McMahon IELTS Energy Co-host, All Ears English“The examiner will note the change in your voice when you talk about your personal stories.

Your voice will become relaxed, fluid, and loose.

You will sound more like a native speaker.

This will cause the examiner to give you a higher score in pronunciation and general fluency.”

-Lindsay McMahon, Co-host of IELTS Energy Podcast

What changes in your voice when you use personal examples?

The examiner will notice a change in the flow of your voice if you use personal stories, experiences, and examples.

You will become more relaxed and confident and loose.

You will feel more free to add details without worrying that you will make a mistake.

It will sound like you are just having coffee with a friend.

How can you practice this?

Get used to talking about your personal stories, experiences, and opinions out in the world and at social events.

Be confident that your life is interesting enough to share.

Open up about yourself and practice this with people you meet.

Have you used this strategy on your IELTS exam yet?

Let us know in the comments below.

What other questions do you have about IELTS?

Write your comments!

What should you say when you’re unsure of your plans in English?

Today we’ll show you one native English phrase to express your uncertainty about your social life and your plans.

When you aren’t sure what’s going to happen you can say that your plans are “up in the air.”

Learn more by listening to the episode.

 

native English teachersAre you looking for a professional, native English teacher online?

Get a native English teacher online in seconds at italki.

Lindsay and Michelle recommend italki as our #1 English-learning solution online. Choose from more than 400 teachers to work on your business English or to pass your next big exam.

Get our special offer before it runs out! Go to italki and claim 10USD to go toward a FREE second English lesson at italki!

 

Sample sentences:

  • “My plans with my friend were up in the air until he actually arrived in Boston.”
  • “With the wedding everything was up in the air so I couldn’t make plans to hang out with my good friends.”
  • “Things were up in the air with my plans and unfortunately they fell through.”
  • “Next summer is still up in the air. I have a loose vision of what I want to do. It’s going to be a commitment to make the choice.”
  • “Is anything still up in the air with your wedding?”

 

Practice this phrase in the comments below!

Did you know that using idioms can move your IELTS Speaking score form good to great!

In today’s episode find out exactly how to do it and what idioms to use.

Are you worried that the examiner will use idioms in his or her questions?

Don’t worry about this.

The examiner will not use idioms.

However, you should use idioms in your answer.

Use interesting idioms to get a higher score on speaking!

Listen to this episode to know what to do if you don’t understand the examiner’s questions.

Here are five idioms you can use to express your opinion about things that are good:

#1) “Out of this world”

  • “Have you seen any good movies lately?”
  • “Yes I saw a great movie. It was out of this world.”

This can also be used to talk about food. For example, “My dessert was out of this world.”

#2) “The most incredible (thing) ever!”

Examples:

“This is the most incredible apartment ever!”

#3) “It’s one in a million.”

Out of a million people, this person is the best.

Example:

“My favorite soccer player is Renaldo. He is one in a million.”

#4) “I couldn’t be happier with (thing)”

Example:

“I couldn’t be happier with my neighborhood.”

#5) “It is mind-blowing.”

Example:

“The ideas in this book are mind-blowing.”

“I just attended a mind-blowing TED Talk.”

These idioms exaggerate your point.

It’s a good idea to exaggerate because it puts more feeling into your tone of voice.

This will get you a higher pronunciation score.

What questions do you have about today’s episode?

Let us know in the comments below.

Are you wondering what your goals are and what you should be aiming for on IELTS Speaking Part 2?

Today find out exactly what the examiner will be listening for on this part of the exam.

In Part 2 of the IELTS Speaking exam, the examiner will give you directions, telling you that you can make notes for one minute, and that you should speak for one to two minutes.

They will then hand you a piece of paper and a pencil for notes, and a booklet.

The booklet will be open to a specific page, and there is a card printed on the page.

The card looks like this:

Describe your favorite place to exercise.

You should say:

  • where it is
  • what it looks like
  • what you do there

and explain why you like it.

This is the topic you must speak about, and you cannot turn the page or choose another card.

The phrase at the top of the card tells you to describe something, usually a person, place, object, event or experience.

The bullet points underneath give you ideas of what to say.

**You DO NOT have to talk about the bullet points in your Part 2 speech.

These phrases are only there to help you, the candidate, be able to talk for the whole two minutes.

Many students are surprised when they hear that the bullet point questions are not important, but it’s true!

In fact, many examiners do not even look at this part of the card, because these questions have nothing to do with your grade.

The examiners have a lot to think about while they listen to you talk, and these questions are not important.

So, here is what the examiner is listening for in Speaking Part 2:

  • Fluency and Coherence: Although the examiner tells you to speak for one to two minutes, you must speak for the whole two minutes to score highly in this category. This is the fluency part of the grade. Another factor of fluency is not having a lot of pauses, or fillers. Fillers are words such as, “uh, um, like, yeah, you know.” The coherence grade is based on how well your ideas are organized, and how many linking words you use. That is why, if you can, telling a story in Speaking Part 2 is a good idea. Stories are easily and clearly organized, using time linking words, and they make it easy to keep talking for the whole two minutes.
  • Vocabulary: Seeing as this is still not a formal, academic topic, you are not expected to produce these kinds of words. The examiner is listening for interesting words and phrases that are less common among students. These are words that you probably did not learn in your English textbook; rather, these are words and phrases that you picked up from TV, movies, or native-speaker friends. For example, “My closest friend in the world is Megan, and, honestly, I can’t imagine not having her in my life. I’ll tell you about her personality first. She is super sweet, and she would give anyone the shirt off her back if they asked….”
  • Grammar: Many candidates are nervous about their grammar, because it is not perfect. Well, guess what- it doesn’t have to be! In fact, all the way up to band score 8, you are expected to have some errors that stick around. Having said that, you cannot have loads and loads of mistakes. Pay attention to improving your accuracy in the obvious areas, such as verb tense and singular/plural nouns. Those are mistakes that the examiner will notice, and you can improve these errors on your own by recording yourself and paying attention to these specific points. Other than this, the examiner is listening for varied sentence structure. Try to use more relative clauses (which, that, who, when, where clauses) and other types of dependent clauses (because, so, although, etc.). Listen to this episode about our grammar philosophy for IELTS.
  • Pronunciation: To score well in this category, you must put emotion in your voice. This is your chance to show some personality. The examiner wants to hear intonation in your voice, or your voice going up and down, and stress, or emphasis on important words. For example:

↗                 ↗

I absolutely love my best friend. She’s amazing!

Now you know what your goals are for IELTS Speaking Part 2.

Follow the guidelines above, stick to a clear strategy system, and you will reach your target score.

Your path is clear! Now you just have to work hard and put in the required time.

We think you can do it!

Leave us a comment below.

What questions do you have from this article?

There are traps on the IELTS Listening test!

These traps will lower your score!

But don’t worry.

We’ll show you how to identify them and how to avoid them in today’s episode.

Today we’ll show you the 5 things that could hurt your score on the Listening test.

Top 5 IELTS Listening Traps:

Trap #1) Trying to figure out your score while you are taking the test: If you are doing this then you are not paying attention to the listening and you are not identifying key words, listening for them, and listening for the answer. If you use too much mental space trying to calculate your score you will lose points! Don’t do it.

Trap #2) Writing your answer and second guessing yourself: Don’t doubt your answer. Go with your first thoughts. If you write an answer and then go back and change it then it’s probably going to be wrong. If you do this you will miss the next answer. The test doesn’t stop for you. You will lose points if you do this. If you MUST change your answer, you will have time to change it later.

Trap #3) Not following the test instructions and the strategies: You are not smarter than the test. The test will tell you exactly what to do. Follow the steps. Some teachers have different advice here. Some teachers tell you to use the answer checking time to look ahead at the next group of questions. We don’t believe that you should skip ahead and do this. You need the time to check your answers. You will be able to catch spelling, grammar, and logic mistakes.

Trap #4) Taking notes while you’re listening: IELTS is not TOEFL. On TOEFL you take notes but on IELTS you don’t. You do not have the time. If you take notes you will be missing the next answers. Do not take notes. Make sure you work with an IELTS professional who will give you the right advice on this.

Trap #5) Stressing out because you don’t understand every word you hear: Even native speakers don’t understand every word that they hear in English. You just need to get the answers. IELTS won’t surround the answer with so many tough words that it’s impossible to understand. You will understand enough to get the answers. Don’t waste time stressing about this.

Try to find listening practice that you enjoy in your free time.

That will give you the confidence that you need on test day.

Have you fallen into any of these Listening traps?

Let us know in the comments below. What will you do differently next time?

Today find out how to start an English conversation with a friend of a friend!

Sometimes you might know someone indirectly.

Maybe you have heard something about the person but you are meeting them for the first time.

How can you start that conversation smoothly without feeling awkward?

Today we’ll show you four ways to do that in English using the information that you already have about the person.

Phrases to start the conversation:

  • “So (our common friend) tells me that you’re a (hobby, job)”
  • “Oh so I heard you’re from (home city)?”
  • “Aren’t you working as a (job)”?
  • “Oh you’re a (job) right?”

The key goal is just to get the person talking.

Say one of these phrases and let them start talking.

That is all you need to do to start that connection.

What other phrases have you used to start this type of conversation?

Let us know in the comments below.

You have a 50% chance of getting questions about your hometown on IELTS Speaking Part 1.

Today you’ll get sample answers to common speaking answers about your hometown.

The first question on IELTS Speaking Part 1 is always about:

  • Your hometown or your current city OR
  • Your work or studies

Here are some typical questions for Speaking Part 1 about your hometown:

  • Where did you grow up?
  • How long did you live there?
  • Why did you like your hometown?
  • Why did you not like your hometown?
  • Does your family still live there?
  • Where are you living now?
  • How is your current city different from where you grew up?
  • Why did you move to your current city?
  • What are the main industries in your city?

Remember, in today’s role play the person asking the question responded a bit but on the actual test the examiner will not respond with a comment.

Tell us about your hometown?

How would you answer some of these questions? Use the same level of detail, intonation, and interesting vocabulary.

Are you an adventurer?

Today we’ll show you three things you can learn from an American adventurer that we admire.

You’ll also learn three new idioms from our conversation.

In today’s episode Lindsay and Michelle talked about a boy named Chris McCandless who decided to escape everyday life to spend time in the wild, living off the land.

The story is called Into the Wild.

This move strikes a chord with many people who watch it.

Many fans of this movie look at their own life and realize that they are not spending enough time in nature.

What can we learn from Chris McCandless?

  • Know what you want, have a specific goal in mind: Stick to your guns. If you have a goal, don’t let anyone sway you away from it. Chris knew that his ultimate goal was to live on his own in Alaska. A lot of people told him not to go and that it would be too dangerous but he stuck with his goal and eventually went on his adventure.
  • Enjoy and appreciate nature: Chris spent all of his time outdoors and he loved “to be one with nature.”
  • Connect with people: Chris made incredible eye contact when he talked to people. Even though he was running away from some of his relationships with family members by going on the trip, he formed some strong relationships while he was traveling. Chris really touched people.

 

Idioms from today’s episode:

  • To strike a chord
  • To stick to your guns
  • To be one with nature
  • To touch people

 

Practice using the idioms below by creating sentences in the comments below!

In American culture it’s good to be opinionated!

It’s good to have preferences for certain things over other things because it makes people respect you.

The same is true on the IELTS.

You need to be able to express your opinion in a few different sections on the IELTS Exam.

On the Writing test you need to put your opinion in the essay on Writing Task 2.

You must show a strong “position” or opinion to get a 7 or above.

On the IELTS Speaking test it doesn’t carry the same weight of importance to share your opinion but you are asked about your opinions, especially in Speaking Part 3.

So if you are going to show strong opinions on the IELTS then you need to develop strong opinions.

We have already shown you how to create a culture of thinking for IELTS.

You need to read newspapers, watch the news, read books, and expose yourself to what is happening out in the world.

Here are some phrases to express your opinion:

  • “My frank and honest opinion is that…”- using the word “frank” is a good way to stand out because it’s less common vocabulary
  • “It is my firm belief that…” – this shows an awesome grammar structure and good vocabulary
  • “To my mind/in my mind…”
  • “I’m inclined to believe that…”

Practice opportunity!!

Go right now to iTunes and leave us a review for the podcast.

Tell us your honest opinion about our show and use these phrases! Click here to go to iTunes.

We appreciate your review.

Do you know how to use “whatever” in English?

American English speakers use it all of the time but it’s important to know how to use it in the right places and with the right tone of voice.

With this word, tone of voice is key to getting your point across accurately. Today we’ll show you how to do it.

Meanings of “whatever”:

  • To say that you are flexible and open to different options or ideas
  • To show that you are indecisive or wishy-washy
  • To show frustration or anger or resentment

“Whatever” is used a lot by teenagers. It was especially common for teenagers back in the ’90’s. Watch the movie Clueless to hear it used this way.

Sample conversations (listen to the episode to hear these):

L: I think we should get a new website look.

M: I personally like the yellow but whatever you want.

*with this response Michelle used an upward intonation to show that she was interested in the question but wasn’t sure how to respond, she was flexible.

M: Lindsay did you really get stood up last week? What are you going to do?

L: Ughh whatever. I am not going to get in touch with him. He can contact me

*In this case Lindsay’s tone of voice indicated that she was frustrated and annoyed. Listen to the episode.

 

Leave us a sample sentence in the comments below!

Use whatever in one of the three ways!

We want to see your examples.

Are you wondering what verb tenses and grammar forms matter on IELTS?

On our podcast, IELTS Energy, and in our course, 3 Keys IELTS Success System, we tell people to not worry so much about their grammar on IELTS.

There are many reasons for this.

First of all, if you are trying to improve your speaking and writing score, your time is better spent on improving your fluency, coherence, vocabulary and pronunciation.

These categories provide more reachable ways to make your band score jump higher.

In the category of grammar, however, it is not easy to internalize and produce new and more complex structures with few mistakes.

Many people who study English for years, and are considered fluent, still make grammar mistakes.

Native speakers still make grammar mistakes!

Having said that, there is one part of grammar that you must think about when speaking and writing.

This is verb tense.

Errors in tense and time are very noticeable to the examiner, and, if you make too many of these mistakes, it could severely impact your score.

Remember, you do not have to have perfect grammar to get a 7.

To score a 6 for grammar, you are actually allowed quite a few grammar errors, as long as you are using a variety of sentence structures.

However, if the examiner notices too many errors, your score may drop down to a 5.

With that in mind, I’m going to provide examples below of where the most common verb tenses are used on the test.

The fewer mistakes, the better!

Present Simple

This tense describes general truths, habits, and descriptions of things or events that are currently happening.

Speaking Part 1

Tell me about your apartment.

Student: “My apartment is near the university. It is quite small, but comfortable. I live there with two of my friends, and we like to throw parties there sometimes.

Speaking Part 2

Describe a person who you think is intelligent.

Student: My friend Marta is super smart. She goes to school at Harvard University, and she wants to be a doctor. It’s interesting, because I think most people as smart as Marta do not have good social skills. Marta, however, loves going out dancing and she has a lot of friends…

Writing Task 2 / Speaking Part 3

Some people think that reading comic books, or graphic novels, is only for children, and mature adults should not be wasting time on these things. What is your opinion?

Student: These days, comic books are definitely not just for kids. There actually exists a specific literary vehicle called the graphic novel that many novices mix up with comic books, but they are far from the same. Graphic novels feature many adult themes and violent scenes, and are written and drawn by some very well respected artists in their own right.

Past Simple

This tense describes actions or things that are finished in the past.

Speaking Part 1

What did you do yesterday?

Student: Yesterday, I had school, actually. So, I woke up around 8 in the morning, grabbed some coffee on my way to campus, and went to 3 classes in a row. It was pretty tiring, to be honest.

Speaking Part 2

Describe a place you went to that was really quiet.

Student: Last year, I visited Taipei with a friend. My friend, Chloe, had some meetings to go to, so I tagged along for a little vacation. One day, when Chloe was at work, I decided to go to the mountains and hike. It was incredible! The trail started right in the city, practically, and I could bike there easily from my hotel…

Writing Task 1

The graph shows the amount of students in three different majors from 2000 to 2010.

Student: In 2000, the number of students in the tech courses stood at 3,000. Then, in the next 5 years, this number rocketed to over 1 million.

Present Perfect

This tense is usually used to introduce information about a past experience. It is almost always followed by the past simple to give details about the experience.

Speaking Part 1

Do you travel often?

Student: I have traveled to over 30 countries, by myself. I went to Europe for the first time in 1998, then I traveled around India in 2001.
Remember, do not worry too much about having perfect grammar.

That is nearly impossible.

However, you should also not make basic errors, such as those with verb tense.

Do you have any questions about grammar on IELTS?

Leave us your question or practice your own sentences in the comments below.

Are you worried about multiple choice questions on the IELTS Reading test?

Today you’ll find out how to reduce stress and handle multiple choice questions when they come up on the IELTS Listening and the Reading test.

This can be stressful because you are faced with four possible answers.

You are trying to keep all of the different information in your head while you are listening to the recording or reading the passage.

A test strategy that you need here is elimination!

It’s often easier to find the wrong answer than it is to find the right answer.

Before you start listening and reading, read the question and look at the answers.

Trust your logic.

There is often one answer that is not logical, it does not make sense.

Put an “X” next to that.

This could reduce stress.

Next, don’t look for the answers.

Listen for the key words from the question.

When you hear the key words or see them in the passage, pay close attention because the answer is always next to the key words.

If you are left with a few answers, use your logic to make an educated guess about what the right answer is.

Remember, the key to using this skill on the test is to practice it as much as possible before the exam within a larger system and with well-written exercises.

These exercises should focus on specific skills and strategies and not just the test practice.

What questions do you have about multiple choice questions?

Let us know in the comments below!

A great way to connect with more people is to use natural American English expressions.

Today you’ll get four expressions that include the word “speak.”

Here are today’s expressions:

  • “Speak of the devil” When we are talking about someone and then they contact us by phone or they show up. This does not mean that the person is “the devil.” This is usually used when the person is close to you. It indicates that it’s a coincidence that the person showed up at that time.

 

  • “To speak ill of someone” : To say something bad about someone. This is a common expression but it’s a bit more formal. It could be used more in writing.

 

  • “Speaking of….”: This will help you transition in your conversations. Use this to move to the next topic when you find a common link. Our goal with English is Connection NOT Perfection. Use this phrase to change the subject from a boring topic and bring it back to getting to know someone better.

 

  • “Speak your mind”: To say what you think and to say it firmly and with confidence. You can also use this to invite someone to speak by saying, “Go ahead, speak your mind.”

 

Leave us a sample sentence.

Practice these phrases in the comments below.

Do you know how to write an awesome concluding paragraph on your IELTS Writing test?

Earlier this year we showed you how to write an introduction and how to write a body paragraph.

Today we’ll show you how to write a concluding paragraph that will get you the 7 that you need!

Your conclusion only needs to be a few sentences.

You can start it with a phrase like:

  • “In sum…”
  • “To conclude…”
  • “In summary…”

If you use a phrase like “In conclusion…” you may get a band 6 because that is a common textbook phrase.

If you try new phrases like the ones above then you’ll be likely to get a 7 because you will go beyond the textbook.

Next, give a one-sentence summary of your main ideas.

“To conclude, the government should pass a law requiring citizens to exercise to alleviate the obesity epidemic.”

Remember, don’t repeat the same words.

Learn how to paraphrase and show the examiner that you have enough vocabulary to not repeat yourself.

In the last sentence you should give your opinion about the future of this problem.

Start by saying:

  • “It is my belief that…”
  • “It is my firm belief that…”
  • “In my opinion…”

What questions do you have about writing a concluding paragraph?

In our 3 Keys IELTS Success System we go into much more detail on how to write this.

Follow the steps and get the score you need!

Time is so important, especially in American culture!

We spend a lot of time asking what time it is, talking about times for appointments, and worrying about being on time.

Since we talk about time often, today we’ll help you to avoid sounding strange when you talk about time in English.

Last week we talked about how to not sound awkward when you use numbers to talk about money, years, phone numbers, etc.

Today you’ll get four tips on how to talk about time in English.

 

Tip #1)

Do not say “zero” when you talk about time.

For example, you can say “It’s three-o-four” when it’s 3:04.

 

Tip #2)

In American culture we say “It’s three thirty” for 3:30. You could say “it’s half past three” but it’s much less common. In British English it’s common to say “half three” but we don’t say that in American English.

 

Tip #3)

If it’s 3:15 you can say “it’s quarter past three” but it’s a little bit old fashioned.

If it’s 2:45 you can say “It’s quarter to three” or “quarter of three.”

If it’s 3:20 you can say “It’s three twenty”

 

Tip #4)

We don’t use military time in the US.

When you use military time people will understand it but we don’t use it.

Instead use 10 am or 1o pm to tell the difference between the morning or the evening.

 

What questions do you have about today’s episode?

Ask us in the comments below.

Are you ready for the IELTS Speaking test?

You can prepare by knowing what the specific Speaking topics are and selecting two to three idioms that you will use if you get those common questions.

If you use idioms on your Speaking test you can dramatically increase your vocabulary score.

We have already shown you how to use work idioms, happiness idioms and party idioms and today we’ll show you some great idioms to use if you get a question about museums or art.

If you can throw these idioms in at the beginning in Speaking Part 1 to give an immediate positive impression and then at the end in Speaking Part 3 you will be sure to get an increased vocabulary score.

Here are 5 art/museum idioms that you can use:

  • “A work of art”: Anything that could be considered art. This can include a song, a painting, or a photograph.
  • “Beauty is in the eye of the beholder”: If you think something is beautiful then it’s beautiful. You could use this to talk about something that you like that other people don’t such as a painting or a piece of clothing, etc.
  •  “To paint a picture with words”: To describe something very clearly, specifically, and directly. To help someone envision something through words.  You can use this expression to describe what a great author does in your favorite book.
  • “A picture is worth a thousand words”: If you talk about photographs that you have taken this would be a great idiom to use.
  • “A starving artist”: The idea that if you follow what you love it’s not going to be easy, especially if you are working in a creative field such as painting, photography, writing, or music. This is a romantic notion in American culture.  A “starving artist” lives a life with minimal comforts to be able to do their creative work.

Remember, on the IELTS Speaking test you need to be as specific and descriptive as you can.

Check out these articles to learn how to describe someone with integrity and how to describe someone’s temperament.

Now, practice using these idioms in a sentence and leave your sentence in the comments below.

Do you have any questions from today’s episode?

Have you visited a museum as part of your IELTS preparation?

Let us know about your experience in the comments below.

In American culture we tend to misunderstand introverts.

Find out what it really means to be introverted and find out how to get more nuanced when you describe personality types in English.

A lot of people think that introverts are just shy but research has shown that introverts are not always shy.

Introverts get their energy from being alone and extroverts get their energy from interacting with people and other forms of stimulation like music and bright lights.

Today we’ll give you a bunch of vocabulary terms that you can use to describe different personalities.

You can use these nuanced terms on the IELTS Exam for a higher score or in your everyday conversations.

Check out the vocabulary terms below!

 

Ways to describe extroverts:

  • Social
  • Outgoing
  • Gregarious
  • Talkative
  • The life of the party

 

Ways to describe introverts:

  • Shy (be careful, this does not apply to all introverts)
  • Introspective
  • Thoughtful
  • Withdrawn (this has a negative connotation)
  • Quiet

 

Leave us a comment!

Practice using one of these terms to describe a friend or family member.

We want to see your examples below.

Did you know that adding a tiny word to your English phrases and sentences can change your mindset?

The way we communicate can affect the way we think.

Why not focus on building a growth mindset by adding the word “yet” when you talk about goals that you haven’t quite accomplished up to this point?

Carol Dweck, a researcher from Stanford, discovered two types of mindsets:

  • Fixed mindset: This person thinks that intelligence or talent will create your success rather than how hard you work. They believe that your intelligence is “fixed” and it will not change. People with this kind of mindset will spend more time measuring their intelligence rather than focusing on increasing their intelligence. This person thinks that only talent causes success and effort doesn’t have much to do with it. This person believes that your future is reliant on the traits that you already have.

 

  • Growth mindset: These people believe that success can be built through hard work. They love to learn.  They believe they can change their future if they work hard enough. They can increase their intelligence and skills.

We talked about Carol Dweck’s research when Sarah Scala came on the show to talk about grit and resilience.

 

What can you do to cultivate more of a growth mindset?

You can add the word “yet” to your sentences when you talk about something that you haven’t done or don’t have.

Examples:

  • “I have always wanted to travel to Australia. I haven’t made it to Australia yet.”
  • “I haven’t met the love of my life yet.”
  • “I haven’t found my language exchange partner yet”
  • “I haven’t achieved a four-hour workweek yet.”

 

Now leave us your phrases in the comments.

What are you working toward that you haven’t accomplished yet?

Let us know!

Today we’ll show you how to follow the directions to get the highest possible score on IELTS Writing Task 1.

All Task 1 questions look the same.

They ask you to describe what the charts says.

They ask you to summarize the information by looking at the main features and making comparisons where it’s relevant. Many students get confused by this line of instructions.

These instructions don’t tell you how to organize the information.

It’s kind of vague and this does not tell you what they are expecting.

Don’t worry! You don’t even need to pay attention to this sentence.

Instead, you need to know what the examiner wants.

You need to be writing about the key features.

Learn what they are and how to organize them.

For example, if it’s a COT (Change Over Time) graph where you are looking at population change between 2000 and 2015. You need the following:

  • Key features: What are the topics (populations)
  • Main points: Specific numbers- highest, lowest

Next you need to organize this information. You also need to use grammar structures that are more complex and interesting vocabulary.

Most people make this more complicated than it needs to be.

However, you do need to have a step by step system for organizing and writing out your essay.

You should work with a qualified IELTS teacher to practice using a solid system.

What other questions do you have about this?

Let us know in the comments section.

Do you know how to use the phrase “might as well” like a native speaker in English?

If you start using this phrase as well as others like “long story short” or “worse comes to worst” you will be able to connect with people because you will no longer sound like a textbook!

Today we’ll give you one more phrase to add to your repertoire.

The phrase “might as well” or “may as well” can be used to say that you are going to take a logical action.

Here are some examples:

  • “You might as well get to the beach now because November is coming”
  • “I’m closer to the Jersey Shore than Long Beach so I might as well go there instead.”
  • “I figured I might as well (just) go to the beach and do my work.”

 

Write your sample sentence in the comments section below!

Let us know if you have any questions about today’s episode.

Do you think that IELTS writing is the same as academic writing?

The two are not the same and if you work with a teacher who does not understand the differences between the two you will end up with a low Writing score.

We recently got upset when we heard that one of the students in our 3 Keys IELTS Success System  got bad advice from an IELTS teacher who disagreed with our advice that students should use interesting adverbs in their essays.

#1) All advice must be connected to the scoring system:

The problem here is that the teacher is giving the student advice according to what works on academic essays but IELTS is different from other academic essays.

The teacher is not working from the perspective of the IELTS scoring system. He or she is probably an academic writing teacher.

Every single piece of IELTS advice must be connection to the scoring system.

Ask your teacher, “How is this piece of advice going to get me a higher score?”

For example, on an academic essay you should not use “I.”

The professor generally does not want to know your opinion on something.

However, on IELTS you often need to share you opinion and argue your point of view.

If you do not do this you will get a lower score.

#2) Stick to one system, don’t confuse yourself:

Even if you do find an IELTS teacher who really understands the IELTS scoring system it’s better not to try to work with many different teachers who all use different systems.

You need to choose one system with one professional who has real experience and only follow that system.

You cannot try to follow two or three different strategy systems.

You will get confused and this will lower your score.

#3) Invest in a course and get a better chance of success:

Also, don’t rely only on free advice when it comes to IELTS.

If you invest in a course you will be much more likely to focus your time and energy on getting the maximum results for your investment.

What is your experience?

Are you working with more than one teacher and trying to follow more than one system?

Let us know in the comments below.

Are you worried that you don’t have the reading skills that you need for the IELTS?

You already have all the reading skills you need to do well on the IELTS exam.

In fact, you probably employ all three skills in your daily life, even when you are not preparing for the test.

Of course, you are using these skills in your first language; nevertheless, they transfer easily to English.

In today’s article, I am going to explain what these three skills are, when you use them in your “real” life (not preparing for IELTS), and how these skills will help you on the exam.

#1) Skimming

What is it?

Skimming is reading for gist, or main idea.

This is when you read only parts of an article, essay or story to understand, in general, what it is about.

When do I use it?

You use this when you first look at a newspaper, for example.

There are so many long articles in the newspaper, and most people don’t have time to read every word of every article.

First, you read the headline and decide if it interests you or not.

Then, if you find a headline that interests you, you read the first couple sentences.

If you are still not sure of the value of the article, you may skip ahead, reading a couple sentences in the beginning, maybe the end of the article.

By doing this, you have a good overall idea of what the article is about.

Also, when you are reviewing a chapter for a test, or a sales report before an important meeting, you skim.

You reread the title, then a few sentences in the beginning, middle and end of the chapter or report.

This gives you enough information to jog your memory, bringing to mind the details and data that you read at an earlier time.

How do I use it on the IELTS exam?

Skimming is actually the first thing you do when faced with a passage.

As soon as the exam starts, go to Passage 1 and spend 1-1 ½ minutes skimming.

This helps you understand the overall idea of the passage, and will help you access the information and vocabulary you already know related to it.

Then, when you look at the questions, you understand what they are about and what they are asking for.

#2) Scanning

What is it?

Scanning is, actually, not reading.

Reading is slow and scanning is fast, as I like to tell my students.

Scanning is when your eyes are roaming, or wandering, over words to find specific information, such as a name or a number.

When do I use it?

We scan a lot in our daily lives.

Say, for example, you access your work schedule online.

You are not going to read every name and time carefully.

Instead, you are going to scan the document, only looking for your specific name.

Or, perhaps you are looking at a schedule for a movie theater.

You know what movie you want to see, so you scan for that title, then look carefully at the times given.

How do I use it on the IELTS exam?

Scanning helps us find the location of the answers in a passage.

It doesn’t tell us what exactly the answer is, but it tells us where we can look for it.

After you identify the keywords in the questions, you scan for those key words.

Use your finger or pencil to help your eyes move over each line.

The answers are always next to keywords from the question.

#3) Reading for detail

What is it?

Reading for detail is what we think of when someone says the word “reading.”

That is to say, reading for detail is when you read every word of a text carefully.

When do I use it?

Hopefully this is part of your daily life!

If it isn’t, you should incorporate it into your routine for at least 10 minutes a day.

We read for detail when we read for pleasure, or for fun, such as when we enjoy a novel, a comic book, or an interesting essay.

When we study, though, we also do this.

I think you are doing it right now!

Textbooks, practice materials, articles related to our field of study- all of these things people read word for word.

How do I use it on the IELTS exam?

This is the skill you employ after you have scanned for and found the keyword.

After you find the key word, you read the sentence containing the keyword carefully.

Then, compare it to the question.

If the answer is not there, it will be in the sentence immediately before or the sentence immediately after.
As always, with any testing skills, PRACTICE, PRACTICE, PRACTICE!

Click here to learn how to become a faster reader.

What additional questions do you have about IELTS Reading?

Let us know in the comments below.

Do you sound awkward when you use numbers when it comes to years, money, and phone numbers in English?

Today we’ll show you how to stop sounding awkward and start sounding natural!

Years:

  • I was born in 1981: We don’t say “I was born in one thousand, nine hundred and eighty one” instead we say “I was born in nineteen eighty one.”

 

  • I was born in ’81: You can shorten a year by just saying the last two numbers of any year.

 

  • We are in 2015: You can say “we are in twenty fifteen” or “We are in two thousand fifteen.”

 

Money:

  • My rent is $330: We don’t say “My rent is three hundred and thirty dollars” but instead we say “My rent is three-thirty”

 

  •  My coffee cost $3.24: We don’t say “my coffee cost three dollars and twenty four cents” but instead we say “my coffee cost three twenty four”

 

 Phone numbers:

 

  • 347-554-1774: Sometimes we group together the last four digits of a phone number. We also group together the first sets of 3 numbers. You could finish this number by saying “seventeen seventy four” or by saying “one seven, seven, four”

 

  • We say “o” rather than “zero” when zero comes in a phone number, for example 352-2301

 

What other questions do you have about using numbers when it comes to money, phone numbers, and years?

Let us know in the comments below.

Are you under the “illusion” that you are preparing for IELTS while spending time on social media?

Today we’ll talk about how to spend your time well and use social media to your advantage to pass the IELTS!

In our 3 Keys IELTS Success System our students get to join a private Facebook group where they can ask Lindsay or Jessica any questions they want.

This is a great way to build community and get support but make no mistake- while you are in Facebook, you are not preparing for IELTS.

To really prepare for IELTS you need to be spending time learning strategies, doing test practice, and following a daily study plan.

It is fine to spend time in the Facebook group or on other IELTS-related social media sites to “blow off steam,” reduce stress, and get some support but don’t tell yourself that you are actually preparing for IELTS during that time.

Your buddies on social media cannot give you your 7.

Only the examiner can give you 7 if you show that you have built the right skills and used the right strategies.

Don’t waste your time!

Go beyond the surface level of social media to get your target score on the IELTS.

Spend your time learning strategies, practicing them in structured exercises, and doing test practice.

Let us know your questions or comments below!

Do you spend your time preparing in Facebook groups and on social media?

How is it helping or hurting your score.

Do you want to be more spontaneous when you make plans in English?

Do you want to be able to make and change plans quickly in English?

Today you’ll get some solid English phrases that you can use when your plans change.

Here are some great ways to say that your plans have changed:

  • “Oh hey, quick change of plans….”
  • “We decided to make a change actually…”
  • “I think we’re going to change it up….”

What other phrases do you know to make changes to your plans in English?

Let us know your ideas in the comments below.

Do you feel overwhelmed on the IELTS Listening Test?

It’s hard when you have to listen, read, and write all at the same time.

Do you want to feel more confident on IELTS Listening?

Today find out how to manage it all with confidence and a clear head.

To conquer this challenge you need:

#1) Test strategies: Follow the directions.

Do what they tell you to do! 

You need to know what to expect.

You will hear the introduction which will tell you what kind of situation you are going to listen to and who is going to talk.

Pay attention to this introduction!

Don’t skip ahead and look at the questions.

At this time you can open your brain box and pull up the vocabulary that you already know.

This will put you one step ahead when it comes to the Listening test.

Next you’ll have time to look at the questions. Be active. Circle key words.

Know what you are listening for- is it a name? a number? a date?

Have that information in your head when you start listening.

Next you will listen to the conversation and listen for the answers.

This part is scary but if you do the two steps that we described before this, you will reduce your anxiety and you will be ready to write down the right answers.

Next you are going to go back and check your answers when the instructions tell you to do it. Don’t forget that your first answers are usually correct!

Don’t second guess yourself.

Don’t try to ignore the instructions or outsmart the test.

#2) Test practice:

After you have done step 1 and you have gotten good at the steps and strategies, next you can do test practice.

Get a booklet of practice tests and practice under test conditions.

Don’t skip step 1 because it you don’t learn the strategies then you will never increase your score through test practice.

Actually you will hurt your score and your confidence.

#3) General listening practice:

Get great listening material such as podcasts or You Tube movies or Ted Talks.

Don’t just stick to ESL material.

Listen to material designed for native speakers.

Try to listen to at least 15 minutes of English every single day and you will get more comfortable with the sounds of native English.

What questions do you have about the Listening Test advice?

Let us know in the comments below.

Today we have Jaime Miller from English Success Academy back on the show for Episode 3 in a three-part series.

A few weeks ago Jamie told us about the differences between IELTS and TOEFL Writing.

Today you’ll hear about the differences between TOEFL and IELTS when it comes to the Speaking test.

What happens on IELTS speaking?

The biggest difference between IELTS and TOEFL with speaking is that on IELTS you are talking to the examiner.

IELTS is split up into three parts.

Speaking Part 1 includes easy questions about your hobbies, your job, your family.

In Speaking Part 2 you are given a topic card and you have one minute to brainstorm then you must speak for 1- 2 minutes.

In Speaking Part 3 the questions are more difficult but they are not personal questions.

You’ll get questions about society and the world.

This requires more high-level language.

The entire test is 11-14 minutes.

Learn more about IELTS Speaking here.

What happens on TOEFL speaking?

On TOEFL students are speaking into the computer.

There are six parts on TOEFL. It starts with personal questions for the first two parts.

In the third task you look at a campus dialogue. You are at an imaginary university and you listen to a dialogue between two people debating a recent change on campus. When you respond you summarize what you understand about the change.

In the fourth task you have a short reading passage. You get a new concept to look at. It will probably be something that you are not familiar with.

The sixth task is a lecture from a professor talking about a new concept. You need to summarize what you listen to.

The entire TOEFL Speaking test takes about 20 minutes.

A few tips to remember for both exams:

  • Never try to memorize answers for the exam
  • Be sure to get balanced practice (general fluency and test strategies)
  • Follow a clear, daily study plan

TOEFL English Success Academy Jaime MillerJaime Miller creates and teaches private, customized online lessons. Learn more at jaimemiller.com.

Jaime knows why some students get TOEFL speaking scores of 26 or higher, while others are stuck with scores of 24 – and she creates customized exam study plans that get results.

What questions do you have about the differences between TOEFL Speaking and IELTS Speaking?

Let us know in the comments below.

Do you drink soda?

Do you know how to ask for a soda in a restaurant in English?

Do you know the difference between “soda,” “pop,” and “soft drinks”?

Today we’ll show you what we call soda in different parts of the world and we’ll talk about some controversial laws that ban consumption of large size soda in the United States.

In 2013 New York City banned the sale of the Big Gulp, a large size for a soda at 7-11.

Read more about it here.

Is it ok for New York City to ban a large size cup for soda? What do you think?

Names for soda around the United States:

  • “Pop”: This term is used for soda in the Midwestern part of the United States.
  • “Coke”: Sometimes just the word “Coke” is used as an umbrella term meaning soda. This is used in parts of the Southern United States.
  • “Soft drink”: This is used in more upscale restaurants instead of saying “soda.”

 

What do you think about the New York City ban on the Big Gulp?

Let us know in the comments.

Do you want to know how to be confident on the IELTS Listening Test?

Here is the answer: Prepare!

If you ask anyone who gets that magic score of a 7 or higher on the listening test, they will tell you that they practiced listening.

They didn’t just practice the listening exam, however.

Students who understand what they hear on the exam worked hard to strengthen their overall listening ability as well, outside of textbooks and test practice.

With that in mind, here are five activities to give you confidence on the listening exam.

All they require are a computer or smartphone, paper and something to write with.

Ready to get started?

Check out these resources below!

#1) Listen to a podcast, an IELTS listening practice test, or any recording of spoken English with an audio script.

Try to write out what you hear- word for word.

You can pause it anytime to write.

Compare your notes with the audio script.

Notice any words that you didn’t understand, and listen to that part again.

#2) Close your eyes and listen to a podcast, an IELTS Listening practice test, or any recording of spoken English with an audio script.

Listen again and follow along in the audio script.

#3) Choose a video that has subtitles or closed captioning (look for a button or icon with CC on it to turn on the closed captioning subtitles). Watch it with the subtitles so you can read and listen at the same time.

Watch the same video again with NO subtitles/closed captioning.

#4) Choose a song you like. Read the lyrics online, and sing along.

Try these websites for some great ideas to get started.

#5) Choose a song you like. Try and listen and write the lyrics as you hear them. You can pause the song at anytime to write.

Compare your notes with the lyrics.

Listen to the song again and sing along.

What else should you do?

Besides these activities, you should still watch movies and TV shows whenever you like, without turning it into a listening practice activity.

Just choose something you are interested in, watch, and enjoy!

Also, when you are doing IELTS test practice, do the listening practice test a couple of times.

After you do the test the first time, circle the answer you got incorrect.

Then, check the audio script, or tape script, and find the answer that you missed.

Next, you can listen to the whole thing one more time and follow along with the answers, listening for the correct ones.

Finally, you can listen for the last time, and follow along with the audio script.

This will help you get used to the speed at which they speak and the different accents that are used on the IELTS exam.

Most practice exams come with an audio script, so use it!

On test day, just remember to follow the directions.

The IELTS exam is very well designed, so just listen to what the person on the CD tells you to do, and do it.

For example, when she/he tells you to look at the questions 1 to 5, only look at those questions.

When the person tells you to check your answers for a section, check those answers.

Do not go ahead to the next section.

Try to work in as many of these activities as you can every day, working on improving your overall listening ability for 10 to 20 minutes a day.

That’s not too much time- and the investment will pay off on test day!

Good luck and let us know in the comments if you have any questions!

Do you get confused between “take care of” and “care about” in English?

These two phrases are easy to confuse but it’s important to know the difference and start using them correctly.

 

To take care of:

To help someone who might be vulnerable physically or emotional.

You take care of your pets and you take care of your children.

You might also take care of your house or take care of your health. You can take care of your body or your mind.

This is an action.

We also say “take care!” as a way to say goodbye.

 

To care about:

This is about your feelings regarding something.

You can care about your friends without taking care of them.

You can care about the environment without taking care of it.

This is a feeling, not an action.

 

Listen to the episode to hear the differences between the two expressions.

Leave a sample sentence below.

In today’s episode we’ll show you how creating a vision board will help you stay focused on your IELTS goals and the life that you want after you get your target score.

Making a vision board can help you focus your goals, keep track of how you are using your time, and feel good about what you are moving toward.

What is a vision board?

It’s a physical representation of what you want your life to look like.

Use images that represent what you want to be doing in your ideal life.

Why does this matter for IELTS?

When you are preparing for IELTS you need to keep your vision board in front of you.

You know that aspects of your ideal life, such as moving to a country like Canada, will only happen if you get your target score on the IELTS.

By seeing the vision board every day it will remind you to keep working hard.

Have you created your vision board yet?

Snap a picture of it and share it on our Facebook page at www.facebook.com/allearsenglish

Share your vision board with the community!

In today’s episode you will get the exact way to organize your time for IELTS Writing Task 1 and IELTS Writing Task 2.

Are you worried about time management on the Writing test?

When it comes to time management, here is what you should NOT do:

DON’T skip ahead to Writing Task 2 and spend most of your time on that. Many bad IELTS teachers suggest this but the problem is that if you do this you won’t have enough time for Writing Task 1.

Instead here is what you should do: DO complete the essays in order.

Complete Writing Task 1 first because it’s shorter.

Get it out of the way and use it as a warm up.

Do what the exam tells you.

Start with Task 1.

How to manage time on Writing Task 1:

We have three steps in the writing process.

We need to plan, write, and check.

It’s good to make sure that you spend enough time planning.

Spend 2-3 minutes planning for Task 1.

Write out a solid essay and plan. Brainstorm.  You must do the planning to get a high score in task achievement and cohesion and coherence (organization).

Spend 15 minutes writing.

Spend the few remaining minutes checking your essay. You must check your work to get a high score for vocabulary and grammar.

Each of these three steps are necessary to get a high score in Writing Task 1.

How to manage time for Writing Task 2:

In IELTS Writing Task 2 spend 5 minutes brainstorming and planning. There are no bad ideas. Try to write continuously for the full five minutes.

Spend 30 minutes writing.

Leave 5 minutes to check. Look for spelling mistakes and repeated vocabulary.

When should you start timing your test practice?

Don’t prepare under test conditions until you have learned the 3-step strategies and practiced them thoroughly.

At that time you can start worrying about time management but not before then.

In the 3 Keys IELTS Success System we go into more detail about this system and exactly how to use it. Check this page and watch the video to learn more.

What questions do you have?

Let us know in the comments below.

Today you’ll find out how to begin a conversation when you are about to explain something in great detail in English.

If you use the phrase “You see,…” it will show people that you are about to explain something or go into detail.

It can also be useful when you want to defend your choices or voice your opinion in English.

Here are the three ways that you can begin your explanation:

  • “Ya (you) see, ….”
  • “Well see,….”
  • “See,….”

 

Here are some phrases from our conversation in the episode:

L: Why do they make the train routes so confusing in New York on the weekends?

M: Well see, they do a lot of construction on the weekends because they figure it’s the perfect time to do it. Not as many people are going to work.

 

M: Why are you having so many break ins in your neighborhood?

L: Ya see, it’s because there are some homeless shelters near my neighborhood and in my neighborhood there are a lot of nice homes. So people from the homeless shelters are coming up and breaking into home.

 

Have you used “you see” in conversations with native speakers yet?

Let us know in the comments how it goes if you try using this phrase.

You already know that using phrasal verbs on your IELTS Speaking test will push your score higher. Today we’ll show you 6 English phrasal verbs using “keep” that you can throw into your response on the Speaking test.

These phrasal verbs will set you apart in the examiner’s mind as a student who goes beyond the textbook.

We have done episodes showing you English phrasal verbs using get and idioms about sports, work, and others.

Here are the phrasal verbs with “keep” for today:

  • Keep going- to continue moving
  • Keep (it) up- to continue moving or to maintain appearances
  • Keep at (something) – continue to do something
  • Keep out – do not enter
  • Keep off- do not get on
  • Keep away- do not get close

Go to Google Images and get examples of signs so that you can remember what these phrasal verbs mean.

Listen to this episode again.

Pay attention to the questions that we ask each other.

Answer these questions yourself using these phrasal verbs with keep.

What questions do you have from today?

Let us know in the comments below.

Is integrity important to you?

It’s important to us!

Do you want to know how to describe someone who is honest or dishonest using more specific English vocabulary words?

By going deeper with your vocabulary words you can connect more with people and create a better description of someone.

A few weeks ago we talked about how to use specific vocabulary words to describe someone who is mean in English.

Today you’ll learn some new English vocabulary terms to describe integrity and personality.

If you are taking the IELTS exam then using specific vocabulary words on your IELTS Speaking test or your IELTS Writing test will boost your score so this episode is for you!

 

How to describe someone who is dishonest:

  • Manipulative: Someone who understands the human mind and tries to control your mind to control what you do in order to serve or help that person in some way.
  • Sneaky: More often used to describe someone who is young and who takes little, dishonest actions.
  • Deceptive: Someone who hides things, who leads someone in the wrong direction.

 

How to describe someone who is honest:

  • Trustworthy: Someone who can be trusted with a secret or who is reliable.
  • Dependable: Someone who will always show up when they are expected to show up, someone who can be expected to deliver what they promise on time.
  • Loyal: Someone who will be true in a relationship, who will not cheat. We can also use this term to refer to a dog who has been well trained.

 

Practice these adjectives!

Please tell us about the people in your life.

Leave your comment below.

Do you have trouble coming up with ideas for the IELTS?

If so, you are not alone!

Many students struggle with this.

Today we’ll show you how you can be more creative, come up with ideas faster, and where you get resources online to move toward these goals.

If you come from a culture where coming up with ideas is not emphasized then you can train yourself on how to do it.

The worst thing that you can do is to put up a mental block, assume that you can’t do it, and not even try.

Don’t assume that you can’t do it before you have even tried!

Start by going back to our episode on how to brainstorm and come up with details for IELTS.

Remember, you can always fall back on this framework:

  • Who
  • What
  • When
  • Where
  • Why

Next, find some writing topic ideas!

Where can you find them?

Go to creativewritingprompts.com

This website will give you tons of creative ideas to get your ideas flowing and to base your essays on.

Go to this website, choose a topic, and just start writing.

Get a journal and grab one of these topics every day and write.

Here is another idea:

You can also check out writingforward.com

You’ll get lots of advice, angles, and tips on the task of creative writing.

Don’t worry if this doesn’t seem like it’s direct IELTS practice.

These activities are going to help you get better at brainstorming and coming up with ideas.

 

To get better to coming up with ideas:

– remember HOW to brainstorm (who, what, when, where, why, how)

– know where to look for brainstorming ideas (see the websites above)

– start practicing- take out your pencil and a journal

Check out our other IELTS Writing episodes here

Have you tried using these sites to improve your ability to come up with new ideas in writing?

Let us know in the comments.

In today’s episode you’ll learn how to talk about the things that you regret using a great American English idiom.

You’ll also get a few more English idioms about eyes and eyesight.

Earlier this summer we learned a few other expressions such as “long story short”  and “worse comes to worst.”

Here is today’s key expression: “Hindsight is (always) 20/20.”

What does it mean?

It’s related to the concept of eyesight.

When eyesight is 20/20 it means that we have perfect vision.

We use this when we talk about things that we regret.

When we look back on something it becomes clear that we took the wrong action and we know what the right action would have been.

However, we didn’t know it at the time and maybe we couldn’t have known it.

 

More idioms with “eyesight”

  • An eye-opener: Something that is shocking or sobering, something that surprises you. “Arianna Huffington had an eye-opening experience when she passed out on her desk one day due to lack of sleep.”
  •  To see eye to eye: To agree with someone, to see things the same way someone else sees them. “Do you see eye to eye with your fiance when it comes to wedding planning?”

 

Try using these idioms in your own sample sentences.

We want to see your examples in the comments below.

Do you struggle to find time to learn English?

Is time your most valuable asset?

If so then today’s episode is for you.

Today Derek will show us 3 ways to be more efficient with our English learning routine:

  • Tip #1) Learn how to self correct when you are speaking. This is the best way to get better at speaking while focusing on both fluency and accuracy. You want to be making mistakes because it means that you are pushing yourself but you want to correct them on your own.
  • Tip #3) Don’t pretend that you know everything. If you are 80-90% sure that you know what someone is talking about but there is a tiny bit of doubt you should still ask. Don’t assume that you understand a word because you might get yourself into trouble. Use these phrases:
    • “Let me see if I got this…”
    • “I am sorry could you explain that a bit more.”
    • “Let me make sure I have that correct.”
    • “Let me see if I understood that.”
  • Tip #3) Study the types of mistakes that you make. Try to relate your mistakes to a wider area of study. See if there are any patterns in your mistakes. Know the difference between a random error and a systematic error.
    • Systematic error: A grammar mistake that keeps happening
    • Random error: A preposition mistake or another small mistake

Derek’s Bio

I was born and raised in the state of Colorado in the United States of America. I’ve travelled extensively throughout the States and I also lived in Memphis, Tennessee for a short time. I’m essentially a nomad, so I’ve had the chance to live in Brazil for more than two years, Colombia for about 9 months, Europe for over a year, Mexico for another 9 months and now I’m headed back to South America.

I graduated from the University of Colorado at Boulder in December of 2010 with two bachelor’s degrees, one in physics and the other in Astronomy. Shortly after I graduated I moved to Rio de Janeiro where I earned my International Diploma in English Language Teaching (IDELT), which is an accredited TEFL certification, from Bridge Linguatec based in Denver, Colorado USA.

I have been teaching English as my primary profession since February 2011, first in Rio de Janeiro and then Salvador in Brazil. I have taught English to students of every level, from zero level beginners to the very advanced. I’m very patient and I try to make students feel relaxed and enjoy themselves in my classes. We always seem to have a fun time.
I speak Brazilian Portuguese and Latin American Spanish.

Today we have Jaime Miller from English Success Academy back on the show!

Jamie is back for episode 2 in a 3-part series.

Last week she chatted with Jessica about the overall differences between IELTS and TOEFL.

Today Jessica and Jamie talk about the main writing differences between IELTS and TOEFL.

They will also talk about what “integrated” means on the tests and what this means for you as an IELTS or TOEFL test taker.

On IELTS there are fewer writing tasks and they are more straightforward.

On TOEFL there are two different types of tasks.

The first one is the integrated task.

They want to know if you can read something from a textbook and take notes, listen to a lecture, and then respond to what you have read and listened to.

You may have to notice the similarities and differences in the arguments and write about them and talk about how both points of view disagree.

Here they are testing your ability to talk about and analyze a debate.

In the TOEFL integrated task you should not give any opinions.

In IELTS Writing Task 1 you are asked to analyze information from a graph or diagram of numbers and you need to describe what is going on.

Writing Task 1 is 20 minutes and you need to write 150 words. If you write more than 150 words you will lose points.

On Writing Task 2 for IELTS you write an opinion essay and the second task for TOEFL also asks you to write an opinion essay.

Another big difference is that on IELTS you have to write by hand and on TOEFL writing you type your answers.

We’ll be back next week to explore more differences between TOEFL and IELTS!

TOEFL English Success Academy Jaime MillerJamie’s Bio:

You can learn more about Jaime Miller and her private, customized online lessons at jaimemiller.com.

Jaime knows why some students get TOEFL speaking scores of 26 or higher, while others are stuck with scores of 24 – and she creates customized exam study plans that get results.

Do you have any questions about today’s episode?

Let us know in the comments below.

Teachers, classes and textbooks are full of useful advice on how to get high scores on the IELTS exam.

Some of this information is useful, of course, but some of it is also too general to actually help you.

For example, teachers always tell students to “organize your ideas more clearly” or “use better vocabulary,” but do you know how to do this?

So, today, I’m not only going to tell you what to do, but what NOT to do.

I’m also going to tell you exactly what these gems of wisdom will do to affect your IELTS Writing Task 1 score.

#1) Do NOT write fewer than 150 words. If you write fewer than 150 words,

    • your Task Achievement score will automatically go down.
    • you will not have enough room to show a range of vocabulary, because you simply will not write enough words, so your vocabulary score will fall to a 5 or lower.
    • you will probably not have enough room to show a range of sentence structures, because you simply will not write enough sentences, so your grammar score will fall to a 5 or lower.

#2) Do NOT start describing the numbers right away in your essay.

  • Just like any academic essay, you must start Task 1 with an introduction. In the introduction you MUST rephrase the test question. If you do not do this, you risk not explaining clearly what the graph is about (for the Academic exam). This means scoring a 5 or lower on Task Achievement.

#3) Do NOT just state numbers.

  • You must describe the numbers, not just list them. You have to say why the number is important, such as describing it as the highest or the lowest. If you just list numbers, you will get no more than a 5 for Task Achievement.
    • For example:
      • WRONG: In 2013, the number of classes reached 100.
      • RIGHT: In 2013, the last year shown, the number of classes reached an all time high, with 100.
    •  You must also use linking words to join the sentences. If you do not, you will get a 5 or lower for Cohesion/Coherence.
      • For example:
        • WRONG: Numbers hit 700 in 1980. Numbers fell to 20 in 1990.
        • RIGHT: The number of full-time workers increased to 700 in 1980, the highest amount during the period. Then, 10 years later, this number fell to 20, reaching the lowest point.

#4) Do NOT use the same sentence structure over and over. If you do, you will get a 5 or lower for Grammar.

  • Some students memorize one or two structures, like “There was a decrease in 2014,” and use this same sentence structure throughout Academic Writing Task 1 so they are sure to not make any grammar mistakes. Well, even if there are no grammar mistakes, if you do not use varied sentence structure, the examiner can give you no higher than a 5 for Grammar.

To make sure you don’t make any of these mistakes, please read these rules more than once.

Then, the next time you practice a Task 1 essay, please check your work for these four things.

If you follow these rules, you are on your way to higher scores!

Check out our other articles on IELTS Writing Task 1

What questions do you have about IELTS Writing Task 1 Academic Essay?

Let us know in the comments below.

What is paraphrasing and when do we do it on IELTS and in our everyday lives?

Paraphrasing is when you use different words and vocabulary to express an idea.

In our daily lives we might use paraphrasing to tell our friend about our weekend.

We might summarize the whole weekend into three sentences.

Maybe we saw a movie and we will paraphrase the story in a short way.

When we read we also need to paraphrase to tell people what we have read in the newspaper or in a magazine.

We also might summarize our favorite novel.

When you are in an academic class at your college or university you are going to need to take notes during the lecture. This is a form of paraphrasing.

You may also need to paraphrase a lecture for a friend who missed a class.

When we write papers at the college level we also paraphrase when we add outside research and citations to a paper.

When do we paraphrase on IELTS?

In IELTS Writing Task 1 and IELTS Writing Task 2 you have to paraphrase an idea, word or phrase in different ways.

If you use the word “school” in one paragraph then you need to use different words in the rest of the essay like “academic institution” or “university” or “college.”

How do we paraphrase on the IELTS Speaking test?

Part of getting a good vocabulary score is showing range and flexibility and that is how we can push up our entire speaking score. Try not to repeat the same word more than two or three times. Instead, try to say it in a different way.

You can also paraphrase what the examiner asks you on Speaking Part 1, 2, and 3 before you answer.

Why would you want to do this?

It would impress the examiner with your flexibility and it would give you more time to think and prepare your answer.

How can you practice paraphrasing for IELTS?

Read a newspaper and summarize it in your own words. Tell a friend about the article.

Create a culture of thinking.

Surround yourself with people who like to talk about what they read and see in the news.

Do you feel comfortable paraphrasing?

What questions do you have about this?

Let us know in the comments below.

Are you making mistakes with your facial expressions and gestures when you visit the US?

Today Mark will show us the top 3 facial expressions and gestures that he has seen in parts of Latin America that you should avoid if you want to connect with American people when you visit the US.

Three facial expressions or body language gestures to avoid in the US:

  • Using a puckered lip gesture to point at something or someone (pucker means to bring your lips together and hold them tight). In American culture this looks very strange. We might use an eye or a head gesture to draw someone’s attention in one direction or another but we don’t use puckered lips.
  • Calling someone to come toward you by pulling your arm out straight, pointing your palm down, and moving your fingers toward you in a downward gesture. This is rude if you use this gesture in the US.
  • Kissing as a greeting. If you kiss an American on the cheek as a greeting they will feel awkward. Use a handshake instead or if there is a large group you could wave.

What should you do if you don’t know what gestures to make?

Observe. Sit back. Wait for other people to use their gestures and then do what they do.

Mark Esposito’s Bio:
From New Jersey, USA. B.A. Spanish Translating/Interpreting. ASL interpreter and instructor.
TEFL/TESOL Certificate for teaching English.  
Teaching English and Spanish for over 25 years.
I Worked as a Sign Language Interpreter for about ten years.
My wife and I are both teachers on italki. I’ve lived in 6 countries, including Spain and 5 Latin American countries. I’ve been living out of the U.S. for the past 15 years.
How to book a lesson with Mark:
  • Step 2: Search for Mark’s profile in people search: Mark Esposito

Today we bring you IELTS Energy Episode #100!!

We’ll give you 5 tips for improving when you think you can’t and we’ll tell you about a special invitation at the end of the episode.

The easiest way to get a 7 on IELTS Speaking is by working on your pronunciation!

For the next 100 hours you are invited to claim your special bonus called Power Packed Pronunciation with Jessica Beck. If you get into our 3 Keys IELTS Success System within the next 100 hours you will also get this super cool bonus. It’s a 5-minute video where Jessica will show you exactly how to increase your pronunciation score during the Speaking test.

Click here to get the course and your bonus now!

Offer ends on Monday August 17th!

Do you feel like you are plateauing with your IELTS preparation?

Are you not getting any better?

Can you say everything you need to and understand everything you hear?

But maybe you can’t understand difficult articles that use academic English.

Today we’ll show you 5 things you can do to get out of your comfort zone and push past this plateau in order to hit that 7 IELTS level.

Remember, you need to action on these points every single day.

It’s easy to do it once per week or just once per month but what are you doing every single day?

5 things to do:

  • Reading: You need to expose yourself to higher level words. Read the Washington Post or the Huffington Post or the New Yorker. If you don’t read these kinds of materials you won’t get a chance to see these high-level words that you need for the IELTS Exam.
  • Listening: Listen to what native speakers listen to. Try TED Talks on You Tube. Search for a specific topic that you are interested in. A lot of native speakers listen to NPR.org. You can find music, news, comics. Listen to The Moth Radio Hour and Snap Judgment on NPR.
  • Take a class: Take a class in a topic that is not focused on ESL. Take a cooking class in English. Take an art class. Go to EdX from MIT and take it online.
  •  Writing: Challenge yourself to write a short story. Interview someone in your family and write a biography about that person. Research a topic that interests you and write a short report on the topic. Take something that you like to read in your native language and translate it into English.
  •  Speaking: Push yourself to talk to native speakers. It’s easy to talk to other English learners but try to find a tutor or a language exchange for free where you can really hear correct English. Find a site where you can get a native partner online or in your city.

If you do these five things or even just one or two of these things you will have a much better chance of improving your IELTS score.

Let us know which of these activities you are already doing. How is it going?

Mt Liberty

Life is like mountain climbing!

Today find out how to accomplish big dreams by putting one foot in front of the other and taking life one step at a time.

Here is today’s quote:

“Never measure the height of a mountain until you have reached the top and then you will see how low it was.”

-Dag Hammarskjold

 

Don’t be afraid to set big goals.

Don’t consider big goals to be insurmountable.

If you go ahead and accomplish your goal you will look back and realize that it wasn’t actually that hard.

In this episode Michelle told us that when she first moved to NY she felt that it was too hard to get around the city.

She didn’t know how to take the subway to meet friends or which train to take.

It all felt like a huge task.

She got lost.

Now, looking back on those days she doesn’t think it’s so hard.

Do you ever tell yourself, “I could never be fluent?”

Be careful when you say this.

Don’t just assume that you can’t do it.

Give yourself a chance.

Take the first step.

Do it one step at a time.

If you are taking an exam like the IELTS, this means that you need a step by step system or a course where someone can hold your hand and take you through the steps that you need.

Henry Ford says, “Whether you think you can or you can’t you’re right.”

 

How are you approaching your big dreams?

Are you taking them one step at a time or are you giving up on them before you even start?

Let us know in the comments below.

If you want to move your English to the next level then you need to make sure that each word adds value.

Today we’ll show you why you need to avoid being redundant in English  and we’ll give you seven phrases to avoid in order to speak more powerfully.

What does it mean to be redundant when you speak in English?

It means that you use two words that say the same thing.

Each word should bring something new to the table.

 

Seven redundant phrases that you should AVOID in English:

  • In my opinion I like chocolate”: Here you don’t need to say both “in my opinion” and “I like” because we know that when you say “I like” you are voicing your opinion.

 

  • “I like the fact that I live near in a fun area and also in addition I love the fact that I am right between Harvard and MIT”: In this conversation I said “also, in addition.” Using both of those words is not necessary because the words are saying the same thing.

 

  • “The best top colleges in the US are Harvard, Yale, Dartmouth”: Here we said “the best top colleges” and those two words mean the exact same thing. Instead of using both words you can just choose one. You can say “the best colleges are..” or “the top colleges are…:

 

  • “It’s critically important to think like an entrepreneur with your career in New York”: The words “critical” and “important” mean the same thing. You don’t need to use both.

 

  • “In graduate school we collaborated together all of the time to get projects done.” It isn’t necessary to use both “collaborate” and “together” because the word “collaborate” implies that you are working together with other people.

 

  • “In my past experience I have co-taught with other teachers.” The words “past” and “experience” have similar meanings. You can just say “in my experience I have co-taught with other teachers.”

 

  • “The reason why crime went down in New York is that the graffiti was taken off the trains.” This is a common redundancy that is used all of the time by native speakers. The word “reason” implies “why” so instead you can say “the reason crime has dropped..” or “the reason that crime has dropped…”

 

When you speak English you want each word to have value.

Less is more with the words that you choose when you want to speak powerfully and connect with people in English.

Do you know any other common redundancies in English?

Let us know in the comments.

What are the daily and weekly habits of the most successful IELTS students who get a 7?

Today you’ll find out exactly what smart students do to get their seven.

Students who get a 7 make English a part of their everyday life.

They don’t keep English at a distance.

They use it as entertainment.

They explore their interests using English.

They don’t think of it as work or “studying.”

Success is usually not the result one single action. It is often the result of multiple actions taken over an extended period of time.

What are those actions for a 7 IELTS student?

Find out below!

7 habits of highly successful “7” IELTS students:

  • #1) They are committed: They have a specific goal. They promise to work every day. They are intentional about the score they want. They share their commitment with someone in their life. They hold themselves accountable.
  • #2) They are not afraid to start random conversations and speak: When they run into someone they know in an English-speaking place, they start conversations and continue speaking. If they don’t live in an English-speaking country, they find a way to practice with a native conversation partner. They speak every day despite their fear.
  • #3) They plan a specific time every week to practice what they have learned each week: They are intentional about using new phrases or expressions in their practice conversations. They don’t cancel their practice sessions. They show up and get comfortable with the language.
  • #4) They have something they enjoy reading: A successful “7” student has a habit of reading. They like to read. They find reading material on a topic that they are passionate about. They use blogs, email newsletters, newspapers, and magazines.
  • #5) They watch movies and TV: They have a favorite TV show in English. It is part of their lifestyle to follow sitcoms that they consider fun. They don’t think about watching TV in English as studying. They consider it entertainment.
  • #6) They learn how to organize their thoughts into an academic essay for Task 1: Strategies are important for 7 students. Especially for the Writing test, you MUST learn what the examiner wants. You cannot just work on your general English.
  • #7) They know the IELTS exam: They know the test. They know the strategies, they have a step-by-step system, they know how the timing works. They work with a qualified professional or find a good course to help them.

Which habits do you currently have?

Which habits are you going to adopt moving forward?

Let us know in the comments below.

When we are practicing for the Speaking exam, we must remember what the examiner wants.

Today, we are going to focus on hitting that 7 or higher on the Speaking test in two ways:

  • Fluency and Coherence (having organized, specific ideas)
  • Vocabulary (not repeating words/ideas, using specific vocabulary)

The best way to hit a 7 or higher on Speaking Part 2 is to tell a story.

For some kinds of questions, this is easy, such as describing a movie, TV show, or book.

However, we can also turn our 2-minute answer into a story when we are asked to describe a situation or event.

Often, these questions begin with, “Describe a time/occasion when…”.

Below we’ll look at Speaking Part 2 on the exam, step by step.

 

Step 1:

Before you give your answer, you have one minute to plan and take notes.

The examiner will tell you the topic, hand you the booklet with the topic card on it, and also give you a pencil and piece of paper.

Then, you have a full minute to write down your ideas.

This is a crucial time, and I’ve seen many students who do not use this time well.

This is your chance to plan your answer so write down everything you think of- details, words, examples, everything.

When you choose to tell a story as your Part 2 answer, this first planning stage is easier as well.

Just start at the beginning of the story, and move through the story in your head, writing notes on everything that comes to mind.

Remember, there are no bad ideas!

Let’s look at an example:

Describe the last movie you saw in the cinema.

My notes:

 

  • Jupiter Ascending
  • mina kunis, channing tatum, future, sci-fi
  • maid in new york, russian, dad killed
  • lives with mom, aunt, all maids
  • tatum werewolf alien, comes earth
  • aliens try kill mina, saved
  • space family controls all planets, uses people as medicine, never grow old
  • three siblings control all, want kill/mary mina, she owns earth, forget why
  • lots action, flying shooting, earth, tatum rocket rollerblades
  • he saves her, they fall in love, she’s still maid

 

Now, you can see all the specific details I wrote down in my notes.

Also, my notes are organized by bullet point, from the beginning of the movie to the end.

Also notice that I did not remember everything (this was not the best written movie!), and that is fine.

Again, your ideas are never wrong on the Speaking exam– all the examiner wants is to hear you speak English.

 

Step 2:

After one minute for note taking, the examiner will ask you to start talking.

When you are talking, you must use linking words.

You are allowed to look at your notes, so you should do this if you forget what to say.

That is why you take notes! Use them, and keep talking!

An example answer with linking words looks like this:
Today I will tell you about a movie I saw recently named Jupiter Ascending, by the Wachowskis, the people that made the Matrix movies.

The Matrix movies are classics, but, sadly, in my humble opinion, they have not been able to replicate that genius.

Especially in this movie, Jupiter Ascending.

It was really pretty, but the story, writing and dialogue left a lot to be desired.

So, it starred Mina Kunis as a maid of Russian descent who lives with her mom and aunt in a small room in New York, very poor.

Channing Tatum is the other big name, and he’s a werewolf alien hybrid creature, who has crazy rocket rollerblades that he flies around on.

We find out in the beginning of the movie that Mina’s dad was a scientist, killed in Russia, although we don’t know why, and her mom came to America.

She actually gave birth to Mina/Jupiter on the ship.

There are many additional characters, but the ones that matter are three siblings who are, I think, sort of royalty in space, and they actually own all the planets.

For some reason, I forget why exactly, they have to get Mina in order to harvest Earth.

Oh, by the way, by “harvest” I mean they destroy the planet and use all the life as fuel for their immortality.

Yeah, pretty crazy.

Anyway, about 20 minutes into this disaster of a film, Channing wolf comes to Earth, saves Mina, but then loses her as one of the siblings grabs her.

One brother wants to kill her, the other brother tries to marry her, and the sister tries to befriend her.

The whole complex tale culminates in lots of shooting action and explosions on Earth that no Earthling seems to notice, with Channing rocketing around on his ridiculous rollerblades.

Of course, in the end, Mina and Earth are saved, her and Channing Tatum fall in love, even though he’s half dog, and she chooses to still be a maid.

All completely unbelievable, and this is from a girl who really digs her sci-fi.

 

Step 3:

Read my answer again and write down all the linking words/phrases.

Then, use them to practice telling your own story.

 

Good luck and have fun!

Get more episodes and articles on IELTS Speaking here.

 

What questions do you have about today’s activity?

Please let us know in the comments below.

Do you know someone who is mean?

Would you like to be able to describe that person in more specific terms in English?

You are at the right level to expand your vocabulary and use more specific words.

Don’t just use general terms.

If you want to connect with people, you need to be specific so they know exactly what you want to say!

On the IELTS Exam, the fastest way to get a 7 or higher on Speaking or Writing is to use specific vocabulary words.

In today’s episode we will show you 5 different words that you can use to describe a mean person in English.

 

native English teachersAre you looking for a professional, native English teacher online?

Get a native English teacher online in seconds at italki.

Lindsay and Michelle recommend italki as our #1 English-learning solution online. Choose from more than 400 teachers to work on your business English or to pass your next big exam.

Get our special offer before it runs out! Go to italki and claim 10USD to go toward a FREE second English lesson at italki!

 

How to describe a mean person in English:

  • Rude: Not polite, short-tempered, to have a short fuse
  • A jerk: Someone who has a bad character and does not treat people with respect. We use this term more to describe a guy.
  • Selfish: Someone who only thinks about themselves
  • Cruel: Extremely mean and calculated in the bad actions that they take against you
  • Abusive: Someone who inflicts physical, emotional, or sexual harm on someone

 

Do you know anyone that you can describe using these terms?

Let us know in the comments below.

Can you write a quote by a famous person in your IELTS Writing test essays?

Can you quote someone famous on the IELTS Speaking test?

The answer is yes! You can use quotes on your Writing test and in the Speaking test. It could add a layer of depth and it could make your answer more interesting for the examiner.

However, you need to make sure that the quotes are introduced well and fit naturally into your essay or your speaking answer.

It’s ok if you don’t know the person’s name who said the topic.

If you can express the fact that you don’t know the name by using an idiom, you can score extra points.

For example, you can say, “The name of the person who said this slips my mind.”

If the quote doesn’t fit with the topic that you are covering, don’t try to force it into the essay.

Here are some of our favorite quotes that you could use:

“You are the average of the four people that you spend the most time with.”- Jim Rohn

This quote could be used in Speaking Part 1 for most questions.

What does this quote mean for your IELTS preparation?

Be careful who you spend time with when you are preparing for the exam.

Be around people who believe that you can pass the test and who support you and encourage you to work toward your goal.

“It’s not how much time you have. It’s what you do with it.”

Be smart about how you spend your time preparing for IELTS.

You need a clear study plan and you need to use the right materials.

How are you spending your IELTS preparation time?

Who are you surrounding yourself with? Do these people motivate you and inspire you to keep reaching for your IELTS dream?

Let us know in the comments below.

Today you’ll learn about one unique American speech habit that you can use to introduce ideas or to share quotes.

In English we use “like” in a few different ways.

  • It can be a filler word. “So, like, what are you doing tonight?”
  • It can be used to say “such as.” I enjoy foods like sushi.
  • It can be used to report an idea or something that you said. “I was like, ‘wow, we should take some time off.’”

Today we are going to focus on the third way that “like” is used when we use it to report what we said or what we thought in a past conversation.

In the episode Lindsay and Michelle used this expression in a few different ways. Listen to the episode to get the details!

To talk about something that was said in the past:

  • “I was like ‘wow, I gotta check that out.’”
  • “My mom heard the story and she was like, ‘oh yeah just take my car.’”

To tell a story that happened in the past using the present tense to pull people into the story and to hold their attention:

  • “On Saturday we’re hiking and we get to the top and it’s cloudy. My friend is like, ‘let’s just wait and see if the clouds clear’ and within a few minutes the clouds did clear.

Have you heard Americans use “like” in this way in English conversations?

Have you tried using it yourself?

Let us know in the comments below.

TOEFL English Success Academy Jaime MillerToday we have a guest on IELTS Energy!

We are happy to have Jaime.

Jaime is a TOEFL professional and in today’s episode she chats with Jessica about the main differences between the TOEFL Exam and the IELTS Exam.

Today is the first of a series of three episodes where Jaime and Jessica will tell you about the key differences between the two exams.

What are the differences between TOEFL and IELTS?

One of the biggest differences between IELTS and TOEFL is that on TOEFL it sometimes make sense to take notes while on IELTS there is no opportunity to take notes because you will miss answers and waste time.

Jaime has a 21-day course which helps students with this note-taking skill.

On TOEFL you are on a computer the whole time. On IELTS you don’t use a computer.

 

Are there any other reasons to take TOEFL if you aren’t going to university?

Some pharmacists, physical therapists, or doctors may need to take it if they want to get promoted within their career field while they are working in the United States.

 

What kinds of question types do you find on each test?

TOEFL has ten different types of questions for reading and the listening section has six different types of questions.

On TOEFL the reading and listening can vary from test to test. You may get 3 or 4 passages for reading. In contrast, IELTS has three passages for every test. It’s always 60 minutes and it’s exactly the same every week.

On TOEFL you drag and drop your answers for reading and listening but on IELTS you need to listen and spell the answer correctly or it’s counted as incorrect.

 

What topics are common for TOEFL and IELTS?

TOEFL has a lot of questions about physical and life sciences, history, psychology, anthropology.

A lot of the topics are from the academic perspective and may be harder for some people who are not used to that type of question.

Some people think that IELTS questions are a bit easier but the third reading passage for IELTS is a bit more academic.

 

Jaime’s Bio:

Jaime Miller is the director of an online school that matches motivated students with dedicated teachers for private, customized online lessons. Jaime knows why some students get TOEFL speaking scores of 26 or higher, while others are stuck with scores of 24 – and she creates customized exam study plans that get results. Learn more at jaimemiller.com.

 

What questions do you have about today’s episode?

Let us know in the comments below.

Do you want to score a 7 or higher on IELTS Speaking?  

To get that high score you need to use idioms when you respond to the questions in Speaking Part 3 and Writing Task 2.

You may get a question about work-life balance in these parts of the test.

You could also use happiness idioms in Speaking Part 1 when you talk about how you feel about your life.

Using idioms will push your vocabulary score to a 7- guaranteed. We have already shown you how to use idioms to talk about work, parties,  sports, and travel.

Today you’ll get 5 idioms that you can use to answer questions about happiness on the Speaking test.

5 Idioms:

  • “Keeping up with the Joneses”: Keeping up with your neighbors, maintaining an image of success by having the material possessions that your neighbor has or something even better such as a flat screen TV, a pool in the backyard, or a nice car.
  • “Livin’ the dream”: When someone has an amazing life that you admire. They have the life that you want. This would be different for everyone, based on what you think a dream life is.
  •   “To be on cloud nine”: To be very happy. This would work well in Speaking Part 1 and Part 2. If the examiner asks you the following: “Do you like your apartment?” You could say, “Yes, I am on cloud nine in my new apartment.”
  • “To jump for joy”: To physically jump because you are excited and happy
  • “To be a happy camper”: Someone who is content at this moment. “Getting to sleep in until 10 in the morning really makes me a happy camper.”

Remember, use these idioms as much as you can on the Speaking test and you will get the 7 that you need!

Please leave your questions or comments below.

If you don’t entirely agree with someone, there are ways to express this in English.

Get four ways to slightly disagree with someone in English today!

Here are the 4 ways to disagree slightly in English:

  • “Not exactly”
    • Q: You must have a glamorous life, you live in New York!
    • A: Not exactly. My life is actually pretty average. I work hard and I go to the movies like normal people.

 

  • “Not really”
    • Q: It sounds cool to run your own business. Is it?
    • A: I mean, not really. It’s a lot more work than people think. I work a lot and when I am not working I am thinking about work.

 

  •  “Not quite”
    • Q: So you went to Montreal this summer? You must have eaten a lot of maple syrup, right?
    • A: Not quite. It’s too sweet for me.

 

  •  “Not so much”
    • Q: Your hair is so straight. It must be easy to take care of
    • A: Not so much. I use a hair straightener. It takes a lot of work.

 

Go out and use these four expressions to slightly disagree with someone in English.

Let us know if you have a question in the comments below.

American English pronunciation and phonics expert Martha Bashir

Today we have a guest on the show.

Our guest is an expert in phonics, the sounds of English and English pronunciation.

Martha will give you three actions that you can start taking today to sound more natural when you pronounce the sounds of English.

What is phonics?

Phonics is knowing the sounds that the letters make in different words.

 

3 Tips from Martha:

  • Tip #1) Read out loud. When you read out loud you hear the sounds that the letters make. Because you are used to listening to English you can catch yourself if you pronounce the words incorrectly. If you are worried that you are making mistakes then try using poetry because the words rhyme. Martha recommends poems by Robert Louis Stevenson.

 

  • Tip #2) Write your words down. When you write or type you are slowing down. Also say the sounds while you write it down. It’s not important what you write about. It’s about writing down new vocabulary words. Keep a resource of the words that you are learning so that you can review them.

 

  • Tip #3) Look for patterns in words. Eighty percent of the English language is logical. Don’t get hung up when words that don’t seem to fit the patten. Here is a pattern: The feature picture was about a treacherous journey. The pattern is the “TU” is read as “CH.” If you notice this pattern you can apply it to other words and save study time and energy.

 

native English teachersAre you looking for a professional, native English teacher online?

Get a native English teacher online in seconds at italki.

Lindsay and Michelle recommend italki as our #1 English-learning solution online. Choose from more than 400 teachers to work on your business English or to pass your next big exam.

Get our special offer before it runs out! Go to italki and claim 10USD to go toward a FREE second English lesson at italki!

 

Martha’s Bio:

My name is Martha and I am from the state of Pennsylvania in the United States. I have a 4 year degree in elementary education. 
I taught in a private school for 8 years before I was married.  Now I have 5 children of my own and I have been teaching  them in my home for the past 9 years.  
 
I have 17 years experience in teaching phonics to beginning readers. I understand the challenges of learning English as a foreign language firsthand because I live in a bilingual home. My husband was not born in the United States so for him English was not his native tongue. 

I started teaching on italki  on June 20th of this year and since then I have taught over 100 sessions and now have nearly 50 students.   I have found that I really love teaching English as a foreign language.  Because of my background as a homeschooling teacher I find it easy to adapt lessons to fit my students needs.

Phonics is my specialty.  I believe phonics is the key that helps to decode the English language for speaking, reading, spelling and writing purposes.

 

How to book a lesson with Martha:

  •  Step 2- Search for Martha’s profile. Go to the bottom of the page on italki, click on Learn English, search for “Martha.” Martha recommends you book your lesson for a Saturday because her schedule is more open on those days.

To get the IELTS score you need you must not only work hard but you need to work SMART!

Today we will talk about whether it’s better to study for 3 hours at a time, 1 hour at a time or to study in small chunks when you have free time during your day.

To answer this question you need to know yourself and the way that you like to consume information and think about ideas and strategies.

Do you prefer to study for a short time and then go out and do something else or do you do better when you go into more depth?

Remember, regardless of how much time you spend on your tasks, don’t try to multi task by listening to a podcast and also checking your email. That is not a way to put quality attention into the task.

It’s ok to study for a short time but you need to go deep into the material.

When you split up your study time, sit down for one hour and set a goal. For example, during this time I am going to sit down, review this lesson video, write a sample essay, and check it.

Be very specific in what you are going to do.

The most important thing to remember is to be intentional about what you are going to do during your study time and then break up your study time based on how you like to consume information.

Be smart about the time you invest but work hard when you are working!

What is your study schedule?

Let us know in the comments below.

Today you’ll learn a very cool English expression that natives use to describe a very bad situation.

The expression is: “Worse comes to worst”

What’s the difference between “worse” and “worst”?

  • Worse: Comparing two things. The Boston T is worse than the New York City subway
  • Worst: This is a superlative. When one thing is THE worst. The worst thing about the subways in New York is the rats.

“If worst comes to worse”

  • Q: “Where are you going to sleep on your trip?” A: “If worse comes to worst I will sleep in my van.”
  • Q: “When are you going to see your family?” A: “I’d like to try to see them soon but if worst comes to worst I will see them this fall.”

Another way to say this: “Worst case scenario, I’ll sleep in my van.”

Listen to the episode to get examples of how to use “worse comes to worst” in realistic English conversations.

If you want to learn another cool native expression, check out our Episode 352 on how to use “Long story short.”

Remember, the more that you use these natural expressions, the more you will connect with people through English.

Leave us your comments below.

What questions do you have about this expression?

Have you ever tried to use it?

If you are not planning to apply to a university or immigrate to a new country should you still take IELTS as a personal goal?

Today Lindsay and Jessica ask this question and give you some hints and ideas about how to use IELTS to build your general English skills.

We think this is a great idea!

If you are planning to do this you can take the General Exam.

It’s a way to create a goal for yourself and create a study plan.

You will also create accountability for yourself to keep reaching toward your goal.

You could also add your IELTS score to your Linked In profile and possibly attract the attention of some international companies.

If you choose this plan, be careful!

Make sure that you take it seriously.

Keep your end goal in mind.

Try creating a vision board for your ideal life and think about how IELTS plays into that.

What do you want to do?

  • Do you want to be able to go to the theater in London and understand every word?
  • Do you want to be able to read a classic novel?
  • Do you want an international recruiter to find your profile on Linked In?

How can you make sure that you take your goal seriously?

Invest your money in a good course.

If you put your money into your goal you are much more likely to follow through on this goal.

Are you planning to take the IELTS as a personal goal?

Leave us a comment below and let us know.

Today is Lindsay’s 34th birthday! Let’s celebrate!

We are asking for 34 reviews in the iTunes store for Lindsay’s 34th!

Please go to the iTunes store now and leave a review for All Ears English- click here.

Today we’re going to talk about 7 questions that you should ask yourself at a turning point or a milestone in your life.

Another example of a milestone could be a graduation, a birth, a wedding, or another important day.

Here are the 7 questions you should ask yourself:

  • When was the last time you laughed?
  • When was the last time you cried?
  • How do you define success and what daily actions do you take to become successful?
  • What is your purpose in life?
  • What would you do if you didn’t need to work for money?
  • Where do you want to be at this time next year or in five years or in ten years?
  • What am I doing to strengthen my relationships? Am I surrounding myself with people who uplift me?

 

How would you answer one of these questions?

Let us know in the comments below.

Are you worried that you will not understand a word on IELTS Writing Task 2?

A lot of students are worried about this happening.

We have already shown you what you should do if this happens on the Speaking test.  Today we’ll talk about what to do if it happens on the Writing test.

Here is what you SHOULD NOT do:

1) Do NOT explain that you don’t  know the meaning of the word in your essay

Unlike the Speaking test, the Writing test is academic and formal.

If you don’t know the meaning of the word you cannot explain that you don’t know the word in the essay.

You cannot write “I am sorry I hope I understood the meaning of this word.”

That would be considered more casual and would not work on the Writing test.

2) DO NOT pretend to know the word and use it

Also, don’t pretend that you know the word and throw it into a bunch of different sentences if you don’t know how to use it.

That strategy also will not work. It will be obvious that you don’t know what you are writing about and your score will drop quickly.

What SHOULD you do:

Don’t worry about that specific word. Look around the word. Take what you DO understand and use that.

Play to your strengths.

Consider the words that you do know in the question and work with those.

It will not kill your score completely if you don’t understand it.

As long as you respond to all of the other parts of the question you can still get a good score.

Has this ever happened to you?

Did you have an experience where you didn’t know the meaning of a word in IELTS Writing Task 2?

Write your questions in the comments!

On the IELTS Speaking test the best way to push your speaking score to a 7 or higher is to use idioms and phrasal verbs.

If you use these terms the examiner will be impressed and will most likely give you extra points in the vocabulary section.

Today we are going to show you some phrasal verbs with “get” that can be used to describe connections between people or relationships.

#1) To get over

When you are feeling sad about something you need to “get over it.”

This means that you need to stop feeling sad and move on.

#2) To get around

To avoid something.

With this phrasal verb you can say “there’s just no getting around it.”

This means there’s no way to avoid something.

You can also use this phrasal verb in the physical sense when you want to avoid an obstacle in the road or on the sidewalk.

Example: “There was something in the road but I got around it and kept going.”

#3) To get away

This means to escape or to take a vacation and go somewhere else.

Sample sentence: “My friend is busy in New York and it’s hard for him to get away”

#4) To get along with

To have a good relationship or connection with someone.

Sample: “Do you get along with your siblings?”

#5) To get across

To communicate an idea.

To make someone understand something.

Sample answer: “I was mad at my friend and it was hard for me to get across why I was angry.”

Choose two of these phrasal verbs and practice them.

Plan to use them on your IELTS Speaking test if you get questions about relationships or for any other questions where they might fit.

Phrasal verbs with “get” could work for a lot of speaking answers.

What other phrasal verbs do you know with “get”?

Let us know in the comments below.

Are you an optimistic English student?

This week I worked with a student from Italy.

He inspired me because he only paid attention to his improvement.

He noticed that he was starting to understand spoken English a bit better.

What effect did this have?

It made him more motivated to keep improving and keep working on his English.

This created a positive feedback loop and now he is on track for even more improvement.

In contrast another student could have noticed the areas where he or she was not improving.

He could focus on that and that would have a negative effect on motivation and his future improvement.

 

Here is a great quote:

“Everything you see or hear or experience is specific to you.

You create the universe by perceiving it so everything in the universe you perceive is specific to you.”

-Douglas Adams

 

What do you think about this topic?

Do you see the glass as half empty or half full?

Let us know in the comments below.

Tarle Speech and Language Jennifer Tarle English Pronunciation

Today we have a guest back on the show to talk about American English pronunciation!

Jennifer Tarle from Tarle Speech and Language is here to help you with your consonants in English!

Jennifer was on the show last month and she gave us 3 immediate action steps to improve our English vowel sounds.

Today we’ll talk about consonant sounds in English.

What is a consonant?

Consonants have a very specific place that they are made in your mouth (with your lips, with the tip of your tongue, with the back of your tongue).

They also have a specific manner in which they are created.

Sometimes the air stops in your mouth or the air continues.

Today we’ll find out the biggest mistakes that students make with English consonants.

 

Mistake #1) Touching the tip of the tongue to the teeth

With the “TH” sound you should not touch your top or bottom teeth and keep the air moving.

If you touch your teeth you won’t pronounce the sound properly.

 

With the “S” sound you have the tip of your tongue between the top teeth but if you make the mistake of touching your teeth you will make the wrong sound.

With the “SH” sound, if you touch the tongue to your teeth you will say the “CH” or “T” sound.

With the “Z” sound you need to avoid touching the tongue to your teeth or you will say the “D” sound or the “J” sound.

 

Mistake #2) Not paying attention to voicing

Many students don’t pay attention to whether their voice is vibrating in certain sounds.

Most people only struggle with this at the end of the word.

For example, the “S” sound is not voiced. You don’t feel any vibration in your voice. In contrast the “Z” sound does create a vibration in your throat. You need to pay attention to how these sounds are different.

Also “K” is not voiced and “G” is voiced.

You should clearly feel the difference if you put your hand on your throat.

 

 

Mistake #3) Making mistakes with specific sounds

  • “SH” versus “CH”: With the “SH” sound your tongue doesn’t touch your teeth but with the “CH” sound it quickly touches your teeth then it pulls back
  • “W” versus “V”: A lot of Indian students struggle with this as well as European students. This goes back to spelling confusion. For the “W” sound round your lips like you are blowing someone a kiss. With the “V” sound we gently bite our bottom lip.
  • “V” and “B”: Japanese and Spanish speakers make this mistake as well as Romanian students. For the “V” you are gently biting your bottom lip and for the “B” sound you are squeezing your lips together and then releasing.

 

What English consonant sounds do you struggle with?

What questions do you have for Jennifer?

Let us know in the comments below.

 

Jennifer’s Bio

Tarle Speech and Language was founded in 2005 by Jennifer Tarle in order to empower individuals at all stages of life through better communication skills. Jennifer is a Certified Speech Pathologist with over 19 years of experience in speech-related training and  pathologies.

Jennifer earned a BS degree and an MA degree in Speech Pathology from Kent State University. She is licensed in CA, IL, & OH, is certified with the State Boards of Education in IL and OH, is certified by the IL early intervention system, holds the Certificate of Clinical Competence from the American Speech Language Hearing Association (ASHA), and has earned several AHSA ACE Awards for continuing education.

Jennifer is a self-published author of accent workbooks, audio CDs, DVDs, and iBooks.  Materials are designed to be easy and effective.  Products are all downloadable so that you can practice on the go!  She distributes her pronunciation materials solely through www.tarlespeech.com and iTunes.

Jennifer recently launched a new website with more free Minute of Speech videos and tips on how to improve your speaking clarity.  She also introduced a new product line of  downloadable sound packages.  Each package includes instructions on how to make a sound, practice word lists and sentences, and audio & video examples.  Clients can design their own program or buy a quick start guide to address the top three vowel and consonant mistakes for each language.  

Introductory through advanced classes on foreign accents are taught throughout the city of Chicago, via video conferencing, and throughout the world.  To help even more people, she launched a video podcast, The Minute of Speech, in 2007.  It is available on iTunes, YouTube, and at www.tarlespeech.com.  She implemented her Tarle Speech pronunciation and accent reduction program at the Nanjing University of Science and Technology, Nanjing, China and at E4TG in Tokyo, Japan.  Contact her to schedule a consultation or class.

Jennifer strives to help individuals to improve their lives through better communication.

Do you need to move your IELTS score from a 6 to a 7?

Last week we showed you how to move from a 5 to a 6 on Speaking.

Today let’s talk about how to move from a 6 to a 7.

It’s not an easy jump but with today’s episode you will get on the right track.

We’ll show you exactly how to spend your time to move your score up to a 7.

To make this jump you need to push yourself and do the right things when you prepare.

Remember, just listening to this episode will not increase your score.

Here is what you need to do:

#1) Fluency and coherence

To get a 7 you need to be flexible with your linking words and use the linking words correctly.

In Speaking Parts 2 and 3 use linking words to organize your ideas in your responses. In Speaking Part 1 you don’t need to use linking words because it’s more casual.

In Part 3 use more high-level linking words.

The other key is your ability to keep speaking. A “6” student will say “um,” “well” and will hesitate.

A “7” student has no problem continuing speaking.

This kind of student is confident and does not hesitate.

Get some speaking models and sample answers. Read them out loud in front of the mirror.

Get a native speaker to practice with. Work with an IELTS professional.

#2) Vocabulary

This is an easy way to push up your score.

You need flexible vocabulary. Use idioms, phrasal verbs, and expressions.

Check out our episodes on work idioms for IELTS Speaking, family idioms for the Speaking test and others.

However, remember that you need to practice these new vocabulary terms in real conversations and in your practice tests.

Be specific and use the right terms. Do not use general terms like “people” or “things.”

Make your vocabulary interesting and “native like” and you will be a “7” student in this category.

#3) Grammar

This is not a great area to focus on because it’s very hard to get a 7 on grammar.

To get a 7 you need to have mostly error-free sentences. It’s very hard to do this if you have a short amount of time to prepare.

Make sure you have a variety of sentence structures.

It takes years to make this jump so you might want to spend your time on other areas when it comes to the Speaking test.

Learn more about our IELTS grammar philosophy at All Ears English.

#4) Pronunciation

This is an easy way to increase your Speaking score.

This is fun to improve and it’s totally possible.

You can’t do it in a day or two but with a good study plan you can do it in a few months.

To get a 7 the examiner needs to understand you.

You can still have your accent but it shouldn’t affect the examiner’s comprehension.

If it’s easy to understand you then you will get a 7 for pronunciation.

The next thing is the intonation and stress.

Put emotion in your voice.

Tell stories in the Speaking test that you care about so that you will have feeling in your voice.

Check out this episode on How to Be a Drama King or Queen on the Speaking test.

Remember, these tips are just the starting point.

We are showing you what you need to focus on but now you need to get the daily study plan, do the practice exercises, and put in the time.

If you want more information on our course which contains all of these focus areas, check the video at the top of this page and get into our course for $1 for the first 3 days.

Let us know your questions in the comments.

Do you get nervous during the IELTS Listening test?

Are you afraid that you will lose control during the Listening test and you won’t understand anything?

Are you worried about the different accents on the test?

Today we have a fun solution for your problem!

The trick is to get into a TV series.

You’ll have fun with it and you’ll forget that you’re practicing your English. By the time you get to the test you will be comfortable with different English accents.

You can find great series and other resources on Netflix.

Should you use subtitles when you watch these series?

Yes, you can turn on the subtitles for the first couple of episodes until you have gotten used to the accent.

After you have gotten used to it you can turn off the subtitles.

TV Series:

#1) Almighty Johnsons

This is a fun TV series that is made in New Zealand.

You can read more about it here.

#2) Downtown Abbey

This is a popular British TV show.

It’s a great chance for you to get used to the British accent.

Learn more about it here.

#3) Dr. Who

This is also a British series. Learn about it here.

Jessica loves this one. Check it out!

#4) Call the Midwife

#5) Sherlock

Podcasts:

#6) Real Life Radio

This is a great podcast where you will hear the Australian accent. The guys who run this show are fun and you will finish every episode feeling motivated and ready to learn more.

Get more information here.

#7) Luke’s English Podcast

You will hear the British accent on this show.

Luke has fun and entertaining episodes where he talks about a variety of topics.

#8) Ron at English Funcast

Ron is a comedian and his podcasts are fun! He explains jokes and tells funny stories. He is from Canada so you will get to hear some small pronunciation differences between the American and the Canadian accent.

Get more listening resources here.

How to handle the Listening test:

In addition to practicing your general fluency and listening skills, you also need to do Listening test practice.

When it comes to test practice and the actual test, don’t take notes during the test.

When you have time to look at questions, underline the key words (names, numbers, verbs).

Next, predict answers. What do you need in the blank? Are you listening for a noun or for an adjective?

When they start speaking, follow along with your pen and fill in the answer as soon as you hear it.

You will have time to go back and check your answers.

By the time you get to the actual IELTS exam, you should be comfortable with hearing different types of accents.

Make sure that your study plan includes balanced practice which allows you to improve both your general fluency and also your test strategies.

Listening practice can be one of the most enjoyable parts of your IELTS study plan so grab some great resources and get started!

What other listening resources do you know?

Let us know in the comments below.

Do you get confused between “grow” and “grow up” in English?

Today we’ll show you how to know the difference and use each term correctly.

We’ll also throw in some bonus English phrasal verbs with “grow” to help you sound more natural when you speak English with natives!

 When do we use “grow”?

We use this to talk about something getting physically bigger or longer. We can say “My grass is growing” or “My bank account is growing.”

Examples of “grow”:

  • “Does your hair grow fast or does it grow slowly?”
  • “What’s the best way to grow a business fast?”
  • “What should I do if I need to grow my bank account?”

When do we use “grow up”?

This is only used to talk about people becoming more mature.

Using “grow up” implies that the thing is human.

Examples of “grow up”:

  • “Where did you grow up?
  • “What movies were popular when you were growing up?”
  • “What was your favorite meal as a kid growing up?
  • “What’s the best thing about watching your niece grow up?”

Bonus phrasal verbs with “grow”:

  • “To grow into”: When a child gets big enough to wear clothing that had been too large before.
    • Sample sentence: “Oh don’t worry if that shirt is too big right now. He’ll grow into it.”
  • “To grow out”: To allow something to get long naturally
    • Sample sentence: “Are you going to grow out your beard this summer?”
  • “To grow out of something” To become too mature for something
    • Sample sentence: “I used to be a stubborn kid but I grew out of it.”
  • “To grow apart”: To no longer be close with someone because your lives diverge and you have different interests
    • Sample sentence: “My friend and I grew apart after high school because she got married and I moved to the city.”

What other phrasal verbs do you know with “grow”?

Let us know in the comments below and tell us if you have any questions from today’s episode.

Do you use the phrase “I wonder if…” to make a polite request in English?

If you use this phrase for that purpose it makes you sound old fashioned and irrelevant.

Today get six alternative phrases to make a request that are more up to date and modern.

 

native English teachersAre you looking for a professional, native English teacher online?

Get a native English teacher online in seconds at italki.

Lindsay and Michelle recommend italki as our #1 English-learning solution online. Choose from more than 400 teachers to work on your business English or to pass your next big exam.

Get our special offer before it runs out! Go to italki and claim 10USD to go toward a FREE second English lesson at italki!

 

Here is the phrase that you should avoid using: “I wonder if you could tell the correct word” or “I wonder if you could get me a drink.”

This phrase sound old fashioned and indirect.

It does not sound strong enough.

Actually the phrase “I wonder if…” is used to contemplate or ponder something. It’s not used to make a request in modern American English.

For example, we might say “I wonder if there is life on other planets.” or “I wonder if I will ever get married.”

 

Here are some better phrases to make polite requests in English:

  • “Do you mind…?.”
  • “Would you mind…?
  • “Could I…?”
  • “Would it be ok if…?”
  • “Would it be possible…?”
  • “Would you be willing to…?”

These are better and more modern ways to make a request in English.

Listen to the episode to get role plays of Michelle and Lindsay using these phrases in a real conversation.

 

What other ways do you know to make a polite request in English?

Let us know in the comments below.

You want to score a 7 or higher on IELTS, right?

If so, when you choose an IELTS teacher you need to be careful!

Recently we have heard a lot of bad advice from IELTS teachers.

Students come to us and ask if the advice that they heard is true.

In today’s episode we are going to tell you the most common myths that students are hearing from bad IELTS teachers.

Myth #1) You need to speak British English on the IELTS

This is incorrect! If someone tells you this, run away from them!

They are not a qualified IELTS teacher.

The IELTS is an international exam.

Even though the company that makes the IELTS exam is a British company, it does not matter.

You can spell in British English or American English on the Writing and the Listening test.

On the Speaking test you can speak in any accent you want.

The accent doesn’t matter on the Speaking test.

What matters is being understood.

If you can be understood by the examiner, you will get a better score.

Read more here

Myth #2) You cannot make up facts on the Speaking or Writing test

This is also a lie.

Of course you can make up facts.

In many cases you have to make up facts and create fake research to support your ideas.

The examiner knows that you don’t have access to the internet.

Also, the examiner will love it if you are creative and spontaneous.

They will be more likely to give you a higher score if you are able to keep it fun and interesting by adding your own facts and statistics to support your ideas.

Myth #3) You should take notes while you listen

This is wrong.

There is no time to take notes on the Listening test.

You should not take your attention away from the Listening to write things down.

You should instead follow along, stare at key words that you underline, and predict the answer.

Myth #4) You must ALWAYS use high-level academic words for the entire Speaking test

You should NOT use formal, academic vocabulary for the entire Speaking test.

You only need academic vocabulary for Speaking Part 3.

For Speaking Parts 1 and 2 you should be using casual slang and natural idioms and expressions.

Myth #5) You should write a 4-paragraph essay format for Writing Task 1

No! This is also a myth.

Teachers will tell you this if they are not familiar with the IELTS exam. They will tell you to write the IELTS essay in the same way that they write a traditional academic essay but that is not the right way to do it.

There are very specific ways to do Writing Task 1 for the IELTS and you can learn more about it here.

If you hear any of these myths from your IELTS teacher you should stop working with them.

Why? If they are telling you one of these myths then they are probably telling you other things about IELTS that are incorrect.

You should not waste your time and money with someone who is a general test-prep expert and teaches TOEFL, IELTS, and other exams.

Has a teacher ever told you these myths?

Tell us in the comments below.

Do you like to party?

On the IELTS Speaking test there are a lot of questions about parties and celebrations.

If you get a question like this you should use idioms and expressions to boost your vocabulary score to a 7 or higher.

Today we’ll give you 6 idioms to increase your score with these questions.

Here are 6 great Speaking test idioms for questions about parties and celebrations:

  • To get down: To dance, to have fun, to enjoy, to get crazy
  • To throw a party: To host a party, to invite guests
  •  To crash a party: To show up uninvited, to go when you are not supposed to be at the party
  •  To be the life of the party: To be the person that everyone is looking at, to be entertaining everyone, to be the center of attention, telling jokes, making the party fun
  • To be a party pooper: Someone who doesn’t have fun at parties
  • To be a wallflower: Someone who is shy and stands in the corner at a party and does not socialize very much
  • To be a party animal: Someone who loves parties
  • To let your hair down: To relax, let loose, have fun, loosen up, chill out and have a good time

Use these idioms on your speaking test if you get a question about parties and celebrations. Why? When the examiner hears idioms like these they automatically push your vocabulary score up.

This increase in your vocabulary score could push your entire band score up and might mean the difference between a 6 and a 7.

Want more episodes like this one? Get idioms for questions about work

What idioms do you know that can be used to talk about parties and celebrations?

Let us know in the comments below.

Do you feel happy in your life?

Do you feel happy at work?

We watched a video on the Today Show that showed us the three numbers that help us be happier at work.

What do you think about these three actions? Do you agree that they could make you happier at home and at work?

Here are the three numbers:

  • FIVE: 5 minutes of meditation. Meditation has been found to change your brain. Try focusing on your breath for just ten minutes a day.

 

  • THREE: Write down 3 good things in your life every day. What are you grateful for? What are the simple things in your life that you appreciate?

 

  • ONE: Do 1 act of kindness every day
    • “Oh let me help you with that.”
    • “How can I help?”
    • “Do you need any help?”
    • “I’m around if you want to talk.”

 

Do you feel happy at work?

Could you implement these three numbers into your life to make your day better?

Let us know your ideas in the comments below.

To get that 7 or higher on IELTS you need to use idioms in your answers.

In other articles we have talked about idioms to talk about work, idioms to discuss technology, and idioms to talk about sports and exercise.

If the examiner feels that your vocabulary is above and beyond what you would read in a textbook, he or she is likely to give you extra points for vocabulary which could bump up your entire speaking score.

The best way to prepare to use idioms on the IELTS Speaking test is to learn at least 2 idioms for each speaking question type and practice using them with a native speaker or with an IELTS professional.

Today we’ll give you four idioms that you can use when you get speaking questions about family.

You might get any of these questions:

  • How many people are in your family?
  • Do you all live together in the same house?
  • What do you like to do together as a family?
  • Who do you get along with the best?

In this article I will give you four great idioms that you can use to talk about your family on the Speaking test.

#1) It runs in the family

This means that a character trait or a physical feature is found in many people within the same family.

Here is a sample sentence: “I like to be active and I participate in a lot of marathons and road races. It runs in the family because my dad also runs in marathons sometimes. We often train for the big races together.”

Here is another example: “My dad has high blood pressure and I started to develop it this summer. I guess it runs in the family.”

#2) Flesh and blood

This means that you have the same genes and that you are related.

We usually use this idioms when we want to say that we will support someone if they are in our family regardless of their actions.

You might answer a question like this: “Even though my sister can be annoying sometimes I always stand up for her when she is in trouble because she is my own flesh and blood.”

#3) Sibling rivalry

This means that you and your sibling (brother or sister) often compete.

You might compete with your sibling on academic achievements, athletics, or you might compete for your parent’s attention.

Here is how you could use this on the Speaking test: “My brother and I get along well now that we are adults but when we were kids we had a major sibling rivalry and we would compete with each other constantly.”

#4) The apple doesn’t fall far from the tree

This means that a son or daughter might repeat the behavior that they see in their father or mother.

This is often used to describe negative actions that a son or daughter might take that resemble the actions of their parent.

Here is an example: “My sister is just like my father. She jumps from job to job and can’t settle on one career path. The apple doesn’t fall far from the tree.”

Remember, using idioms on the IELTS Speaking test is one of the easiest ways to increase your score.

Practice the idioms in today’s article with a native speaker or an IELTS professional and you will be on you way to your target score.

Good luck and let us know in the comments if you have any questions.

Are you worried about using the present perfect on your IELTS Speaking test?

Many students get stressed when it comes to grammar tenses like this one.

Today we’ll show you how to use the present perfect and the simple past to respond to typical Speaking questions for a 7 or higher.

We’ll give you some simple and easy rules to follow on the test.

We use present perfect to describe achievements and accomplishments in the past.

How is present perfect different from simple past?

With the present perfect it doesn’t matter when the accomplishment happened. For example, “I have traveled to more than 30 countries.”

With the simple past, the time that the event happened is important and the specific details are given. For example, “I went to Mexico in 2005 and I ate Mexican food.”

In Speaking Part 2 when you introduce a story and at the beginning you might use present perfect to introduce the overall experience and then when you get into specific details you can use the simple past.

You should mix in both tenses to get a more dynamic and interesting answer and a higher grammar score.

Sample Answers:

Q: Do you enjoy going to museums?

A: Yes, I have been to many museums. When I lived in New York I went to a museum every week. When I went to Italy I also spent a lot of time at museums because they are famous there. I think it’s great to go to museums and see works of art that we don’t get to see every day.

Q: What books do you enjoy reading?

A: Good question. I love reading books. I have always loved reading science fiction and horror. I have read every book by Steven King. The last book I read by him was Full Dark No Stars. I read it and scared myself before I fell asleep every night.

With both of these sample answers we mixed the present perfect and the simple past in the same idea to introduce different parts of the answer and to add details and main ideas. This is what you need to do on your Speaking test. Practice writing down our sample answers here and create your own using the same grammar structures.

What questions do you have about using present perfect and simple past on the IELTS Speaking test?

Let us know in the comments below.

Do you get confused between “remember” and “remind” in English?

We hear students make this mistake all of the time and we are going to fix it today!

Let’s talk about the difference between the two words:

  • To remind: To tell someone about something. This usually involves two people or the person and something else that helps the person “remember”
  • To remember: This only happens with one person. There is information that the person recalls on their own without anything that “reminds” them.

 

Here are some common phrases:

  • Would you remind me your name?
  • Will you remind me to take out the trash on Wednesday night?
  • Did you remember to stop at the post office?

 

Listen to the role play between Lindsay and Michelle to get some great examples of how to use “remind” and “remember.”

 

Do you have trouble with these two words?

Let us know in the comments and write your sample sentences!

Do you ever want to escape a bad conversation in English without sounding rude?

Sometimes you start a conversation but then you realize that the person is not very interested in you or they are not interesting to speak with at all.

Last week we learned some phrases to continue the conversation in English.

Today we’ll give you 7 English phrases to get out of the situation gracefully without burning bridges.

Here are some phrases to end a conversation politely:

  • “Ok well have a great night.”
  • “Have a good time.”
  • “Ok I’m going to get a drink.”
  • “Ok take care”
  • “I’m going to go mingle around a bit but have a great night.”
  • “It was great talking with you.”
  • “I’m going to go grab something to eat so I’ll talk to you later.”

What other phrases can you use to end a conversation in English?

Let us know in the comments below.

Do you need to move your IELTS Speaking score from a 5 to a 6?

In today’s episode you’ll find out exactly what the examiner listens for and how to use this information to push up your score.

There is a big difference between a 5 and 6 on IELTS Speaking.

Here is what the examiner looks for:

  • Fluency and coherence: If you can keep talking and speak for the full two minutes and if you can use complete sentences you can get a 6. You will also get a 6 if you don’t use “um” and “uh.” If you use linking words then you can get a 6. On the other hand, if you speak slowly, pause often, use “um” or “ugh” or “like” then you will get a 5 for this grading category. Remember, fluency is the ability to keep talking and that is what you need to get a 6.
  • Vocabulary/Lexical Resources: If you have enough vocabulary to get your ideas across you can get a 6.  It may be wrong but the examiner understands what you want to say. If you can talk about familiar topics such as personal topics (going to the movies, shopping) with the correct vocabulary but when you get to unfamiliar topics in Speaking Part 3 you don’t have enough vocabulary words then you will get a 5. People who get a 5 here also use general words like “stuff” or “things” or “people.” These vocabulary words are too broad. Practice being specific with your choice of words and you will get a 6 in this category.
  • Grammar: To get a 6 you need a mix of sentence structures including compound, complex, and simple sentences. You can have some mistakes and still get a 6. Don’t focus on small grammar rules like prepositions. Read more about grammar on the IELTS here.
  • Pronunciation: This is the easiest place to improve your score. Someone who gets a 5 talks like a robot with no feeling in their voice and all of their words sound exactly the same. To get a 6 you need to put some feeling in your voice. Practice varying your tone of voice in your English conversation practice and you’ll be ready to do in the test.

A student who gets a 6 is able to get their ideas across and the examiner understands most of what they are saying.

A student who gets a 5 cannot communicate their ideas and be understood, especially when they get to Speaking Part 3

Are you ready to move your score from a 5 to 6 on IELTS Speaking?

Let us know what your study plan is in the comments below.

Today you’ll find out what English phrase you should eliminate from your vocabulary and you’ll get 5 or 6 new phrases to replace it with when you agree with someone in English.

Do you use the phrase “Very well” when you want to say that you understand or that you agree?

If you are using this phrase it sounds old fashioned, stiff, formal, and out of date.

There are some better phrases that you can use.

Instead we recommend the following phrases:

  • “Ok that’s fine.”
  • “Ok, agreed”
  • “Ok got it.”
  • “Ok sounds good.”
  • “Ok sounds great.”
  • “See you then.”
  • “Yeah that works.”
  • “That’s cool.”

 

https://www.allearsenglish.com/italkiAre you looking for a professional, native English teacher online?

Get a native English teacher online in seconds at italki.

Lindsay and Michelle recommend italki as our #1 English-learning solution online. Choose from more than 400 teachers to work on your business English or to pass your next big exam.

Get our special offer before it runs out! Go to italki and claim 10USD to go toward a FREE second English lesson at italki!

 

Listen to the role plays between Michelle and Lindsay in this episode to see exactly how these phrases are used.

 

What other phrases do you know to agree with someone in English?

Let us know in the comments below.

Today we are talking about the key differences between IELTS Writing Task 1 for the General Exam and the Academic Exam.

For the General Exam you will have to write a letter.

It is easier than the Academic Exam because they tell you exactly what to write.

There are a number of different letter types and you should practice them all in your preparation plan.

For the letter task you will get a situation and you will have 3 bullet points that you must talk about in your letter.

Make a paragraph for each bullet point.

Make sure you talk about each bullet point in your letter because that is part of your task achievement grade.

One common type of General essay question is the letter of complaint. For example, you could get a situation where you have stayed at a hotel and you had a problem.

Now you have to write a letter of complaint explaining what happened. You’ll need to be able to use formal vocabulary for a letter like this.

Remember these tips for the letter of complaint:

  • You need to include specific details of your stay
  • Use formal vocabulary that sounds polite
  • Use interesting vocabulary such as idioms, specific words, expressions, phrasal verbs
  • You must address all 3 bullet points to get the 7 or higher
  • You need to show a mix of sentence structures. You can’t just use simple sentence structures
  • You need to have paragraphs and you must use linking words to organize your ideas

Letters of complaint are always formal so you need to use high-level, polite language.

You could use the following:

  • “Would you mind if…”
  • “Would it be possible to…”

What questions do you have about writing a letter of complaint on the General Exam?

Let us know in the comments section below.

Michelle used to be a stand-up comic!

She performed at improv events and open mic nights around New York City.

There is so much to learn from comedians about how to communicate well in English

Here is what you can learn from a stand-up comedian about how to be a better English learner:

  • Be flexible: Never memorize things.  Keep your language alive. Don’t make it static and dead. Language is dynamic. It is ok to memorize small chunks but you need to be able to plug them into spontaneous and flexible conversations. If you notice that something is not working then you need to be able to change quickly.

 

  • Be playful: Be light on your feet. When someone doesn’t understand you, don’t take it too seriously. Use more of an experimental attitude toward language. If comedians tell a joke that “bombs” then they keep going. You can do the same with your English. If you make a mistake, keep going and “roll with the punches.”

 

  • Be self-deprecating: Make fun of yourself or “poke” fun at yourself. Don’t take yourself too seriously and don’t take life too seriously. If something makes you look bad then you are ok with it. Remember, Connection NOT Perfection!

 

What do you think?

Can you apply some of these ideas to your English learning skills?

What is the difference between the IELTS Academic Exam and IELTS General Exam?

Today we’ll show you the major differences and we’ll tell you exactly what to expect on the General IELTS Writing test.

There is not a huge difference between the IELTS Academic and the IELTS General Exam.

The Reading test is slightly easier and the Writing test for Task 1 is different and the Writing Task 2 essay topic might be a bit easier.

On the IELTS General Exam for Writing Task 1 you will need to write a letter.

The key is to make sure that you use the right tone when you write the essay based on the goal of the letter.

For example, you might have to write a letter of complaint to return a product.

In this case you would need some formal vocabulary in the letter.

For Writing Task 1 on the IELTS Academic Exam you will see a graph and you will need to write about it.

We’ll give you more details on how to write an essay for the General Exam in future episodes.

Are you taking the IELTS General or the IELTS Academic?

Let us know in the comments below.

John Fotheringham Language Mastery Show

Today we have a special guest on the show.

Our guest is the creator of The Language Mastery Show.

Today John will show you how to take learning into your own hands using exchanges and paid lessons to hit that higher level of English that you are looking for! Check out John’s tips below.

 

Tip #1) Get a language tutor

You must apply what you are learning on your own through a book or a podcast.

John recommends italki. Apply what you are learning in your independent study with your native English tutor.

Try out different phrases that you hear and ask your tutor for connections.

When you know you have a meeting with a tutor coming up you are more likely to put in the time every day to prepare.

Thirty minutes is a good amount of time for a lesson.

 

Tip #2) Try lang8.com

This site will help you practice your writing.

It’s another great way to put into practice what you learn through reading and listening.

A lot of students overlook the importance of practicing writing.

You submit your essays to be corrected by a native.

You also correct essays in your native language.

Using the site is free if you are also helping people learn your native language.

You can submit a term paper, a blog post, a journal entry, even an email.

 

Tip #3) Try Rhinospike.com

You submit text and you have native speakers record the text in audio format.

The idea is that you get to hear what you write being spoken by a native speaker.

This is free because you also record something in your native language that someone else has submitted.

 

What do the most successful students do?

They are motivated and interested.

If you want to learn you can get by with average materials and a lack of time.

Having a need or a strong desire to learn is the key to success when it comes to independent English learning.

 

John’s Bio:

Howdy language lovers! I’m John Fotheringham, a linguist, author, entrepreneur, vagabond, and full-time silly goose. I have been learning and teaching languages for over a decade and have seen first-hand what works and what doesn’t. And what have I learned?

Anyone can learn a language regardless of age, income, or zip code with the right attitude, methods, and materials. Most adult learners fail because they spend all their time learning about the language instead of actually practicing in the language.

You DON’T need to spend thousands of dollars on classes but a little investment in the right tools and materials can go a long way.

You DON’T need to force yourself through boring textbooks. Fun, modern, relevant materials are readily available online.

You DON’T need to be “gifted” at languages, but you DO need to figure out what methods fit your learning style, schedule, and personality.

You DON’T need to move abroad. Creative use of technology allows you to create an immersion environment no matter where you live.

You DO need to maximize your exposure to the language everyday through listening and reading input and maximize your active practice through speaking and writing output.

For adult-friendly language learning tips, tools, and tech, check out my blog Language Mastery, my podcast, The Language Mastery Show, and my comprehensive language guides.

 

 

Have you tried these tools?

How did you like them?

Let us know in the comments below.

If you want to get the highest possible IELTS Writing score for Writing Task 2 then you need linking words!

What linking words should you use and how should you use them?

Find out today!

In our daily study plan in 3 Keys IELTS we give you all of the linking words you need for the exam.

In the last episode we said that in IELTS Writing Task 2 if you get an opinion essay then you can answer it using both sides of an argument because using that style you will find it easier to come up with examples.

Today we are going to talk about the kind of vocabulary that we have to use to get a 7 or higher on IELTS Writing Task 2.

We have to use linking words!

Every sentence should have a linking word.

Use them all of the time.

Get Strategies Created by a Former IELTS Examiner

3 Keys IELTS Online Course logoAre you ready to move past IELTS and move forward with your life vision?

Find out why our strategies are the most powerful in the IELTS world.

When you use our Insider Method you avoid the BIGGEST MISTAKES that most students make on IELTS.

Click here to get a score increase on IELTS.

It’s 100% guaranteed.

Click here to enroll now.

Here are the linking words that you can use for every body paragraph

Topic: gentrification in urban areas (lower income families are having to move out of their neighborhood away from the urban areas because their rent is going up)

As for those who believe that gentrification is good, they feel this way because their neighborhood becomes safer. For instance, a study last year found that crime had decreased by 17% in Park Slope last year. In addition, they believe that real estate investors should be able to increase rent as they deem fit. A fantastic example of this is, the house next to me rented for $1200 per month last year and now it’s renting for $1600 per month.

In contrast, other people hold the notion that gentrification is unfair. Firstly, this is because longtime residents can no longer afford to live there. For example, my friend at work had to leave her neighborhood after twenty five years. Moreover, this is pushing people out into areas that are farther away from home or school, creating more challenges for them to succeed. More specifically, my colleague used to commute one hour to work and now she has to commute for two hours.

Takeaway:

A key part of your Writing score on Task 2 is using high-level linking words. You will lower your score to a 6 if you use linking words that every other student is using. 

Make your essay stand out in the eyes of the Examiner and become a 7 candidate by using these exact linking words to get a 7 or higher on your Writing Task 2 essay.

What questions do you have about Writing Task 2?

Ask us in the comments below.

Do you need a 7 or higher on the IELTS?

Do you have a limited amount of time and money to prepare?

If you are in this position then you must maximize the time that you do have and do the right things every single day to get ready for your exam.

If you don’t want to take the exam multiple times, it’s best to find a quality IELTS course where the IELTS study plan has already been created for you.

However, if you want to create your study plan by yourself, today you will learn four things that you need to think about when you create your study plan.

Get a 100% Score Increase Guarantee with the Insider Method

Are you ready to move past IELTS and move forward with your life vision?

Find out why our strategies are the most powerful in the IELTS world.

When you use our Insider Method you avoid the BIGGEST MISTAKES that most students make on IELTS.

Click here to get a score increase on IELTS.

It’s 100% guaranteed.

#1) Create a balanced study plan

To get a 7 or higher on IELTS you need to focus on two things: test strategy/practice and general fluency. You can’t ignore either one of these. They are both important.

When you create your study plan, you need the following:

  • Strategies and test practice: Make sure that the foundation of your course includes learning strategies (these strategies should come from a qualified IELTS professional that you trust)
  • Exercises to improve your general fluency such as listening to podcasts with different accents, meeting with a native English conversation partner for speaking practice, reading the NY Times or another high-level newspaper and other solid activities to help you build confidence.

Write out your daily preparation activities and be sure that each week includes general fluency build and test preparation.

If you leave either of these out then you are unlikely to get the score you need.

#2) Test practice comes at the end of your plan

Should you include practice tests under test conditions every week in your study plan or should you place most of the test practice at the end?

It’s better to do most of your practice tests during the final 25% of your preparation time.

Why?

You need to build your foundation by learning test strategies and improving your general fluency first.

This will help you get confident so that you when you take your practice tests, you will be able to use those strategies that you have learned.

Should you take a practice test before you start your study plan as a pre-test?

If you are at a lower level it’s best to avoid early practice tests and focus on strategy first.

Learn more here: When Should I Start Preparing Under Test Conditions?

#3) Check in with a qualified IELTS professional

The stakes are high when it comes to the IELTS.

This test will determine your future career opportunities and what happens in your life moving forward. It will also determine opportunities for your family if you move abroad with them.

Unless your level is already very high, it doesn’t make sense to do this by yourself.

Work with a qualified IELTS professional and have them check your IELTS Speaking and IELTS Writing practice tests.

You could create your IELTS study by yourself and have the professional check it and add a few ideas or you could ask them to create it for you.

Whether you take a full IELTS course or just check in with a professional every few weeks, you can’t do this by yourself.

When you select an IELTS professional, ask them the following questions:

  • How many students have you prepared for IELTS and what scores did they get?
  • What are your IELTS strategies and how do you know they work?
  • Can I speak with your former IELTS students?

There are many ESL teachers out there who say they can prepare you for IELTS but they don’t have the depth of knowledge that they need to help you get your target score.

Be careful when you make your choice!

#4) Don’t rely only on “tips and tricks”

Don’t make the mistake of believing that a simple “tip or trick” will help you get the score you need.

On our IELTS podcast we give you tons of “tips and tricks” but they are not meant to be your only practice.

They are meant to be a starting point or just a taste of the information that you need. You need to go deeper in your study plan.

When you create your study plan you need to include more substance where you are learning real strategies in a step-by-step manner and then practicing them in an intensive format.

If you rely entirely on free content such as quick tips and tricks then you will miss the in-depth practice and implementation of the strategies that you need.

Be smart when it comes to IELTS preparation.

Invest your time and money in your dream and you will see results but don’t try to take shortcuts tips and tricks.

Now get started!

If you follow the suggestions above you can create a great IELTS study plan which will give you the structure and daily actions that you need to get closer to your target score.

Remember, a daily study plan is not going to help you if you don’t use it!

Block off a specific time each day (2-3 hours for 30 days) to prepare for IELTS.

Put in the time, take the right actions, and use the right materials and you will get your target score.

What questions do you have about how to create an IELTS study plan?

Let us know in the comments below.

Today we’ll answer a question from a student. Michelle’s student asked: How do I know if “girlfriend” means platonic friend or romantic interest?

The first thing we want to consider is the context.

What do you know about the person who is speaking and what exactly are they saying about the person?

If someone says, “I bought my girlfriend flowers” then the person is probably talking about a romantic interest.

It also depends on the gender of the person who is saying it.

When a man says “my girlfriend” it is definitely a romantic interest.

If a man wants to talk about a friend who is a girl he would say “my friend.”

If a man wants to talk about his friend who is a guy he would say “my buddy” or “my friend.”

If a girl says “my girlfriend” then it might be platonic but it might also mean that the person is a romantic interest.

 

Here are some examples:

  • “I went with a few girlfriends to the beach over the weekend.” In this case the person is probably talking about platonic friends because the person has more than one girlfriend.
  • “I have a girlfriend who works for that company.” This is probably also a platonic friend because the person said “I have a girlfriend” because it implies that this is one out of many friends that the person has.
  • “I went to the movies with my girlfriend.” This one sounds like a romantic interest because the use of the word “my” makes it sound more exclusive and as if there is only one girlfriend.

What are your thoughts on today’s episode?

Let us know in the comments below!

Today you’ll get three solid steps to tackle IELTS Writing Task 2!

You’ll learn how to stay calm and get the best possible score on the IELTS Writing test when you are writing argument and opinion essays.

All Task 2 questions look the same. You might see this question: Many people today think that zoos are cruel to animals and should be closed. To what extent do you agree or disagree with this statement?

To answer this question it’s better to write an argument essay where you talk about both sides.

Why? If you write an opinion essay (one side only) it’s harder to write because you need to come up with more ideas and specific examples for one side. Therefore, answer every question as an argument essay (address both sides).

Where should you start?

Brainstorm the W questions:

  • Who
  • What
  • When
  • Where
  • Why

Write down everything you can think of to support both sides of the issue.

Write down examples and main ideas.

Learn more here about how to brainstorm for IELTS Writing.

Remember!

You must address everything that is asked in the essay question.

If the questions asks you to respond to both sides of the argument then you need to include both sides in order to get the highest possible score.

For that reason it’s best to always answer Task 2 questions as an argument essay, addressing both sides.

How to calm your nerves when you write the essay:

Before you write out your essay try to clear your mind and take three deep breaths.  Feel your feet on the floor. Next, start writing with a clear mind.

Steps to follow for IELTS Writing Task 2:

  • Step 1: Close your eyes and take 3 deep breaths
  • Step 2: Look at the test question. Give yourself a few minutes to understand it
  • Step 3: Take 3-5 minutes to brainstorm
  • Step 4: Write your essay

What questions do you have about IELTS Writing Task 2  and how to structure your essays?

Let us know in the comments below.

Today we have a guest on the show!

Scott from Scott’s English Success is here to give you his top 3 tips on how to pass the IELTS Exam.

Here are Scott’s top 3 tips:

  • Get to know the test: You need to know all four sections well. The more that you know, the easier it will be to anticipate what’s coming. You don’t want to be wasting time reading the instructions. You should already know the instructions by taking practice tests. There should be no surprises and nothing unfamiliar in terms of the format of the exam. Get familiar with all of the different question types on each test section. This can’t be done overnight. It takes time, effort, and energy. You need to plan ahead and give yourself the time you need to get to know the test well. This will save you money because it’s expensive to take this test.
  • Understand how you’ll be assessed: This is especially true for the IELTS Writing test. You need to know the four categories of assessment. They include:  Task Achievement, Grammar, Coherence and Cohesion, and Vocabulary. If you know that these are the things that the examiner is looking at then you can consider them when you write your essays. Use these guidelines to “begin with the end in mind.”
  •  Stick to an exam plan: The students who have a plan and stick to it always do better on the exam. You should have a plan for what you will do every day during your preparation time.  You also need solid strategies for each part of the exam. It’s important to use strategies so that you feel comfortable and oriented when you are in any part of the exam.

* Bonus tip! You need to have a large vocabulary. If you understand more words on the exam you won’t have to slow down to try to understand words as they come up on the IELTS Reading or the IELTS Listening test.

Don’t just learn the definitions of words. You need to know how to use the words and in what contexts. Practice them with a native speaking partner before your exam.

Spend a good chunk of your study time focusing on vocabulary for more confidence and speed on the exam.

Scott’s Bio:

Scott is the founder and creator of Scott’s English Success.

What are your thoughts on today’s episode?

Which tips will you implement into your IELTS study routine?

Let us know in the comments below!

Do you know how to talk about success in English like a native speaker?

Would you like to sound more natural when you talk about this topic?

In today’s episode we’ll show you how to do it and we’ll talk about what makes a person successful.

Here are the expressions from today:

  • “To stand out”: To draw focus to yourself. To be different in a way that draws attention or focus. Here is a sample sentence: “Successful people stand out in one way or another.”

 

  • “To keep up”: To try to be the same as everyone else, to stay at the same pace as everyone else. “People who succeed in the world don’t try to keep up with others. They only focus on competing with themselves.”

 

  • “To go above and beyond”: To do more than average. To do something more than most people do. “My friend goes above and beyond to please her customers.”

 

  • “To come out on top”: To succeed, to have a positive result if you are in some kind of competition.

 

 

https://www.allearsenglish.com/italkiAre you looking for a professional, native English teacher online?

Get a native English teacher online in seconds at italki.

Lindsay and Michelle recommend italki as our #1 English-learning solution online. Choose from more than 400 teachers to work on your business English or to pass your next big exam.

Get our special offer before it runs out! Go to italki and claim 10USD to go toward a FREE second English lesson at italki!

 

What do you think makes someone successful?

Leave us a message in the comments and use the vocabulary words from today.

Are you worried about anxiety on the IELTS Exam?

Are you afraid that you will become nervous and anxious on the IELTS Speaking test and the IELTS Writing test?

Maybe your mind will go blank during the Listening test and you won’t be able to focus on what you are hearing from the audio track?

Anxiety is a real problem for many IELTS students especially if you have already taken the exam and you didn’t get the score you needed.

Don’t worry! You don’t need to let it take over your exam.

The first step is being well prepared.

Preparation is your foundation.

You need to prepare with someone who knows the exam or with a high-quality course where you’ll learn the right strategies that will allow you to walk into the exam with confidence.

Today I will show you three things you can do to keep your anxiety under control and get the IELTS score you need.

Tip #1) Know where it is likely to occur

In order to prevent anxiety from throwing you off, you should know where on the test you are likely to start to feel anxious.

What parts of the test trigger your anxiety and why?

This is easier for people who have already taken the exam but if you work with a qualified IELTS professional, that person can help you anticipate anxiety-provoking test sections and help you learn what to do when anxiety comes up depending on where you are in the test.

For example, on the Reading test there are two situations that will probably provoke anxiety.

What should do in these situations?

  • Situation #1: You don’t understand every word you read.
    • IELTS doesn’t expect you to know every word. Don’t let one word distract you and throw you into anxiety. Keep moving forward with the passage.
  • Situation #2: You don’t have enough time to complete the full Reading test
    • Go back to the strategies that you should have learned during your IELTS preparation. You must have a solid strategy to complete the reading on time. This strategy will be a solid foundation and will give you a resource to turn to when you get anxious.

Tip #2) Notice when you are feeling anxious

The key to not letting any emotion or feeling take over is to recognize and acknowledge when you are feeling something. In this case, notice when anxiety occurs in your body.

Are your palms starting to sweat? Is your stomach nauseous?

Is your heart beating fast?

Don’t ignore this when you notice it.

It’s a natural way that your body is reacting to a big test where the stakes for you are high.

Accept the fact that you are feeling anxious so that you can start to move past it.

Take a few deep breaths. Feel your feet on the ground. Spend a few seconds coming into the present. Then move forward.

Tip #3) Use your anxiety to increase your score

This may be counter-intuitive but on some parts of the test you can use your anxiety as an opportunity to show your language resources such as vocabulary, flexibility, and fluency.

You can also show that you know how to use your sense of humor in English.

Let’s get more specific.

On the Speaking test, what should you do if your mind goes blank?

Instead of freezing, getting quiet, saying “um” and “uh” or letting your anxiety ruin your test, try articulating what is happening to the examiner.

Use an idiom or a native phrase to do it.

Use rhythm and feeling in your voice to increase your pronunciation score also.

You can say:

  • “I am sorry. My mind just went blank.” (great native idiom)
  • “Give me a second. It’s on the tip of my tongue.” (this means you almost have the answer)
  • “I am blanking on this topic right now. Let me see… (now tell a personal story if you can)

If you use advanced language like this with some feeling in your voice, you might be able to use the moment of anxiety to move your vocabulary and/or pronunciation scores from a 6 to a 7.

To get a 7 on vocabulary in the Speaking test you need to have phrases that natives actually use.

To get a 7 on pronunciation you should avoid sounding like a robot.

You should sound like a real human being with life in your voice.

Your voice should show some emotion.

A moment of anxiety is a great opportunity to do all of these things and increase your speaking score.

Here’s the key thing to remember

When you experience anxiety on the IELTS it doesn’t have to bring your score down. Don’t fear it. Know when it’s likely to occur.

Be well prepared so that you know exactly what to do.

Use it to increase your score.

Everyone experiences anxiety on the IELTS.

The candidates who know how to make use of it skillfully will be the ones who get the score they need.

What do you think about anxiety on the IELTS?

Have you experienced it before?

What happened and how did you react to it? What will you do differently next time?

Let us know in the comments below.

Do you use emojis and emoticons when you text in English?

Today we’ll talk about what messages emojis can send and what impression it can leave about you.

What can an emoji be useful for? If you are saying something that is harsh you can use them to soften your message.

Emoji “etiquette” might vary across cultures. If you have just moved to the US then you should hang back and observe. See what people send to you.

In the US emojis are good for:

  • Flirting/talking with someone you are dating
  • Speaking with friends

 

They are not good for:

  • Acquaintances
  • Bosses or managers
  • Colleagues that you are not close to

 

Do you use emojis? How do you use them? Who do you send them to?

Let us know in the comments below.

The best way to instantly increase your Speaking score on IELTS is to insert native idioms!

What idioms should you use?

It depends on the speaking topic!

Today we’ll show you seven great idioms that you can use when you get questions about work, career, and business.

The idioms that you are going to learn today can be used on both the Speaking test and the Writing test.

Question Speaking Part 1

Q: Do you work or are you a student?

A: I do the “daily grind” but my daily grind is a bit different. I don’t do the “old nine to five.” My day is a little bit different. I work from 6am to 10pm.

Here we used the following idioms:

  • “The daily grind”: Working hard, commuting, showing up at work, dealing with co-workers and bosses, repetitive work that you do every day
  • “The old nine to five” or “To have a nine to five”: A traditional schedule, working 8 hours per day
  • “To climb the corporate ladder” or “to work your way up the corporate ladder”: To move up in a large corporation

Question Speaking Part 3

Q: How has the working world changed in recent years?

A: My mom talks about having a “glass ceiling” in her career. She couldn’t break through it because she was a woman. I know it still exists today but I think more and more women are breaking the “glass ceiling.” They are finding their own ways “to bring home the bacon” and being the “breadwinner” of the family. Traditional roles are changing. It’s not like before where we only wanted to make ends meet. Now we are thinking more about building a business where we can make money into the future.

Here we used the following idioms:

  • “The glass ceiling”: The barrier that women can’t break through due to their gender. They can only go so high in their careers.
  • “To bring home the bacon”: To bring home money, to earn money for the family
  • “To be the breadwinner”: To be the one who supports the family, your money pays the rent
  • “To make ends meet”: To survive, to be able to pay all of the bills

What idioms have you used on the IELTS Speaking test?

Let us know in the comments below!

Today you will learn a very cool English phrase that will help you shorten your stories and will make you sound native and natural in English.

Here is the phrase that you can use:

  • “To make a long story short…”
  • “Long story short…”

Here are a few alternatives:

  • “I’ll give you the short version…”
  • “Basically what ended up happening was…”

 

Listen to the episode to hear how Lindsay and Michelle use these phrases!

This phrase would also be useful if you are taking the IELTS Speaking test.

When the time gets short towards the end of your answer in Speaking Part 1 or Speaking Part 2 you could throw this expression in at the end to bump up your speaking vocabulary score.

Learn more about how to increase your IELTS Speaking score here.

 

What other phrases do you know to shorten the story or conversation?

Share them in the comments section below.

Are you afraid that you are too shy to get a high score on the IELTS Speaking test?

A lot of our listeners feel being shy is going to hold them back from IELTS success.

Today we’ll show you what you can do if you have this problem.

One thing you can do is create a new character for yourself during the Speaking test.

You can imagine yourself as someone who is outgoing and gregarious.

Give yourself an English name.

Practice the Speaking test with your new character so that when you get into the Speaking test you will be someone else, not yourself. You will shift your mindset for the test.

Have fun with this technique.

3-step system to become more outgoing during the Speaking test:

  • Step 1: When you prepare by yourself, don’t worry about talking yet. During your preparation just write down 3-5 sentences to answer Speaking test questions. Use complete sentences. Add details. Answer the questions “who, what, when, where, why?”
  • Step 2: Read your answers out loud and practice saying them.
  •  Step 3: Practice answering the question without writing down the answer.

What questions do you have about the Speaking test?

What strategies have you been using? How are they working?

Let us know in the comments below.

What should you do when someone doesn’t understand your English on a conference call or in a business meeting?

Today we’ll give you four easy steps that you can take to explain your point without getting nervous or anxious.

What to do when people don’t understand you:

  • Step 1: Notice if you are feeling anxious. What is happening in your body?
  • Step 2: Go back to your breath- try to feel your feet on the floor. Feel your breath going in and out. Take just a few seconds to do this.
  • Step 3: Try to remember the main point that you wanted to communicate. What was the essential message? What do people have to understand? Do they need to take some action? Summarize this point in your own head first.
  •  Step 4: Now say the main point in a different way. Use these phrases to get started:
    • “What I meant to say was…”
    • “What I mean is…”
    • “The main point that I am trying to get across is…”
    • “Basically,….”

What other phrases do you know to get your point across?

Let us know in the comments!

IELTS Writing is a huge challenge for many students!

Are you worried about IELTS Writing Task 2? Do you know how to organize your paragraphs?

Today you’ll find out how to write an awesome body paragraph for Writing Task 2.

We’ll give you the formula, linking words, examples, and the steps that you need to follow to get a 7 or higher on this part of the IELTS Writing test.

Last week we talked about how write an introduction on Writing Task 2 and today we’ll talk about the body paragraph.

The best information in your essay should go into the body paragraph.

The introduction and conclusion should not contain any substantial information.

You’ll need two body paragraphs which describe two sides of the issue for an argument essay.

  • Sentence 1 (topic sentence): Basic summary of what you are going to talk about. Present the main idea of the paragraph. For example, “There are many reasons to support co-ed schools.” By using a broad sentence you leave it open to go into more detail
  • Sentence 2 (first reason): Give the reason for what you are saying in your topic sentence. Use a lot of linking words. For example, “Firstly, there is a lot to learn by going to school with the opposite gender.” Next you need to add more details to expand on that idea. You can use personal examples or fake research here. You do not need to use statistics that are actually real. You can make them up. Try to have 5-6 sentences.
  • At the end of the body paragraph you don’t have to summarize what you have said because you might run out of time to write the conclusion paragraph.

Stick to this structure, stay organized, and practice it many times before the exam.

Use a variety of topics when you practice.

This structure will become a habit for you and you will be able to increase your score on the IELTS Writing test.

What questions do you have about IELTS body paragraphs?

Let us know in the comments below.

How do you keep the English conversation moving after you have started the conversation?

After you have introduced yourself to the person and you have exchanged a few words, how do you keep it going if you want to connect with the person?

Do you feel like the conversation always ends abruptly?

The first thing you can do is avoid “yes/no” questions.

They will end the conversation if the person is shy.

To come up with great follow up questions you can ask:

(In this example we are at a Spanish language meetup)

  • Who: Who taught you Spanish?
  • What: What other languages do you know?
  • When: When did you start learning Spanish?
  • Where: Where did you hear about this meetup? Where do you live?
  • Why: Why did you decide to start learning Spanish?
  • How: How do you like this meetup? How often will you be coming to this meetup? How did you get here?

*** The “Why” question is useful because it gives you a lot of insight into the person’s motivations, intentions in life, and their general point of view on things.

This framework is great for social events and exams also!

If you are taking the IELTS Exam it’s important to learn how to extend your answers on the Speaking test to fill the amount of time.

Learn what to do if you run out of ideas on the IELTS Speaking test.

What challenges have you had when it comes to continuing English conversations?

Let us know in the comments below.

If you are taking the IELTS soon then you might ask yourself, “when should I start preparing for IELTS under test conditions?”

Great question!

There is a right and a wrong way to prepare for IELTS and today we’ll show you when to start mixing in test practice with your IELTS preparation.

Are you worried that you are spending a lot of time learning test strategies but not practicing them enough under real test conditions?

Here is what you need to do to create your IELTS study plan:

  • Step 1: Start by building your general fluency skills and test strategies for each section. Learn how to write the best possible essay for IELTS Writing Task 1 and Task 2. Build these skills slowly and step by step. Take the issue of timing out. Just build the skills. Don’t worry about test conditions.
  •  Step 2: After you have your IELTS strategies and your general fluency skills, then you can take those skills and practice them under real test conditions using IELTS practice tests.

Use this timeline:

  • If you have 30 days, give yourself 7-10 days of timing yourself using actual practice tests under test conditions. For the first 3 weeks you want to only learn the strategies and work on your general fluency skills.
  •  If you have 60 days, start the test prep under test conditions two weeks before the exam to work out timing issues and for the first 6 weeks you need to be working on the strategies and general fluency.

The best time ratio is 1/4 of your time is under test conditions and 3/4 of your time is spent learning strategies and building your general fluency.

Set up your study plan, be organized, keep working hard, and don’t panic!

If you are prepared and organized then you will be fine.

What questions do you have about today’s episode? Let us know in the comments below.

Sean Morgan English pronunciation

Today we have a guest on the show!

Sean Morgan is an English pronunciation specialist with an acting background.

He will give us three key English sounds that will make you sound like a native speaker.

 

Three key sounds to pronounce English more naturally:

  • “Er” sound: Think of a dog growling and try to repeat this sound. This sounds different in the British English or Australian English. This is one of the most important sounds in American English pronunciation.

 

  • Nasal “A” sound: This occurs in “land” or “pan”  or “band” or “and.” It sounds different in British English. The tone of this sound happens in the nasal cavity.

 

  • 5 long vowel sounds: Focus on these because they are super common.

 

Sean’s Bio:

Our guest today has been a teacher for over 9 years.

He is a songwriter and author.

Although our guest is certified to teach English as a foreign language, he credits his vocal and acting training for his ability to help people with pronunciation and accent reduction.  Through careful listening and reducing the English language to it’s most basic sounds, our guest is is able to identify student challenges and focus on the most important pronunciation issues.

Our guest today is Sean Morgan.

To work with Sean on italki go here and then search for Sean’s profile in the search bar.

Do you feel nervous about the IELTS Reading test especially when it comes to matching headings to paragraphs?

Today you’ll get the one-minute system for matching headings to paragraphs on the IELTS.

Last week we talked about Y/N/NG questions on the Reading test so check those out if you are confused about that.

Matching headings to paragraphs should not be hard if you have a good strategy and if you have spent a lot of time practicing your strategy.

Without a strategy you will struggle and you won’t get the score you need.

The main ideas come at the beginning and end of the paragraph.

At least 75% of the answers are in the beginning and the end of the paragraphs also.

Here is the strategy that you should follow for these question types:

  • Step 1: Skim the passage. Spend one minute doing this. Read the beginning and end of every paragraph.
  • Step 2: Go back to the headings. Underline key words (names, numbers, nouns that are important). Don’t over think this. There is not one right answer for key words. This is to help you focus.
  • Step 3: Next go to paragraph 1. Read the beginning. Read it in detail. Go back to the headings and try to match. Don’t think too much about meaning. You are matching vocabulary and parallel expressions. Do you see words in the paragraph that mean the same thing as the headings. If you can’t match from the beginning of the paragraph then try checking out the end of the paragraph. Try not to spend more than one minute on each heading.

Remember, it’s not enough just to know these steps. You must practice them and get comfortable with them. Find a great course or an IELTS professional to work with.

What questions do you have about this IELTS question type?

Let us know in the comments section below!

Maybe you need more than one way to say something in English.

You want to be able to express yourself more precisely.

Today you’ll learn about one tool that you can use to build a deeper and more sophisticated vocabulary.

The Kindle is a great way to improve your English vocabulary!

 

Here are three reasons you should use the Kindle:

  • It’s cost effective: It only costs about $100 to buy a Kindle and from there it’s very affordable or free to get hundreds of books on your Kindle.

 

  • It’s portable: You can use the Kindle on your way to work on the bus or on the train or even in the park. We don’t have time to attend a large class anymore. You need your learning to be mobile.

 

  • You’ll have access to different kinds of material: It’s not just for books. You can get the NY Times on your Kindle, blogs, or other publications.

 

** Special tip!

Be sure to use Vocabulary Builder if you get started with the Kindle.

 

 

 

Learn more about Chris:

SELF2

Chris Ternosky is an English teacher currently living Taiwan.

He is the founder of http://learnenglishwithchris.com/ where you can get tons of free information, and tips on improving your English.

Do you know how to write an awesome introduction for IELTS Writing Task 2?

Today we’ll show you exactly what you need to say for a great introduction for your Writing test.

The majority of IELTS questions are about opinions. You’ll get questions like: “Do you agree or disagree?” or “To what extent do you agree or disagree?”

Remember that an IELTS essay is not long. It is about 250 words. Four paragraphs are fine.

How to structure your introduction:

  • Your introduction should be 3-4 sentences
  • Sentence 1: The hook. This is what pulls in the reader. How do you hook the reader and get them excited to read the essay and to get them interested in the topic? You must mention the topic right away. Be careful of cultural differences in writing. With the hook you can give an interesting statistic and you can make it up. You don’t need to base it on real research because you don’t have access to the internet or any kind of research. If you can’t give a statistic then give a short general history of the topic such as ” the topic of libraries has been in the news a lot lately”
    • Give a statistic
    • Say something surprising
    • Give a short history of the topic
  • Sentence 2: Introduce the two opinions on the topic: “Some people are of the opinion that libraries will close in the near future; however, I disagree.”
  • Sentence 3: Thesis statement. Keep it short, simple, clear, and get to the point. “In this essay I will discuss both opinions” or “In this essay I will discuss why libraries will disappear.”

Remember, your specific examples come into the essay in the body paragraph so you don’t need them in the introduction.

What questions do you have about the writing an introduction to your essay on IELTS?

Ask your question in the comments below.

In today’s IELTS Energy episode you’ll find out what to do if you don’t understand what the examiner is asking in Speaking Part 1, 2, and 3.

It can be really scary if you don’t understand the question that the examiner gives you.

What should you do?

  • In Part 1: You probably don’t understand the question because of one word. Ask specifically what the word means. You can say:
    • “Sorry, what does “x” mean please?”
    • “Sorry I didn’t understand the word “x.” Could you please explain what it means?”
  • In Speaking Part 2: You can’t ask for a different topic. The examiner can’t switch to a new topic. Find the thing that you don’t understand. Is it a vocabulary word?
    • Use the same phrases as Part 1 to ask what the word means
    • “Can you give an example of “x”? – this is an efficient and smart way to understand the question.
    • If you don’t understand the whole question you can say “I apologize. I am not familiar with this topic. Can you explain the question?”
  • In Speaking Part 3: For Part 3 use the same methods as Part 2 and Part 1. Ask for a word definition, an explanation of the topic, or an example. Don’t be afraid to be honest and articulate the fact that you don’t understand. Use more formal questions:
    • “Can you clarify please?”
    • “I’ve honestly never heard of this topic/word. Can you give me an example?”

Remember, it’s ok to say it if you don’t understand a question. Don’t forget to smile. Keep it lighthearted

Have you ever been in an IELTS situation where didn’t understand the Speaking test questions? What did you do?

Let us know in the comments below.

A few years ago Michelle did ten interviews with celebrities in New York City.

She noticed that they all do 7 things when they communicate.

These things that they do make them effective communicators.

Do you do these 7 things when you communicate in English?

In today’s episode we will talk about what celebrities do right when they communicate.

Here is what celebrities do when they communicate:

  • They have great body language: They make great eye contact, they look confident, they sit up or stand up straight, they use gestures, they nod their heads to let you know that they are listening to you. All of these gestures make them command a sense of respect.
  • They have good volume:  They speak up! They speak loudly and with good intonation. This causes people to listen to them. They have a certain strength in their voice.
  • They are flexible during the conversation: They are able to move from one topic to the next depending on what people say. It’s important to be able to “pivot” into the next topic.
  • They listen well: You need to listen well to be able to be flexible in your conversation. Try to be present as much as possible in your everyday conversations.
  •  They support the listener verbally: They use feedback like “ugh huh” or “oh” or “I see” to show the other person that they are listening. This makes the person more interested in talking with them.
  • They include the other person in the conversation: They make the other person feel included. They ask the person follow up questions.
  • They share their own personal experiences and thoughts: It’s always more interesting when you tell a personal story if it’s relevant. Be sure to do it at the right time and make sure you read people’s body language while you tell the story so that you don’t cause people to lose interest.

Which of these communication skills do you have?

Which ones do you want to build?

Let us know in the comments below

Today we have a special guest on the show!

Simone Braverman from IELTS Blog will show you three IELTS tricks for a higher score! These tricks will show you how to do better on the IELTS Reading test, the IELTS Listening test and how to plan your study time.

Simone reminds us that you need to prepare for the exam and use the structure to your advantage.

This will help you reduce errors, save time, and get a better score.

How to get a higher IELTS score:

  • Tip #1: Use the IELTS structure to your advantage: On the Listening test at the end of section 1, instead of checking your answers when the recording tells you to do it, go straight to section 2 questions and start reading them. You will still have time to check your answers at the end because you’ll have ten minutes to transfer your answers. Understand the test structure and be strategic about how you use your time to get a higher score.
  • Tip #2: Do things in the right order to save time: On the Reading test, time management is a problem for a lot of people. The order in which you do things on the Reading test can save time. Many people say that matching headings takes a long time but if you do it by paragraph order, you can save time. Do it paragraph by paragraph. Don’t go in the order of headings. Go to paragraph 1, look at the list of headings, pick a suitable one. Next, do the same with paragraph 2. This way you won’t read a paragraph more than once. You will not be wasting time. The less you read, the more time you save!

Do you need a 7 or higher on your next IELTS Exam?

Do you know where to start when it comes to preparation?

Get our free IELTS Cheat Sheet now!

Click here to download the 7 Easy Steps to a 7 or Higher on IELTS

  • Tip #3: Find out what your weaknesses and strengths are: Everyone is different. Try to find out where you need to focus as soon as possible. You can do a practice test at home under real exam conditions. Do the Listening test without stopping the recording and do the Reading test within 60 minutes. When you finish, take a look at where you got stuck. Did you run out of speaking ideas? Was the problem time management on the Reading test? Don’t just continue doing practice tests and repeating the same mistakes. Once you know your weaknesses, go back and focus on building the right strategies.

Simone’s Bio:

Simone Braverman helps busy people whose English is far from perfect to score high in IELTS (higher than they ever expected) after a short preparation in their spare time – even if they scored low previously, have a learning disability, spend all their time at work or are afraid to death of exams.

Simone is the creator of a very popular IELTS website www.IELTS-Blog.com, which was launched in 2005 to become a great study partner for anyone preparing for the IELTS test.

You can find there a large collection of exam questions, test tips, techniques, strategies and preparation materials (books, courses, practice tests) to help you maximize your score.

In 2014 IELTS-Blog.com has won People’s Choice Award in the Best Australian Blogs Competition.

Simone has published four IELTS preparation books.

Her most popular book “Target Band 7”, written in easy English and available as an e-book and in print, attracted over a hundred positive reviews on Amazon.com and helped thousands of test takers achieve great results in IELTS.

Her newest book series “IELTS Success Formula” will teach you all you need to know to get Band 8+ in IELTS.

Meetup is a great way to get an opportunity to connect with people and to practice your English!

If you are living in the US or even in your home country and you want to have a chance to make friends and speak English, sign on to Meetup.com and search for meetups according to your interests.

What questions can you ask to start a conversation with someone at a meetup?

 

Here are a few ideas to start a conversation:

  • “Is this your first meetup?” (this is a great icebreaker that can be used to help people loosen up and connect)
  • “How did you find out about this meetup?”
  • “What other meetups are you a part of”

 

How to invite someone to meet again:

  • “Hey we should hang out sometime.”
  • “Let’s get together and (go hiking) or (practice our Spanish).”
  • “Can I get your number? Maybe we can meet up sometime.”

 

https://www.allearsenglish.com/italkiAre you looking for a professional, native English teacher online?

Get a native English teacher online in seconds at italki.

Lindsay and Michelle recommend italki as our #1 English-learning solution online. Choose from more than 400 teachers to work on your business English or to pass your next big exam.

Get our special offer before it runs out! Go to italki and claim 10USD to go toward a FREE second English lesson at italki!

 

Have you been to a meetup yet?

What was your experience like?

What phrases did you use to start the conversation?

Let us know in the comments below!

We want you to ACE the IELTS Listening test!

Today you’ll get some great IELTS Listening resources that you can use to improve your overall confidence and general fluency for the test.

These resources will also help you always have something to say on the Speaking test because you will never run out of ideas.

Today you are going to learn how you can understand native English on TV and in the movies and we’ll give you some great resources to push up your listening skills before the IELTS.

What resources are you currently using to improve your listening?

Do you get frustrated if you don’t understand everything when you watch a movie or TV?

You don’t need to understand everything for the IELTS.

You aren’t expected to have the level of a native speaker.

Don’t forget to use closed captioning if you are watching a You Tube video to get the words.

Here are some fun resources to improve your overall listening skills. These resources also come with transcripts.

Resource #1) CNN

Go to video at the top menu bar.

Click on a video and hit the CC (closed captioning) button. Choose something that’s short and quick.

Resource #2) NPR

Click on “listen” and click on “Morning Edition” and you can get transcripts.

Resource #3) TED Talks

What other great IELTS Listening resources do you know?

Please share them in the comments below!

Today is a Deep Thoughts Thursday. Here it today’s quote:

“Life is like photography. You need the negatives to develop.”

This quote has two meanings:

  • Meaning 1: In life you need hard times to develop your character and strength.
  • Meaning 2: In photography you need the negatives (photographs before they are developed) to bring the material into a full photo.

 

Sometimes life throws us hard stuff.

We hit the bottom but we have to push and keep moving forward.

What can you do when you hit one of these moments life or in your English learning?

  • Expect the down moments to happen
  • Stay centered
  • Push through them but be kind to yourself
  • Get a support system
  • Join a meetup and meet people, build community
  • Know that it will pass

 

What do you do when you the negative times in life?

Who do you turn to?

How do you get out of those moments?

Learning with bite-sized English chunks

Today we have a guest on the show!

Vanessa from Speak English with Vanessa will show you how you can still learn English even if your life is super busy using “bite-sized chunks.”

 

Are you too busy to sit down in a traditional classroom?

There are plenty of things that you can do if you don’t have time for an English class.

Here are Vanessa’s suggestions:

  • Decide what is sustainable for you: How much time do you have each day? What amount of time can you dedicate every single day? Make sure you don’t overdose on learning one day. Instead, be consistent with your specific amount of time each day. This is especially important if you have an exam coming up such as the IELTS Exam.
  • Choose the same time every day to learn English: This will create a habit. Once it has become a habit you no longer have to decide if you are going to do it. If it’s a habit you will be more likely to continue with it. This will also help you prevent procrastination. You will take action every single day.
  • Try not to miss two days in a row: If you do this it’s hard to get back into the habit. It’s ok to miss one day but if you miss two then you need to make a conscious effort to re-start the habit.

 

Vanessa’s Bio:

 

Vanessa Prothe is a TESOL certified teacher who has been teaching English for the past 5 years in 3 different countries: the US, France, and South Korea. In 2014 she started teaching English online on her website www.speakenglishwithvanessa.com.
In her latest course “30 Days of English,” English learners can improve their conversational English with daily 5 minute video lessons.
She invites you to join her free 30 minute conversation training on June 26th at 8PM EST.

When it comes to IELTS Listening and IELTS Reading you need to know what details matter when you fill out your answer sheets.

Does it matter if you capitalize your letters?

Does spelling matter?

What about punctuation?

Find out today!

So what matters when you write your answers on the answer sheet?

Only two things matter and they are:

1) Having the correct word

2) Spelling

3) Clear handwriting

You don’t need to worry about:

1) Spacing

2) Hyphens

Remember to focus on Connection NOT Perfection when you prepare for the IELTS.

Don’t worry about the little details like tiny grammar points that won’t change your score.

You can’t bring your old English-learning mentality into your IELTS preparation.

You need to remember that your score is an average.

Focus on what matters most!

What questions do you have about IELTS Listening or IELTS Reading?

Let us know in the comments section below!

In today’s episode you’ll find out how to talk about your accomplishments in English without sounding rude, snobby, or tacky.

It’s important to be able to talk about the great things that you have done but there is a “fine line” between being proud of what you have done and sounding snobby or “full of yourself.”

Three ways to talk about your accomplishments:

1) Link it back to the other person with a question:

  • Michelle: “Lindsay what have you accomplished lately?”
  • Lindsay: “I hiked across Spain in 2010. Do you like to hike? Are you a hiker?”

In this case I mentioned the accomplishment but I quickly turned it around and made it into a conversation by asking the person if she liked to participate in that same activity.

2) Emphasize the other people that helped make it happen

  • Lindsay: “Michelle, what have you done in the past five years?”
  • Michelle: “I moved to New York by myself but I was lucky because my friends were really supportive. I couldn’t have done it on my own.”

In this case Michelle acknowledged what she did but she also talked about the people that helped her and the role that they played.

3) Be casual and humble when you mention the accomplishment

  • Lindsay: “Michelle guess what? Did you know that our podcast got nominated for an award?”
  • Michelle: “Oh that’s great. Congratulations!”

You can start a statement like this with “Guess what?” or “by the way” or “oh I meant to tell you.” The idea is to insert it casually and without focusing too much on it.

What should you avoid when you talk about your accomplishments:

  • Don’t downplay your accomplishment: Don’t say “Oh it’s no big deal.” It’s annoying when you do this. Be proud of what you have done but use the techniques that we mentioned above.

Is it ok to talk about your accomplishments in your home culture?

Let us know in the comment section below!

Today let’s talk about our IELTS Reading test strategy.

On this Reading test you need three skills.

These are skills that you already know how to do.

You just need to transfer them into the test and then you need to spend time practicing and getting familiar with how to use them on the test.

Skill 1: Skim

When you skim you get the main idea or the “gist” of the passage. You might skim a newspaper article to get the basic idea.

Skill 2: Scan

You look for specific information. You might do this when you look for information on a website or if you are looking at a movie schedule in the newspaper.

Skill 3: Reading for detail

When you read for detail you are reading slowly. You read every word. You would do this when you read a novel, textbook, or comic book. You do this after you scan and find the key word and then you start reading for detail to find the answer.

Remember, it’s not enough just to know that these are the 3 steps. You must know how to use them on the test and you must spend your time practicing these 3 skills. We show you how to do this in our 3 Keys IELTS Success System course.

Do you have any questions about the Reading test?

Please let us know in the comments below.

Do you use curse words in English?

Do you use them in your native language?

Today Michelle and Lindsay will talk about using curse words, what it says about you, and how it might bring you closer to the people around you.

These days it’s not as shocking as it used to be to use curse words.

We hear curse words in the media much more than we used to.

Has this also happened in your culture?

Ashely Fern wrote an article in Elite Daily where she talked about why cursing can be good for you. Here are our favorites from the article:

  • It makes you feel less pain: When you stub your toe and let out that curse word, scientists think you can feel less pain
  • It can make you feel stronger: Do you agree?
  • It is a coping mechanism: It makes it easier for you to deal with things that are hard that are going on in your life.
  • It helps create close bonds with other people: Cursing sometimes create a subculture and it could make you feel like you are part of an in-group.

What is it like to curse in your culture? Is it frowned upon?

Is it encouraged or discouraged? Is it okay to curse in your culture?

Has this changed in your culture in the same way that it has changed in US culture?

Let us know in the comments.

In today’s episode you’ll learn how to not “drop the ball” on the IELTS Speaking test and how to answer common Speaking questions about sports using idioms.

In IELTS Speaking Part 1 and Part 2 there are often questions about hobbies, sports, exercises or staying in shape.

In these questions you need to use idioms and phrasal verbs. When you use idioms your vocabulary score will go up instantly.

Listen to today’s episode to learn more.

Here are some typical speaking questions:

  • What do you like to do in your free time?
  • How do you stay in shape? How do you keep fit?
  • Do you play sports? Did you play sports as a child?

Example 1 idioms:

To be a team player= someone who plays well on a team with other people

  • Question: How do you stay in shape? How do you keep fit?
  • Answer: I play tennis. I like to play tennis to stay fit. I am a team player when it comes to tennis and that’s why I played on a tennis team. In high school I was the MVP (Most Valuable Player) of my high school tennis team.

Example 2 idioms:

To drop the ball= to not do something you are supposed to do

To be down for the count= to be in trouble, to be held down for an extended period of time

To be the underdog= to be the weakest competitor that everyone expects will lose

  • Question: Do you play any sports in your free time?
  • Answer: I have been a soccer player my whole life. I played soccer for ten years straight and then I dropped the ball. I didn’t play for a decade then I started playing again. Now that I am playing again, I miss 1 in 20 shots.

Today you’ve learned some new idioms and how to use them on the Speaking test when you get a question about sports.

Try to use these same idioms when it comes to other Speaking test questions too.

Let us know in the comments if you have a question about the Speaking test.

Do you get nervous on the IELTS Speaking test and the IELTS Writing test?

When you get nervous it’s easy to spiral downward with anxiety and to lose your ability to think clearly.

Today we’ll show you how to keep it light and easy on these two sections of the test.

How can you reduce anxiety on the Speaking test?

  • Make a light joke: You can do this as long as the joke is relevant and well-placed. Don’t tell a random knock-knock joke.  It can be good to poke fun at yourself sometimes and it will show the examiner that you are flexible and have real communication skills.
  • If you stutter or get stuck, acknowledge it: Say something like “Oh my gosh that was really hard. I am sorry I stumbled there. I am just a bit nervous.” You need to be willing to articulate what’s going on with you. It’s ok to acknowledge that you’re embarrassed. It will help your vocabulary score and it will also increase your fluency score.
  • Tell a funny story about yourself: This can be done in Speaking Part 2, as an example in Speaking Part 3 or on Writing Task 2. It’s important to use personal examples from your own life in Writing Task 2 because you don’t have access to examples and research.

Remember, you are not graded on your ideas on IELTS Speaking or Writing.

You are graded on your English so when you stumble or when you run out of ideas, you have an opportunity to show your fluency.

You have a chance to articulate what is happening with high-level vocabulary.

The examiner doesn’t care how much you know.

They care how well you communicate in English.

Do you have questions about today’s topic?

Let us know in the comments below

Are you using certain English words in your emails that make you sound weak or not confident?

Find out the 5 words that you should eliminate from your English emails today.

Lily Herman posted an article on The Muse with these 5 words that make you sound less confident when you use them in an email.

Let’s review them today.

The 5 Words to Eliminate:

 

  • “Just”: Don’t start an email and say “Just checking in” or “I just wanted to say hi.” If you add “just” it takes away from what you are saying. It sounds less confident and less direct. You make it sound like you think you are bothering someone.

 

  • “Hopefully”: This sounds like you don’t have any firm expectations or that you aren’t committing to anything. This indicates that you aren’t reliable and that people can’t count on you.

 

  • “Actually”: This has become a filler word. It can be kind of annoying. It often doesn’t communicate much. It can sound redundant and not necessary.

 

  • “Kind of”: This makes you sound hesitant.

 

  • “Sorry”: This is important to use in many situations and when you have done something wrong you must say it but don’t overuse the word. When you don’t need to apologize for something you don’t need to say “sorry.” This could make you sound weak in business.

 

What do you think?

Let us know your thoughts in the comments below.

Your vocabulary problems may be coming to an end.

Today you’ll learn about a cool technology tool called Anki and you’ll find out how you can use it to get a deeper, more sophisticated vocabulary.

Anki is a flashcard system that helps you review the same words over and over again.

Anki uses the spacing effect. It improves learning because it spaces out the time between your review sessions. If you review something too soon you are wasting your time.

The system tracks how well we know a card and the card is put into a large equation.

The problem with learning vocabulary is that the new words are hard to remember.

With Anki you can continue to review the new words. Now Anki is available on your Smartphone so you can take your Anki words with you anywhere.

There is no need to be chained to your desk.

This tool could end your problems with vocabulary.

Check it out today!

This tool can also be used if you are preparing for IELTS. You can build a set of vocabulary words based on common Speaking test topics and Writing test topics.

 

Trip’s Bio:

TheCardists_Trip_photo

Trip was born and grew up in New York City. He moved to Zurich in 1993 and for the last 18 years has taught at The Cambridge Institute, a school which he considers the premier center for learning English in Switzerland. Trip is also an oral examiner for Cambridge University Exams and a free-lance journalist.

This year Trip co-founded ‘The Cardists,’ a company which specializes in bringing the power of modern, computer-based flashcard learning to schools, corporations and individual students. For more information, visit his website thecardists.com or email him at Trip@thecardists.com.

If you want to get a 7 or higher you need to use idioms and native expressions on the IELTS Speaking test!

If you use the idioms in today’s episode on the IELTS Speaking test your examiner will immediately consider a score of 7 for your vocabulary score.

This may move your overall speaking score from a 6 to a 7.

A student with a score of a 6 will not use these native idioms.

These idioms are the extra edge that you need on the Speaking test.

Here are the tech idioms for today:

  • “Bells and whistles”: “I just bought a new phone and it has all of the bells and whistles.”  This means that something has all of the additional pieces and add-ons. You can use this to respond to a question in Speaking Part 2 such as “Describe a piece of electronic equipment that you find useful.”
  • “A hack,” “A life hack”: A shortcut, something that makes it easier to accomplish a goal. Listening to podcasts are a great life hack because you can shorten your learning time and learn on the go!
  • “It’s not rocket science”: This means that something is not as hard as most people think. “A lot of people think that making a website is hard but it’s not rocket science.”
  • “You don’t have to reinvent the wheel”: When there is a process already in place to achieve a goal you don’t need to create a new process. You can just follow the process.

More questions to practice on your own:

  • Speaking Part 2 question: “Describe a piece of electronic equipment that you no longer find useful.”
  • Speaking Part 3 question: “Do you think all new homes will be equipped with household machines in the future?”

Please answer and practice these questions at home using the idioms above.

Remember, these idioms are what you need to move your score from a 6 to a 7.

What questions do you have about these idioms or about the Speaking test?

Let us know in the comments below.

Are you stressed about the IELTS Speaking test?

Are you worried that you are going to panic?

Are you afraid that you will forget everything you learned in your IELTS preparation?

Are you afraid that you won’t know the answer?

We understand how you feel so today in today’s post we’ll give you three key things that you need to know about the IELTS Speaking test to get the score you need.

Check them out below!

#1) You must use phrasal verbs to impress the examiner

One of the most efficient and smart ways to increase your Speaking score is to use native-like vocabulary including phrasal verbs, idioms, and expressions.

When you prepare for IELTS get a list of the common Speaking test topics and learn a few phrasal verbs for each topic.

You don’t need to memorize a random list of phrasal verbs. Make sure they are related to test topics.

Next, practice those phrasal verbs in everyday conversations with native speakers.

Also, practice them when you do your Speaking test practice with your IELTS professional teacher or coach.

You need to interact with these phrasal verbs in many ways and many times before the test.

Practice writing in your journal and use them in your writing.

Notice them in the material that you read.

Give yourself plenty of time to learn a group of phrasal verbs for each topic and by the time you get to the test you will be ready to use them in your answers. You can also try using Anki to learn new IELTS vocabulary.

If you use phrasal verbs you will get a 7 or higher on the vocabulary section of your Speaking test.

Learn more about how to use phrasal verbs on the Speaking test here!

#2) You DON’T need to speak fast

Many IELTS student think that you need to speak fast to get a higher score on IELTS Speaking.

It’s a myth!

If you speak fast and the examiner can’t understand you or if you speak fast and make a lot of mistakes you won’t get the score you need.

Instead, you need to slow down and use intonation in your voice.

Put some feeling behind your words.

This will push your fluency score up and your pronunciation score.

It’s more important to speak clearly and with confidence than it is to speak fast.

This is also true for everyday English fluency but it’s especially important on the IELTS.

Click here to learn more about how to use your intonation on the Speaking test.

Get our step-by-step IELTS Cheat Sheet.

Download the “7 Easy Steps to a 7 or Higher on IELTS” now!

Click here to get it for free

#3) You don’t always have to know “the answer” on the Speaking test

Everyone’s biggest fear is that they will get into the Speaking test and they’ll get an unfamiliar question.

Are you worried about that happening to you?

What should you do if you the examiner asks you a question and you don’t know the answer?

The most important thing to remember is that you are not graded on your ideas on IELTS.

You are graded on your ability to articulate your ideas and communicate in English.

If you don’t have the answer to a question there are two things you can do:

  • You can make something up- it is totally ok to make up a fake answer. Again, no one is going to go and check your facts. This is not a history test or a test about your factual knowledge. If you make something up and you communicate your message well, you can easily get a 7 or higher. This is much better than freezing up if you don’t know the answer and saying nothing. Also remember that you can’t ask the examiner to give you a different question. You have to answer the question that you are given.
  • You can say that it’s a tough question- buy yourself some time by saying “wow, that’s a tough question” then try to share anything in your personal experience that’s related to the question topic. It’s always easier to share personal stories than to share boring facts. You can increase your vocabulary score by articulating the fact that it is a hard question. You can also use an idiom to increase your vocabulary score such as “my mind just went blank.”

Click here to learn more about what to do if you don’t know the answer on the Speaking test.

What questions do you have about the IELTS Speaking test?

Let us know in the comments below!

Today find out how to casually and easily schedule plans in English with someone.

We’ll help you drop that formal English that you learned in school.

Today you’ll get the phrases and terms that you need to connect with someone and spend time with them.

Phrases to ask someone to spend time together:

  • “When are you free?” This is more direct than saying, “Would you like to hang out?” or “Would you like to meet up?” or “Are you free on the (date)?”
  •  “When is good for you”? This is similar to saying “When are you free?”
  •  “How about the (date)?” or you could say “cCan we do (date)”?
  •  “That’s no good for me” or “That doesn’t work for me”
  •  “Does the (date) work?” or “Is the (date) ok for you?”

Have you used any of these phrases to schedule plans with someone?

Let us know which phrases you have used!

Leave us a comment below.

Are you feeling overwhelmed with your IELTS preparation? Not sure how you can fit it all in if you have a family, a full-time job, and other obligations?

It can be a huge challenge to prepare for the IELTS if you are already have a busy life.

Today we’ll show you how to make it all work to get that 7 that you need.

Here are some key tips on how to prepare for IELTS:

  • Figure out your priorities: If you only have two months, are you willing to sacrifice an hour of sleep to get up a few hours early? Are you willing to give up your TV programs to spend that time studying? Focus on the “why.” Why are you taking the IELTS? What do you want to do when you get your target score? Thinking about your “why” and your bigger vision will get you out of bed early in the morning.
  • Seat deadlines and mini deadlines: You need to register for your exam before you start studying. Also, sit down and look at how many days you have to prepare. Break down the whole test and set deadlines for specific parts of the test. What will you be able to do and by when? For example, by March 15th I will be able to complete all Writing tasks within the allotted time.
  • Don’t waste your time doing the wrong things: You must work with an IELTS course or an IELTS professional who can tell you exactly what to do with the small amount of time that you have. Make the right choice when it comes to choosing who to work with. If you choose to work with an individual IELTS tutor then ask them about the scores of their previous students.
  • Don’t be too tough on yourself: It’s ok if you have a bad day. You can take a day off. But don’t take more than a few days off. Get back to it quickly.
  • Don’t spend too much time thinking about how stressed you are: This is a waste of time. Structure your schedule and get a study plan. Use that time to get to work. Be in control of your time. Be positive.

What did you think of today’s episode?

Are you feeling overwhelmed about the exam?

Let us know in the comments below.

Do you know how to catch the attention of your audience right from the beginning of your presentation in English?

Today we’ll show you how to do it and we’ll give you the phrases you need.

In order to give a great presentation you need to start strong.

You don’t want your audience to “zone out” and get bored.

You want their attention on you.

Here are 3 tips on how to open strong:

  • Start by asking a question: You can say “I’d like to start today with a question (for you)” or “Let me ask you a question.” It can useful to use these openers to frame the question and to get the audience prepared and to make them curious about what you are going to ask. Or you could say “To start off, I’d like to take a poll.”
  • Start by telling a story or anecdote: You can just jump into the story or frame the story by saying, “Let me tell you a story about…” or “Here’s a quick story…” Pay attention to intonation when you deliver these phrases to build the anticipation. You can also say, “I’d like to open with a personal anecdote.”
  • Start by shocking them: Surprise your audience. Michelle tried this in a graduate school class by opening her presentation by using curse words and swearing in front of the class. People didn’t expect her to use these words so she had their full attention for the rest of the presentation.

Have you used these tactics to open a presentation or a speech in English?

Let us know in the comments below and ask us your questions!

Do you struggle with the IELTS reading test especially when it comes to T/F/NG and Y/N/NG questions?

Today we will give you a simple tactic to get it right and get that 7 you need in IELTS reading.

Top tips for this type of question:

  • Pay attention to whether they are asking you for T/F/NG or Y/N/NG. Don’t get too comfortable to the point that you aren’t paying attention to instructions.
  •  These questions are more straightforward than they appear.
  •  For the True (T) answer it means that the statement matches or agrees with the passage.
  • The most difficult thing is telling the difference between False (F) and Not Given (NG). The difference is clear cut but you need to make sure you practice a lot.
  • Here’s a trick- set it up like a cartoon- one cartoon character is the question statement and one cartoon character is the passage. They are talking to each other. If they agree with each other then the answer is Yes or True and if they disagree then the answer is No or Not Given. Draw two stick figures and write the questions and answers next to each other so that you can see if they agree with each other.
  •  When you look at these questions, first look at key words. Key words are names, negatives, numbers, and other words that contain important information. Now try to picture the statement and the passage trying to have a conversation and see if they agree. If they agree then your answer is Yes or True. If they don’t agree then your answer is No or False.

What questions do you have about the IELTS Reading test and this strategy?

Let us know in the comments below.

Having too much time on your hands can be a luxury but can it take you further away from your goals?

John F. Kennedy say, “We must use time as a tool not as a couch.”

If we have extra time we have to use it to do something and not waste it.

Parkinson’s Law says: The work that we have to do will expand to fit the allotted time.

This is extremely important to keep in mind if you are preparing for an exam like the IELTS Exam.

If we don’t approach our work with a sense of urgency then we will never get our work done.

Here’s an expression for today:

To pull an all-nighter: This means to stay up all night to get work done. A lot of people do this in college.

 What can you do?

  • 1- set deadlines
  • 2- get an accountability partner- get a support system. Set goals with this person and tell them each day whether or not you have achieved your goal.

 

What do you think?

Do you struggle with maximizing your time?

What is your strategy to get over this problem? Let us know in the comments below.

In today’s episode we’ll give you sixteen synonyms to get a 7 on your IELTS.

We’ll also show you how to come up with your own synonyms for a stronger score on the Speaking test and the Writing test.

If you want to get a 7 or higher on IELTS you must have interesting vocabulary that is a mixture between academic, formal, high-level and casual idioms.

Are you worried that you can’t think of any synonyms or that your vocabulary is limited?

You may know only one word to describe something.

Now it’s time to expand your vocabulary to think about more than one way to say things.

Strategies Created by a Former IELTS Examiner

3 Keys IELTS Online Course logo

100% Score Increase Guarantee with our Insider Method

Are you ready to move past IELTS and move forward with your life vision?

Find out why our strategies are the most powerful in the IELTS world.

When you use our Insider Method you avoid the BIGGEST MISTAKES that most students make on IELTS.

Click here to get a score increase on IELTS. It’s 100% guaranteed.

Synonyms:

Word #1: Buy

Synonyms (casual): To grab something quickly, to get a good deal, to get a good bargain, to pick something up

Synonyms (formal): Purchase, acquire, consume (this is better for larger economic trends= great for Writing Task 1)

Word #2: Global warming

Synonyms: Environmental issues, harmful pollution, greenhouse effect, ecological degradation

Word #3: Travel

Synonyms: Explore, go on an adventure, take an adventure, go on an excursion, get away, wander, mosey

How can you come up with your own synonyms?

Take the main word and create two boxes, one is specific and one is general. Fill those boxes with new words.

Go to thesaurus.com and type in your main word.

Check out all of the synonyms that they give you.

The words that are dark orange are direct synonyms.

Lighter orange words are more indirect synonyms.

You can get between 5 and 20 synonyms for any word you type in. It’s also linked to dictionary.com.

Takeaway:

If you want to do well on IELTS then you do need to use synonyms. Don’t try to memorize too many synonyms.

It’s important to not only know them but also be able to use them in many situations.

If you choose only a few of them to learn then you will be able to use them correctly.

Choose two synonyms for each word and put them in your IELTS vocabulary notebook.

Today we are going to do an experiment to create a culture of thinking so that you can get that 7 on your IELTS Exam!

We will look at a NY Times Sunday edition and we’ll pick out some articles to find out how we could bring in those topics on IELTS test day.

Article #1: The Frugal Traveler: High End Paris for 1/10th the Price

Reading this article could help you in many ways on the IELTS Exam. You could highlight it as a trend or you could discuss it if you get any speaking questions on travel. This would also help you on the Listening test. You may hear a conversation between two people taking a trip. You’ll get the vocabulary that you need. It will help you build your brain box on the topic of travel.

Article #2: Discovering Ara-Yaki, a Japanese Dish

This article would help you on the Speaking test if you got a question about food.

Article #3: Listen! The Ethicist’s Weekly Podcast

This is a Q and A article. People write in and email in questions. How could this article help you on the IELTS? On the Speaking test or Writing test it would be great to be able to refer to this podcast and some of the ideas in it.

These articles are just a few examples but you need to remember that we want to create a “culture of thinking” in our own minds where ideas are always coming in and going out.

New concepts are always bubbling in our mind and we will never go blank on the Speaking test.

Get started by subscribing to the NY Times today or subscribe to a few podcasts.

TheCardists_Trip_photo

What are the Cambridge Advanced Exams?

Who should take these exams?

Why should someone take these exams?

Today we have Trip on the show who is an oral examiner for Cambridge University Exams and he’ll show you how to prepare for these exams.

Who should take the Cambridge Advanced Exams?

These exams are designed around specific levels. You can set a goal to pass a specific level and you either pass or you fail. In contrast, the IELTS gives you a band score.

These exams are also more common for business professionals and the IELTS is more common for academic goals or immigration.

 

How to Prepare for the Higher Level Exams:

At the high levels, the teachers can no longer teach you.

Trip says that grammar is not a good thing to focus on.

You have to know what’s on the test.

To pass the higher level exam you have to read.

You should get the language flowing through you. It’s better to read more of what is easy for you.

Trip says that it’s important to memorize at this level. You need to get to know the tricky parts of the language naturally. You need to be able to pull out those skills during the exam.

 

3 Tips on How to Pass the Exam:

1) Read as much as possible: English becomes more nuanced as we get into the higher levels. If you read more you will have the language “flowing through you more often” and you will get confident faster.

2) Take a preparation course: It may be hard to study for this exam alone. It’s a great idea to attend a school where you are in the company of other people taking the exam and you feel like you are not doing it alone.

3) Take practice tests but not too many: Don’t make the mistake of taking too many practice tests. Doing practice tests teaches you the format of the exam but it does not teach you English and you have to know English.

 

Trip’s Bio:

Trip was born and grew up in New York City. He moved to Zurich in 1993 and for the last 18 years has taught at The Cambridge Institute, a school which he considers the premier center for learning English in Switzerland. Trip is also an oral examiner for Cambridge University Exams and a free-lance journalist.

This year Trip co-founded ‘The Cardists,’ a company which specializes in bringing the power of modern, computer-based flashcard learning to schools, corporations and individual students. For more information, visit his website thecardists.com or email him at Trip@thecardists.com.

IELTS test takers make a lot of mistakes that make it hard for them to achieve their target score.

These mistakes cause them to get stuck at a band score of 6 when they need a 7.

In today’s episode we will talk about the mistakes and how you can make sure that you don’t make these mistakes yourself.

By the way, if you searched for “ILETS” or “ILTS” to find this page, remember that it’s IELTS (International English Language Testing System).

Now learn about the most common mistakes below!

 

 

Mistake #1) They don’t take the time to understand the exam

 

  • Research the exam: Many people, even general English teachers call it “ILETS” or “ILTS” but it’s “IELTS” and it is administered in most countries around the world. Learn about the exam here and find out where you can book your test. You need to book your exam date well in advance because test centers fill up quickly.
  • Know what to expect on test day: The test day usually looks like this: Listening comes first, then Reading and Writing tests are given. In the afternoon you do your Speaking test. The time between your Writing test and your Speaking test could be one hour or it could be 4 hours and you won’t know until you arrive on test day. You need to have a plan for how to fill that time. Knowing what to expect helps build confidence for exam day.

 

 

Mistake #2) They don’t learn solid strategies that work

 

  • Learn the strategies: There is no magic piece of advice or magic idea that is going to get you to your target score. The only way to increase your IELTS score is to learn simple but powerful strategies that actually work. Make sure you ask your teacher how many of his/her students have achieved their target score before you use his or her strategies. The strategies should provide a system that you can use for each part of the test. They should be a foundation to fall back on. They will help anchor you and will keep your mind clear so that you don’t get taken over by anxiety. Strategies will also help you manage your time well on the IELTS Reading test and the IELTS Writing test.

 

  • After you have the strategies, put in your practice time: This is a difficult test. You cannot just learn strategies in a few minutes and expect to be able to apply them on the exam to increase your score. You need to learn the strategies and then put them into practice. You must do practice exercises and practice tests with these new strategies until you find that your score is increasing. There are no shortcuts on this exam. Do the work if you want to see a score increase. Read more here

 

 

Mistake #3) They don’t get balanced practice

 

  • Get a study plan that includes test prep and general fluency building: Most students either do only test practice and don’t improve their general fluency or they do only general fluency and they don’t learn strategies or do test practice. You need to do both.

 

  • Write out your study plan: Create a chart that details exactly what you will do each day. The activities should be a balance of test practice and general fluency building and should also include enough time to give your mind a rest. If you have 30-60 days to prepare you should expect to spend at 2-3 hours per day, six days per week preparing for the exam.

 

Click on the link below to download our free IELTS Cheat Sheet.

This will give you the exact 7 steps that you need to follow to get on the right path for a 7 or higher.

Click here to get 7 Easy Steps to a 7 or Higher

 

 

Mistake #4) They don’t plan their prep time well

 

  • Schedule a deadline: At the time that you get serious about the IELTS, choose a course, and start studying, you also need to set a test date. Why? Deadlines apply pressure that will motivate you to study every day. If you don’t set a test date then you won’t take your commitment seriously. You won’t put in the time that you need.

 

  • Leave enough time to prepare: You must leave at least thirty days to prepare for your IELTS exam. Thirty days is fine if you are already very advanced in your English level. If you are not advanced and you need to get a 7 or higher then you need to leave at least 3 months to prepare. The best thing you can do is spend a year and the first half of the year is spent focusing on general fluency and then later in the year you can focus on test strategy.

 

 

Mistake #5) They don’t work with a real IELTS professional

 

  • Ask about the teacher’s experience and student results: There are many English teachers out there who say they can help you with IELTS but they can’t. When you prepare for IELTS you cannot work with a general conversation teacher. A general conversation teacher does not know the exam and will not teach you the strategies that you need to get your target score. You will waste your time and money. When you consider hiring a teacher, ask about their previous students. What exam results did they get? What strategies did the teacher help them with? Don’t be afraid to question the teacher a bit. This is your future and you are making a significant investment. You need to get results. If the teacher doesn’t have the skills then look for someone new.

 

Are you making any of these IELTS mistakes?

Let us know in the comments below and ask us your IELTS questions!

We hope to hear from you.

 

Photo credits: http://bit.ly/1KZ0tf0

 

Today you will find out how you should plan your essay and whether or not you should count your words in IELTS Writing Task 1 and IELTS Writing Task 2.

Gem of Wisdom 1:

Do not forget to plan your essay. You MUST plan your essay before you write it if you want to get a 7 or higher.

You can’t just randomly put all of your ideas down on the page.

It must be organized and well planned.

Gem of Wisdom 2:

Do not plan your essay in your native language.

This will take too much time because you will be brainstorming vocabulary and ideas and then you will have to translate into English from your native language.

Gem of Wisdom 3:

How should you plan your essay?

Start by coming up with your thesis statement or main point- what are you trying to say, what are you trying to get across?

What is your opinion?

It’s crucial to have an opinion on the IELTS Writing test.

Most of the time you’ll have two columns and you’ll brainstorm reasons and examples for both sides.

It may be easier to think of ideas for the side that you don’t agree with.

Don’t worry about having an organized outline. Use two columns and that is enough.

Go deeper with your brainstorming to find a unique idea.

Gem of Wisdom 4:

Should you count the number of words that you have in your essay? No! It takes too long.

First, get used to the timing of planning and the timing of writing the paragraphs.

Once you get a feel for how much you are supposed to write you can start counting your lines to make sure you have enough.

By the time you get to the test you should already know what it feels like to write the required amount.

Most people write ten words per line.

Make sure you have at least 15-18 lines.

For Task 2 you need 25-28 lines.

Did any of these tips surprise you?

What additional questions do you have about the Writing test?

Let us know in the comments.

Today you’ll find out how to immediately grab someone’s attention in English by leading with their interests.

We’ll give you five English phrases that you can use to to do this today.

Pulling someone in from the beginning is one important key to connecting with someone through a conversation.

You want people to be interested in what you are saying.

You don’t want people to “zone out” when you start talking.

You want them to be tuned in to you and what you are saying.

Expressions to catch someone’s interest:

  • “I thought of you when I saw this…”
  • “I was hoping to get your opinion on this…”
  • “I know this is right up your alley…”
  • “You’d be interested in this…”

Which of these phrases do you use in your English conversations?

Let us know in the comments below.

In today’s episode you’ll get 4 Scottish English expressions to speak with a local in Scotland.

These expressions are super common in Scotland but you’ll never hear them in the United States.

Here are 4 Scottish English expressions:

  • ‘That’s me away”: This means “I am going now” or “I am leaving”
  •  “To go and get the messages”: To go food shopping in a supermarket or grocery store.
  •  “Away to your bed”: This means “go to your bed” and this is something that a mother might say to her child when she is frustrated or annoyed or wanting to be firm.
  •  Modal verbs such as “want” and “need”: In Scottish English they use the progressive tense. They say “will you be wanting that?” instead of “do you want that?”
  •  “Aye”: This means “yes” in Scotland. It can be used in a more formal situation.

Steven’s Bio:

Hello, I am Steven from Dundee, Scotland. I have over 12 years experience of teaching English as a foreign language, so if you are interested in learning English with me, then I’d be delighted to hear from you. I am also a language learner myself, so I understand the processes involved in learning, maintaining and improving your skills in a second or third language. Please contact me if you wish to receive lessons in either English or Scottish Gaelic. I hope to see you soon!

Have you ever been to Scotland? Did you understand the Scottish accent?

Tell us about your experience in the comments below.

Spelling matters on the IELTS Listening test!

Would you like to know why?

If you spell a word incorrectly on the Listening test, Reading test, or Writing test, the answer is considered wrong.

How can you improve your spelling for IELTS?

You need to read as much as you can. You need to create a reading culture in your life.

As long as you read often you will be able to spell anything you need to spell on the IELTS exam.

Two activities you should try:

  • Envision the words in your mind while you speak. Envision the way that they are spelled.
  • Choose one paragraph and as you read, read with your finger, read out loud and point to each word as you say it. Focus your mind on each specific word and how it sounds and how it’s spelled.

You also need to focus on your spelling for the Writing test. It’s impossible to get a 7 if you have 3 or 4 words spelled wrong.

This is another reason to not take big risks on the test.

Don’t use new words that you have never written down before.

Take big risks during your preparation.

During the exam only use words that you know how to spell.

How is your spelling in English?

Have you experienced any challenges with this?

Let us know in the comments.

If you want a 7 or higher on the IELTS Exam you need to be spontaneous on the IELTS Speaking test.

Today we’ll show you how to build spontaneity and flexibility into your speaking skills.

Do you rehearse and memorize what you are going to say when it comes to the IELTS Speaking test?

Here is how rehearsing impacts your score:

If you memorize speaking answers you use them in the wrong context.

You’ll get a low score for coherence and you’ll get a low pronunciation score because you will have no variety in your tone of voice if you are using rehearsed phrases.

How can you get more spontaneous and natural?

Step 1: Stop worrying about perfect grammar

Step 2: Create an immersive environment. Watch English movies. Get a conversation partner.

Step 3: Join an improv group where you learn to come up with ideas on the spot and act them out. Learn more about improv from Jessica Coyle.

What are you doing to build your spontaneity in speaking?

Let us know below.

Michael DiGiacomo Happy English

Are you wondering if you should study English in a small town or in a big American city like New York?

Today our guest, Michael DiGiacomo from Happy English will show you how to decide where to study English.

You need to ask yourself what your goal is.

Why are you studying abroad?

What is the purpose of the investment?

What new skills do you want to have when you go home?

 

Pros of studying in the city:

  •  You get access to amazing museums, restaurants, clubs, cafes, etc. You’ll get a true cosmopolitan experience.

 

Cons of studying in the city:

  • You are likely to spend time with people from your home country. You won’t get many opportunities to speak English if you spend time with people from your home country.

 

Pros of studying in the countryside:

  • You may be the only person from your home country. This could be great because you’ll be forced to speak English. You’ll probably improve much faster.

 

Cons of studying in the countryside:

  • You might be lonely. You might feel culture shock. You may feel isolated.
  • You might be bored because there isn’t much to do in small towns.

 

Here’s a better option: Choose a city that is an hour or two outside of a major city.

You can get into the city on the weekends when you get bored but your daily life won’t include people from your home country.

 

Michael’s Bio:

Michael DiGiacomo is the founder of Happy English.

Based in NYC, he has been an English teacher for more than 20 years.

His mission at Happy English is to make English fun and practical and to help you feel confident when you speak.

In today’s episode you’ll get 3 steps to go from “slow reader” to “IELTS reading extraordinaire.

If you feel like you read slowly then today’s episode is for you.

Here is what you should do:

  • Read something you enjoy every day. It doesn’t matter what it is. Go to a bookstore. Browse and look around. See what you like. Create a reading culture in your own life. Learn to read for fun and you will be more confident on test day. At this point don’t worry about speed.
  • Next learn how to apply the reading skills on the test. This is where you need a strategy. Use the skills of skimming, scanning, and reading for detail. Do practice tests after you have learned the strategy and practiced it.
  • Try this exercise: choose a newspaper article, read it, write down everything you remember for 5 minutes only. If you do this every day your reading speed and your comprehension will improve quickly.

Click here to learn about one reading worry for all IELTS students.

What is your plan to improve your reading speed for the IELTS?

Let us know in the comments below.

Shayna from Espresso English

Today we are super excited to have Shayna from Espresso English Podcast on the show for the second time!

Today Shayna will show us how to push our level from intermediate to advanced with some new ideas that we have never talked about before.

It’s all about diversifying!

Keep reading to learn more.

 

How to push your English to the advanced level:

  • Look for material in various genres of English: If you currently listen to a lot of academic lectures like TED Talks, why not try poetry or classic English literature? You’ll see phrases being presented in different ways, from different angles. Diversify your input!
  • Seek out people with different types of English accents: Don’t limit yourself just to “American English” or “British English.” A great site to do this is ELLLO.ORG

 

Shayna’s Bio:

Shayna is the creator of Espresso English where she helps you move your Englsih to the next level with clear, concise, and easy-to-follow English lessons online.

She is from the US but she is currently living in London.

Shayna has a new course that is designed just for intermediate English learners who want to move to the advanced level. Check it out here.

 

Today you’ll hear the sad story of someone stuck at IELTS band score 6.

Is this you?

You’ll find out what you need to change if this is your situation.

What is this student doing wrong?

  •  She is trying to study alone, with a textbook and is trying to memorize things to prepare for IELTS just like she studied in her home country growing up. This doesn’t work when it comes to a language exam like IELTS. The IELTS requires spontaneity so memorization doesn’t help very much.
  •  She makes pages of lists of sentences and words by herself. She doesn’t interact with anyone else or any other material or input.
  •  She reads example essays and copies them. She doesn’t spend much time writing her own essays and using IELTS writing strategies.
  •  She refuses to admit that her way of studying isn’t working. She has been stuck at a 5.5 or 6 for three years.

version 1 JPGDo you know what steps to take to get a 7 or higher on the IELTS?

You can get our free IELTS Cheat Sheet now!

Download the “7 Easy Steps to a 7 or Higher on IELTS”

Is this you? Here is what to do:

  • Admit that you need help and that what you are doing isn’t working. Be willing to change your preparation strategy.
  • Put in the hours with the CORRECT strategies.
  • Go out into the real world with your English to get the balanced practice. Be willing to spend time with native speakers, make mistakes, and feel vulnerable.
  • Remember that test practice is not a way to improve your IELTS skills. You need to prepare for the test by learning strategies and improving your skills then measure by taking practice tests.

 

Are you this student?

Are you stuck at a band score of 6?

What are you going to change starting today?

Tell us in the comments below.

Do you bore people when you speak English?

Do you ramble?

If you do then you need to get some new skills to keep people engaged and excited to talk to you.

Today we’ll show you how to do it.

Today we’ll show you how to engage someone in person and on the phone.

Situation #1: In Person

  • You need to be able to “take a hint” when someone in front of you is bored. People might look at their watch or look away from you. That means that the person wants you to stop talking. Learn to take the hint and stop talking.
  • Make eye contact- don’t look around the room. Make the person feel engaged. This is different across cultures but in American culture it’s important to make eye contact.
  •  Vary your tone of voice- Don’t be monotonous when you speak. Be interesting! Use your words like a song. Put feeling into your voice. This can even help you on the IELTS Speaking test.
  • Show the person that you are thinking about them- Use phrases like these “You are probably in a hurry” or “I want to respect your time.” It’s also great to ask the person questions about themselves. Show interest with these phrases like “what about you?”

Situation #2: On the phone

  • Use reference markers- Use phrases like “first of all…” and “the other thing is…” and “the last thing I want to say is…”

What do you do to keep people engaged?

Let us know in the comments below.

Have you set a test date yet for your IELTS Exam?

If you haven’t set a date yet, today you’ll find out why you MUST set a date as soon as possible and how to do it.

Why should you set a test date before you start preparing for IELTS?

When you don’t know when your test will be, you won’t know how to divide up your study time.

You won’t be able to use a specific IELTS daily plan.

If you don’t have a specific plan or test date you won’t approach your preparation with enough urgency.

You must feel the pressure to push yourself to really be ready.

You also need to know exactly how much work is involved when you are planning and preparing so that you know how much you can do each day.

version 1 JPGDo you know what steps you need to take to get a 7 or higher on the IELTS?

Get our free IELTS Cheat Sheet!

Click here to download the ” 7 Easy Steps to a 7 or Higher”

What is your plan to reach a 7 or higher?

Have you set a test date yet?

If not, why not?

Let us know in the comments.

Sometimes life gets complicated!

It can hard to de-clutter your life.

Today find out how to simplify your English learning and your life.

How can you simplify your life?

  • Try to chase one goal at a time. Don’t go after more than one thing because you won’t achieve any of your goals if you “spread yourself too thin.”
  • Beware of “the curse of the expert.” When you know a lot about one topic it’s easy to get overwhelmed and it’s hard to simplify the concept.
  • Take a day off. This will help you to simplify things in your mind because it will change your state of mind. Go into nature. Go climb a mountain.

How do you simplify your life?

Let us know in the comments.

Do you have an IELTS vocabulary notebook for the Writing and Speaking tests?

If you don’t then you should and we’ll show you how to use it today.

To get a high vocabulary score you need:

  • Idiomatic phrases
  • Casual phrases
  • Native phrases
  • Academic phrases and words

You must improve your vocabulary for every part of the IELTS test.

You can do that with a vocabulary notebook. Get a simple notebook and follow the tips in this episode.

Where does the vocabulary come from?

  •  The newspaper: Read it once per week, get the Sunday edition, there are at least 20 different article topics. Make yourself read an article that you wouldn’t normally read. We recommend the New York Times. You will find common IELTS topics in a newspaper like New York Times. This will get you the academic vocabulary that you need for writing.
  • Watch your favorite TV sitcom: You can watch Friends and have your vocabulary notebook on your lap. TV shows like Friends would be a great way to get idiomatic speaking vocabulary. Write down no more than 2 words per episode.
  • Conversations:  You can eavesdrop on other people’s conversations in cafes or on the train. Take out your notebook and write down 1 or 2 words that you hear during a conversation.
  • Podcasts: Don’t just focus on ESL podcasts. Choose a topic that you like and search for it in the itunes store. Listen to different types of vocabulary and listen to different ways of speaking.
  •  Follow your interests: Google search your interests. Write down no more than two words that you read. Do this for 20 minutes and then move on to a new activity.

What do you write in your notebook?

Write the word and part of speech.

Write down the definition in your own words in English if you are intermediate or above.

Write two example sentences.

Get one sample sentence from Google.

Get the other sample sentence by creating it yourself. You need to come up with that second sentence to make the word stick in your head.

Then use the word in speaking and writing throughout the day or week.

Remember, when it comes to IELTS vocabulary, less is more!

Learn fewer words but learn them very well and be ready to use them with confidence.

Do you have your IELTS vocabulary notebook yet?

Let us know in the comments below.

Have you just relocated to the United States?

Today we have a guest on the show who will give you 3 smart tips to have a great experience during your first few months in the United States.

3 tips for a newcomer:

  • Always have a solid expat legal plan: You should always have your legal paperwork in order and be prepared. Understand the laws of the country. Understand the limitations of your visa and what you are allowed to do.
  • Continue to contribute your unique skills: Remember that people are people, regardless of culture. We respond to hard work, honesty, and integrity. Keep doing your work while you are here.
  • Learn to take rejection and move on: It will be challenging when you move abroad. Be prepared to get rejected and then to stand back up and keep trying.

 

Portia’s Bio:

Dr. Portia Ndlovu is an author, Associate Professor, a business woman and a lawyer.

She comes from Durban South Africa and she is now based in Cape Cod, MA.

In her consulting and teaching she inspires others to pursue their dreams in both the legal field and in business.

Check out her publications on Linked In

Learn more about Massachusetts Maritime Academy

 

On IELTS Writing Task 2 do you struggle to find ideas?

Do you know where to put your ideas when you come up with them?

Today we’ll show you how to brainstorm for Writing Task 2 and how to organize your ideas into your paragraphs in Writing Task 2.

How to brainstorm your ideas for IELTS Writing Task 2:

  • Write down anything that comes to mind
  • Go beyond the 2nd, 3rd idea- write down 4, 5, 6 ideas
  • Don’t stop brainstorming until you get an interesting angle, concept, point
  • Draw two columns, agree and disagree and write down everything you can think of
  • Don’t over-complicate it by trying to be too specific, it can be broad such as “Many people agree with X for the following reasons.”

How to organize your ideas:

  • Go back and circle the best ideas and then you are ready to write
  • In the body paragraph, the first sentence needs to have the topic sentence
  • In the next sentences, use more complicated sentences and build out your idea

A final tip:

  • Journal every day- close your eyes, point to something in the newspaper, take ten minutes to write about that topic

What other questions do you have about IELTS Writing Task 2?

Let us know in the comments below.

Today we’ll talk about delayed gratification versus instant gratification.

You’ll find out how you can use delayed gratification for better English skills and a better life overall.

Here is today’s quote:

“Today I will do the things that others won’t so that tomorrow I can do the things that others can’t”- Jerry Rice

 

What are the things that you could do to get ahead with your English?

Do you work every day. Don’t just show up when you feel inspired or motivated. You will get better if you set a regular time to work on your English every day.

 

What do you think?

What are you working hard on every day? Do you show up every day?

Tell us your story in the comments.

Do you have questions on your mind about the IELTS exam?

Today you’ll get 3 answers to 3 questions from a current IELTS student.

Question 1: Where can I take the IELTS?

Go to IELTS.org. Click on “find a test.” Choose your city.

Book your test at least 3 months in advance to be sure that you get your spot.

Test centers get booked very far in advance. Don’t miss your opportunity to take the test.

Question 2: The test seems so “daunting.” What should I do?

Yes, the test is huge and quite long.

The biggest issue is timing.

You need strategies for getting the timing right and to complete each test section.

Find an IELTS professional to give you the strategies that you need and then practice them.

Question 3: It seems hard to do all of the test subjects on the same day. What should I do?

Make sure you have enough energy for test day. Eat a good breakfast. Your brain and body need energy and calories.

Have a plan for what you are going to do between the Writing test and your Speaking test.

Your Speaking test could be scheduled for any time in the afternoon.

During that block of time you should be able to get some food.

Maybe do some casual English listening practice.

Plan to go watch a movie or get some exercise.

What are your questions about IELTS?

Leave them in the comments section below!

In today’s episode you’ll get the difference between “suppose” and “to be supposed to.”

What is the difference between the two terms?

  • “I suppose”= I think, I guess, I assume, I believe, I imagine (verb)
  • “I am supposed to”= I should, I need to, I am expected (adjective)

Examples:

What are you going to do if your students don’t show up to class? I suppose I’ll stick around and wait for them.

People are supposed to pay for the subway in Boston but sometimes they don’t.

Now write your sample sentence in the comments.

Let us know if you understood today’s lesson!

Should you memorize when it comes to IELTS?

What happens to your score if you memorize an essay topic and use that to respond to the essay instead of answering the actual question that you receive?

This is a very bad idea. Don’t do it. Answer the actual essay question that you are given.

Is it always bad to memorize for the IELTS?

There are some situations where memorizing for the IELTS is good. Here are some examples:

  • You can memorize the essay structure. Memorize what kinds of structures you need for each type of essay on the IELTS Writing test.
  • You can memorize step-by-step systems for each part of the test. These systems will keep you from panicking.
  • You can and should memorize high level vocabulary, phrasal verbs, and idioms for the IELTS

Do you have any questions about today’s episode?

Ask us in the comments below.

Today we have a special guest on the show!  You’ll find out the 3 mistakes you are making with your American English vowel sounds and how to solve your problem today!

Jennifer Tarle from Tarle Speech and Language is here to show you 3 actions steps that you can take to immediately solve your problems with American English vowel sounds.

Jennifer believes that listening is key to pronunciation. It’s more important than learning phonetic symbols and studying a pronunciation chart.

You need to work on your listening and then put it into practice.

Here are 3 things you can do today to improve your American English vowel sounds:

  • Long versus short vowel sounds (“Eat” versus “it”): Listen to the difference in vowel length. These sounds are used often in American English. Make the “eat” sound long and make the “it” short.
  • Open vowels: Watch a TV program with the sound off in your native language and then watch a TV program in English with the sound off. Watch the person’s mouth, lips, and jaw. Americans move their mouths a lot when they speak compared with other languages. English has a lot of vowels. Consider the word “fantastic.” You have to open your mouth wide to say that word.
  •  Movement vowel:  A lot of students keep their mouths closed and don’t move their mouth from one sound to another. You need to focus on moving your jaw and your lips. Don’t cut off the sounds and shorten them. Continue the sound.

Jennifer’s Bio:

Tarle Speech and Language was founded in 2005 by Jennifer Tarle in order to empower individuals at all stages of life through better communication skills. Jennifer is a Certified Speech Pathologist with over 19 years of experience in speech-related training and  pathologies. Jennifer earned a BS degree and an MA degree in Speech Pathology from Kent State University. She is licensed in CA, IL, & OH, is certified with the State Boards of Education in IL and OH, is certified by the IL early intervention system, holds the Certificate of Clinical Competence from the American Speech Language Hearing Association (ASHA), and has earned several AHSA ACE Awards for continuing education.

Jennifer is a self-published author of accent workbooks, audio CDs, DVDs, and iBooks.  Materials are designed to be easy and effective.  Products are all downloadable so that you can practice on the go!  She distributes her pronunciation materials solely through www.tarlespeech.com and iTunes. Introductory through advanced classes on foreign accents are taught throughout the city of Chicago, via video conferencing, and throughout the world.  To help even more people, she launched a video podcast, The Minute of Speech, in 2007.  It is available on iTunes, YouTube, and at www.tarlespeech.com.  She implemented her Tarle Speech pronunciation and accent reduction program at the Nanjing University of Science and Technology, Nanjing, China and at E4TG in Tokyo, Japan.  Contact her to schedule a consultation or class.

Jennifer strives to help individuals to improve their lives through better communication.

Today you’ll get 4 ways to craft a life that you love!

Here is today’s quote: “Life is like a combination lock. Your job is to find the right numbers in the right order so you can have anything you want.”

-Brian Tracy

We like this quote because it means that we don’t have to live the way that others tell us we have to live.

We have the ability to create our own life and create our dream life.

How can we do this?

  • Don’t focus on improving your weaknesses. Focus on making your strengths or your unique genius better and become exceptional in one core area. In school we are taught a different strategy. We are taught to focus on the things that we aren’t good at.
  •  Find a mentor. Get someone who can steer you in the right direction. Successful people always have mentors.
  • Surround yourself with people who have big dreams. Jim Rohn says, “You are the average of the five people you spend the most time with.”  You can also create a peer group through listening to podcasts.

 

What do you think?

Which of these steps are you currently taking?

Let us know in the comments below.

Today you’ll get four nonverbal ways to bump up your IELTS speaking score!

A few weeks ago we had Mark Bowden, body language expert on the AEE podcast and he told us that we need to know what messages our nonverbal communication is sending to others.

Your nonverbal communication will affect your scores on the speaking test.

Why? We all make subconscious judgments and when your body language is sending a message that you lack confidence or that you aren’t trustworthy, this may bring down your score because examiners are human.

Four ways to bump up your speaking score:

  • Smile consistently– it puts people at ease and makes them trust you.
  • Don’t slouch– don’t sit with your shoulders hunched over, with your head down. This does not make you look confident. Imagine there is a line going from the back of your neck to the ceiling.
  • Don’t sit with your legs wide open- This looks very rude for both men and women. If you are sitting up straight, this probably won’t happen. Crossing your legs is ok.
  • Use open gestures- Mark told us that when we have our hands open, out in front of us and at navel height, the person trusts us because they can see our hands. That makes us appear to be a safe, trustworthy person. On the Speaking test, don’t hide your hands in your lap. Don’t have them out of view of the examiner. Don’t put your elbows on the table, it’s informal. Use your hands to give emphasis to your speech. Use your hand gestures to show more meaning. This will help your pronunciation sound more natural too.

Here is another speaking test hint!

Have you used any of these nonverbal gestures on the speaking test?

Leave us your comments below!

Sean Watson International Business English Coach

Do you want to know how to thrive in the international business world?

Today you’ll meet our guest who helps students succeed in the world of international business.

Our guest Sean Watson will show you exactly how to become successful in business across cultures. You’ll get 3 tips to succeed in business across cultures.

How to succeed in business across cultures:

  • Be curious- do your homework before doing business abroad: Learn about the culture.  Learn a few words in the client’s language. Find out what nonverbal gestures are acceptable. If you want to be interesting, be interested. Be curious about other people and other cultures. You won’t get very far in business without making a genuine connection and it starts with understanding your client’s culture.
  • Be tolerant- keep an open mind: Learn to not judge people too quickly. This will go a long way to creating lifelong friendships and business partnerships.
  • Remember that nothing you learn is a waste of time: Don’t only focus on the things that you think you need to learn. It’s not just about the vocabulary, the grammar, and the pronunciation. There are many more angles to business than just the words. Try to learn from every situation you are in. Read other material and let it inform you when it comes to your business career. This is also important to generate ideas for small talk.

 

Sean’s Bio:

In today’s episode we have a special guest. Sean Watson has been in the English-teaching world since 1997.

Sean has traveled to 25 countries and has worked with CEOs from companies like Reuters, KPMG, Deloitte and Philips in Hungary.

He now specializes in teaching business English with a special focus on International Trade and advanced English conversation.

Sean is also a musician.

 

How to work with Sean:

  • Step 1- Register on this page to get $10 USD off your second lesson (*** If you don’t register here, you won’t get 10USD for free)
  • Step 2- Find Sean’s profile on italki and schedule a lesson: italki.com/teacherSean

“Say it once and say it well.” This is a great mentality that you can use when it comes to the IELTS Writing test.

Why?

Today you’ll find out how to take casual English phrases and turn them into academic phrases to get a higher IELTS score on the writing and the speaking.

Here are 3 casual sentences transformed into academic language:

  • Casual: I think traveling abroad is good.
  • Academic: I am of the opinion that undertaking exotic adventures is highly beneficial.

Rule#1: If you are using a word that you learned in your first year of learning English like “good” then it’s too basic.

Exchange it for a new one.

  • Casual: Too many people are fat today.
  • Academic: A growing number of individuals would be labeled as obese nowadays.

Rule #2: Make sure you know what words are considered rude such as “fat” and exchange these words for different, more polite ones.

  • Casual: Writing in cursive is not needed.
  • Academic: Pupils are wasting valuable time in learning an extinct skill such as writing in cursive.

Academic vocabulary from today:

  • Studious: To be intelligent, academic, well-read
  • A considerable amount, a great deal: this is better than saying too many or many

What questions do you have from today’s episode?

Please leave your questions in the comments!

In today’s episode you’ll find out if you should use cursive or printing on the Writing test on the IELTS.

If your handwriting is messy, it can impact your score negatively.

Practicing the timing on the Writing test is the key to making sure that your handwriting stays neat and easy to read.

Don’t make it hard for the examiner to read your essay.

If you have messy handwriting when using cursive, then try to print in block letters.

Warning!

Some teachers might ask you to type out your essay for your IELTS practice.

Typing out your essay is not good practice.

If a teacher asks you to do that, don’t trust that teacher!

It is not valid test practice because on test day you will have to write your essays by hand.

Don’t skimp on your preparation:

You cannot skip steps.

Learn from an IELTS professional who is teaching you correctly and who is not wasting your time.

It’s not enough just to read an example essay, learn an outline and jump into the test.

You need to sit down, write out your practice essays, and get feedback.

Leave us your questions in the comments now!

Let’s have a conversation.

Do you want to command more respect when you share your opinion?

Do you want people to listen to you?

There are 4 phrases in English that you can use when you introduce an opinion that you feel strongly about.

Here they are:

  • “Look,…”
  • “Listen,….”
  • “Here’s how I see it,…”
  • “Here’s what I think….and here’s why….”

These phrases are especially useful if you work in the legal field or any field where you need to have a point of view and have people listen to you.

They could help in any field where you are an authority and you need to convince people of something.

These phrases could also be useful if you want to get a point across in your personal relationships.

Listen to the podcast for examples of how we use these phrases in conversation.

Have you ever used these phrases?

Let us know in the comments.

Today we have a former Silicon Valley hiring manager and professional in the high-tech industry.

Troy Lee will show you the exact changes that you need to make to get your resume noticed and to get an interview in the United States.

Troy specializes in interview strategy, resume writing, and personal statements.

He helps people get the job of their dreams!

Troy says there are three common mistakes that international professionals make on their resumes.

Here are the three mistakes:

  • They don’t use spell check on their resumes: Make sure your spell check is set to American English, not to your home country’s language. Check for grammar, spelling, and punctuation.
  •  They don’t know how to “market themselves”: Write your accomplishments. Quantify them. What specific value did you deliver to your former company? How did you help them increase their bottom line? Highlight your leadership experience. This is not the time to be humble. Silicon Valley and the rest of the US is competitive. You really need to stand out.
  •  They don’t study the company before they apply:  Make sure you study the company. Get some background information. Make them feel special. Learn about new projects that they working on or new products that they are introducing. Use the same words that they use in their job description. There is a program called Resumix. It’s a keyword finder where they search for everyone who used specific words in their resume. It is important to be very intentional about what keywords you put into your resume in order to get selected by this program.

Idiom from today:

“Good ole’ boy network”= your personal and professional network, who you know

Also remember, there is no need to put your photo on your resume and it’s good to leave some white space on your resume.

Troy’s Bio:

Troy is a certified, native English teacher, born and raised near Stanford, California, about 30 min. away from San Francisco, USA, and has been teaching on Italki since October 2009.

When he is not teaching students business English or helping them with their IELTS or TEOFL test on weekends and evenings (California Time), he works a full-time day job at a major Silicon Valley software company as a product manager. He has been in the high-tech industry for over 11 years.  He is well-versed in business English.

Troy has worked in many high-tech industries including healthcare, hardware, and software and has had a role as a hiring manager. He enjoys mentoring people to best position themselves, be contacted by hiring managers, succeed in interviews, and win the job of their dreams.

He even continues to help his students into their job by explaining the different cultural differences ESL students should be aware of that may differ from the work culture in the students home country.

Troy’s most popular course on Italki is Interviewing Strategy, Resume/CV, Cover Letter Wording & Layout, Personal Statement.  You can find him at http://www.italki.com/troyleeusa

Are you going to waste your money and time preparing in the wrong way for the IELTS speaking test?

Many students are wasting money and time doing the wrong things and we want to show you what NOT to do today.

To get the speaking score you need, you can’t just practice general conversation.

You can’t just grab a native speaker and try to speak with them.

What should you do differently?

You should learn the speaking strategies and understand the exam when you prepare for the speaking test.

You need to know the rules and the strategies so that you are not practice incorrectly.

You want to know what the examiner wants before you begin your speaking test practice.

The formula for success is to have two types of speaking preparation: Get a speaking partner, chat with them a few times a week to get your fluency up AND learn the format, rules, strategies of the speaking test and if you can, do some speaking test practice where you are pretending to be in the exam.

Even native speakers don’t always get a perfect score because they don’t have the strategies.

They usually get a 9 for pronunciation but they may not get a perfect score on vocabulary, fluency and coherence because they don’t know the rules of the exam.

In Part 1:

You must answer in complete sentences and you can’t give one-word answers.

Your fluency and coherence score will go way down if you do that.

In Part 2:

You are given a topic card and you have a minute to take notes and think about your answer.

People who have not studied for the test think they have to answer every question on the card.

That’s not the case.

The examiner doesn’t care if you answer every question on the card.

The questions are meant to guide you.

Click here to learn more about your goals for IELTS Speaking Part 2.

In Part 3:

A good rule of thumb is to organize your answer in the same you organize an academic essay.

Put an introduction, examples, details, and the conclusion.

Use the same structure for every question on Part 3.

Learn the linking words that you need to use.

Then you need to practice, practice, practice.

Read more about how to use idioms on the speaking test.

Leave us your comments below.

What questions do you have about preparing for the Speaking test?

What are you most nervous about?

Are you stressed about vocabulary on the IELTS exam?

You need a brain box to get a high score on the IELTS but do you feel that your brain box is empty?

Do you feel that you don’t have enough vocabulary for the IELTS?

Do you have a hard time coming up with words that relate to a specific topic in English?

Today we are going to show you how to brainstorm for new vocabulary words based on the topic.

You already have the words in your first language so you need to transfer the words into English.

Get 5 guaranteed ways to increase your speaking score.

Get the 4 rookie mistakes that many IELTS test takers make

Get your free IELTS checklist, click here.

How to create your “brain tree”:

  • Step 1- Start with your first language. Think of a common IELTS topic like food. Draw a tree with branches. On each branch write out all of the words that you know that are related to food in your native language. Get as specific as you can. Write down everything you think of. Go from general to specific. Give yourself a time limit for each brain tree. Do it for 5-10 minutes.
  • Step 2-After you finish your brain tree, go back and translate everything into English. This will increase your IELTS vocabulary and will show you that you already have the vocabulary but you just need to translate the words into English.
  •  Step 3- Put these English words into your vocabulary notebook. Organize your vocabulary notebook by topic.

How can you find a topic for your brain tree?

Check out IELTS courses online and look at the topics that they teach. Use those topics for your brain tree.

Click here to learn how to get a 7 for vocabulary when you speak or write about age.

Have you tried this activity?

Let us know in the comments. How did it work for you?

Mark Bowden, body language expert

Today you will meet one of the world’s top experts in body language, nonverbal communication, and human behavior.

You’ll get 3 simple things that you can do to establish trust with anyone using body language.

Mark says that our primitive brain makes quick, snap decisions about whether or not someone is safe based on their body language.

We need to understand this because if we do not use the right body language people will never listen to what we are actually saying.

Although some gestures vary across cultures, there are certain basic body language gestures that are universal and signal specific things in every culture.

How can we build trust using body language?

  • Smile: Mark says that when we smile we allow the people around us to relax and to think that it’s safe to interact with us.  When we smile we say “it’s good now.” We send a message that the relationship is good. Mark says that as much as you practice your English, you should also practice your smile!
  • Gestures with open body language: Open palms, not closed palms signal that you don’t have any weapons and it’s especially effective if you open your palms at the height of the belly button.
  • Keep your gestures consistent: Keep your hands at belly button height, keep your palms open. If you change your gestures often your brain gets confused. If the brain gets confused it will start to skew what you say in a negative direction.

 

When we do these 3 things that we have mentioned above, people are more likely to trust what we say and to take what we say and skew it in a positive direction.

 

Mark’s Bio:

Today we have Mark Bowden on the show. He is an expert on body language and human behavior.

He is ranked #1 in the Top 30 Body Language Professionals for 2014 by globalgurus.org and is the creator of Truthplane, a communication training company and methodology for anyone who wants to communicate with more impact.

In addition to being a TedX speaker, Mark has written the best-selling book, Winning Body Language and is the resident body language expert on CTV’s daily talk show, The Social.

Check out Mark’s TED Talk and his work at Truthplane

Also check Presentation Genius

 

What did you think about today’s episode?

Leave us a comment below and let us know if you have tried these tips.

You MUST use English idioms to get a 7 on the IELTS Speaking test and the IELTS Writing test.

If you use these idioms you will get those extra points because the examiner will realize that you have skills beyond the textbooks.

We have already done episodes on how to use idioms when you talk about happiness, art, and parties and celebrations.

Today you’ll get four idioms on different topics that you can “copy and paste” into your IELTS exam.

Get our free IELTS checklist

Find out how to save time and increase your IELTS score.

Click here to download it for free.

Four idioms to use on common Speaking and Writing topics:

Topic 1:  Questions about the home: “To make yourself at home”

I like to have my guests make themselves at home.

Topic 2: Questions about school or studies: “To hit the books”

I have really been hitting the books, trying to read some Spanish poetry.

Topic 3: Questions about food: “To eat and run”

My friends eat and run. They jump up and grab a banana and go.

Topic 4: Travel: “Off the beaten track”

I like to go off the beaten track and see things that most tourists don’t see.

Give us your sample sentences in the comments below!

Michelle took a Spanish class last year.

Today you’ll find out about the program that she used and the good points that helped her learn. You’ll also find out why she was not able to continue and how she quickly lost motivation.

The good points of the program:

The program was set up online and she had to build sentences using the foundation of a word such as a verb.

She would use translated words and create new combinations of words and new ways of saying things.

 

What went wrong:

She got too excited too fast. She watched 10 videos per night.

She quickly got overwhelmed and did not absorb the information.

She started “binging” on the information. She thinks that this was a setup for failure because she quickly burned out.

 

What was missing:

The human aspect.

It would have been better if she had combined the learning videos and an opportunity to practice with someone. You need to have a mix of different methods when you learn a language.

She also didn’t build momentum. She couldn’t measure and see her progress quickly.

 

What language learning programs do you use?

Do you ever binge on programs or podcasts to learn English?

Tell us in the comments below

In IELTS Writing Task 1 you’ll get Change Over Time questions.

Are you ready to use time prepositions in English to describe these charts and graphs?

Find out how to do it today.

A lot of students make mistakes with these prepositions on Task 1 questions:

  • During: Use only one word after it- The price of soda increased during the summer of 2012
  • From… to : The price of soda increased from June 2012 to September 2012
  • Between…and: Between May and February the price of soda went from $2.12 per can to $2.50 per can

How to practice these:

  • Look at a newspaper and look for graphs, tables, charts
  • Look in business or finance sections of magazines and newspapers
  • When you spot an accurate sentence describing change over time graphs and charts, write it down
  • Practice what you have written down on your own

Our free checklist will show you how to prepare in a step-by-step, clear way.

Find out how to maximize your time and increase your score.

Click here to get your free checklist.

Learn more about IELTS Writing Task 1:

Leave us your practice sentences in the comments below

Good luck and start practicing here!

We hear mistakes for English learners with “almost” and “most” all of the time!

Are you making this mistake?

Today, find out the difference between these two words and how to use them correctly and naturally.

Most Versus Almost:

Most: This means the majority. It is an adjective.

What do you do most mornings? Most mornings I roll out of bed. Most mornings I drink coffee. Most of the time I leave my apartment without eating breakfast. Most of the time I have breakfast on the go.

Most of the people in New York are busy and rushed all of the time. Most of the people are stressed out.

What do you have for lunch most days? Most days I have a peanut butter sandwich for lunch.

What do most people do on the weekends in New York? Most people walk outside or go to the park.

Almost: This means nearly. It’s an adverb.

Are you almost done with your wedding preparations?

I am almost done but I am still looking for someone who does hair and makeup.

We are almost ready to launch our new IELTS course!

Leave us your sample sentences in the comments section using “most” and “almost”!

Is this your first time taking the IELTS? If so, you are an “IELTS newbie” but don’t worry!

In today’s episode we are going to show you exactly what to do if you are an IELTS newbie!

We’ll give you three easy steps to follow. Check out today’s episode!

We’ll show you what to do if you have a month to prepare or if you have a year to prepare.

Get this free checklist and stop wondering what you should do next.

Learn how to prepare the right way. Save time. Get your target score.

Click here to download it for free.

If you have 1-2 months:

  • Step 1- Go to a bookstore and look at some of the practice tests. Get a sense of how hard this test will be for you.
  • Step 2- Find someone to help you. Don’t choose a general English conversation teacher. Work with someone who specializes in IELTS (not every ESL exam, just IELTS) and who has systems and strategies that work. Ask to talk with some of the teacher’s former students.
  • Step 3-Make a study plan and get started

If you have 6 months to one year:

  • Step 1- Do not start practicing the test right away! Focus on your general English skills. Take 3-4 months to improve your English. Listen to the All Ears English Podcast. Get a teacher on italki.
  • Step 2- Find good materials and a good course

Be smart about how you use your plan.

Don’t attempt to prepare for the IELTS without a plan.

Work for a few hours each day and you will do fine.

What questions do you have?

Leave your questions in the comments!

If you have a good study plan that you have created, please tell us about it in the comments or email us at Lindsay@allearsenglish.com

Mother’s Day was yesterday in the United States.

When is Mother’s Day in your culture?

Today you’ll find out how we celebrate Mother’s Day and you’ll find out what you should say to your mom today.

Here are some things you should say to your mom today from :

Some of these ideas came from an article by Megan Walgren on Family Share

  • Show your appreciation: “You’re the best mom in the world.” or “You’re the greatest mom in the world.” or “You mean so much to me.” or “I appreciate everything you do.”
  • Learn how to do things: “What is your recipe for potato salad?” – Your mom has a lot of wisdom so ask her how to do things!
  • Learn about your childhood: “Tell me about the day I was born.”

What do you want to say to your mom today?

Tell us in the comments!

Today you’ll find out exactly what happens on IELTS exam day.

The Listening test is first.

You listen for 30 minutes and then you have 10 minutes to transfer your answers.

Next you start the Reading test.

The Reading test has 3 passages, 40 questions, and you have to do it in 60 minutes.

There is no extra time for transferring your answers.

Next comes the Writing test. At this point you might be tired but you need to keep going. It’s important to eat a good breakfast before the test.

The Writing test is 60 minutes, 20 minutes for Task 1, 40 minutes for Task 2.

When you prepare, be sure to practice the timing for the Writing test.

After Writing, find out when your Speaking test is. It’s usually that afternoon.

Sometimes it’s at another time during the week.

During the time between the Writing and the Speaking tests, you may have a huge amount of time.

Have a plan for how you are going to fill those hours if you need to.

You can listen to a podcast in English during that time but also get some fresh air, go outside and take a walk. Give your brain some down time.

Which part do you think will be the hardest section on the test?

Let us know in the comments and tell us how you are preparing for that section.

Today we have a quote!

“Holding back is so close to stealing.” – Neil Young

To hold back means to withhold or to not do something or to not give something.

This episode is about taking chances in our lives.

You may feel like you can’t be yourself in English.

Maybe you are funny in your native language but you don’t know how to be funny in English so you hold back.

But if you do that then you are “stealing” from the moment as this quote says.

 

What do you think?

When have you erred on the side of perfection and protection by protecting yourself and when have you erred on the side of connection by taking a chance?

Let us know in the comments below.

It can be stressful when you get started preparing for the IELTS exam.

Maybe you don’t know where to start. You don’t know how to choose an IELTS course.

Today we’ll show you what you are probably missing when you get started with your IELTS prep.

 Most students make this mistake. They do one of these things:

1- Only focus on test strategy and practice

or

2- Only focus on general English skill building

Doing only test prep or only general English and not both is a huge mistake.

This is a test of your English skills and not just your ability to take the test.

You need to get exposure in all different ways including speaking, reading, writing, listening.

Also, you need to study the test and understand how to use strategies to get a high score.

The way to make sure that you balance your practice is to have a daily study plan that helps you do both.

What’s the problem with a lot of IELTS schools?

At many IELTS schools you have young teachers who have online resources and fun activities but the teacher often does not know the test.

On the other hand, you could get a teacher who knows the test and who has been teaching IELTS for many years and will only do test practice with you but is very inflexible and boring.

These are the two types of teachers that you will find at many IELTS schools.

Unfortunately both of these types of teachers won’t help you get the score you need.

It’s possible to spend a lot of money and not get the skills that you need when you finish the course at an IELTS school. Don’t let this happen to you!

If you really want to attend a traditional IELTS class, make sure you have the option to get your money back after your first class or if you are studying online, try to get some sample lessons before you have to buy the whole course.

What resources have you been using in your IELTS prep?

Let us know in the comments below.

Do you think it’s important to obsess over something to become successful at it?

Another way to say it is ” to have tunnel vision.”

Another word for obsession could be “focus” but it has more of a positive connotation.

When we get really focused we have to be careful of burnout.

We could get exhausted.

When it comes to learning English you should chunk down the learning into bite-sized pieces and be sure that you are learning in a way that is fun for you.

 

What are you focused on?

What are you obsessed about?

Let us know in the comments below.

When it comes to the IELTS Speaking or Writing tests you may get a question about age groups.

Do you have the right vocabulary to talk about age groups in English?

Today you’ll get the vocabulary you need.

Here are some terms that you need to know:

  • Infant or baby: Under age 1
  • Toddler: Age 1-3
  • Child, kid: Age 3-12
  • Teen, teenager, adolescent: Age 13- 20
  • Young adult: age 18-30
  • Twenty-something: Someone who is in their twenties
  • Thirty-something: Someone who is in their thirties
  • Middle aged: 50’s/60’s
  • Elderly, elders: Age 70/80/90/100

Here’s another bonus vocabulary word:

“Mid-life crisis”: A time in your life when you become confused and distressed about the direction your life is going in and your life goals.

Use these vocabulary words to sound natural enough to get a 7 on your Speaking and Writing tests.

Practice!

Describe the age groups of people in your life!

Get ready for your IELTS exam.

Do you know how to leave a great voicemail in English?

Today you’ll get the 5 steps that you need to follow to leave a great voicemail.

Listen to the sample role plays in today’s episode to hear what your message should sound like.

Here are the steps:

1) Greeting: “Hi it’s Lindsay” or “Hey it’s Michelle”

2) Why are you calling: “I just wanted to talk with you about tomorrow’s meeting” or “I’m calling to catch up.”

3) What they should do next: “Would you get back to me when you can” or “Give me a call whenever you’re free”

4) Your phone number: “My number is 359-284-9856” or “You can reach me at 617-593-0952

5)  Say goodbye: “Hope you’re having a good day” or “Take care” or “Have a great one”

Here are a few other tips:

1) Make sure they know how to get back to you

2) Don’t ramble, don’t go on and on, don’t leave a long message, make it concise and tight and to the point

3) Do leave a message- don’t call and hang up, it’s better to leave a message with some grammar mistakes than it is to not leave a message and not connect with the person

Have you left any successful English voicemails lately?

Let us know in the comments below!

Native speakers use the verb “to want” in the past tense when we are making a request in the present tense.

For example, you might call a colleague and say ” I wanted to confirm our lunch appointment for today.”

This makes the message a bit more polite and more indirect.

We think it’s also used more commonly for women.

How can you add this speech pattern into your conversations?

Give us some examples in the comments.

Did you know that your cultural IQ can affect your Speaking score on the IELTS exam?

It’s true!

Today you’ll find out how.

There are questions that can be traps on the IELTS exam.

Examiners are human and when they hear your response to a question like “what’s the difference between activities that men and women do?” they will have a negative gut reaction to your answer if you respond in a way that shows a lack of cultural sensitivity.

If you come from a culture where there are certain activities that women can’t do or that men can’t do and if you don’t articulate that you understand that this is different in different cultures, your score may be marked down.

The test is not completely objective.

You need to show that you understand cultural differences.

You can use these phrases:

  • “In my culture, this is what happens..”
  • “I know it’s not the same everywhere but this is how it is where I am from.”
  • “My culture is different from the West but…”
  • “In my experience.”
  • “This is what I’ve seen:…”
  • “I know it’s different here.”

Another important part of cultural differences is understanding points of view when you talk about ages across cultures. Listen to this episode for more information: How to Get a 7 When You Speak or Write About Age

What do you think about this topic?

Have you made any cultural IQ mistakes in the IELTS exam?

Let us know in the comments!

Are you preparing for IELTS in a way that works with your personality?

Do you assume that because you’re an introvert, you can’t succeed on the Speaking test?

What’s the difference between an introvert and an extrovert:

  • Introvert:  You lose energy from being around people and stimulation
  • Extrovert: You can get energy from outside stimulation like interaction with people, music, crowds, etc.

How should you change your study plan based on your personality?

The important thing is to realize your personality style and do what works for you.

If you are an introvert, you may have an easier time focusing and working by yourself at home.

You can focus more time on the Reading test and the Writing test.

If you are an extrovert, you may want to spend more time increasing your skills in your area of strength, like the Speaking test.

You know that you need human interaction to absorb concepts or to stay focused so go out and form a study group.

Talk about the strategies with your study group.

Don’t waste time trying to be what you’re not.

If you are an extrovert, don’t block out two hours to study by yourself.

If you are introvert, don’t push yourself to go out and find people to talk to all of the time. Try learning online. You don’t have to use the video and you can do it from home.

What is your personality style?

How does it affect your study plan that you follow?

Let us know in the comments below.

What makes you come alive?

To “come alive” means to become energized and excited about something.

Here is the question:

“Each day wake up and ask yourself, what will make you feel most alive that day.”

What makes you feel happier?

What makes you feel smaller or less alive?

We all owe it to ourselves to think about this every day.

 

Leave a comment for us today.

Tell us what makes you come alive?

Are you living in the US?

Have you avoided setting up your voicemail in English because you aren’t sure what to say?

Today we’ll show you exactly how to set it up and what to say.

If you don’t have your voicemail set up and you get a business call, most likely the person will not try to call back again so you will miss an opportunity.

What to say in your voicemail message (personal):

  • Part 1: Greeting- “Hi, it’s (name) or ” “Hi you’ve reached (name)” or “You’ve reached (name’s) mobile.”
  • Part 2: Explain the situation: “I”m not available now” or “I can’t come to the phone right now” or “I’m not here right now.”
  • Part 3: Call to action: “Please leave your name, number and a brief message and I will get back to you as soon as I can.” or “Please leave a message and I will get back to you.”

 

Business voice message in English:

  • Part 1: Greeting- “You’ve reached the desk of Michelle Kaplan”
  • Part 2: I am either away from my desk or on another call.”
  • Part 3: “For immediate assistance, please contact (name) and (number)” or “Please leave a message”
  • Part 4: “Thank you and have a great day.”

 

 

Have you set up your voicemail yet?

What questions do you have about how to do it?

Ask us your questions in the comments.

We have a HOT new IELTS video training out! Get it here and learn how to get a 7 or higher on your IELS exam.

This morning one of our listeners just took the Speaking test and we got a great question from her.

She had two questions:

1- “Is it bad that the examiner asked me to speak louder?”

2- “Is it ok that I took a quick sip of water during the test?”

Neither of these issues is a problem that will affect your grade.

But you must speak loudly enough that the examiner can hear you of course.

Also, it’s a great idea to record yourself when you practice the IELTS Speaking test and then go back and listen and note down if you are using any language crutches or making other mistakes.

What other questions do you have about the IELTS exam?

Ask us in the comments section below!

When someone has a bad idea and you don’t agree or you don’t want to accept the invitation, how can you say it in English without offending the person?

Today you will find out exactly how to do it.

Here are some nice ways to reject someone’s idea without being rude (how to validate someone’s idea):

  • “That’s a great idea but what do you think about….(another suggestion)”
  • “Hmm good thought. I think… (another suggestion)”
  • “Interesting idea. What about…”
  • “Unfortunately I don’t think that would work. Let’s…”

 

What other phrases do you use to validate someone’s idea in English?

Share your ideas in the comments below.

 

Are you using crutches when it comes to the IELTS Speaking test?

Today you’ll find out why crutches can be deadly on the IELTS exam.

Language crutches in English are “like,” “um,” “uh” and words like those. When you use those on the IELTS Speaking test you lose points for both fluency and vocabulary.

You lose fluency points because you are repeating yourself and you lose vocabulary points because it sounds like you don’t have the vocabulary words that you need.

You have to stop using them on the exam even though you hear native speakers using them all of the time and they are natural.

How to break this habit:

Record yourself speaking. Listen to the recording. If you hear “like” and  “um” too many times, you need to keep focusing on reducing those language crutches.

You can also join Toastmasters. When you join the group, your colleagues will listen to your speeches and will note down how many times you have used these filler words.

Do you use language crutches?

How do you plan to break this habit for the IELTS?

Let us know in the comments below.

Do you struggle when it comes to dating in English?

It can be quite a challenge to try to find the “love of your life”!

In today’s episode, our dating consultant, Jessica Coyle will show you how to deal with it when you become discouraged or disappointed.

Here is Jessica’s advice:

  • Don’t be afraid to give in to sadness by crying. It’s good for your body to cry and it makes you feel better. In American culture it’s often not accepted for men to cry but it’s a healthy thing to do.
  • Get active! You don’t have to go to the gym. Get outside. Get the endorphins going. This also releases the toxins and makes you feel much better.
  •  Learn a new skill. Stretch your mind. Teach yourself to play the guitar. Set a personal goal. Use an app like Duolingo.
  • Get someone to talk to. Talk to a friend or a therapist or a coach. It always helps to talk it out. Other people can give you a sense of perspective.
  • Try meditation. Work on your breathing because our thoughts can become repetitive. You may have negative thoughts about your dating life. This could really change your outlook on things.

 

Jessica suggests this podcast: Invisibilia

 

headshot (1)

Jessica Coyle is our dating consultant at All Ears English.

She lives in New York City and writes a dating blog called Hopeful Disasters.

Check out her latest article called Punching Sadness Where It Hurts and It Hurts Everywhere

 

 

What did you think about today’s show?

Tell us your response to this question: Is it accepted for men to cry in your culture?

Let us know your thoughts!

Do you ever run out of things to say on the IELTS Speaking test?

What should you do in this situation?

This happens a lot in Part 2 of the Speaking test.

Follow two steps if your mind goes blank and you run out of ideas:

  • Be honest. Say something like “That’s all I can think of to say on that topic.” “I can’t believe it’s not two minutes yet.” This will also help with your anxiety. If you say what you are experiencing, you will feel much more relaxed.
  • Next, think of something else to say. Think of anything in your personal experience that connects to the topic in any way.

Click here to learn how to come up with creative ideas for IELTS Writing.

Follow these two steps the next time you run out of ideas on the Speaking test and let us know how it goes.

Share your thoughts in the comments below.

Do you know what the biggest myth about writing and speaking on the IELTS is?

What should you do if the questions that you get on the IELTS speaking test are too broad?

You should talk about examples from your personal life.

Tell your own stories. Think about your most recent experiences from the topic.

For example:

Q: Do you enjoy exercise?

A: Yeah just yesterday I was going on a bike ride and I saw cherry blossoms.

Don’t be afraid to “boast” about yourself.

Also use linking phrases to get a higher fluency and coherence score. Examiners listen for them.

Use linking words like:

  • “In fact…”
  • “Indeed”
  • “Actually”

What questions do you have about the IELTS exam?

Let us know in the comments below.

Do you have a 5-year plan?

Do you think it’s important to have one?

Today we’ll talk about why sometimes it’s good to let your plans go and relax into life a bit.

 

Today we talked about a great quote:

“It is always wise to look ahead but difficult to look further than you can see.”

-Winston Churchill

You can make as many plans as you want in life but you never know what’s going to happen.

 

Here is another great quote:

“Life is what happens to you when you’re busy making other plans.”

-John Lennon

 

What do you think?

Should you have a 5-year plan?

Do you plan for the future?

Let us know your thoughts in the comments.

 

Did you know that you should spend LESS time on grammar when you prepare for the IELTS exam?

Does that sound strange to you?

If it does then you should listen to today’s episode.

Why shouldn’t you focus on grammar for IELTS?

It’s not worth the time and it’s almost impossible to improve your grammar score for the speaking section quickly. Don’t waste your time on grammar textbooks.

Instead of doing grammar exercises, you should try reading a newspaper to improve your reading score.

In speaking, you are graded on 4 things:

  • fluency and coherence- keep talking and don’t use “ums” and “uhs’
  • vocab- use exaggerated language, slangs, and idioms to get a 7
  • pronunciation- get a 7 by using intonation and emotions
  • grammar- this will be much harder to improve

Remember, your speaking score is an average. You can still get a speaking score of 7 without focusing on grammar.

 

What do you think?

Are you focusing a lot on grammar?

Are you going to change your strategy after today’s episode?

Let us know below.

English acronyms are fun and easy when it comes text messaging and emailing but you need to know what impression you give the person when you use them!

Today we’ll show you some common English acronyms and what impression they create. We’ll also give you some alternatives.

Here are some common acronyms in English when we send text messages:

 

  • BRB (“Be Right Back”) – This could sound relatively young. Some alternatives are “back in a minute” or “be back soon”
  • LOL (“Laughing out loud”)- A lot of people get annoyed by this one. This could be used in a text message. A good alternative is “haha”

300x257_web-FINAL

  • TTYL (“Talk to you later”)- This one also sounds really young. A more mature alternative is “talk soon” or “talk to you soon” or actually writing out “talk to you later”
  • SMH (“Shaking My Head”)- This is a newer acronym. You can use this when you disapprove of something that someone has done.
  • OMG (“Oh my gosh”)- This can also be annoying. Other options are: “Oh wow” or “I can’t believe it.”

 

Which acronyms have you used?

Let us know in the comments below.

It was long, cold, and tough winter and now we want to talk about spring!

Do you know how to talk about spring in English?

This is a great way to start English conversations these days.

In today’s episode you’ll get a bunch of ways to talk about it with a native speaker.

 

Here are some expressions from today’s episode:

  • 300x257_web-FINALTo spring into action: To get going, to move into action, to act quickly, to get started quickly
  • To have a spring in your step: To have energy, to move easily and quickly, to be light on your feet
  • Spring cleaning: To clean out your home or space after the winter, to get rid of things that you don’t need anymore
  • To spring up: To come up, to arise spontaneously
  • To spring ahead: To advance
  • To spring something on someone: To surprise someone about something, to put someone under pressure with a surprise
  • To spring for something: To buy something that is slightly out of your budget

 

Do you love springtime?

What do you like to do in the spring?

Let us know in the comments!

Are you worried about the IELTS Listening test?

Do you think it’s stressful to answer questions and listen at the same time?

You don’t have to listen to every word and understand everything on the IELTS Listening test.

There are 3 different listening skills and you only use one of them on the IELTS:

  • Listening for detail: Listening for every word that the professor says and taking notes on everything they say. You might do this when you watch a movie and you need to hear every line. You don’t need to do this on IELTS. You do listen for details but you don’t listen to every word.
  • Listening for gist: Listening for the main idea. You don’t do this on the IELTS exam.
  • Listening for specific information: This is the skill that you need for the IELTS Listening test. This is a test strategy. On the test you look at the question, underline key words and then listen for those specific key words and the answer that is right next to them.

300x257_web-FINAL

Remember, you don’t have to understand every word on the IELTS exam.

Use listening quizzes that you can find for free online. Try esl-lab.com

When you use these listening activities you should approach it the same way you would on the test.

That means that you should read the questions before you listen. Focus on the key words like names, numbers, special verbs and nouns.

Also, predict an answer. Know what to listen for- is it an adjective or a verb to go before one particular word.

Click here to learn more about how to listen, read, and write at the same time on the IELTS Listening test

What aspect of IELTS Listening are you struggling with?

Did this episode answer your questions?

Let us know other questions that you have below in the comments.

Do you know what to say to someone after a good or a bad date in English?

Today you will find out from our favorite dating consultant, Jessica Coyle.

You’ll also get some new English dating vocabulary and terms that you can use in the real world!

What should we do if we have just had a good date:

(1) Send a text message that evening and say:

  • “I had a really nice time.”
  • “Had a great time tonight. (I) Would like to see you again.”
  • “It was really nice meeting you, let’s hit up (go to) the MOMA.”
  • “Thanks so much for a great time.”
  • “I enjoyed meeting you.”

 

(2) Jessica likes to research the person online after a good first date to find out more about the person.

 

If you had a bad date you can say:

  • “I didn’t feel any chemistry but best of luck.”
  • “I got more of a friend vibe.”

 

Key vocab from today:

  • To ghost someone: To disappear and stop communicating after you have been on a date
  • To do the fade-away: Similar to ghosting (see above)
  • A vibe: A general feeling or impression
  • To go Dutch: To split the bill

 

headshot (1)

Jessica’s Bio:

Jessica Coyle has been teaching English since 2007.

She received her Master’s in TESOL in 2013, finishing with a professional project researching the use of improvisational comedy teaching techniques to teach English as a second language.

She has studied and performed improv comedy all over Korea, China, Canada and the United States.

She writes a dating blog called Hopeful Disasters.

Today you’ll find out why staying in the same place will never get you to where you want to go and how to make an effective change quickly and easily.

Here it today’s quote:

“To get something you never had you have to do something you never did.”

-Unknown

“If you do what you’ve always done, you’ll get what you’ve always gotten.”

-Tony Robbins

It’s so easy to get into a habit but we have to step back and ask ourselves if our habits are creating the results that we want.

Time goes by fast.

We often realize that we have been doing the same thing for years and we haven’t achieved our goals.

Here are some examples of our goals:

  • Michelle’s new goal: She wants to build upper body strength. How is she working towards the goal? She is using resistance bands at her home a few times every week.
  • Lindsay’s new goal: She wants to deepen her meditation practice. She has started going to her meditation center every morning.

What about you?

What are you going to change after listening to today’s episode?

What change do you want to create in your life?

Tell us in the comments below

Today we have our dating consultant, Jessica Coyle, back on the show!

Today Jessica is back to talk about the concept of chemistry in dating in urban US culture.

Jessica is going to tell us how to know if we actually have chemistry with someone.

Chemistry: A magnetic pull between two people where you seem to understand the other person and something is different about that person to you.

 

 Two different types of chemistry:

  • Slow burn chemistry: You start out as friends and then chemistry and attraction gradually builds over time. Features of the other person that seemed strange or unattractive initially start to become endearing and attractive.
  • Quick chemistry/limerance: This is more of an infatuation. Jessica thinks that online dating and set ups reward this type of attraction. These connections can be really intense at first and then can fizzle out and not end well. At the same time, sometimes these attractions can work in the long run.

 

What about in your culture?

What are your deal breakers when it comes to dating?

In your culture, how much influence do your parents and family have when it comes to your choice of a partner?

 

Here are some dating vocabulary words that we talked about today:

  • Limerance
  • Lukewarm feelings
  • Slow burn chemistry
  • Quirks (personality and physical)
  • Deal breakers
  • Red Flag

 

headshot (1)

Jessica Coyle has been teaching English since 2007.

She received her Master’s in TESOL in 2013, finishing with a professional project researching the use of improvisational comedy teaching techniques to teach English as a second language.

She has studied and performed improv comedy all over Korea, China, Canada and the United States.

How to find Jessica Online:

Her dating blog: https://hopefuldisasters.wordpress.com/

 

Let us know your thoughts on this topic.

What are your deal breakers?

How important is chemistry when it comes to dating in your home culture?

Are you STILL making this English mistake?

We hear a lot of intermediate learners still getting confused between “I would like” and “I like” in English.

Today you’ll get two examples of how to solve this mistake.

1) “Do you like coffee?” This means do you enjoy coffee?

2) “Would you like a coffee?” This means that someone is inviting you to have a coffee or is offering you a coffee.

Listen to the role plays in the episode to hear how Lindsay and Michelle use “Do you like” versus “Would you like.”

Are YOU still making this mistake?

Leave us a sample phrase or question in the comments below!

Today we have a special guest on the show!

Our guest will challenge your assumption that SPEAKING is the most important part of learning English.

Julian sees learning languages as a simple, two-step process:

Step 1: Learn the language that we need for our specific situation

Step 1: Apply the language and use it

Julian’s tips are useful not only if you are just working to improve your communication skills but also if you want to get a high score on the IELTS Exam or another big test.

You need a balanced study plan where you use all four skills to work toward that higher score.

Keep reading to get Julian’s tips!

 

Julian’s 3 Tips- How to Keep it Practical:

  • Try to do many different kinds of things in the language: English is a process. Spend time with it. You can’t HAVE it. You can’t GET it. You need to constantly maintain it.  Julian says that there is no difference between “experiencing” the language and “learning” the language, as far as your brain is concerned. By experiencing the language in many different ways, we can acquire chunks of English which will help us to sound more native-like. You should try to encounter the language through reading, speaking, listening, writing, etc. Get a more well-rounded experience of the language instead of just focusing on speaking.

 

  •  Try to get a balance between intensive activity and relaxed exposure: Some of your work should be deliberate, focused, practical, intensive study. At the same time, some of your work should be a more relaxed encounter with the language. You need to take it in in a way that is enjoyable and easy. You could try listening to music in the language or watching TV. The key is getting a balance between the two forms of learning.

 

  • Focus on things which are useful to YOU: Exclude things that aren’t useful to you. Don’t bother to learn things that you won’t need to use. According to Julian, we don’t become fluent in English. We become fluent in specific topics such as cooking, law, politics, art, etc. Choose your focus and pursue English in that area. Drop the idea of becoming “fluent” in English in general.

 

Julian’s Bio:

Our guest today is an English teacher from England, living in Japan. He is the father of three bilingual children, is halfway through a PhD program in Psycholinguistics and used his insight about language learning to go from speaking poor Japanese in 2008 to being a translator in 2010. Our guest today is Julian from DoingEnglish.com

 

What do you think?

Have you focused down on one specific area of English learning?

What area are you focusing on?

Let us know in the comments!

Do you have any enemies?

Do you have any “frenemies”?

Here is today’s quote for a Deep Thoughts Thursday: “Always forgive your enemies. Nothing annoys them so much.”

– Oscar Wilde

 

What does this quote mean?

This quote is somewhat “cheeky” and it says that if we want to annoy our enemies even more, we can forgive them.

Also, the quote is telling us that it’s better for us to forgive.

It helps us lead healthier lives.

When you have an enemy you carry a lot of negative energy around and it takes up space in your body and in your brain.

 

According to Mayoclinic.org, the benefits of forgiveness include:

  • Stronger immune system
  • Less anxiety
  • Lower blood pressure

 

A few great vocabulary words from today’s episode:

  • Frenemy: “Friend” + “enemy”= someone that you care about and you are there for them but you can’t get along with them on an everyday basis and many things about that person bother you.
  • To hold a grudge: You keep thinking about something that someone did to you, you hold on to your anger. You don’t move on.

 

 

Do you have someone to forgive?

What is holding you back from forgiving that person?

Share your experience in the comments.

This is our 300th episode!

We are happy to be able to continue All Ears English for our amazing listeners!

Today let’s talk about how All Ears English got started, what we do to publish each episode, and what it means for you if you want to put your creative vision out into the world!

 

Today we’ll talk about:

  • The idea: Lindsay was feeling frustrated with what she had seen in the ESL field. English learning didn’t seem to be working for many students. She was also listening to podcasts at the time and she felt an intuitive voice saying that maybe it was time to start a podcast so she found a partner to work with and got started. If you aren’t hearing any voices in your heart of mind about your creative project, look at what’s needed in the world and go out and investigate that idea.
  • The background research: We tried our best to avoid “analysis paralysis.” We did a little bit of research to see that other people were doing this and that people were downloading these types of podcasts. When you get started on your creative vision, don’t let “research” hold you back because it may be a form of procrastination. Research is a way of staying safe and not taking the risk of launching.
  • Production/recording: We kept in mind Seth Godin’s philosophy of “the dip.” We hit a dip in our first three months of producing this project. All Ears English almost failed.  We couldn’t get the audio right. There was a learning curve, especially with the technology. We had to throw out an entire day of work because it wasn’t good enough. If you are creating something, you are going to hit a dip. You need to keep pushing beyond the dip because in the long run you will be happy that you did.
  • Editing: Quality is king. This may sound contradictory to “Connection NOT Perfection” but it’s not because we consider our work to be art. We don’t seek perfection but we do seek the highest possible quality that we can reach. Remember, people want to see that you are human. You make mistakes and it’s fine but quality also matters. Find a balance. When you put out your vision keep this in mind.
  • Publishing: This is the crucial moment. You have finished your project and now it’s time to show your “art” to the world. In this moment a lot of people don’t publish or they don’t “ship” because they get scared. Why is it scary? It’s scary because you are vulnerable at this time and anyone can come and criticize what you have done. Reid Hoffman says, “If you aren’t embarrassed by the first version of your product then you have launched too late.”
  • Rinse and repeat: Four times per week we publish episodes. You need to put your work out into the world on a regular basis, not just once. This builds up a sense of resilience and self confidence. No matter what you’re working on, there is always going to be someone who doesn’t like your work but that doesn’t matter.

 

** Get a chance to meet with Lindsay on Skype for 15 minutes!

If we get 300 comments we will choose one person to meet with Lindsay on Skype and practice English.

 

What are YOU working on?

What is your creative art or vision that you are putting out into the world?

Answer these questions:

1) What are you working on?

2) What challenges have you had?

3) What have you learned?

When you meet someone for the first time in English, whether it’s a date or just a first-time meeting with a friend or colleague, there are certain topics that you should NEVER discuss.

Today you’ll find out what they are with our favorite AEE dating consultant, Jessica Coyle.

A few weeks ago we talked about what four things you SHOULD talk about on a first date in English or at a first meeting but today we’ll show you what you should avoid.

4 Topics to AVOID on a first date or first meeting in English:

  • Politics: You can casually mention your political interests but don’t get drawn into a political debate or discussion. Jessica calls this “quicksand” because you can start to sink and you’ll get stuck and you won’t be able to get out of it. It’s better to bring up this topic once you already know someone well and after you know their triggers well.
  • Age:  You should definitely avoid asking the person their exact age. Also, this means that you should not ask people about their timeline in terms of when they want to get married or have kids. It’s too direct and too intense for a first date or first conversation. You might terrify the person if start asking these questions too early.
  • Religion: You probably have a rough idea of your date’s religion and it will be important later but it’s too personal to get into during a first date. It’s ok to share your own religion if you want to but don’t ask the person directly what their religion is.
  •  Education:  This is tricky. Jessica says that the goal in not asking this question is to avoid coming off as arrogant or judgmental. If you ask the person where they went to school or how many degrees they have, it will be clear that you are fishing for information regarding their intelligence or social status. You might make the other person feel bad if you ask this question. Try to figure out if there is an intellectual connection instead.

Jessica’s Bio:

headshot (1)

Jessica is the author of Hopeful Disasters where she explores dating in New York City.

She is also an ESL teacher in New York City.

Check out her blog here!

What is the difference between “come” and “go” in English?

This is a big mistake that a lot of English learners make!

Are you making this mistake? Let’s stop it today. Today you’ll get a simple strategy to use when you choose between “come” and “go.”

Here is the trick to remember “come” versus “go”: Where is the speaker?

If the speaker is in the place that he is talking about, he says “why don’t you come to New York?”

In this case, the speaker is in New York.

If he says, “I plan to go to Boston” then he is not in Boston.

Keep it simple! Stick to this rule and it will clear up your confusion every time.

Phrasal verbs with “come” and “go”:

  • To come around: To visit (at someone’s home) or to get better, to return to normal. Here is an example, “You are in an argument with a friend now but I hope your friend comes around.”
  • To come to: To regain awareness and consciousness after fainting or after passing out. “In hot yoga, if you faint and then you come to, everyone will be standing over you and staring.”
  • To go through: To deal with something, to struggle with something that is hard, maybe a break up, a divorce, a hard time financially. “Are you going through anything difficult these days?”
  • To go into: To enter something, to start to talk about something, an idea, a topic. “Today we went into a lot of great topics.”

Write a sample sentence below to show us that you understood today’s episode!

We hope to read your example soon!

What is the difference between being original and imitating?

Which one will get you further in life?

Today is a Deep Thoughts Thursday so we have a quote:

“It is better to fail in originality than to succeed in imitation.”

-Herman Melville

 

What does this mean for English learners?

Don’t follow a formula.

Be creative with your words.

Don’t focus too much on being perfect.

Get creative with your tone of voice.

Learn different ways to say different things.

 

Check out this episode about the Zone of Genius.

 

Where does this quote resonate with you?

Let us know in the comments.

We want to hear from you!

Do you feel like you never get a chance to speak English?

Even when you attend an English class or work with an English tutor do you leave the class feeling like you haven’t spoken at all?

If so, then you are not alone.

A lot of students feels this way.

Today we have a guest, Jason Newnum, who is an American English teacher.

He teaches on the italki platform and he is available for lessons now!

Jason has a special class called “Student Speaks, Teacher Listens.”

Why did Jason create this class?

Jason created this class because when he took Spanish classes he noticed that he was not getting much speaking practice at all.

He felt discouraged and didn’t get much better.

He realized that the same problem was happening with English students.

Jason wants to solve this problem.

Why is Jason’s class different?

  • He makes sure that students talk more, about 80% of the time
  • He feels comfortable being quiet, he doesn’t get nervous like other teachers do sometimes when they are nervous so he doesn’t fill that space with meaningless chatter

A typical class with Jason:

  • He asks you what’s new with you
  • He gives you a short article or video clip and asks for your opinion
  • He asks great follow-up questions- directly related to YOU and YOUR experiences
  • He writes out your mistakes in the Skype chat box so that you have a record of your mistakes

Jason’s Bio:

Jason Newnum teaches English as a second language, in Bariloche, Argentina, and lives there with his family. Although he received his university degree in Spanish and now lives in a Spanish speaking country, his Argentine wife speaks English and Spanish equally. So it’s difficult to force himself to practice Spanish, when it’s easier to speak English with his wife. So he understands the frustrations of having to force ourselves to practice a foreign language everyday.

Do you have this problem with your English class?

Are you planning to try Jason’s class?

If so, let us know when you are going to get started with Jason.

Do you ever want to get the status of someone’s progress on a project or an assignment but do you get confused about how to ask without making the person feel pressured?

Today you’ll find out how to do it successfully in English.

Ways to check on progress:

  • “How’s it going? I look forward to receiving the files.”
  • “Any updates?
  • ” How are things progressing?”
  • “How are things moving forward?”
  • “How are things going?”
  • “Do you need any feedback on anything?”
  • “Do you want me to check your work?”

Slightly more direct ways to check on progress:

  • “What’s your timeline?”
  • “How’s your timeline looking?”
  • “I just wanted to check in. When do you think you’ll be able to get that done?”

 

What other phrases do you use when you want to check on someone’s progress?

Let us know in the comments below.

April Fool’s Day is coming up later this week.

Are you ready for it?

How do you celebrate April Fool’s Day in your culture?

Today you’ll learn what many Americans do on April Fool’s Day and you’ll get a few new vocabulary words for this day.

It’s common to play jokes on friends and colleagues at work or at college in the United States.

It’s especially common in colleges because students live together with their friends in dormitories.

Vocabulary for April Fool’s Day:

  • Gullible: To trust people and believe things that people say, even if those things are not true.
  • Practical Joke: A joke that you play on someone (not a spoken joke). You act out this kind of joke.
  • A prank: A practical joke, a joke that is acted out
  • Gag gift: A silly gift that is not meant to be serious but is meant to be a joke

What should you do if someone plays a joke on you?

Don’t take it too seriously.

Laugh at it.

Have a good time.

Leave a message in the comments.

How do you celebrate April Fool’s Day?

Let us know.

Today is a Deep Thoughts Thursday and we have an inspiring quote for you!

Let’s talk about success.

 

Here is the quote:

“Success consists of going from failure to failure without loss of enthusiasm.”

-Winston Churchill

 

We can apply this quote to a lot of different aspects of our lives like learning English, dating, and our career paths.

We have to keep going and take on new challenges with a positive attitude even if we have failed many times in the past.

Try to avoid feeling bitter when you take on a challenge and try again.

 

What do you think about this quote?

Do you keep your heart open and stay enthusiastic when you try again with something?

Leave us a comment below and let’s discuss it!

 

What is your fashion style?

Would you like to be able to talk about fashion in English in a more sophisticated way?

Today you’ll get to expand your English fashion vocabulary in this episode with Lindsay and Michelle.

 

Fashion Vocabulary:

 

1) Umbrella term= Bag

  • Purse
  • Backpack
  • Satchel
  • Handbag
  • Pocketbook
  • Evening bag
  • Clutch
  • Wristlet

 

2) Umbrella term= Shoes

  • Sneakers
    • Tennis shoes
    • Walking shoes
  • Boots
    • Hiking boots
  • Heels
  • Flats
  • Sandals
      • Birkenstocks
  • Flip Flops

 

3) Umbrella term= Shirt

  • T-shirt
  • Blouse
  • Tank Top (Spaghetti straps, sleeveless)
  • Sweater
  • Sweatshirt
    • Hoodie (hooded sweatshirt)

 

4) Umbrella term= Jacket

  • Coat (heavier than a jacket)
  • Ski jacket
  • Leather jacket
  • Peacoat

 

 

What do you think?

How do you know when someone is fashionable?

What is your fashion style?

Share it with us in the comments.

In today’s episode you’ll find out how to use the words “crazy” and “insane” as slang words in conversations.

How to use the word “crazy” in a slang form:

  • “I know someone who’s totally crazy because he still hitchhikes.”
  • It was crazy for us to hitchhike. Those were my crazy days.”
  • “Are you crazy about your boyfriend?”
  • “What is the craziest thing you have ever done?”

The slang words “crazy” and “insane” mean wild and out of control.

They could also mean unexpected or out of control.

The words are also used a lot in song lyrics, especially love songs.

If you use these words in a literal way to describe someone who is mentally ill it is rude.

Instead you could say that they are “mentally disabled” or “mentally handicapped” or “mentally challenged.”

Have you ever tried using these slang words in your English conversations?

Share your questions with us in the comments below.

Let’s talk!

Are you busy?

In your home culture, is it considered “cool” to be busy?

In American culture everyone is busy and it’s almost in style to be busy.

We think that’s crazy! Today we are going to give our opinion on this article from the Washington Post called Exhaustion Is Not a Status Symbol.

In American culture, especially in large cities like New York and Boston, things move fast and we often define ourselves based on the things that we do.

We also measure our worth based on what we achieve.

We end up valuing perfectionism and accomplishing things over just living.

Americans don’t take much time off for vacation while in other cultures people take much more vacation time.

How do we know that this is a problem? People in the US always say:

  • “I’ve been crazy busy.”
  • “I have so much going on.”

What can we do about this?

  • Avoid checking emails every three minutes
  • When you complete a task, sit back and reflect, get feedback (this was a suggestion from the article)
  • Take more vacation time

What do you think?

Is being busy considered cool in your culture?

Let us know in the comments.

Are you getting ready for your IELTS exam?

One big challenge on the IELTS is timing on the Writing test.

Today we’ll help you with a great time-management strategy.

You have a total of 60 minutes to do the whole Writing test. Task 2 is 250 words and Task 1 is 150 words so you need to spend more time on Writing Task 2.

We recommend 20 minutes for Task 1 and 40 minutes for Task 2.

However, don’t start with Writing Task 2. Do Task 1 first.

You also need to allow time for planning.

It really depends on you and how you prefer to write but we recommend that you practice and see what’s right for you in terms of planning time.

As a general guideline, you could spend 4 minutes planning and then spend a few minutes after to check your work.

When you practice brainstorming and coming up with ideas in the planning step, don’t forget to write down everything you think of.

In Task 2, spend 5 minutes planning, 30 minutes writing, 5 minutes to check.

You need to practice the timing for all of these steps and adjust it based on what you need.

Practice is the key with time management.

The biggest mistakes that people make with time management on IELTS Writing is when they skip both planning and checking at the end.

When you check, look for spelling, grammar, vocabulary, etc.

Listen to this episode to learn more about how to check your own IELTS Writing test.

What other questions do you have about IELTS Writing?

Let us know in the comments below.

Today let’s talk about how to sound more natural in English when you use the phrase “by the way.”

Michelle and Lindsay will show you some great examples of how to use this phrase.

 

This phrase is useful to do two things:

  • Bring up a random, unexpected topic
  • To continue with the same topic, to add an idea linked to a previous idea

Listen to the episode for a few great examples of how to use “by the way” in English conversations with Lindsay and Michelle.

 

How have you used “by the way” in the past?

Let us know in the comments!

Did you know that being imaginative and creative can get you a 7 on the IELTS exam especially for Speaking Part 3?

This is especially true when it comes to the IELTS Speaking test. Your ideas don’t need to be 100% realistic. What’ more important is the way you deliver your ideas. You can make stuff up and have fun with it!

Today we’ll show you how!

What should you do when you get a Speaking question about the future and you don’t know how to answer the question?

You need to open your mind and be willing to make up your own ideas quickly.

In Part 3 of the Speaking test, they often ask you to guess or predict the future. For example, they might ask, “How might the way people travel change in the future?” With this question you need to make up a creative answer.

A good response is this: “I predict that by 2025 we will all be riding in flying cars.”

This is also useful because when you make up a funny idea, it makes you laugh, which makes you relax and makes you speak more like a real person.

This will also help your vocabulary because you will end up using less common vocabulary when you make up ideas about the future.

If you aren’t used to coming up with your own ideas or if you haven’t learned this in school you can train your mind to be creative.

You already have the ability but you just need to practice it.

Creativity is a muscle.

Flex your imagination!

Try this:

Look at the news and look at the topics in the newspaper. Come up with a prediction for each article headline that you read. Predict what will happen with that specific topic in the future.

Try to entertain the Examiner.

The Examiner is going to give you your score right after Part 3 of the Speaking so it’s good to leave them on a funny and positive note because this could influence your overall Speaking score.

If you are already a naturally funny person then you should amplify that in the Speaking test.

Don’t be afraid of your own ideas and your own personality.

If you are enjoying yourself during the test then your Examiner is probably having fun too.

Next learn how to tell a story in IELTS Speaking Part 2.

Do you have other questions about the Speaking test?

Let us know in the comments below.

Do you ever get confused about whether or not you should tip in an American restaurant?

Do you wonder how much to leave?

When to leave it?

Today you’ll get insider information from Michelle, who used to be a waitress at an American restaurant.

In the United States you MUST tip in a restaurant. Servers only make a few dollars per hour.

They rely on your tips.

How much should you tip?

You should tip 18-20%. However, you do have a choice when it comes to leaving a tip. If you have bad service then you can tip less.

If the waitress is slow or has a bad attitude then you don’t have to leave a lot of money as a tip.

It’s up to you.

 

When should you leave the tip?

If you pay with a credit card they take your card and come back with a receipt and the receipt has a place to write in the tip and the total and then you need to sign the receipt before you leave.

If you are paying in cash it’s ok to leave the cash on the table but put it under a cup or a plate.

 

What if you are with a large party? (A group of 6 or more people):

In this case gratuity (tip) is usually included.

It’s added into the bill before you get the bill.

Make sure you ask if you don’t know if it has already been included.

 

In other episodes we will talk about tipping in a bar, a cafe, the hair salon, a taxi, etc.

 

What is your opinion when it comes to leaving tips in the US?

Have you ever made a mistake with this?

Do you have any additional questions? Please ask us in the comments below.

Are you nervous about the IELTS Speaking test?

Most people get super nervous about this part of the test!

Part of why you are nervous is because you don’t know what kind of questions to expect from the Examiner.

Today we’re going to show you what questions the Examiner is likely to ask on the Speaking test.

We’re also going to show you how to prepare for these questions.

On Part 1 of the Speaking test you will always have to talk about:

  • Work
  • Study
  • Home

 Sample questions for Speaking Part 1:

  • Do you like your apartment?
  • Are there many shops near your apartment?
  • What are you studying? Why did you choose this subject? What will you do when you finish?
  • Clothes
  • Driving a car
  • Excercise
  • Food
  • Health
  • School- what do you remember about your high school? Who was your favorite teacher? What do you like to read? Do you enjoy reading before you go to bed?

** Remember! You can’t give one-word answers. You must expand on your ideas. Give complete sentences or you will get marked down.

When the Examiner asks, “What are you studying?” don’t say “English” instead you can say “At the moment I am studying English at the university downtown.

You can practice Part 1 with a language exchange partner.

Speaking Part 2 and Speaking Part 3:

Questions in Part 2 and Part 3 will always be linked to each other.

Topic: Movies

Part 2: Describe your favorite movie (who, what, when, where, why). You can practice this part by yourself to get comfortable speaking for two minutes.

Part 3: What makes a movie successful? Do you think the director or the actors are more important?

For part 3, you should have 3 things in your answer:

  • Give your opinion
  • Give an example of your opinion
  • Give a concluding sentence

When you prepare for the test, you should write out your answers ahead of time. Later, when you get comfortable with that you can stop writing them out and get better at responding quickly.

Remember, planning ahead and preparing is the key to getting more confidence.

Final tip- check out the NY Times and look at the newspaper sections- those are typical IELTS Speaking topics.

 What other questions do you have for the Speaking test?

Please ask us in the comments below!

Do you ever get into trouble during English phone conversations?

This is one of the biggest challenge for English students, especially at work.

Today we will show you how to get out of trouble if you aren’t understanding someone on the phone.

We’ll give you 8 things to do before or during the call to get the help you need.

 

 How to Rescue Your Phone Call:

  •  Practice to listening to natives as much as possible in your daily life (podcasts, sitcoms, the news on TV)
  • Ask the person to help you:
    • “I’m sorry. I’m having trouble understanding you. Would you (be able to ) say that again?”
    • “Could you repeat that (for me) please?”
    • “Would you mind slowing down a bit? It’s hard to hear you.”
  • Ask the person to follow up with a summary of the conversation by email
  • See if it’s ok to record the conversation
  • Breathe deeply before you get on the call with a native speaker

 

It’s important not to be ashamed if you can’t understand someone in English on the phone.

Don’t pretend to understand when you don’t.

Use one of our strategies above to save your English conversations on the phone.

 

What other tactics have you tried to rescue your English conversations?

Share them with us in the comments!

Norman Viss Expat Coach

Are you going abroad sometime soon?

Have you set an intention for your time abroad?

In today’s episode Lindsay talks with Norman Viss, an expat coach who helps his clients make the most of their time abroad by setting intentions.

How can setting intentions make your life abroad more fulfilling?

  • Think about what kind of expat you are and decide how that will shape your expat life:
    • Are you a foreign assignee? Has your company moved you abroad to work?
    • Are you an international student or former international student?
    • Are you a “love-pat”? (someone who has gone abroad because they have met a partner, are you a traveling spouse?
    • Are you a “greener pastures expat”? This is someone who has gone abroad to find a better place to live including retirees.

 

  • Set goals and don’t just “go with the flow”

    • Do you want to learn a language? Be realistic about what will be possible based on the amount of time that you will be abroad.
    • Be intentional about what kinds of friendships you want while you are abroad.
    • What are your areas of interest? Do you like desserts? Sports? Do you like history? What kind of focus will you have during your time abroad? Will you create a theme for your life abroad?
    • What about your work? What professional goals do you want to accomplish while you are abroad?

 

  • Consider how your life will look after your time abroad:
    • What do you want your life to look like after you return from abroad?
    • What about retirement? If you are going abroad in your 40’s or 50’s then it’s a good idea to think about the future after your time abroad.

 

The key to a happy life abroad is being intentional!

Let us know in the comments below if you have been intentional in your life abroad and how it has affected your experience abroad.

 

 

Norman Viss put down roots in Nigeria (10 years) and the Netherlands (22 years).

He has worked for mission organizations, churches and in the public sector for the City of Amsterdam.

He holds B.A. and Master’s degrees, with majors in cross-cultural and urban studies and theology; he is also an ICF- credentialed coach.

Currently he runs an online business coaching expats around the world (Expat Everyday Support Center) and serves part-time as a clergyman in the Philadelphia area in the USA. Norman is a thankful husband, father and grandfather.

Visit Norman’s coaching website at expateverydaysupportcenter.com

Today get some strategies for how to cultivate more gratitude in your life in English!

Today’s quote:

“When I started counting my blessings, my whole life turned around.”

– Willie Nelson

 

Vocabulary from the quote:

  • To count your blessings: To pay attention to the good things in your life
  • My whole life turned around: My whole life got better, changed direction

 

How can you cultivate more gratitude in your life?

  • Keep a gratitude journal every day, write down your “blessings” and what you are grateful for
  • Focus on the good things that you have in your life, not the bad things
  • Set an alarm on your phone. When the alarm goes off you can think about what you are grateful in that moment.

 

What do you do to cultivate gratitude in your life?

Let us know in the comments.

Today find out how to get a 7 on all 4 sections of the IELTS!

In the Speaking Section:

The examiner looks for four things:

  • Fluency and coherence: Use linking words, don’t pause, don’t repeat yourself
  • Vocabulary: Use a few slang words, a few idioms, a few phrasal verbs- get away from the textbook
  • Grammar: It’s hard to get a 7 in grammar. The only way you can do it is if most of your sentences don’t have mistakes but it’s ok not to get a 7 in grammar because the score is an average. Think about where your strengths are and if they are not in grammar then focus on other areas. Read more about our grammar strategy for IELTS.
  • Pronunciation: This is the easiest one to get a 7. You can do it! Show some personality. Use some intonation. Use drama! You don’t need “perfect English pronunciation.”

The Writing Section:

  • Task 1: Task achievement- you have to include all of the important numbers and you have to have an overall trend. For example, “Overall, numbers increase in this period.”
  • Task 2: They grade you on task response. Did you answer the question? Answer every single part of the question. Also, cohesion and coherence are important. Use linking words and have clear paragraphs. Have an obvious main idea.
  • Vocabulary: You need to use academic phrases and academic linking words.
  • Grammar: It’s hard to get a 7 on this. You need a variety of sentence structures and not a lot of mistakes.

The Reading and Listening Sections:

  • At least 27 correct answers out of 40 will get you an “acceptable” score

Now you know exactly what you need to do to get a 7 on all 4 sections of the IELTS.

Now go get started on your preparation and you will be ready to get that 7!

Let us know your questions in the comments section.

Today you’ll get 3 sentence structures to improve your grammar grade on IELTS Writing Task 1.

On IELTS Task 1 you are shown a graph, table, pie chart, or bar chart. They have numbers and you have to compare and contrast how they change.

You will see a graph that shows “Change Over Time”

The examiner wants you to use different sentence structures for this category.

Here they are:

1) Subject + verb + adverb : “The numbers increased dramatically in 2008.”

2) There was + adjective + noun: “There was a dramatic increase in 2008.”

3) Before +verb-ing: “Before increasing in 2008, the number of surfers experienced a decline.”

Where can you find graphs to use to practice these sentences?

  • Find IELTS forums
  • Go to IELTS.org
  • Go to a bookstore and write down some sentences with your notebook
  • New York Times and USA Today
  • Google Images, type in “bar chart” or “pie chart”

Where else have you found resources like pie charts or graphs to practice these sentence structures for Writing Task 1?

Let us know your ideas below!

Knock-kock jokes are super common in American culture.

Today you’ll find out how to tell a joke like this and make people laugh to build great connections with English speakers in your life.

These kinds of jokes are often told by kids.

They are fun, innocent and clever. They are a play on words.

Joke #1:

“knock knock”

“Who’s there?”

“Canoe”

“Canoe who?”

Can-oe (can you) help me me with my homework?”

 

Joke #2:

“Knock knock”

“Who’s there?”

“Orange”

“Orange who?”

“Orange-ya (aren’t you) gonna let me in?”

 

Joke #3:

“Knock knock”

“Who’s there?”

“Harry”

“Harry who?”

“Harry up (hurry up) it’s cold out here”

 

What knock-knock jokes do you know in English?

Tell us your joke in the comment section below!

Are you nervous about your IELTS Speaking test?

Did you know that there are some easy things that you can do to increase your chances of a higher score on the Speaking test?

The IELTS exam is not completely objective because another person is giving you the score.

Yes, they are trained and there are very specific requirements for each score but they are still human and you can influence the examiner in a positive way to increase your score.

How to build a rapport with the examiner or get their attention:

  • Don’t shake the examiner’s hand. This is not a business deal.
  • Do follow their instructions about where to sit and be respectful.
  • Don’t try to negotiate with the examiner to get a better score.
  • Don’t ask the examiner how you did right after the speaking test is over. The final few minutes before you leave the room are very important so don’t make the examiner angry.
  • Do use your personality. Do Tell personal stories. Don’t say what you think the examiner wants to hear.
  • Do relax, smile, laugh a little bit.
  • Do be polite.
  • Do make eye contact if you can. If you can’t do that then you can look beyond the examiner.

Approach the Speaking section like a formal interview but also show a positive attitude.

It’s supposed to be formal but relaxed.

Final tip! Use these 5 phrasal verbs to impress the examiner on your Speaking test!

Do you have any other questions about the Speaking test on the IELTS?

Please ask your question below.

How can you quickly change the subject in an English conversation and get out of trouble when someone seems uncomfortable?

It’s important to know how to do this if you want to be able to make great connections with people.

How do we know when someone’s uncomfortable in American culture?

  • Their shoulders tense up
  • They don’t make eye contact
  • Their tone of voice changes
  • They hesitate
  • They use “um,” “ya know” and other filler words

 

Today let’s find out how to save the interaction when you have brought up a topic that makes someone uncomfortable.

What questions can you ask to change the topic?

  • “So how’s work going?” (ask about the person’s job or work projects)
  • “How are your parents doing?” (ask about the person’s family)
  • “It’s freezing today, isn’t it?” (or another weather comment)
  •  “Do you have any vacations coming up?’
  • “Have you seen any good movies lately?”

 

What questions do you use in your culture to change the topic if someone is uncomfortable?

Share your ideas in the comments below!

Today, learn 6 phrases to help you enter into conversations with confidence!

 

Entering into a conversation with native English speakers can be difficult.  They often speak fast and might not seem to offer you a chance to speak.  Instead, they will expect that you are going to jump in and speak if you have something to say.

This means that you need to show confidence if you want to get into a conversation.  You need to be able to assert yourself and use the phrases that signal to them that you have something to say.

 

Here are six phrases to help you do that:

“I see what you mean.”: This shows that you agree with the other speaker.  It also gives you the opportunity to follow it up with something extra that comes from you.  You could also say, “Yeah, I totally agree.”

“Actually, I think…”: If you want to disagree, this is a polite way to do it.  You don’t want to show too much disagreement if you’re trying to get into a conversation with a stranger, but polite disagreement might make for a deeper conversation.

“Hey, I have an idea.”: As it suggests, this phrase would help you express a new thought. You could also say: “What about this?”

“Me too!”: This can help show commonality and is a good way to start telling a story. It’s also a very relaxed phrase that sounds natural to Americans.

 

Do you find it intimidating to jump into conversations with English speakers?

Tell us what you think in the comments section below!

Are you nervous about talking for two minutes in speaking section 2 of the IELTS?

Today, get some note taking strategies you can use to ace the IELTS speaking section!

In the IELTS speaking part 1, the examiner asks you about three topics.  But in part 2 you are given a single topic card.  No matter what this topic is, you cannot change it. You have one minute to prepare to speak for two full minutes. How you spend that minute is important.

Because you will have such a specific topic, and such a short amount of time, it’s probably best to write everything you can think of about the topic.  You could do this in a bullet list, or as a mind map.  But you need to have enough to say for those two minutes.

If you do not have practice brainstorming like this, you may want to practice.  Use a topic from a newspaper as an example.

Give yourself a minute (or more) to make a list of notes on the topic.

Then, see if you can use them to speak for two minutes.

Other tips:

  • Practice brainstorming/note-taking every day if possible.  You’re training your brain for thinking, speaking and writing in English.
  • Take all of these notes in English, not your native language!
  • Ideally, your notes will provide you enough to tell a story. Telling a story will enable you to speak for the full two minutes, and help you remain coherent.

Do you have much experience brainstorming?

How do you think it would go for the IELTS speaking section part 2?

Let us know in the comments section below!

Today, meet Kathleen from Canada, and get 3 phrases to connect with locals in the capital city, Ottawa!

Canada is a multicultural and diverse country, and Ottawa is a micro version of that.  It’s a city of one million inhabitants and numerous languages.  It is also a city in touch with nature.  With four distinct seasons, Ottawa has something for everyone.

Though Canada and the United States have some similarities, they also have many differences.  Among these are some subtle differences in using the English language. This includes pronunciation and some commonly used phrases.

Here are Kathleen’s top Canadian phrases to help you blend in when you’re in Ottawa!

  • I’m sorry: Canadians are known for being very polite.  In fact, the culture can be so polite it becomes apologetic.  Sometimes Canadians will begin a sentence, “I’m sorry,” even if they did nothing wrong and aren’t apologizing for anything.
  • Out and About: This means to go exploring or to check something out. A Canadian might say “Let’s go out and about,” or “I was out and about.”
  • Eh?: Often, this word is used the way an American might use the words “right?” or “huh?”  It shows agreement or clarification with other people.  You might hear someone say, “That was a great show, eh?”

Are you going to Ottawa, or Canada?

Have you ever been there?

Share your thoughts in the comments section below!

Kathleen Kuracina italki teacher AEE gues interviewKathleen is a native English speaker from Ottawa, Canada. She has been teaching and tutoring students in  English and beginner French for over three years in Asia, Latin America and Canada. She also speaks French and Spanish, and so understands the challenges and joys of learning a new language. In her experience, conversation is the best way to improve language skills.

Kathleen has worked and continues to work in the areas of community development, and is currently completing her Bachelor of Education.  This summer she will be teaching in Ulaanbataar, Mongolia. She loves meeting people from different cultures and learning new languages.

Today, we welcome back dating expert Jessica Coyle to give you four easy topics for conversation when dating!

 

Conversation can be tricky on a first date.  You might be nervous, and it can be hard to know what’s safe to talk about.  Jessica has a great acronym to help you with simple, safe discussion topics.  It’s FORD, and it stands for:

  • Friends: If you have mutual friends, ask how your date met them.  Or, if you don’t have mutual friends, ask if your date knows anybody in the area where you’re meeting.
  • Occupation: Asking about another person’s job is usually a good conversation starter.  You might say, “What do you do with your time?”  That way, if your date happens to be unemployed, they are still able to give an answer.
  • Recreation: Ask about what somebody likes to do for fun. You might follow up by asking, “How often do you get to do that?”
  • Dreams: This is good for asking hypothetical questions. You could ask things like “Where do you see yourself in ten years?” or “What would you do if you had a billion dollars?”

 

People love talking about themselves, so being interested in others is what might make you more interesting to them.  When starting a conversation, don’t just ask a list disconnected questions.  Follow-up with the other person’s answers to show that you are listening to what they are saying.

 

Are you dating in English?

What are your experiences?

Tell us how it’s going in the comments section below!

 

headshot (1)Jessica Coyle has been teaching English since 2007. She received her Master’s in TESOL in 2013, finishing with a professional project researching the use of improvisational comedy teaching techniques to teach English as a second language. She has studied and performed improv comedy all over Korea, China, Canada and the United States.

 

How to find Jessica Online:

Her dating blog: https://hopefuldisasters.wordpress.com/

Her comedy podcast: NY Pacific

What’s the difference between the IELTS and the TOEFL?

Today, learn what makes these two tests distinct, and how to choose between the them!

The IELTS and the TOEFL have some significant differences.  But that doesn’t mean one is easier than the other.  Many universities will accept either test, so you might be able to choose which one works best for you.  That means it’s a good idea to know how each is unique.

Here is are some points of difference between the two tests:

  • The IELTS exam is completed on paper and by speaking to a person. The TOEFL is done entirely on a computer (even the speaking portion).  For some people, IELTS might feel more “natural.”
  • The listening section in TOEFL uses only North American accents.  IELTS, on the other hand, uses a range of English accents from around the world.  If you have trouble with accents, you might find IELTS more difficult.
  • But IELTS is more predictable.  For example, the test has three reading passages every time.  TOEFL, on the other hand, always has a different number of reading passages.  It also might have longer listening and reading sections.
  • With TOEFL, on one section you have to listen to a conversation and give your opinion.  This means it’s both a writing and speaking section.  IELTS only has distinct listening and reading sections.

Learn more about IELTS and TOEFL differences:

Check out our episode series with Jamie Miller form English Success Academy.

Learn about IELTS and TOEFL writing differences

Which exam sounds easier to you?

Let us know why in the comments section below!

In Part 2 of today’s episode, Lindsay and Mo break down their unrehearsed, first time meeting from Part 1, and talk about what it means to you learning English!

 

In Part 1 of this episode, Lindsay met Mo.  They hadn’t met before and didn’t know what was going to come up in their spontaneous conversation.  Now, in Part 2, the two of them discuss what worked, and what didn’t.

 

Some of the discussion points in Part 2:

  • How can you feel confident in English conversations?
  • How can you be respectful about gender and other differences when meeting someone new?
  • How can you allow your true curiosity about the other person come out even though your English isn’t perfect?

 

What did you get out of this conversation?

Share your thoughts in the comments section below!

In Part 3 of today’s episode, Mo will show you three ways to develop authentic, bulletproof confidence when you speak English with his unique method!

 

In Part 1 and 2 of this episode, Lindsay and Mo had an authentic English conversation and analyzed what worked, and what didn’t.  Now, in Part 3, Mo discusses Be in English, his method for learning how to have the best conversations possible in English.

 

Here are the main principles of the Be in English system:

1. If you know enough English to listen to this podcast, you can discuss anything in English!  By using creativity, you are capable of joining a conversation and having a voice.

2. Be aware of your self-consciousness and shame about not speaking perfect English.  Accept it, realize that your English will never be “perfect,” but don’t get too close to the idea.

3. Work with “naked listening.”  That is, listen closely to a recording of English.  Listen several times if necessary until you can distinguish every sound.  Practicing this will change your orientation to listening.

 

You can find and work with Mo Riddiford and his Be in English system on italki.

 

What do you think about the Be in English system?

Share your thoughts in the comments section below!

Today, listen to Part 1 of a real, authentic example of two people using English to get to know each other! 

In Part 1 of this episode, Lindsay meets Mo.  Mo is from New Zealand but has lived all over the world.  He currently lives in Germany and teaches English.  The two of them talk about this, and about learning a language and living in a different culture.

Some of the discussion points in Part 1:

  • Why do people want to learn English?
  • How can they be relaxed enough to learn it?
  • Is it okay to accept that you’ll never be a native speaker?

What did you get out of this conversation?

Share your thoughts in the comments section below!

Today, Lindsay and Michelle discuss the top taboos to look out for in American workplace culture!

 

A taboo is something that is improper or unacceptable based on culture or region.  Different companies might have their own taboos, but most American workplaces probably have many of the same ones.

An article by Barbara Mason outlines the biggest of these taboos.  Here are a few of them, and how to avoid them:

  • Spreading rumors: To spread a rumor is to make up an untrue story about somebody, and tell it to others.  Americans tend to look down on people who do this.  If you want to be trusted and have positive relationships, avoid gossip!
  • Taking credit for another’s work: This means telling others that you did the work or achieved a success when, in fact, somebody else did.  Again, Americans won’t trust anybody suspected of doing this, so don’t do it.
  • Falling asleep at work: It may not be natural to be completely energized for 8 straight hours, but at minimum your boss will expect you to be awake.  Try taking a break from your desk, going for a short walk or stepping outside to refresh yourself.
  • Lying about an academic background: Honesty is very important to American bosses.  If you lie about your academic background, you’re likely to be fired when you get caught. The best thing to do is to present the academic background that you do have in the best possible way.

 

What are the top workplace taboos where you live?

Tell us all about them in the comments section below!

How can you increase your vocabulary range for the IELTS? 

Today, learn 3 steps for building a more dynamic vocabulary for the IELTS exam!

You need to have words that are useful for academia and formal situations, but also with your friends on the street.

This is key to having a more natural sounding English.

But how do you build this range of vocabulary?

Jessica has three steps for building it.  They include:

Step 1: Getting the vocabulary: Newspapers are a great resource for this.  A newspaper like the USA Today is more understandable, while the New York Times is written at a higher level.  A magazine like the Economist is even higher.

Step 2: Recording it: For every article you read, choose maybe five new words to learn.  Keep them in context. Maybe write a summary of the article that uses these new words.

Step 3: Remembering it: Develop a system for studying these new vocabulary words.  Try to review the words at least two or three times a week. Also, try to use these new words in conversation.

Don’t stop here! Keep learning!

For more awesome vocabulary episodes, check out work idioms for IELTS and happiness idioms for the IELTS Speaking test.

What are you doing to build a range of vocabulary?

Tell us what you’re doing in the comments section below!

Are you worried about losing energy and focus on IELTS test day?

Today you’ll find out why some students lose focus and energy easily and quickly on the IELTS and why others are able to stay awake and energized throughout the entire exam.

How to Keep Your Energy High for IELTS Day:

  • Eat Breakfast: You need protein that will stick with you all day like eggs as well as carbohydrates that will give you the energy that you need like oatmeal. You can also try almond milk, nuts, fruit, etc.
  • Bring Water to the Test: Remember that when you bring your water bottle into the IELTS exam, you cannot have a label on the bottle. Tear the label off before you go in. Prepare for this ahead of time.
  •  Get Fresh Air and Exercise: This is a great way to keep your focus alive and to keep your mind awake. Ty to get in a short, brisk walk before you check in and at noon after you finish the Writing section. This will help you be ready for the Speaking test in the afternoon.

Do you have great strategies to maintain your energy on IELTS test day?

Let us know your ideas in the comments below!

Today you’ll find out which accents will be on the listening section of the IELTS and where you can practice those accents for free.

Are you confused about which English accents will be on the IELTS?

There are a variety of accents on IELTS. If you buy books from a British publisher then you will hear mostly British accents.

However, on the test you will hear a variety of accents from around the world. Still, you need to get used to British English and other accents.

You can find British accents on Luke’s English Podcast.

Here are a few other resources with a mix of accents but also a lot of videos from England:

** You can also view transcripts and take quizzes on these sites.

More Hot Resources!

Have you found any other great resources to prepare with a variety of accents?

Please let us know in the comments section below!

Today, learn three tactics to remember names in English, and why it’s important to do so!

A name is a person’s most basic possession and part of their identity.  It’s the sweetest sound to their ears.  For this reason, Alan believes it’s important to get a person’s name right, and to show an interest in it.  But it’s not always easy to do that, especially with names you are unfamiliar with.

Here are Alan’s tips for remembering new names:

  • If a name is unfamiliar, ask them to repeat it.  This helps you learn their name and also shows a respectful commitment to learning it.  Simply say, “Your name is a little difficult for me, but I’d really like to get it right. Could you say it again?”
  • Ask for their business card.  This works best in a business context, though students may also have business cards.  Reading the name might make it easier to remember.
  • Make up a mnemonic, or memory aid.  Think of what the unfamiliar name sounds like in your native language and use that to help you remember.  This is a way to bridge your language and English.

Alan suggests you also learn common names in the English-speaking world, and that you try asking others if their names have any special meanings or significances.

How do you deal with learning new names?

Share your experiences in the comments section below!

Alan Headbloom is an intercultural trainer, a professional English teacher and a talk show host. He frequently appears as a speaker on topics such as cultural diversity and workplace inclusion. He lives in Michigan, USA where he and his wife produce the show Feel Like You Belong, a show about immigrants creating a new life in the United States.

Visit Alan’s Website: Feel Like You Belong and Alan Headbloom- Cross Cultural Communication

Today you’ll learn what grammar risks you should take on IELTS to get a 7 and when to play it safe with your grammar choices.

Do you know how complex your grammar needs to be to get a score of 7?

For a 7 you need a mix of sentence structures for the IELTS.

To get a 7 you need simple (subject + verb “I go to the store”) and compound sentences (two simple sentences put together using conjunctions “I go to the store and I like to shop”) and complex sentences (adding a dependent clause such as “I go to the store which is near my house because I love to buy the food that they have”).

However, you also need to be sure that you don’t have a lot of mistakes.

It’s ok to make some mistakes. You can make mistakes up to a band score of 8.

You should play it safe on the IELTS and use the grammar structures that you are comfortable with.

Don’t try using rare grammar tenses like the past perfect.

Don’t experiment with new tenses on the IELTS exam.

To sum up, to get a 7 you need 80% of your sentences to have no mistakes. You should get comfortable with relative clauses because it’s a great way to mix in the more advanced grammar that you need and they are easy.

How can you add these more complex grammar points?

Try to make it relevant to you when you practice.

What tenses have you used on the IELTS exam?

Tell us in the comments!

Today, learn 3 ways to do it with italki teacher Arianne!

 

Arianne believes that reading is critical to learning English.  It’s a great way to expand your vocabulary and learn the grammar.  It’s also visual learning, and something you can do by yourself.

 

Here are Arianne’s 3 tips for improving your English with reading:

  • Choose something that interests you. Follow your interests and passions.  There are endless possibilities on the internet, whether blogs or news websites.  Make sure you’re connecting with the material you’re reading.
  • Read with a dictionary.  Reading is a great activity for building your vocabulary.  You may not want to look up every new word, but be active about learning words you see over and over.
  • Make reading a routine in your daily life.  Reading doesn’t have to be work.  In fact, it is one of the least stressful activities you can do.  Try to give it 15 or 30 minutes a day if possible.

 

Do you make reading a part of your English learning?

How do you do it?

Let us know in the comments section below!

 

Arianne is a CELTA certified professional teacher with seven years experience teaching ESL and other subjects.  She has worked with both adults and teenagers from around the world, and has taught in several different countries outside the US, including New Zealand and Spain. Arianne uses a very relaxed teaching style which she believes helps students learn English in a way that is both natural and enjoyable, while still being informative and useful.  She speaks Spanish and French, and so understands firsthand the difficulties of learning a second language.

 

Today, learn how interruption is a part of American speaking culture, and how you can participate!

Americans often interrupt each other.  It can appear rude, and can cause frustration, but it happens.  Don’t take it personally.  Instead, learn how it works so you can take part in this aspect of spoken American English culture.

There are many phrases you can use when being interrupted, or when interrupting others.  Some of them include:

  • Sorry or Oops: These might be said not only by the person doing the interrupting, but also by the person who is interrupted.
  • Go ‘head (ahead) and No, you go: These phrases permit the other person to interrupt you.
  • No problem: This indicates that you are okay with the interruption that just occurred.

Other common interruption phrases include:

  • What was that?
  • Uh huh.
  • Oh?

What other ways have you heard Lindsay and Michelle interrupt each other on past episodes of All Ears English?

Tell us in the comments section below!

Today, returning guest Jessica Coyle talks about some of the obstacles, and shares 3 tips to improve your odds of success!

 

Jessica doesn’t consider herself a relationship expert.  However, she goes on many dates, and blogs about her experiences.  She has found that there is no perfect solution to dating in a big city.  But you can increase your chances of finding someone you like by doing three things.

 

Here are Jessica’s suggestions:

Make Time!  Nobody has time in a big city.  Or, maybe nobody makes time.  It might be a matter of priorities.  If a relationship is a goal of yours, you need to treat it with the respect and effort that you would with any goal.  Approach it like a new job, or like learning English!

Join Groups and Be an Organizer!  It’s not easy to make friends in a new city when you don’t know anybody.  But there are many social activities available to you.  Make it your job to try something new every week, especially activities in which you can meet people.  Also, become a person who plans things.  Give people a reason to meet up with you.

Stay Local or Move Closer to the City!  Transportation can be an issue in the city.  It might take an hour to get across town to meet a potential date.  Consider searching for dates in your local area so meeting them isn’t such a hassle.  Or, think about where you live, and if you could afford to live closer to the center of the city.

 

Have you tried dating in a big city?

Share your thoughts and experiences in the comments section below!

 

headshot (1)Jessica Coyle has been teaching English since 2007. She received her Master’s in TESOL in 2013, finishing with a professional project researching the use of improvisational comedy teaching techniques to teach English as a second language. She has studied and performed improv comedy all over Korea, China, Canada and the United States.

Check out Jessica’s dating blog at https://hopefuldisasters.wordpress.com/. Her comedy podcast is called NY Pacific.

Can’t find anyone to correct your IELTS writing practice?

A lot of people have this problem but it doesn’t mean that you can’t do some great preparation for the test by yourself!

Today you’ll find out exactly how to create a checklist for your writing to grade it yourself.

When you create your checklist you should organize it based on the descriptors. Descriptors are what the examiner looks at in order to give you a grade.

What to look for when you correct your own writing practice tests:

  • Task achievement/task response: Do you complete the required task? Do you actually answer the question? For Task 1, you need to include all the key points. You need a summary or overall trend. You need to say what happens to the numbers in general. For Task 2, did you stick to the topic and fully answer every part of the question. For example, if it’s an argument essay, did you talk about every part of the question?
  • Organization: Does every sentence connect to the topic? Are you repeating anything? Are you being direct and concise?
  • Coherence and Cohesion: Do you have good paragraphs? Do you use linking words between every sentence? Examiners look for the linking words! Don’t forget them. They are important! Don’t let your writing be choppy. It needs to flow with linking words.
  • Do your ideas make sense?
  • Vocabulary: Look for repeated words and circle them. Try to think of different ways to say words when you have repeated them.
  • Grammar: Look for a variety of sentence structures. Underline the complex sentences. Make sure you included them in your writing. A complex sentence is where you use a dependent clause with a simple sentence. Here is an example: “I like writing which has a lot of linking words.”
  • Mistakes: Make a list of the most common errors. Look at verb tenses, circle the different tenses. Make sure you are using them correctly.

It’s better to have a real person correct your IELTS writing but if you can’t do that, try using this checklist above.

Set up a very specific study schedule. Work on it every single day. Leave yourself plenty of time ahead of the test to prepare and you can do it!

Leave us a comment below!

Have you tried correcting your own IELTS writing?

How did it go?

Cathey-Armillas_headshotIn this episode you’ll learn how to get out of your head and how to get as confident as you can for the speaking section of the IELTS Exam!

Today our guest is Cathey Armillas.

Cathey is a professional TEDx speaker, a marketing professional, and she has been the leader of a Toastmaster’s public speaking organization in Portland, Oregon.

Today Cathey is going to offer us 3 tips for how to handle the IELTS Speaking test.

  • Step 1: Practice and prepare! Try recording yourself with audio or video and then go back and listen to the recording. This will help you start to see your patterns and pick up on problems that you could improve on.

 

  • Step 2: Get out of your head! Don’t get in your own way. Relax. The Examiner wants you to succeed. The test is designed for you to do well. Get into a confident mindset. Don’t focus too much on yourself. Try striking a “power pose.” Check this TED Talk to learn more.

 

  • Step 3: First, recognize your current emotions, be aware of them and then ignore them for the moment. Next ask yourself what your goal is. Remember your goal and don’t let your emotions take over!

 

To learn more about Cathey and her books and speaking philosophy, please go to her website here

 

 

 

What is the IELTS?

Who takes it, and why?

Today, Lindsay and Jessica discuss all the basics of the IELTS exam!

The IELTS is an exam that’s usually taken by non-native English speakers.  The academic version of the exam is for students who want to study in a English-language university. A more general IELTS exam is taken by job candidates who want to work in English-speaking countries. The two versions are very similar – the only difference is that the academic test has more difficult reading and writing sections.

IELTS is completed with pencil and paper, and by speaking with a real person.  This is very different from something like TOEFL, which is computerized. However, the IELTS does have very specific rules.  This means that knowing what to expect can help you get a better score.

If you’re at intermediate level and you’re planning to take the exam, you should begin preparing for it least 3-6 months ahead. Also, be aware that the IELTS is very popular, so seats fill up fast.  Ielts.org has a list of where and when you can take the exam.

Many people who take the test don’t get the score they need the first time.  Don’t worry, you can take it again!  The best way to improve your chances is to know what to expect, and to prepare.

More details are coming soon about our 3 Keys IELTS System! Stay tuned to learn more!

Are you going to take the IELTS?

Tell us why, and how you’re preparing for it!

How can you achieve English fluency where you live?

Today, find out why you don’t have to live in an English-speaking country to become fluent in English!

 

Beth Donaghue taught herself Chinese without ever having visited China.  Her experience has shown her that it’s possible to learn a foreign language without leaving home.  But to do it, you need to get yourself “stuck”, or immersed, in the language. That can be difficult when you’re not surrounded by native speakers.  But it’s not impossible.

 

Here are 3 ways to get stuck in English wherever you are:

  • Read English: Spend as much time as possible doing this, whether it’s books, magazines or online articles.  It’s great for your vocabulary and your grammar, and allows you to explore not only the language, but the culture.
  • Small vocabulary list: Try focusing more intensely on ten words instead of loosely on fifty words. Don’t just learn new words – learn to use them! You have to really know a word so you can use it.
  • Use online tools: Consider something like Anki. It’s a space repetition software that can tell how well you’re remembering vocabulary, and force you to revisit it. Anki would also be useful to help you build vocabulary for the IELTS Speaking test.

 

Beth’s Bio:

I’m Beth, 37 years old and I’m from a little village in South England called Knaphill, where I currently live. I have also lived in London and Manchester. I live with my 2 boys and I teach English and Chinese as second languages on Italki. I started tutoring on Italki in 2011, and I have taught over 1000 lessons in that time. I majored in Chinese studies at the world renowned School of Oriental and African Studies (SOAS) in London, and use many of the techniques I learnt there studying Chinese in my English and Chinese classes. I’m a keen student of languages and can speak to varying degrees: Chinese, Japanese, Korean, German, and Spanish. ”

 

How are you getting stuck in English?

Tell us what you’re doing in the comments section below!

Today, learn how they’re not the same, and how to use them like a native speaker!

The words “by” and “until” are often confused.  Both deal with time, and both can send the same message.  However, they do have some subtle differences.

Until is used to talk about how long a situation continues.  If something happens “until” a particular time, then it stops when that time is up.  Americans often pronounce the word as ’til.

  • It snowed from Monday until Wednesday.
  • I’m going to work ’til I’m old.

By is used to say something must happen at or before a specific time.  It often indicates a deadline.

  • My report is due by 5PM.
  • I have to be home by midnight.

Let us know how you can use the words “by” and “until”!

Leave us a message in the comments section below!

Today, learn 3 reasons you might be talking in circles when it comes to business English, and how you can get your point across more precisely!

Is it common in your culture to be indirect when you speak to others?  Is it better to be direct and use the active voice in English?

When Americans speak to each other, they often get to the point quickly.  This may feel uncomfortable or even rude to a person from another culture.  But if you aren’t direct, there’s a danger of never getting to the point, and talking in circles.

Another problem is, if you don’t have the necessary vocabulary, you may be trying to go around what you really mean.  The only way to correct this is to find the precise words you need by expanding your vocabulary.

A third reason for talking in circles is nervousness.  Speaking another language can fill a person with anxiety, and when we’re nervous we might easily end up talking without getting to the point.  Fixing this is as simple as taking a deep breath and relaxing.

Have you had trouble with talking in circles?

Tell us about it in the comments section below! 

Do you want to impress the examiner in the IELTS speaking section?

Today, find out why exaggerating will give you a better score!

If you want to stand out in the IELTS speaking section, you need to energize the English you’re using.  You can’t just say something boring like “I’m hungry” when you can get more attention by saying “I’m starving – if I don’t eat now, I’m gonna die!”

Of course, you don’t need to exaggerate all the time when you speak English, but doing it during your speaking exam will definitely impress your teacher.

Use adverbs to magnify your adjectives, and use idioms and metaphors to add color to what you’re saying.  Also, use excited and dramatic intonation to show emotion.  Doing these will make you a more interesting and natural-sounding speaker, and get you a better score.

Here are some examples:

  • “I totally love my bedroom.  It’s by far the best room in my house!”
  • “The couch is so soft it’s like sitting on a cloud.”
  • “I like days when the sun’s beating down on me in total brilliance.”

How can you talk like a drama king or queen?

Share your thoughts in the comments section below!

On today’s Deep Thoughts Thursday, hear a quote that will inspire you to be specific in your career choice!

 

Actress and comedian Lily Tomlin has made many clever observations on life.  Among the most popular is the following: “I always wanted to be somebody, but now I realize I should have been more specific.”

 

To “be somebody” is to have a purpose, or be famous, which makes your life important and special.  But Lily is also using “be somebody” in a joking way, as if she should have picked some specific person to be (instead of being nobody).

It’s important to be intentional about where you want your life to go, and to think about who it is you want to become.  Here are some things that might help:

  • Consider finding a mentor or coach.  Usually this is someone who is older than you and who is willing to listen and maybe give good advice.
  • It’s good to have a process of narrowing down ideas about your life so you don’t spread yourself too thin.  Think about how you do that
  • Surround yourself with a supportive community.  Especially seek out people who are intentional about what they want, as well as people who want the same things as you.

 

Are you trying to “be somebody”?

Who do you want to be?

Tell us about it in the comments section below!

Are you in danger of making a cultural mistake in writing?

Today, learn the biggest cultural mistake people make in Writing Task 2 of the IELTS!

Your cultural and educational background influence how you organize your ideas.  When it comes to the IELTS, this can potentially affect how you score on the test.  The grading is not welcoming to cultural differences.  You must express your ideas in a way that fits western expectation.

This means getting straight to the point when writing your Writing Task 2 essay.  A common mistake test-takers make is saving the main idea of their essay for the end.  But the western expectation is that you state your main idea at the beginning, in the first sentence if possible.

Here is an example:

  • “In this essay, I am going to talk about why I think professional athletes are overpaid.”

Does your writing fit western expectations?

Why or why not?

Tell us what you think in the comments section below!

Today, Lindsay talks with TEDx speaker and ESL expert Mindy Young about how to use music, painting and poetry in learning English!

 

It can be hard to get out of your head when learning English.  Mindy suggests you start by getting out of your textbook and into the world.  If you’re enjoying learning and interacting, you’re no longer just learning — you’re communicating.

The arts are a great way to do this.  Consider the following:

  • Music: Learning song lyrics will probably be more fun than a textbook, and you’re likely to discover some new vocabulary.  A song can be listened to more than once.  It can stick in your head.  Singing can also help you with pronunciation and intonation.  Dancing with the music will make it easier to remember.
  • Poetry and scripts: Check out poems by Shel Silverstein or Jack Prelutsky.  They’re short, silly and fun, and are written at an easy English level.  But they’re also intelligent and play with jokes and double meanings in English words.  If you have friends who are learning English, try reading a script from a television show.  Take on the role of a character and practice being a native speaker.
  • Visual art: Observe the image of a famous painting.  Write as many descriptive words about it as you can.  Then, try to make sentences using all of those words.  Write down what the painting makes you feel, and why.  Go deep.

 

To learn more about Mindy’s school go to ESL Arts Advantage

 

Do you use the arts in your English learning?

Let us know how in the comments section below!

 

 

Should you call them Dr., Mrs., Ms., or y’all? This can be tricky because there are so many possible titles and situations.

 

The best thing to do is watch what others do. In America today, things are often very relaxed, and most people (even bosses) prefer you to call them by their first names. Here are some tips:

  • Calling someone Mr. or Mrs. is not wrong, but you are likely to be told “Please, call me John.”
  • With doctors or professors, call them Dr. and their last name.
  • When shopping, address a young woman as Miss, an older woman as Ma’am and a man as Sir.

Don’t worry about making a mistake. Nobody’s going to be too upset, though they might correct you.

Do you want to know more about this topic? In the comments section below, let us know your questions.

What should you bring to your IELTS exam?

When should you go, and what should you watch out for?

Today, Lindsay and Jessica discuss how you can be prepared to succeed on your IELTS test day!

On your IELTS exam day you should try to arrive 45 minutes early.  It’s critically important that you get there on time.  If you are late, you will miss the first section and can’t make it up.  Missing an entire section will make it impossible to get a good overall score.

You should plan to bring your passport for identification.  It is also okay to bring a bottle of water, but you must remove the label.  Your belongings will be stored in a separate room while you take the test.

Usually all four sections of the exam occur in a single day.  In the morning you will have the reading, writing and listening sections.  In the afternoon, you will have the speaking section.

It’s important to understand that the morning will probably be more stressful because it will be so busy.  On the other hand, you will likely have time to wait in the afternoon.  Some speaking sections are scheduled as late as 6PM!  For this reason, it is a good idea to know if there’s anyway near the test station where you could pass the time – a park, for example.

What else do you want to know about the IELTS exam?

Share your thoughts in the comments section below!

Are you looking for English phrases to start a conversation?

Today, get 10 English conversation starters to fill the silence at your next dinner party!

 

Awkward silences can kill a dinner party. Nobody wants to sit in silence, but people must have something to talk about.  Creating this opportunity is as easy as asking a simple question.

 

Can’t find native speakers to practice English with you?

Can’t get your English corrected by your native-speaking friends?

italki sponsorship trial 2

Get a professional, native English teacher in seconds at italki.

For a limited time, italki is offering 10 USD in free English lessons. Click here to get your 10USD in italki credits before this offer runs out!

 

There are many kinds of questions that can be asked, but for a dinner party, the obvious topics are the food and the home where the party is being held.  Open-ended questions are also good because they provoke others to respond.  Here are some common questions for each of these categories.

 

Food

  • “Did you make this?”
  • “Do you cook often?”
  • “What else do you cook?”

 

Home

  • “How long have you lived here?”
  • “Did you make that?” or “Where did you get that?”

 

Open-ended Questions

  • “How do you spend your days?”
  • “What are you into?”
  • “What’s new in your life?”
  • “Are you reading anything interesting?”
  • “How did you two meet?” (for couples)

 

Have you been to any dinner parties lately?

What kind of questions do you ask to start conversations?

Share with us in the comments section below!

Should you speak American English or British English on the IELTS?

Today, Jessica and Lindsay talk about accents, and what you can expect on the exam!

The IELTS was developed in Cambridge, United Kingdom.  So does that mean you should speak English with a British accent when you take the exam?

The answer is no.  English is now a global language, and the IELTS is a global exam.  On the IELTS listening test, you are likely to hear American, British, Indian and other kinds of English accents.  And it doesn’t matter which you use when you speak – as long as your pronunciation is clear!

It’s a good idea to get used to different accents so you don’t have trouble understanding them on test day.  Consider listening to podcasts from the different places, and don’t be afraid to work with a teacher from anywhere.

Which English accents are you used to hearing?

Which ones are difficult for you to understand?

Let us know in the comments section below!

Why does the IELTS examiner stop you on the speaking test?

Today, Jessica and Lindsay talk about why this happens, and why you shouldn’t worry about it!

It can be frustrating if the IELTS examiner asks you a question, and you begin answering it, and then they stop you while you’re speaking.  You might think that you made an English mistake, or the examiner doesn’t like your answer.  But that’s not what’s happening.

Timing is the issue.  The examiner has only a certain amount of time to ask you about specific things.  As part of their job, they must stop you – and it has nothing to do with the quality of your English, or your answer.

Don’t let an abrupt interruption like this cause you extra anxiety!  Expect it to happen, and don’t take it personally.  All tests have to follow their timing.

Do you think being interrupted while you’re English speaking might cause you anxiety?

What do you plan to do about it?

Share your thoughts in the comments section below!

Today, Lindsay and Michelle discuss a tip to help you be a better self-guided learner!

 

A recent study on self discipline suggests that bribing yourself makes it easier for you to accomplish a specific goal.  So, if you indulge in enjoying a latte while you study English, you might not only enjoy the experience more, but it might also improve your chances for long-term success.

Bribing yourself can mean many things.  As said, you might enjoy a treat while you learn.  Or, if you’re listening to a podcast, maybe you can go outside for a walk in a beautiful place instead of sitting in a stuffy room.

 

Classrooms can give us discipline.  But we can also give ourselves discipline.  Studying doesn’t have to be miserable, and using a reward system might even make it something you look forward to.

 

Are you trying to take control of your learning?

Let us know how it’s going in the comment section below!

How do you talk about love in English?

Today, Lindsay and Michelle give you 8 English prepositions to use when discussing romance and finding the right person!

Everyone knows it’s important to say the right thing when you talk about love.  There are so many aspects to it, and so many ways to go wrong.  And while you might not think that having the right grammar is exactly romantic, it can only help!

Here are 8 prepositions that can be useful when talking about love:

  • Married to: “When are you getting married to him?”
  • Afraid of: “You shouldn’t be afraid of falling in love.”
  • Think about: “You might want to think about taking it slow.”
  • Interested in: “It helps to be interested in the same things.”
  • Focus on: “You need to focus on what you have in common.”
  • Depends on: “It depends on the connection you have with each other.”
  • Concentrate on:Concentrate on communicating so you understand each other.”
  • Apologize for: “Don’t apologize for who you are.”

What’s your advice on love?

Share your thoughts in the comments section below!

Did the IELTS examiner ask you a difficult question?

Did your mind just go blank?

Today, Lindsay and Jessica share 6 phrases to help you fill that time void!

If you get asked a question that you can’t immediately answer during your IELTS exam, you don’t want to go silent.  It’s important to keep speaking even if you need a moment to decide how to answer the actual question.

Native English speakers use many different phrases to help them do this. It’s important to understand that using a time-filling phrase won’t hurt your score.  In fact, it’s likely to improve it!

Here are a few phrases to use if you need a moment to think about how to answer a question during your IELTS exam:

  • “Honestly, I am a little bit nervous right now and my mind just went blank.”  This says that you’re being honest, and trying. “My mind went blank” is also an idiom.
  • “Frankly, this isn’t something I’m used to talking about.”  Again, this is honest, and sounds like something a native speaker would say.
  • “That’s a good question.”  This welcomes good intonation, and that will help your pronunciation score.

Other simple and common English time-fillers:

  • “Wow, let me think about that.” 
  • “I’ve never thought about that before.” 
  • “Let’s see.”

Which phrases do you plan to use, and why?

Tell us what you think in the comments section below!

Today, Lindsay and Michelle share 6 phrases to buy you some time in a rushed, stressful situation!

 

Sometimes it seems like everyone’s in a hurry.  People want an abrupt answer even if you’re not ready to give it.  This can be intimidating, especially if you’re still learning English.  But it doesn’t need to be.

The person trying to rush you needs to understand that you’re still making your decision, and that they can do something else for a moment while you decide.  There are several phrases in English that can convey that message.

 

Here are 6 phrases that can calm down a rushed person and give you some time:

  • “Gimme a second.”
  • “Hold on a second.”
  • “I’m still deciding.”
  • “Just a second, please.”
  • “Sorry, I need a minute.”
  • “I’m not quite ready yet.”

 

Have you ever been rushed while in the US?

Tell us your story in the comments section below!

Do you write English emails at work or to your friends and acquaintances?

Do you ever wonder if you are making any big mistakes in your emails?

There is one mistake that I see a lot in emails from students and I want you to stop making this mistake today!

In this video I will show you what that mistake is and three good alternatives.

Please watch the video below.

 

Are you making this mistake with your emails?

 

 

Instead of using “bye” at the end of your emails, you should try:

  •  “I hope to hear from you soon.”
  • “Take care.”
  • “All the best.”

 

Do you want to practice your email writing with a native speaker online? Get $10 USD off your second lesson at italki now!

What should you wear for the IELTS exam?

Today, Lindsay and Jessica talk about how to dress for success on exam day!

Our clothes affect how we feel, and how we conduct our behavior.  Other people can sense if we appear confident and comfortable.  Not only that, they might even reflect what they see in us.

On test day, it’s important to project an image that says you’re intelligent, that you take the exam seriously, and that you’re relaxed.  You want to be comfortable while sitting through the Writing and Reading sections of the test, but you also want to show your best self to the Speaking section examiner.

In order to do both, consider the following “business casual” items:

Slacks: These are the formal pants that would go with a suit.  If they’re black, they can go with almost anything.

Boots and leggings: For women, remember to stick with something comfortable — no high heels.

Blouse or collared shirt: For men, there’s probably no need for a necktie, but a nice button-up shirt can allow you to look and feel relaxed while appearing professional.

You might want to stay away from:

Sweat pants or suits: These might look lazy, even if they are comfortable.

Blue jeans: While jeans are better than sweat pants, you might look better and feel just as relaxed in a nice pair of slacks.

T-shirts: This might come off as too casual — especially if its a t-shirt with images or text on it.

What are you thinking of wearing for your IELTS exam?

Share your thoughts in the comments section below!

On today’s Deep Thoughts Thursday, learn the secret to success, and how you can apply it to learning English!

 

Mark Twain is one of the great heroes of American literature, a man who is famous for combining humor and wisdom.  One of his more popular statements was, “To succeed in life, you need two things: Ignorance and Confidence.”

By ignorance, Twain doesn’t mean stupidity.  He means something closer to innocence.  Children think they can succeed because they don’t know how difficult achieving success will be.  They don’t think about it, and so they don’t become paralyzed with fear.

Don’t let your self-consciousness paralyze you.  Change your perspective and stop worrying about the reasons behind the rules, or about how much you still have to learn.  Be confident, and seek connection, not perfection!

 

What do you think of Twain’s quote?

Does it make sense to you?

Share your thoughts in the comments section below!

Should you connect not perfect when it comes to the IELTS exam?

Today, learn how to connect with the examiner, and something you probably don’t know about the exam day schedule!

In the IELTS, you’re not graded for being perfect.  You’re graded for communication ability.  It’s important to understand that this is connection, not perfection.

After you complete the Reading and Writing sections, there will probably be some waiting time before the Speaking section of your test.  While you’re waiting, don’t get nervous!  Instead, keep in mind that the examiner is not expecting you to be perfect.  He or she only wants you to communicate your ideas the best you can.  They want you to be able to connect with them.

Does connection not perfection work for you and your English learning?

How will you use it with your IELTS examiner?

Tell us about it in the comments section below!

Today, Lindsay and Michelle discuss how to go from obsessing over the rules, to freeing your mind to get more creative with your English!

 

Learning English can be a lot like learning a musical instrument.  In the beginning, you might focus intensely on the rules.  You have to, because you need a foundation — you can’t improvise without that.

But once you know the basic rules, you need to think about exploring and experimenting, and fluency.  Think about learning English as a creative process.

Also, remember that connecting to other people isn’t a matter of rules.  It’s a matter of fluid interaction. For that, you need to put down the grammar book and be willing to make mistakes.

 

Are the rules holding you up?

Tell us what you think in the comments section below!

Do you want that extra edge or advantage to push your score to a 7 on the IELTS exam?

You need some English phrasal verbs to stand apart from the crowd!

Today, Lindsay and Jessica share 5 English phrasal verbs you can use to stand out and get the score you need!

You will probably be asked to talk about the topics of home, shopping, food and studying in Part 1 of the IELTS Speaking Section.  You need to prepare for this.  One way you can do that is have some phrasal verbs.

Phrasal verbs are a way to sound more natural and native when speaking informally.  Though there are many of these to choose from, you only need to use of a few to stand out.

Here are five that are easy to use and will impress your examiner:

Bone up on: This means to learn.  It’s not only a phrasal verb, but also an idiom.  “I had to bone up on my English studies.”

Figure out: This means to learn the details of something, or discover how it works.  “I figured out how to fix the television.”

Goof off: When you are having fun, but not working or studying, you can say “I spent the afternoon goofing off.”

Clam up: This is another phrasal verb and idiom.  It means that you’re so nervous you couldn’t think of what to say.  “I clammed up when she asked me to answer the question.”

Catch up: If you’re behind, and you’re trying to shorten the distance, you might need to catch up.  This can be used physically, like you’re chasing someone, or with your studies.  “I fell behind in my homework and have to catch up.”

Do you have any other phrasal verbs you’d like to use in the IELTS exam?

Let us know what they are in the comments section below!

On today’s Tear Up Your Textbook Tuesday, learn when to (and when not to) use the verb “arrive” with native speakers!

For a native English speaker, “arrive” is not always the most natural-sounding word to use.  It probably fits best in formal situations, such as a job interview or a speech.

Instead of “When did you arrive?” a native speaker might ask “When did you get here?” or “When did you get in?”  Both mean the same thing as “arrive”, but are more common.

How can you use “get” instead of arrive?

Show us what you’ve got in the comments section below!

Today, Lindsay and Michelle discuss why a few towns in the United States are banning a common winter activity for kids!

Most Americans live in places that get snow in the winter.  As children, they probably went sledding at least a few times. But today, some places are trying to ban sledding because it can be dangerous!  Towns with sled hills are afraid somebody will get hurt, and the town will be sued.

Some lawsuits are justified, but there is such a thing as a “frivolous lawsuit,” which is a lawsuit that has little merit but is being pursued for money, rather than justice.

What do you think about banning sledding?

What do think about suing a “haunted house” park because it’s too scary?

Share your thoughts in the comments section below!

Do you try to speak fast to sound like a native English speaker?

Today, Lindsay and Jessica discuss why you shouldn’t leave your heart behind on the IELTS Speaking Section!

Nobody expects you to sound exactly like a native speaker.  People just want to understand you.  So if you’re talking too fast and trying to sound like a native, you might actually become more difficult to understand.

Speed is not important.  If you speak with clarity and confidence, you will always sound better than if you’re in a rush.  You have to be able to relax, pause between sentences, and use intonation and emotion.

If you want a high score on the Speaking Section, the examiner must be able to understand what you’re saying.  Intonation is important — practice expressing your feelings so you DON’T sound like a robot!

Varied Intonation is Key for IELTS Speaking

You can’t have a monotone. 

If asked about fun, exciting things, you should sound excited and happy.

  • How often do you hang out with friends
  • What’s your favorite food or restaurant
  • Describe one of your hobbies

Let emotion sound in your voice.

It would sound strange if you answered these with a serious, formal tone.

Speaking Part 1 and Speaking Part 3 should sound different!

You should sound very different answering more serious Part 3 questions.

  • How can we reduce air pollution?
  • Are companies more likely to create environmentally friendly policies now than in the past?
  • What are some of the drawbacks to the increased use of technology?

 Watch the video now!

Strategies to improve intonation

Practice shadowing and mimicking.

Record yourself and listen to it back

Can you hear the emotion?

Is the tone appropriate for the question type?

How are you going to speak English with your heart?

Share your thoughts in the comments section below!

Maybe you want to try to use phrasal verbs when you speak with natives?

In today’s lesson you’ll find out how to invite someone to spend time with you using 3 common English phrasal verbs.

Watch the video below to learn more!

 

3 Phrasal Verbs to Invite Someone Out

 

 

3 Phrasal Verbs to Invite Someone Out:

  • “Let’s catch up next week.”
  • “Do you want to hang out on Saturday?”
  • “Would you like to meet up on Friday?”

 

What other English phrasal verbs do you know to invite someone out?

Please share them with us in the comments section below!

On today’s Wisdom Wednesday, Lindsay and Michelle talk about why it’s important to pace yourself so you don’t get overwhelmed!

 

It’s hard not to want to do everything.  But it’s important to know when to slow down.  Doing as much as you can, as fast as you can, makes it nearly impossible to retain information.

Maybe you’re watching Youtube videos in English.  You might discover that you can learn more watching one per day than ten per day.  This is because watching only one allows you to learn in quality, rather than quantity.

When learning new words, don’t try to learn 50 or 100 new words at a time — it won’t work!  Instead, consider learning around 5-10 new words at a time.  Remember Aesop’s fable about the tortoise and the hare: “Slow and steady wins the race!”

 

Do you try to learn too much at one time?

Does it cause you problems?

Tell us your story in the comments section below!

Are you afraid of being asked an unfamiliar question in the IELTS speaking section? Find out what to do in this situation!

Today, Lindsay and Jessica tell how NOT to handle it, and give you two tips on what you can do to unfreeze!

What happens if you get to the speaking section of the IELTS and the examiner asks you a question that you don’t know the answer to?

First, DON’T ask the examiner to switch topics!  They can’t do that for you.  So whatever question you are given, you must give some kind of answer even if you are feeling shy or confused.

Here are Jessica’s tips on what you can do so you don’t freeze:

Make something up! As said in a previous podcast, IELTS doesn’t care about the truth of your idea, only about your English.  Think of anything in your life that relates to the subject so you can answer the question.

Prepare for an unfamiliar topic: Memorize a phrase like, “I apologize, but I’m unfamiliar with that topic.”  Then you can answer the question by discussing how little you know about it, and why.

Go here to learn more about scoring for each section of the IELTS exam.

Are you prepared for the speaking section of the IELTS?

Tell us if you’re ready, and what you still need help with, in the comments section below!

Today, learn 3 places where you can find compelling, interesting content to move you to the next level!

 

We live in a time of abundant online resources for learning English.  In fact, there are so many that it can be overwhelming!  But Thaddeus believes finding the right ones are the key to keeping your interest so you stay motivated.

 

Here are Thaddeus’ 3 top resources to help you be an inspired English learner in 2015:

  • TED.com: TED stands for Technology, Education and Design.  The website features discussions on a wide variety of subjects, and includes transcripts.  Much of the language is academic, so it prepares listeners for education in English.
  • Storycorps.org: This site features real English conversations between people who share experiences.  Common themes are love, friendship, education and role models.  The conversations are usually short, and include transcripts.
  • Newsela.com: This site presents common news stories in English. The unique aspect is that allows you to adjust the difficulty level of how the story is written.

 

Have you explored any of these resources?

What did you think?

Share your experiences in the comments section below!

 

SAMSUNG CSCThaddeus is an Advanced English teacher with over five years of experience, an M.Ed. in TESOL, and an undergraduate degree in International Business.  He offers conversation practice and test preparation lessons through italki, and publishes free English learning resources on his website: www.enupgrade.com.

To get $10 off your second lesson with Thaddeus go to allearsenglish.com/italki, register on that page, then search for his username: English Upgrade

On today’s Tear Up Your Textbook Tuesday, find out how to stop using “if” all the time and start using “as long as”!

The phrase “as long as” is a connector similar to “if”, or “provided that”.  It means that meeting certain conditions will allow something to happen.  The emphasis is on the importance of meeting the conditions.

Here are a couple ways “as long as” might be used:

  • When do I have to be home?
  • Whenever you want, as long as you bring the car back in good condition.
  • “Is your landlord nice?”
  • “He is, as long as we pay the rent on time.”

How can you use “as long as”?

Write us a sample sentence in the comments section below!

Are you prepared for the IELTS Writing Task 2?

Today, Lindsay and Jessica give you 3 strategies to help you take charge!

Writing Task 2 of the IELTS requires you to be creative.  But don’t let that scare you.  If you practice ahead of time and approach it with a plan, you can stay focused and do well.

You might be asked a question like, “Why is living in the city better than living in the country?”  Jessica has three tips to help you be able to answer that:

  • Practice brainstorming: You need to be able to think creatively to gather a list of ideas about the topic.  This is a skill you can improve.  Don’t worry about bad ideas, just practice coming up with a lot of ideas, so you have many to choose from.
  • Learn a four-paragraph essay format: After you get your ideas, you need to be able to organize them.  This format is simple and easy to follow.  It includes an introduction, a thesis statement, a paragraph body, and a conclusion.
  • Make stuff up!  IELTS doesn’t really care about your whether your ideas are true or not.  It’s only interested in your English abilities.  You can make things up, or use personal experience.  Focus on having good sentence structures.

Are you preparing for the IELTS Writing Task 2?

What are you doing to get ready?

Share your thoughts in the comments section below!

Today, Lindsay talks with teacher and author Douglas Amrine about three key differences, and why these matter for you in a job interview!

Douglas has spent half his life in the United States and half in the United Kingdom, so his accent is somewhere in the middle of the two.  His experience has given him clarity about the differences in how Americans and British speak, and how speech is perceived in each country.

Here are three key differences between American and British English that Douglas believes are important for you in a job interview:

  • Accent: Both countries have many regional accents, but pronunciation of the consonants “t” and “r” distinguish between British and American.  In-between vowels, Americans pronounce “t” as “d”, so a word like “matter” might sound like “madder.”  Americans also pronounce “r” more strongly.  While they would pronounce “better” as it is written, a British person might say it like “betta.”
  • Vocabulary: The US and the UK occasionally use different words for the same object.  For example, Americans use the word “elevator,” but British say “lift.”
  • Temperature: Americans like to show enthusiasm and exaggeration, but Britons are masters of understatement, often describing something as smaller or less impressive than it really is.  Even if they are thinking the exact same thing, an American might show his emotions while Briton will be reserved.

Have you encountered these differences between British and American English?

Do you know any others? Let us know in the comments section below!

Douglas AmrineOur guest today is not only a CELTA-certified English teacher but also an award-winning travel guide editor and publisher. He has worked on titles and series such as Eyewitness Travel Guides and Top 10 Travel Guides as well as Where to Go When and The Road Less Traveled.
As an English teacher, our guest helps his students with business English, general conversation, and IELTS preparation. Our guest today is Douglas Amrine. Welcome Douglas!

Feeling anxious about the IELTS exam?

Today, Lindsay and Jessica talk about four tactics for overcoming fear and finding calm before test day!

It’s natural to be afraid when going into a test as difficult as the IELTS exam.  But you can’t let fear and anxiety dominate you.  Remember that your goal is to learn English, not just pass the test.  You need to let this goal strengthen and motivate you.

There are many ways to do this.  Jessica has four suggestions that might help:

  • Take a day or two off in which you don’t think about or work on IELTS.  This allows you to recharge and avoid burn out.
  • Make a realistic schedule about where you are in your English, and when you should really be taking the test.  You don’t want to take the exam before you’re truly ready.
  • When practicing, make sure you include practice materials that you enjoy.  These might be movies or podcasts that interest you.  Look at it as an exploration, not just as work.
  • Know what the examiner wants before you take the test.  This will help you do better and feel more confident.

Will these tips help you reduce your anxiety before taking the IELTS?

Share your thoughts in the comments section below!

Do you ever attend English-only meetings at work but sit there with a great idea but not knowing how to enter the conversation politely and how to get people’s attention?

If you just sit there and don’t contribute your idea, you will miss your opportunity and your reputation at work might be in jeopardy.

Today we’ll show you how to speak up and get people to turn their attention toward you when you have something to say!

Watch the video below to get 3 useful phrases

Practice these phrases with a native speaker now and get 10 USD off your second lesson

-Click here-

3 Phrases to Speak Up in a Meeting:

  • “I’d like to share something.”
  • “Can I say something?”
  • “Could I add something?”

Let’s have a conversation in the comments section!

What other phrases do you know that you can use to speak up?

Have you used them before?

Let us know.

Today, Lindsay and Michelle discuss these two words, and how ‘false friends’ from other languages might cause trouble when translating!

 

False friends are words from two different languages that appear to come from the same source (and thus have the same meaning), but are actually completely different.

A good example is in the Spanish estoy decepcionada, which sounds like it might translate into the English ‘I am/feel deceived’.  Decepcionada reads like a Spanish version of the English word ‘deceived’.  But the actual meaning is ‘disappointed’.  So if you translate this false friend, you’re saying something complete different from your intention.

 

  • To be disappointed means to have an expectation of something, and then it doesn’t happen, so we’re sad.
  • To be deceived means we are being tricked or lied to about something.

 

When was the last time you felt disappointed?

When was the last time you felt deceived?

Share your stories with us in the comments section below!

Today, Lindsay talks with Tyler Lockett from Austin about why that city is unique and “weird,” and how you can connect with locals using three phrases!

Texas is a U.S. state that’s bigger than France, and Austin is probably the state’s most unique city.  Unlike most of the rest of Texas, it’s very young, politically liberal, and filled with culture.  Keep Austin weird is the local motto.

Tyler believes that if you’re going to Austin, you may as well speak the language.  Though English does tend to be spoken by Texans, three southern phrases might help you sound more like a local.

Here are Tyler’s 3 phrases:

  • Howdy: This is an older or cowboy way of saying ‘Hello’.  It’s casual, but common across Texas and even other parts of the United States.
  • Y’all: This is contraction of ‘you all’ that refers to a group of people.  It might be used as “Are y’all going to the movies?”
  • Fixin’ to: This means you are about to, or intend to, do something.  You might say “I’m fixin’ to go to work.” or “She’s fixin’ to move to Austin.”

Have you ever heard Americans use Howdy, Y’all, or Fixin’ to?

Would you like to visit Austin?

Tell us what you think in the comments section below!

Tyler Lockett- ESL TeacherTyler Lockett is a professional ESL teacher living and working in Austin, Texas. He has been teaching ESL for over 5 years and has lived in China and Japan. He graduated from Houston Community College with an A.A. degree and lived in New York City for 7 years where he graduated from Parsons School of Design In New York City with a B.A. degree. In addition, he received his Cambridge CELTA certification at International House in New York City. He has backpacked around France, Mongolia and Thailand and is hoping to travel to Istanbul, Vietnam, and Chile in the next two years. He loves Teaching ESL, making connections with his international students, and can’t wait to have more adventures abroad in his career.

ITALKI USERNAME: tyler lockett

Do you need resources to prepare for the IELTS exam?

Today, Lindsay and Jessica talk about three creative practice recommendations, and three textbooks to help you prepare for the IELTS exam!

Preparation for the IELTS can feel overwhelming.  It’s difficult to narrow down the best ways to practice, and the best textbooks for studying.  However you decide to do it, remember that you need to integrate both real skills practice and test practice.

Practice Resources: A native English speaker is definitely best for practicing for the speaking and listening parts of the test.  If you live in a large city, opportunities to talk to native speakers might be all around you, in the form of either students or ex-patriots.

  • For speaking, you want structured practice.  Look for opportunities at local libraries or universities.  Consider advertising for a language exchange or a skills exchange.  Practicing English while teaching a native English speaker something is a great way to gain confidence.
  • For listening, podcasts are excellent for improving your comprehension.  Find a topic that interests and motivates you.  There are podcasts about virtually every subject!
  • For writing, again check out local libraries or universities for writing lab opportunities.

Textbook Test Preparation: With a textbook, you want something interesting that includes brainstorming and vocabulary activities that help you come up with ideas.  Here are three good examples:

  • Introduction to Academic English (Ann Hogue, Alice Oshima).  This book has nice visuals and word maps to help give you ideas, but also to focus you so you don’t feel overwhelmed.
  • Cambridge IELTS Series.  This series contains the best examples of what you will see on IELTS.  It’s not skills practice, only test practice.
  • IELTS Foundation Series.  This series is a good resource for middle-level skill building and preperation.

What resources have you used in preparing for the IELTS exam?

Share your thoughts in the comments section below!

Or do you sound like a textbook when you speak?

Today, get 7 tricks to update your English and sound more natural by using real talk instead of textbook talk!

 

Speaking natural-sounding English can be difficult when you only work with textbooks.  While what your textbook says may be technically correct, some of the phrases might sound outdated or odd to native ears.

 

italki4Can’t find native speakers to practice English with you?

Can’t get your English corrected by your native-speaking friends?

Get a professional, native English teacher in seconds at italki.

For a limited time, italki is offering 10 USD in free English lessons. Click here to get your 10USD in italki credits before this offer runs out!

 

Here are 7 ways your textbook might tell you how to say something, as well as the ways a native English speaker would really say it.

 

  • Textbook: Hello.
  • Real: Hi!, Hey!, or What’s up?

 

  • Textbook: Are you having a good day?
  • Real: Having a good day?

 

  • Textbook: How are you?, How do you do?
  • Real: How’s it going?, How you doin’?, or How’ve you been?

 

  • Textbook: I’m fine, thanks.
  • Real: Doin’ well., or Not bad.

 

  • Textbook: What are your hobbies?
  • Real: What do you like to do?, What are you into?, or What do you do for fun?

 

  • Textbook: I wish to (do something).
  • Real: I wanna (do something), or I’d like to (do something).

 

  • Textbook: See you.
  • Real: See ya., Take care., or Bye.

 

Do you speak textbook English?

Do you know any other differences between what your textbook says and how native English-speakers speak?

Let us know in the comments section below!

Today, learn how to take action and bet on yourself with an amazing opportunity!

 

Every challenge you face is like putting a bet on yourself.  But the only way to really lose is if you don’t even try.

This month, the italki.com Language Challenge can help you improve your English in a serious way.  A $10 sign up fee gets you into the game.  If you can complete 20 lessons (20 hours) with an online teacher by the end of February, italki will pay you $40 back in credit.

This comes out to 3-4 lessons per week.  Can you handle that?  Essentially, you are placing a bet on your commitment to learning English!

 

Three reasons to participate in a language challenge:

Motivation: All of us need to be pushed sometimes, and there’s never better time than NOW!

Defining your goal: Learning English is a lifetime project, but having defined goals will bring clarity to your progress.

Social experience: Even though you could do this by yourself, being accountable to others will focus you and help you follow through to the end.

 

Ready for the challenge?  Sign up at allearsenglish.com/italki.

 

Are you signing up for the challenge?

Share your goals in the comments section below!

 

Kevin Chen is an entrepreneur based in Shanghai, China.  He is co-founder of italki.com, a language learning community marketplace that connects students and teachers from around the world for online language lessons.  italki has over a million users, thousands of teachers, and thousands of language classes are scheduled through the site every day.

Kevin is also an organizer of Techyizu.org, a non-profit group that organizes startup and technology events in Shanghai, including Barcamp Shanghai and Designing Shanghai.

Kevin previously co-founded Famento, a startup focused on recording family history.  Before that, Kevin worked in the finance industry as a research analyst for Lehman Brothers and Merrill Lynch.

He has a masters degree from the London School of Economics, and a bachelor’s degree from Georgetown University.

 

Today, Lindsay and Michelle talk about why it’s important, and give you three ways to be charismatic in English!

 

A lot of a person’s success in America depends on their personality.  If you’re confident and people want to be friends with you, you’ll probably do better.  Charisma is the ability of an individual to attract, influence or inspire others.  Some are born with it, but most of us have to learn it.

President Barack Obama has a lot of charisma.  This makes him likeable and powerful at the same time.  You want to learn English, but you also want others to find you pleasant and even magnetic.  Charisma is behind those connections.  So it’s important to understand how you can make yourself as charismatic as possible.

 

italki5Are You Ready to Practice? Get a Private, Native English Teacher Now!

Try italki to learn to speak like a native.

You’ll get your English mistakes corrected immediately!

For a limited time you’ll get 10UD to use towards private English lessons on italki.

Visit italki now to claim your 10USD in free English lessons.

 

Here are a few ways you can express charisma:

Exude joy: Be cheerful!  To do that, find what you’re excited about or what you love, and do as much of it as you can.  This can come out in your intonation: “I’m so excited to meet them!” or “I can’t wait to go!”

Appear confident: Show your strength in your abilities and don’t disparage others.  This is not the same as being cocky, which is being overly confident and disparaging of others.  Confident people say things like: “I’m on it.” or “I’m sure you’ll figure it out.”

Be a great storyteller: People naturally love stories.  Use your voice and inflection to create drama and intrigue.  Also, use the present tense to talk about something that happened previously — this puts your listeners in the story as it’s being told.

 

What does charisma mean in your culture?

Does it matter as much there as it does in America?

Share your thoughts in the comments section below!

Many many students ask us this question, “How can I speak English as fast as a native?”

That is the wrong question!

The question that you should be asking is this: “How can I speak clearly so that natives can understand me?”

The most important thing is not speed. The most important thing is to speak clearly.

 

Here are two tricks to speak clearly in English:

1- Separate your sentence into thought groups or “chunks”

2- Emphasize the last word in the thought group

 

Watch my video below to learn more!

 

Click here to get $10 off your second lesson with a native teacher at italki

 

So guys, go out there and don’t try to speak quickly. Try to speak clearly by using the two pronunciation tricks that I have taught you today.

Good luck with your pronunciation in 2015!

 

Today, get two quotes by two famous entrepreneurs, and learn how to talk about the impact you want to make on the world in 2015!

 

To impact, or make a difference, doesn’t require money or a stage.  Everything you do has some effect on the world around you.  Even a smile can make a huge impact on somebody else’s day.

But some people do want to change things in a bigger way.  Below are two quotes about making impacts; one big, the other not necessarily so big.

 

“I want to put a ding in the universe.”  Steve Jobs

A ding is like a dent, so what Jobs is saying is that he wants to have left a mark that remains when he is gone.

“Go make a ruckus.”  Seth Godin

A ruckus is a noise, so Godin is suggesting that you try to be heard.  Do something with your life, don’t just live quietly and disappear!

 

How are you going to put a ding in the universe?

How are you going to make a ruckus?

Let us know in the comments section below!

Today, Lindsay chats with Marianna Du Bosq, a bilingual educator who has three ways to help you raise your child to speak more than one language!

 

The benefits of raising a bilingual child are many.  Not only will knowing more than one language open career opportunities for the child when they grow up, research is also finding significant positive cognitive advantages to having a bilingual brain.

 

Marianna believes bilingualism (and even tri-lingualism) is definitely achievable if parents are focused enough.  Here are Marianna’s three main points to focus on:

Expose your children to quality language input.  Read books, or even use audio books.  This way, your child is hearing voices other than those of their parents.

Create a need to use the language. If the child doesn’t have to use the language to get what they want, they’re naturally going to fall back on using the dominant language.  Ask your family members help by only speaking one language or the other.

Keep it fun! Children will be far more involved in the language if they are doing the kinds of things they already love to do.

 

Are you a parent interested in raising bilingual children?

Share your thoughts or experiences in the comments section below!

 

Marianna Du Bosq is a bilingual mother, former bilingual educator, and lifetime language learner.  She is the host of the Bilingual Avenue podcast and blog where she interviews parents and experts raising and teaching multilingual children, and provides an excellent collection of tips and strategies for anyone choosing this journey.

She is originally from Venezuela, has spent the last twenty years in the United States, and is currently on a one year adventure in the Black Forest in Germany with her husband and two year old daughter.

Click here to get “7 Ways to Increase Exposure in the Target Language” a free PDF guide

On today’s Tear-Up Your Textbook Tuesday, Lindsay and Michelle talk about four situations for using the term ‘even’, and how to use your tone of voice to make it work in an English conversation!

 

italki1Can’t find native speakers to practice English with you?

Can’t get your English corrected by your native-speaking friends?

Get a professional, native English teacher in seconds at italki.

For a limited time, italki is offering 10 USD in free English lessons. Click here to get your 10USD in italki credits before this offer runs out!

 

The word ‘even’ has many uses in English and can be confusing.  To make it even more confusing, in some cases the intonation is as important as the word itself!  Here are the four most common ways to use ‘even’:

For something that’s surprising.  When using it this way, stress the word ‘even’.

  • “I get lost even when I have a map!”
  • “I went to class and didn’t even remember my notebook!”

To compare and emphasize.  Using it this way, stress the comparative word.

  • “That coat is on sale for a great price but will be even cheaper next week.”
  • “There are a lot of people here but there were even more last night.”

To be in balance.  This means to be equal, or potentially to get revenge.  In this situation, ‘even’ does not require any intonation.

  • “We’re even now.”
  • “I have to find a way to get even with my brother.”

To talk about a kind of number.  The even numbers are 2, 4, 6, 8, etc.  The odd numbers are 1, 3, 5, 7, etc.  Again, ‘even’ does not require intonation when used this way.

  • “Eighty four is an even number.”

 

Can you tell us something about yourself using the word ‘even’?

Share with us in the comments section below!

Today, Lindsay and Michelle discuss five easy English phrases to use for your intentions in the new year!

 

italki1Are you looking for a professional, native English teacher online?

Get a native English teacher online in seconds at italki.

Lindsay and Gabby recommend italki as our #1 English-learning solution online. Choose from more than 400 teachers to work on your business English or to pass your next big exam.

Get our special offer before it runs out! Go to italki and claim 10USD to go toward a FREE English lesson!

 

What are you going to do different in 2015?  A New Year’s resolution is your intention to change something about yourself from the previous year.  It’s not always easy to stick to changes, and often people don’t, but the point is to recognize that the new year is an opportunity to strengthen your resolve to be a better person than you already are.

To declare your intentions, it’s helpful to have the right words.  Here are five examples of how to talk about your resolutions:

  • I would like…  “I would like to travel to India.”
  • I hope to…  “I hope to stop biting my nails.”
  • I want to…  “I want to move into a new apartment.”
  • I’m going to…  “I’m going to start working out more.”
  • I will…  “I will speak more English.”

 

What are some typical New Year’s resolutions in your country?

Do you have any New Year’s resolutions for yourself?

Tell us about it in the comments section below!

How can you prepare for the Reading Section of the IELTS?

Today, Lindsay and Jessica discuss two strategies to help you answer questions quickly and correctly!

Timing and strategy are important for success on any test.  For a reading test, you need to be able to figure out answers quickly without having to re-read.  Jessica has two suggestions to help you with this.

  • Skim: Take one minute to skim the title, subtitle, and beginning of each paragraph.  This opens your “brain box,” and prepares you to understand what the passage is about.  If you can follow the passage more easily, you will be able to answer the questions faster.
  • Scan: When you read the text, look for names and key words, and underline them.  For many taking the IELTS exam, the most difficult part of the Reading Section are the matching questions.  Scanning for key words and underlining them is an active behavior that will help you answer these faster.

Do you use the strategy of skimming and scanning?

Let us know how it works for you!

Today, Lindsay chats with Jessica Coyle about some of the ways the art of improvisational technique can help you use your body to improve your English!

 

Improv is an art form in which a person uses their body to appear more spontaneous.  It’s a skill, a learned ability, and Jessica believes it can be powerful in learning English because most communication is nonverbal.  By taking care of this nonverbal part, the verbal part (the English) is more free and relaxed, which allows you to learn and use what you know.

 

Three ways improve can help you learn English:

  • Open up and use your body.  Think of your body as an instrument that needs to be fully extended.  Pull your shoulders back and lengthen your spine.  Take up space and be aware of how you look.  Open people are more approachable.  A person who is folded up appears uninterested in others.
  • Mirror your conversation partner.  Pay attention to what they’re doing.  Have a complete and solid idea of what your partner is feeling, and be conscious of what you’re doing in response.  Get a sense of what the person is trying to say about themselves.
  • Initiate with an action.  Comment on or use the environment around you.  Or, literally initiate with an action.  Do something that’s more an activity than a situation that requires a lot of speaking.  Activities can bring people closer together.  You don’t have to sit in a café trying to speak English to become friends with an English speaker.

 

How do you use your body to learn English?

Tell us all about it in the comments section below!

 

 

headshot (1)Jessica Coyle has been teaching English since 2007. She received her Master’s in TESOL in 2013, finishing with a professional project researching the use of improvisational comedy teaching techniques to teach English as a second language. She has studied and performed improv comedy all over Korea, China, Canada and the United States.

 

How to find Jessica Online:

Her dating blog: https://hopefuldisasters.wordpress.com/

Her comedy podcast: NY Pacific

 

Jessica’s Top 10 Podcast Recommendations:

1. Stuff You Should Know
2. Radiolab
3. The Moth
4. Thrilling Adventure Hour
5. The Truth
6. How To Do Everything
7. 60 Minutes
8. This American Life
9. Savage Love
10. Global News Update

How do you build a “Brain Box” for the IELTS Listening Exam?

Today Lindsay and Jessica talk about two strategies to make the listening part of the IELTS exam easier!

 

If you have a strategy or a system to approach the IELTS Listening Exam, you’ll probably do better.  Your first step should be to listen to the introduction.  It will tell you who will be talking, and what they’re talking about.

Many people who take this exam skip the introduction because they think they don’t need it.  This is a mistake, because the context will help you understand.  The “brain box” concept is that your brain puts topics in “boxes,” and accessing a specific box will put a conversation into context, and make it easier to comprehend.

After you’ve listened to the introduction, you will then have about ten seconds to read the questions before you hear them.  Use this time to circle the key words before they’re read aloud.  Making note of these key words will prepare you to answer the question quickly.  Speed is important, because you don’t want one question mix you up on the next one, and then the next one.

How do you plan to prepare for the listening portion of the IELTS exam?

Tell us about it in the comments section below!

In today’s Tear Up Your Textbook Tuesday, Lindsay and Michelle discuss 5 weird ways Americans use English, and how to understand what they’re saying!

 

It can be frustrating to watch a Hollywood movie in English and not understand what’s being said.  Often, this happens because of some of the distinct ways Americans use English. For example, Americans tend to:

 

  • Pronounce the letter ‘t’ as if it were a ‘d’.  This happens when the ‘t’ is between two vowels: ‘water’, ‘later’, ‘better’ and ‘daughter’ end up sound like ‘wader’, ‘lader’, ‘bedder’ and ‘daughder’.  It can even happen between two words: ‘I have a lot of time’ might sound like ‘I have a lada time’.

 

  • Use casual phrases. These include ‘like’ and ‘um’, but also ‘I was like’ (which reports from a previous conversation), or ‘you know’ or ‘I mean’. Note that these are not used in formal occasions.

 

  • Drop vowel sounds. This usually occurs when the last letter in the word is an ‘n’, and the previous vowel is dropped.  ‘Manhattan’ drops the final ‘a’ and sounds like ‘Manhattn’; ‘button’ drops final ‘o’ and sounds like ‘buttn’.  The same happens with words like ‘gotten’, ‘forgotten’, ‘eaten’ and ‘gluten’.

 

  • String words together. This happens in cases like ‘wanna’ (want to), ‘gonna’ (going to), ‘coulda’ (could have) and ‘woulda’ (would have).

 

  • Make a statement we believe to be true, then question it.  Sometimes you will hear Americans add a ‘huh?’ after saying something they know is true.  They probably aren’t really questioning it.  Examples include: ‘So you live in Manhattan, huh?’ and ‘It’s cold out today, huh?’

 

Have you heard Americans using any of these weird speech habits?

Let us know in the comments section below!

What’s so difficult about the IELTS Speaking Part 1?

What can you do to prepare?

Today, Lindsay and Jessica discuss some tactics for avoiding the dangers and allowing yourself to stand out!

Speaking Part 1 of the IELTS includes questions about yourself.  You will be asked about three topics, and though it may seem like simple stuff, the danger is that you might become too relaxed and start using one-word answers.

You want to do better than that.  In fact, ideally your answers will be 2-4 sentences each!

How can you do come up with that?  Do some brainstorming.  Think of the question words.  Question words can help you think of better answers.

Vocabulary is also important in Speaking Part 1.  If you want to achieve a higher score, you will need to use a range of vocabulary, including slang and idioms.  The examiner wants to hear that you know more than what’s in your textbook.  A good strategy is to have a short list of slang and idioms ready to use.

What are some good English slang words or idioms that might be helpful to have for Speaking Part 1 of the IELTS test?

Let us know in the comments section below!

Are you a multi-tasker?

Today, Lindsay and Michelle talk about the famous “to do” list, and whether or not it really moves you forward in your life or your career!

 

It’s hard to make decisions.  But it’s important to choose one thing to focus on in your day or even your career.  Trying to do more is not the same as accomplishing more.  In fact, it might lead to more disappointment than success.

In school, you were probably trained to multi-task, but not how to prioritize.   This might lead a person to being a “jack of all trades and master of none.”  But even if you can’t choose only one thing, it may be wise to at least choose the most important thing, and do that first.  If possible, find and focus on an objective that makes the others irrelevant.

 

Do you think it makes sense to focus on one thing?

Or is it better to be a jack of all trades and a master of none?

Let us know in the comments section below!

Do you expect it to ever get easier?

Today, learn how a New York-based painter went from poverty to riches by sticking with it, and how you can achieve success by following his example!

 

A New York painter was so poor, he had to go to a public gym if he wanted a shower.  But he was talented, and he kept painting for years and trying to show his work.  Today, his paintings sell for $25,000 each!  His style is unique, and there is little competition at his level.  People want to buy his work.

 

Daniel Webster said, “There’s always room at the top.”  As you reach higher levels in life, things get easier.  There’s little competition among the highly successful.  But most people get stuck in the middle.

As an intermediate or advanced English learner, you are at a crucial point.  In learning English, what can you do to become the best?  How can you stick with it, until it gets easier?

 

How can you keep up your goals in the coming year?

Tell us your thoughts in the comments section below!

 

Today, find out why mimicking phrases from movies can make it difficult to have natural-sounding English conversations!

 

Hollywood is drama.  Its stories are fiction.  This means that the language used by characters is often unrealistic.

Because of the unnatural dialogue, you don’t want to quote from movies unless it’s understood that you are quoting.  Native English speakers do it all the time by slightly changing the tone of their voice.  Even then, such quotes are usually made in a context that makes it clear that the usage is a little joke.

 

Some popular American movie quotes:

  • “Life is like a box of chocolates. You never know what you’re gonna get.” – Forrest Gump
  • “May the odds be ever in your favor.” – The Hunger Games
  • “May the force be with you.” – Star Wars
  • “Houston, we have a problem.” – Apollo 13

 

While it can be fun to directly quote movies, you want to try to sound more like a real English speaker, not a fictional character.

 

Do you have any favorite movie quotes in English?

Share the ones you love in the comments section below!

 

Do you need a plan for Writing Task 1 on the IELTS exam?

Today, Lindsay and Jessica share two clear steps for helping you beat it!

The IELTS exam’s written section is divided into two tasks.  Task 1 requires you to interpret a map or chart in approximately 150 words, while Task 2 is about 250 words on your own thoughts.  Even though it is longer, Task 2 is often easier for test-takers.  Task 1, because of the vocabulary needed, can be much more difficult.

The Task 1 chart is usually some kind of line or graph that shows a change over time.  To give yourself the language needed to discuss this chart, a good tactic might be to read the business section of the newspaper and pick up the vocabulary you need – words like that describe change, like increase, decrease, decline and skyrocket.

In writing your answer for Task 1, keep it clear and simple.  A good plan might be to discuss increases in paragraph one, and decreases in paragraph two.  That way, your answer is organized.

How are you preparing for the IELTS exam’s Task 1?

Share your thoughts in the comments section below! 

Today, Lindsay and Michelle give you three crazy role-plays to understand when to use should, could and would!

 

Correct use of modals like should, could and would can be confusing.  All three deal with time and possibility, and all three involve telling or asking someone to do something.

 

 

Get a 5- step lesson guide for Episode 241!

cover for modal lesson guide 241Learn how to use modals like “could,” “should,” and “would” in everyday English conversations.

By the time you finish this lesson you’ll be able to: Know when, where, and how to use the correct modal with native speakers.

You’ll get:

  • Step 1: A short video lesson, going into more depth on how to use these modals
  • Step 2: The full episode without sponsor messages
  • Step 3: A comprehension quiz to check your understanding
  • Step 4: The full transcript from Episode 241
  • Step 5: Conversation questions to practice modals with a native
  • Bonus step: 3 REAL vocabulary words that we used in the conversation

Get the 5-step lesson guide now!

 

Should describes the strong possible likelihood of something.  It is also used to give advice.

  • “I should arrive on time.”
  • “You should apply for the job.”

 

Could describes a possibility in the past or the future.  It can also be used as a polite request.

  • “She could have eaten dinner already.”
  • “Could you pick me up at the airport?”

 

Would is most commonly used to make a polite request.

  • “Would you like to come with me?”
  • “Would you ask him about the book?”

 

How can you use should, could and would?

Give us some examples in the comments section below!

Are you preparing to take the IELTS exam?

Today, Lindsay and Jessica discuss what you need to know to pass with the score you want!

There are lots of questions about the IELTS exam.  It’s not an easy test to take, but it is the most widely accepted test for getting into universities and even for immigration and work visas.

One reason for this is that the test is face-to-face with another person, which makes it more real.  Though this might sound intimidating, many testers actually find it more relaxing when the examiner is another person, rather than a computer.

When students take the test and don’t get the score they wanted, it’s usually because they didn’t have enough real-life speaking practice – they only worked out of textbooks.  You need to practice speaking with an actual person.  You also need to be honest with yourself about where you are with your English abilities so that you have an obtainable goal.

How are you preparing to take the IELTS exam?

Let us know in the comments section below!

Do you have trouble writing an email in English?

Do you worry about what kind of impression you’re making?

Today, Lindsay and Michelle share four common email mistakes made by non-native English speakers, and how to correct them!

 

Communication involves more than words.  But when you send an email, your poise and facial expression do not come through.  Only your words matter, and that can be stressful when you’re still learning the language.

Everybody emails these days.  The ability to write a good email  is as important as the ability to speak proper English.

Fortunately, the four most common email mistakes non-native speakers make are easy to fix.  They are:

  • Your greeting is inappropriate.  Who is the email for?  Sometimes ‘Hi’ is appropriate, but ‘Dear’ might be more appropriate if you are applying for a job.  ‘Dear’ implies formality and distance.  Using ‘Hi’ or ‘Hey’ is more for colleagues and friends.
  • You get to the point too quickly.  In American culture, you need to include some small talk.  Start your email with a ‘thank you’ for a previous message, or ask how their new project is going, or how their previous weekend was.  Jumping right into your point might feel aggressive or rude to Americans.
  • Your email is unorganized.  Keep your email short, sweet, and to the point.  Nobody likes to read a long and unfocused email.
  • You don’t tell people what you expect them to do.  Be clear so your reader knows why you are writing them and what you expect from them.

 

Have you made any of these mistakes when writing emails in English?

Tell us about it in the comments section below!

On today’s Test Talk, Lindsay and Jessica talk about using prediction in testing, and how it can help!

 

When getting a bank account, cell phone, or internet connection in a foreign country, you need to be able to ask questions and know the right structures of conversation.  If you don’t, you might not be told all of the information you need to know.

By practicing, especially if you’re able to do so with a partner, you can learn to anticipate what might be said by the other person.  Doing this is learning to predict, and see what you’re missing.  It might make you a better test-taker.

 

Learn How to Avoid Common Traps on TOEIC Part 1

TOEIC 1 guide artGet this 5-step lesson guide and find out how to use your Powers of Prediction to not get tricked during the TOEIC.

In this 5-step lesson you’ll get:

  • The full strategy tip
  • A written summary of the strategy
  • A practice exercise
  • 3 independent resource ideas
  • 3 real practice questions

 Get the 5- step lesson guide for TOEIC Part 1

 

 

A practice conversation might go like this:

  • “I need to open a bank account.”
  • “Okay, to open an account, please complete this form.”

 

  • “Where should I take the form?”
  • “Give it to the woman in the office down the hall.”

 

  • “When can I have my account?  Today?”
  • “No, it takes two weeks.”

 

  • “Do you need my passport?”
  • “Yes, and your birth certificate.”

 

If you would like to learn about this strategy, hear advice on how to strengthen it with resources that are free online, and get a practice guide written by Jessica, purchase the full episode.

 

Are you taking the TOEIC Part 1?

If so, let us know in the comments section below!

Or do you let your critics decide what you will do?

On today’s Deep Thoughts Thursday, Lindsay and Michelle consider a quote from Teddy Roosevelt, 26th President of the United States.

 

When he was a child, Teddy Roosevelt was weak, sickly and asthmatic.  He had poor eyesight, too.  Yet he grew up to be one of America’s greatest symbols of achievement and individual strength.  His attitude continues to inspire today, and is summed up in the following quote:

 

“It is not the critic who counts; not the man who points out how the strong man stumbles, or where the doer of deeds could have done them better. The credit belongs to the man who is actually in the arena, whose face is marred by dust and sweat and blood; who strives valiantly; who errs, who comes short again and again, because there is no effort without error and shortcoming; but who does actually strive to do the deeds; who knows great enthusiasms, the great devotions; who spends himself in a worthy cause; who at the best knows in the end the triumph of high achievement, and who at the worst, if he fails, at least fails while daring greatly, so that his place shall never be with those cold and timid souls who neither know victory nor defeat.”

 

Roosevelt suggests that we overcome trying to be perfect and instead develop a bias toward action.  Put emphasis on doing something, not fear of what others will say.  Don’t let critics overcome you or have power over you.  The critic is not taking a risk, and so they are weaker than you.

 

Do you think about this attitude?

How have you behaved this way in your life?

Share your story with us in the comments section below!

Today, Lindsay introduces Jessica, the Examiner of Excellence, who’s here to help you excel at your English tests!

 

Test preparation doesn’t have to be boring.  In fact, it should be interesting.  When you’re studying for an English test, it isn’t the same as studying for a math test.  You need to activate your emotions so you can remember more.

Reading or watching movies in English can help, but you can also practice writing essays on subjects that are interesting to you, or go out and speak English with native speakers.  Think of it as test preparation.

 

As for taking the actual test, Jessica has four essential tips to give you an advantage:

  • Be proactive.  Take an active approach that involves your brain.  Try to think about and predict answers.
  • Trust yourself.  Don’t start doubting yourself when answering questions.  Often, your first answer is the correct one.
  • Follow directions.  Tests are written by smart people.  Don’t start looking ahead and trying to race the clock.  If you do, you might miss an important instruction.
  • Don’t rush.  Don’t worry about timing.  Instead, focus on your English and do what the test asks you to do.

 

Have you done any testing in English?

How did it go?

Tell us about it in the comments section below!

Today Lindsay and Michelle talk about how to proceed when life feels overwhelming!

 

Whenever you aren’t sure what to do, always take the next easiest step. This advice is as useful for climbing a mountain as for any decision in life.

Adults tend to be more afraid in learning than children are because they look at the big picture.  Children focus on each step, and so don’t have fear.

 

Make small goals in English learning, don’t look at the entire mass of work ahead!  Break it down into manageable pieces.  Think about what you should do first, then second, then third.  Know your final goal, but focus on the steps.

 

How can you apply this to your English learning?

What do you need to do in the short term?

Share your thoughts in the comments section below!

Do you ever need to comfort others in English? Do you know how to make people feel better in English or to how to boost their ego?

On today’s Tear Up Your Textbook Tuesday, Lindsay and Michelle teach you a simple trick for boosting egos and helping others see the brighter sad of unhappy situations!

 

When someone you know tells you something sad, but not too serious, there’s a trick in English to help make them feel better.  By putting ‘though’ at the end of a sentence, and raising the intonation, you can emphasize something positive about the situation in order to make the speaker feel better

 

 

Do you want to learn more about how to use “though” at the end of your sentences?

cover for though lesson guide 237Do you want to know how to make someone feel better in English?

Get our 5-step lesson guide for Episode 237!

You’ll get:

  • A short video lesson
  • The full episode without sponsor messages
  • A comprehension quiz
  • Conversation questions to practice this language tip
  • The full transcript
  • * Bonus- 3 REAL vocabulary words highlighted from the episode

Get your 5-step lesson guide here!

 

 

Some examples of this include:

  • “My apartment’s too small.”
  • “But it’s such a great neighborhood though!”

 

  • “I made tacos, but I’m not a good cook.”
  • “But they’re really fresh and crunchy though!”

 

Have you used ‘though’ to boost someone’s ego?

How and when?

Tell us about it in the comments section below!

Today, Lindsay and Michelle have a natural English conversation about how information addiction can affect your life, and what you can do to unplug!

 

Electronics rule modern life.  Not only is it difficult to get away from them, many of us tend to not want to get away from them.  We’re addicted!

Like all addictions, this can cause anxiety and restlessness, and it can negatively affect your life.  Often there is a fear of missing out, or that something might happen and we won’t find out about it soon enough.

Of course this is almost never the case.  Email and the internet can wait.  So how do we overcome the feeling, and unplug?

 

Here are three ways that might help:

  • Recognize that there is a problem. Define the problem, then seek out solutions that work for you.
  • Give yourself turn-off time. Turn off not only your devices, but also their auto-notifications and the email capability on your phone.
  • Step away from the machines. Distance yourself physically!  Go outside, get into nature, or meditate.

 

Is information addiction a problem for you?

How do you overcome it?

Let us know in the comments section below!

On today’s Deep Thoughts Thursday, Lindsay and Michelle talk about the biggest decisions in life, and how to make them!

 

The American comedy actor Milton Berle once said, “If opportunity doesn’t knock, build a door.”

The suggestion is, if opportunities in life do simply come to you, then you should go out and look for opportunities yourself.  But which ones should you pursue, and which should you let go?

The worst would be to not explore an opportunity that attracts you, and then have regrets about it later.  Sometimes you’re afraid, and sometimes others get in the way of opportunities.  Life’s short, so don’t let that happen!

Find a quiet place to think about opportunities when you encounter them so you don’t pass up something good.

 

Have you had to make your own opportunities?

Share your story in the comments section below!

Are you looking for a way around it?

Today, Lindsay and Michelle share a story about one student who overcame his fear of speaking English by being an expert at something else!

 

An English student in an American business course had little confidence in his English abilities.  But when the other students in his course discovered that he understood their subject better than any of them, he was asked to be their tutor.  Of course, they wanted him to tutor them in English.

This turned out much better than expected.  As a tutor, he had to be in the moment and focused.  He couldn’t worry about his inhibitions or nervousness, or making mistakes.  And because of this, he was able to take control.

 

A classroom is a safe place to learn English, but you are expected not to make mistakes, and so you must focus on your own perfection rather than connection.  Connecting with others is more natural.  Try to get out of the classroom and overcome your inhibitions.

 

How do you practice English outside the classroom?

Does it help make you less self-conscious about speaking English?

Let us know in the comments section below!

On today’s Tear Up Your Textbook Tuesday, Lindsay and Michelle tell you how to talk about the future the way native speakers do!

 

Usually English textbooks tell you to talk about the future using ‘will’ and ‘going to’.

These work, but native English speakers also do it by using the progressive tense.

To native ears, this is a more natural and conversational way to talk.

 

Get a 5-step Lesson Guide on How to Use this Future Form in English Conversations

how to talk about your future plans in English

Do you want a step-by-step lesson guide on how to use this form of the future when you have natural conversations?

Do you want to have confidence when you speak about your future plans?

Get a 3-minute video lesson from Lindsay on this topic, get the transcript, get a comprehension quiz, 15+ conversation questions to use this language point, and more!

The price goes up soon!

Click here to get it now before the price goes up: Download this Lesson Guide Now

 

 

Here are some examples of conversation about the future using the progressive tense:

  • “What are you having for dinner?”
  • “Tonight I’m having chicken.”

 

  • “Are you bringing anything?”
  • “I’m bringing wine.”

 

  • “What are you doing tomorrow?”
  • “I’m going to see a movie.”

 

Note that all of these conversations are talking about the future, not the immediate moment.

 

What are you doing tomorrow?

What are you doing next week?

Let us know in the comments section below!

Do you want to get a job in the US?

Today, Lindsay and our guest, Brad C. discuss what you need to know to excel at an American job interview.

We’ll also find out how American job interviews are different from job interviews in your country.

Job interviews everywhere focus on skills and training.  But in the US, employers are usually interested in character as well.

They want to know whether you’re a team player, what your potential is to be a leader, and how you will grow in your job.

As such, they might ask some questions focused more on your behaviors than your skills.

It would help to think about these questions ahead of time, so you can be prepared.

Some American job interview questions might include:

  • “Tell us about the most difficult/frustrating individual you ever had to work with, and how you managed to work with them.”  By asking this, they’re seeing whether you can rise above a problem and keep it from affecting the company.
  • “Give an example of how you’ve broken out of a routine or when you’ve successfully developed a new approach.”  Here they’re asking you to show flexibility.
  • “How do you schedule your time/prioritize time when you have a tight turnaround?”  With this, you might want to explain how you ask others for help or delegate your work.

In answering all of these questions, try to tell a story from conflict to resolution, and keep it under three minutes if possible.

Do employers ask questions like these during job interviews in your country?

Tell us about it in the comments section below!

Brad received his undergraduate degree at New York University in 1984, and spent the next 15 years in the business world focused on sales and marketing.  After spending a year testing the English teaching waters in Korea, he returned to the USA and got a Masters degree in TESOL from Seattle University in March 2001.

Since then Brad has worked in London for a summer, spent a few years in Ireland writing TEFL materials for the Wall Street Institute and other companies, and has worked in Germany and Austria as an in-house Business English trainer for companies like Siemens, Deutsche Post/DHL and EADS.

He has also taught many seminars and workshops for various companies on skills like presentations and business correspondence, as well as a business course for two years at the University of Ulm, Germany.

How to Work with Brad on italki:

Step 1- Go to italki to get $10 off your second lesson. You must go through this link to get your special deal!

Step 2- Search for “Brad C” in the teacher search bar after you have registered with the above link for our special promotion.

I know what you are afraid of!

You are afraid that you will begin a conversation with a native English speaker and then the native speaker will say something that you don’t understand.

You are afraid that you will stand there, feeling embarrassed and awkward, right?

You don’t have to be afraid of this anymore!

Remember, having the right vocabulary words and phrases will build your confidence.

Today I will build your confidence for these situations by giving you 5 ways to ask the native speaker to repeat.

Check it out!

 

5 Ways to Ask a Native English Speaker to Repeat:

  • “I’m sorry. What was that?”
  • “Could you say that again?”
  • “Would you mind repeating that?”
  • “Say it again?”
  • “One more time?”

 

 

 

What other English phrases do you know when it comes to asking for repetition?

Let us know in the comments section below!

 

 

Or would you rather be ordinary and routine?

Today, Lindsay and Michelle discuss how not being a play-it-safer can help your English grow!

 

Lindsay has a quote on her wall from Sir Cecil Beaton, an English photographer and painter.  It goes:

“Be daring, be different, be impractical, be anything that will assert integrity of purpose and imaginative vision against the play-it-safers, the creatures of the commonplace, the slaves of the ordinary.”

-Cecil Beaton

 

A person who plays it safe is somebody who doesn’t take any risks or do anything out of the ordinary, but who only follows the rules.  Creatures of commonplace are regular people who only live in a routine and accept the limitations that others put on them.

Not playing-it-safe when learning English means that you have to push beyond your limits.  The best way to do that for your English is to try to make friends with other English speakers.  This might not always be easy. But remember, nobody wants to be just a tool for your English practice — try to make a friend instead!

 

Are you a play-it-safer, or are you more daring?

Tell us about it in the comments section below!

Today, San Francisco native Sarah Honour talks about how you can go local with your English in the City by the Bay!

 

San Francisco is one of the most unique and amazing cities in the United States.  It’s residents are technology-centric due to their proximity to Silicon Valley, as well as health-centric and nature-centric due to the progressive philosophy that has long been part of the spirit of the city.

Sarah believes that these traits are found in some of the language that San Franciscans use, and that knowing this terminology can help you fit in just a little better.

 

Here are Sarah’s three top terms for your visit to San Francisco:

  • “Is there an app for that?”:  App is short for application, as in for your phone.  Because the Bay Area is near the center of a major technological development region, there are apps for almost everything in the city — from calling a taxi to getting your groceries delivered.
  • Organic, Local, Sustainable and Seasonal: Food quality is really important to San Franciscans.  Organic means that no pesticides have been used, local means the food was grown nearby, and sustainable means the environment was not harmed to produce it.  Seasonal simply means that it is the natural time of year for the food to grow.
  • “Where’s the wiggle?”: San Francisco is a great city for biking, but it is also a city with lots of hills.  The ‘wiggle’ is the route for biking with the least amount of hills to go up.

 

Have you ever been to San Francisco?

Would you like to go?

Tell us why in the comments section below!

 

Sarah HonourSarah is a 31 year old American who was born and raised in Denver, Colorado, studied Communications in Seattle, Washington, and worked for almost 10 years as a nanny (or babysitter) in San Francisco, California.  She now splits her time between San Francisco and Sardinia, Italy where her boyfriend lives. She is an English teacher on italki, and is learning Italian and sampling as much of the amazing food and wine from Italy as she can.

Have you ever met someone on the phone or the internet before you met them in person?

Today, Lindsay and Michelle discuss tag questions in English, and how they can help you confirm what you think you know, but aren’t sure about!

 

A tag question helps you to confirm a piece of information that you think is true, but that you want to clarify.  Though they are used as a tool for clarity, they can also be a great way to create conversations.

Tag questions tend to begin with the statement to be clarified, and then end with the question.  There are many possible combinations.

 

Some common examples of tag questions include:

  • “You’re from Washington, aren’t you?”
  • “You used to live in New York, didn’t you?”
  • “He can play the piano, can’t he?”
  • “Her birthday is in July, right?”

 

All Ears English TranscriptsMake sure you understand every word you hear on All Ears English.

Bring your English to the advanced level with new vocabulary and natural expressions.

Get the transcripts from today’s episode.

Learn to speak naturally with the American accent.

Click here to subscribe to the transcripts and save 50%

 

 

Do you ever use tag questions?

What kinds of things do you need to confirm or clarify in others?

Let us know in the comments section below!

 

Do you want to start a conversation in English?

Today, Lindsay introduces and talks about conversations with Michelle Kaplan, the new All Ears English co-host!

Michelle was born in Washington DC but now lives in New York City.  She’s musical, likes basketball, and has some unusual tastes in food.  Most importantly, she’s the new All Ears English co-host.

In her premier episode, Michelle talks with Lindsay and offers some simple conversation starters in English.

In conversing with someone new, it’s good to look for things you have in common.  But first you need some basic information.  Here are some great starter questions that might lead to larger discussions:

    • Where are you from (originally)? Is your family still there? Do you visit them often?
    • What are you into? What do you do for fun? (this is like asking, What are your hobbies?, but more natural)
    • Did you go to college? Where?
    • Do you watch any sports?

Do you have any other conversation starters?

Share your thoughts in the comments section below!

Everyone is getting started on their holiday shopping.

Are you going shopping this weekend?

If you are, you’ll need a few useful phrases to make sure that you can communicate smoothly with the shop owners.

In this video I will give you three useful phrases for shopping  in English on Black Friday.

 

3 Useful Phrases for Shopping on Black Friday in the US:

 

  • “Can I try it on?”: To “try something on” means to put it on to see if it fits. You try things on in the fitting room or in the dressing room.

 

  • “Do you have size ___?”: If the sizes are different in your country then you’ll want to get a chart to translate your size into your US size.

 

  • “What’s your return policy?”: It’s important to know what will happen if you decide that you don’t want the item when you get home or if it doesn’t fit. Find out if you can return the item. Most places in the US do allow you to return an item for a refund or store credit.

 

 

Watch the Video Lesson Now!

 

 

Practice English with a native teacher!

Get $10 off your second lesson at italki- click here

 

Let’s have a conversation in the comments section!

Did you go shopping on Black Friday?

Where did you go?

What did you buy?

 

Is conversation a science?

Find out today as Lindsay talks with Travis Wolven about the poetics of conversation!

 

Travis believes that a core principle of conversation is that, when two people are talking, they’re cooperating.  That is, they’re working together to make the conversation possible.

Mastering English conversation requires mastery of 4 maxims of the poetics of conversation.  These are:

  • Quantity: Be as informative as possible, but don’t give out too much information.  If someone asks you “How are you doing?”, don’t tell them all of your problems.
  • Quality: Be truthful and stay within the context of what you are talking about.
  • Relation: Make sure that what you are saying is relevant to the other person.
  • Manners: Be clear and brief so you are not wasting the other person’s time, and avoid obscurity.

 

Do you see the poetics of conversation in your own conversations?

How does it come up?

Tell us about it in the comments section below!

 

Travis Wolven, Poetics of Conversation, EnglishTravis Wolven was raised in Georgia, and in his early twenties decided to become an ESL instructor in South Korea.

After realizing his passion for teaching and improving ESL education, he studied storytelling at East Tennessee State University.

Today, Travis resides in Boston where he teaches English with the Harvard Bridge Program.

He plans on doing research on the effects of collaborative storytelling in intermediate language learners.”

Get in touch with Travis at esltravisteacher@gmail.com.

 

How can you make the most of the time you invest in studying?

Today Lindsay talks with Nick Vance about the 80/20 principle, and how it can improve your English conversations!

 

Nick believes that 80% of the positive benefits of something come from 20% of the input.  In business, some customers are more valuable than others.  With friends, though you may have many, only a few are truly close.

In learning English, most of the grammar mistakes a new learner makes are really the same mistake over and over.  Correcting these most common 20% of mistakes would eliminate 80% of all grammar mistakes.  The best way to identify these is by working with a teacher who can help point out your mistakes.

 

Are you looking for a professional, native English teacher online?

Get a native English teacher online in seconds at italki.italki1

Lindsay recommends italki as our #1 English-learning solution online. Choose from more than 400 teachers to work on your business English or to pass your next big exam.

Get our special offer before it runs out! Go to italki and claim 10USD to go toward a FREE English lesson!

 

Another way to work with the 80/20 principle is to prepare answers to the most common questions you might get from native English speakers.  This will help you comfortably get conversations started — which is probably 80% of the work!

You might prepare answers to questions like:

  • Where are you from?
  • How long have you lived here?
  • What do you do for a living?

 

Do you see the 80/20 principle working in your life?

How so?

Share your thoughts with us in the comments section below!

 

 

How to book a lesson with Nick!

Step 1: Go to our special italki link to get $10 USD off of your second lesson.

Step 2: After you have enrolled through the promo page to get your discount, search for Nick Vance in the teacher search bar.

 

1

Nick Vance is originally from Kentucky and has lived in North Carolina, Washington DC, San Diego and Portland.  He has been living in Berlin, Germany for 2.5 years.  Nick’s degree is in math but he left that field when he realized how much he enjoyed helping others learn English.
Nick has been helping people improve their English for 4 years and has been teaching online via italki for about one year.

What do employers want and expect?

Today, Lindsay and Kristy talk about 3 things an employer in the U.S. might look for in a job candidate!

 

If you’re applying for a job, it’s important to know what your potential employer is looking for.  Like any other country, the U.S. has a professional culture which places more value on some individual qualities than others.  These qualities may be very different from what employers look for in your home country!

Presentation1All Ears English Transcripts!

Check your understanding of today’s episode.

Learn the sounds of American English and new vocabulary words.

Click here to download the transcripts now.

 

 

Some qualities American employers seek in employees:

Proactive attitude: Show that you are autonomous and energetic – the opposite of passive.  It means to show up early, confirm the time you will meet, and say thank you.

Positive attitude: Americans like smiles.  But it’s also important that you get along with others and not be pessimistic.

Communication: When you actively communicate it shows you are engaged.  A big part of this is simply that you let the boss know what is going on.

Be a “Giver”: Show that you believe in the vision of the company and are personally invested in its success.  In other words, it’s more than a job to you.

 

Are these the same traits that employers look for in your country?

Do you have them?

Let us know in the comments section below!

 

Today, Lindsay talks with Sarah Scala about the importance of persistence, both in life and in learning English! 

 

Resilience is the ability to pick yourself up after a setback, and keep going.  It’s an important ability, and it’s also something we can improve in ourselves.

But Sarah believes that grit is even more important.  Grit is your ability to stay focused, over the long term.  It enables a person to be nimble and accept the ups and downs without losing focus.

 

Can’t find native speakers to practice English with you?Speak English Now (2)

Can’t get your English corrected by your native-speaking friends?

Get a professional, native English teacher in seconds at italki.

For a limited time, italki is offering 10 USD in free English lessons. Click here to get your 10USD in italki credits before this offer runs out!

 

Sarah has three suggestions for developing your own grit and resilience in learning English:

  • Be meaningfully interested.  Find a way to connect to English in a way that is not superficial.
  • Have a growth mindset.  Your brain has the ability to change and evolve, and that will make it easier to succeed and harder to fail.  Attune your thinking to this inherent ability.
  • Practice.  The only way to become an expert is to work at it.

 

How much resilience and grit do you have?

How does it show?

Tell us about it in the comments section below!

 

 

SarahScala

As a dynamic consultant, coach, and educator, Sarah Scala has over 15 years of experience in supporting organization development, leadership, and change management.

Sarah brings high energy, adaptability, and openness to new challenges. She has substantial experience in global leadership development, executive coaching, learning design, and team effectiveness.

Sarah has led development initiatives for start-ups to Fortune 500 companies in industries such as global manufacturing, financial services, legal, consumer packaged goods, pharmaceutical, medical, consulting, and education.

Visit Sarah’s Website Here

 

Learn More About Grit and Resilience!

 

 

 

Do you find yourself looking for new ways to start a conversation in English?

Are you running out of ideas?

Do you feel like you repeat the same questions and sentences every time you start a conversation?

The weather is a great way to start a conversation and build a connection with someone.

You don’t have to make the whole conversation about the weather but it’s a great topic to get started with the person.

Do you want to know three ways to do it?

Watch today’s video!

 

3 Ways to Start an English Conversation with a Cold Weather Comment

 

 

 

3 Ways to Start an English Conversation with a Weather Comment:

 

  • “(It’s) chilly isn’t it?”

 

  • “It’s getting cold, huh?”

 

  • “I can’t believe how cold it is these days.”

 

Let’s have a conversation in the comments section!

What other weather phrases do you know that you can use to start a conversation in English?

Let us know in the comments below!

Is there a connection between tennis and learning English?

What can it teach us?

Today, Lindsay and Kristy talk about what they’ve learned about language learning from tennis lessons!

 

In tennis, as in many other sports, it’s critical that you persist.  You have to keep trying.  You have to show up for practice, and be consistent.  Mental toughness is also important.  You want to have the upper hand and be offensive, rather than defensive.

When learning a new language, sometimes we get stuck on a negative thought or an embarrassment.  This can lead us to lose the upper hand, and our confidence.  But when we sound good, we feel more in control.  The point is to practice, and to try to keep the ball in your court.  Stay in the game and take a deep breath!

 

PrintAre You Ready to Practice? Get a Private, Native English Teacher Now!

Try italki to learn to speak like a native.

You’ll get your English mistakes corrected immediately!

For a limited time you’ll get 10UD to use towards private English lessons on italki.

Visit italki now to claim your 10USD in free English lessons.

 

Do you think tennis (or any other sports) offer lessons to language learning?

What are some examples?

Let us know what you think in the comments section below?

Today, Lindsay and Kristy continue to discuss the Zone of Genius concept, and what you can do to find success in English and in life by discovering it in yourself!

 

The Zone of Genius is where your innate talent and your greatest passion come together, in a way that matters to you.  It is not about improving weaknesses, but rather amplifying strengths.

Inhibitions can hold us back in life.  That is why it’s important to seek out your Zone of Genius and how it applies to your life, your relationships, and your careers.  If you feel afraid, you might be on the right track.

 

What is your Zone of Genius?

How do you know?

Tell us about it in the comments section below!

Today, in #1 of the Top 15 Fixes series, we discuss the most common article in the English language, ‘the’!

 

Use of the definite article ‘the’ can be confusing.  However, there are some rules that can help you get it right most of the time.

 

The first requires that you consider whether the focus is on something specific, or something more general.

When focused on specific items, use ‘the’.  If you’re sitting at a table, talking about the food that is actually in front of you, you might say:

  • “Do you like the turkey?”
  • “Yes, the turkey is great!”
  • “Could you please pass the salt?”

When focused on more general terms, you don’t use ‘the’.  If you’re discussing food in general, you might say:

  • “Do you like turkey?”
  • “Have you tried pumpkin pie?”
  • “Cranberries are too tart for me.”

 

Geographical terms can also be tricky for ‘the’.  In most cases, large, well-known geographic places will have ‘the’: the continent, the Pacific Ocean, the moon.

With specific countries, a country’s formal name might require ‘the,’ while a less formal name might not: the United States, the Russian Federation; America, Russia.

 

Roleplay

Lindsay and Michelle are sitting next to each other at Thanksgiving dinner.

Lindsay: Can you pass the rolls, please?

Michelle: Sure! Do you have butter?

Lindsay: No, I don’t. Can you pass me the butter as well?

Michelle: No problem. How are the rolls? I haven’t tried them yet.

Lindsay: Delicious! These are homemade, but the ones I brought are from the store.

Michelle: That’s funny that you aren’t eating the rolls you brought.

Lindsay: I didn’t have time to make them!

Michelle: I did the same thing. I was asked to bring cranberry sauce, and the sauce I brought is store-bought.

Lindsay: I don’t think I’ve ever tried homemade cranberry sauce!

Michelle: It’s delicious, but it takes a long time to make! I had to make stuffing as well, so I couldn’t do both.

Lindsay: Oh, I’ll have to try it! Can you pass me the stuffing?

Michelle: It’s the same recipe I used last year, and everyone seemed to like it. If it ain’t broke, don’t fix it!

 

Other Entries in the 15 Fixes Series:

 

What have you found difficult about ‘the’?

Tell us all about it in the comments section below!

How can you access your Zone of Genius?

Today Lindsay talks with Laura Garnett, creator of the Zone of Genius Assessment, about how you can discover your own zone of genius!

The Zone of Genius is your innate talents combined with your purpose.  Your talent is what you’re naturally good at, and it is unique to you.  Your purpose is your main challenge in life – this may not be so unique.  In fact, many others may have the same challenge, and there may be an opportunity for you to help them while helping yourself.

Laura offers four tips to finding your Zone of Genius:

  • Identify your talent: Ask your colleagues what they see as your unique approach to the work you do. You may have overlooked something about yourself!
  • Identify your challenges: Look at your past. What did you struggle with? What was hard? What did you overcome, and how did you help others?
  • Ask yourself weekly: What are you excited about at work? Are you bored or interested? Why or why not?
  • Look back on your past week: What impact did you have? Does it satisfy you?

What do you think of the Zone of Genius concept?

Let us know in the comments section below!

Laura Garnett, Performance Strategist

Laura Garnett is a Performance Strategist, speaker and the creator of The Zone of Genius Assessment — a powerful process that clarifies your unique talent and purpose, to produce greater impact, results and fulfillment at work.

She speaks at events and conferences across the country, including TEDx, and is a regular contributor to Inc.com, The Huffington Post and the Zappos Delivering Happiness blog.

Prior to launching her own New York-based consultancy, Laura honed her marketing, branding and mission-refining skills at companies like Capital One, American Express, IAC and Google.

Visit Laura’s website, sign up for her newsletter and take an assessment to see if you are living and working in your Zone of Genius!

Do you occasionally need to ask for a favor in English?

Maybe you want your colleague to help you with a project or you want to ask a friend to help you move!

When you ask for a favor in English, you need to be sure that you use the right words so that your message doesn’t come across as being offensive, pushy, or demanding.

Today I will show you how to politely ask for a favor in English.

Please watch my video below.

 

3 Ways to Ask for a Favor in English

 

 

 

Now go out and practice your new phrases this week with a native teacher!

Get $10 free to go toward your second lesson at italki!

Click here to get this special deal now.

 

 

 

Or are you afraid?

Today, learn how freedom comes with fearlessness!

There are so many things to be afraid of: loneliness, lack of money, professional failure or meaninglessness. Fears can overwhelm you.  But what if you have a vision that’s bigger than fear?

To accomplish anything, you have to get out of your head and into your body. Action means letting go of your thoughts.  But to do that, you need the freedom to be fearless.

 

Presentation1All Ears English Transcripts!

Check your understanding of today’s episode.

Learn the sounds of American English and new vocabulary words.

Click here to download the transcripts now.

 

Freedom to be fearless means:

  • Questioning everything
  • Avoiding “perfectionist paralysis”
  • Having goals, but knowing that goals are not always the most important thing
  • Being able to communicate effectively with others when the stakes are high

 

Are you free and fearless?

How does it come out in your life?

Tell us your story in the comments section below!

Today, Lindsay talks with All Ears English blog writer Jay Bethke about what you can do to be a better writer!

 

English literature is filled with non-native English speakers who’ve been successful English writers: Joseph Conrad, Vladimir Nabokov, Chinua Achebe, Nurrudin Farah, Salman Rushdie, Haruki Murakami and Roald Dahl, to name a few. They bring a fresh perspective to the English-speaking world, and so their work is powerful.

But nobody is born a great writer. Like with everything else, the more you practice, the better you will be.  Imagination and natural talent are part of it, but they’re not enough for success!

 

In addition to practice, here are Jay’s top three tips for being a better writer:

  • Read more.  A good writer is a good reader. Reading attunes your mind to the written language and naturally builds vocabulary.  It can also be fun and interesting, so it doesn’t have to feel like work!
  • Strive for beauty with economy. Try to say as much as possible with as few words as possible. Because of the internet, people today often skim rather than read if things are too long.
  • Seek emotional engagement. Find connection to what you’re writing, and think deeply about how to connect it to readers. You’re writing to elicit response in a reader, not to create perfection of text: Connection not perfection!

 

Do you write in English?

 What kind of things do you write?

Tell us all about it in the comments section below!

 

 

Profile PicJay Bethke is a freelance writer, editor and ghost-writer, and was a runner-up for the 2013 International Three Day Novel Contest. He is available as a professional consultant on all kinds of English writing and editing projects, and would be happy to chat with you about questions or resources for writing in English.  Contact Jay at jsbethke@hotmail.com.

Do you say By Yourself or On Your Own in English?

Today, in #2 of our Top 15 Fixes series, we discuss these two phrases and how to use them when you’re doing something alone!

By yourself and on your own are two phrases that may look different, but their meanings are essentially identical.  Both are used to say that you’ve done something alone, rather than with others.

  • Are you completing this project by yourself?
  • Are you completing this project on your own?

Even though their meaning is the same, you want to be careful that you don’t mix up the prepositions between these phrases. The best way to avoid that is to learn each one as a chunk.  And the best way to do that is to practice!

Roleplay

Michelle and Lindsay are discussing what they do when they have some free time.

Michelle: I’m going to be on my own this weekend since my family is out of town.

Lindsay: What are you going to do with all your free time!

Michelle: Well, when I’m by myself, I love to curl up with a good book. I’ll have some more time though, so maybe I’ll meet up with some friends. What do you do when you’re on your own?

Lindsay: I’m the same- I love reading when I’m by myself. I also spend time meditating, and it’s easier to focus when I’m on my own.

Michelle: Do you like spending time on your own?

Lindsay: For sure. I think everyone needs time with their own thoughts.

Michelle: Yeah, when I’m by myself in a car or on a walk, sometimes I love that time to just think.

 

Other Entries in the 15 Fixes Series:

What do you like to do by yourself?

What do you like to do alone?

Let us know in the comments section below!

Did you know that American culture discourages this?

Today, find out why Americans feel compelled to move out of their family home at age 18 – even if they don’t have enough money to do so!

 

In many countries, adult children might continue living with their parents for many years. But in America, the cultural expectation is that children will move out at around age 18, or after university.

The reasoning behind this is that, in American culture, it is viewed as very important that children be mature and self-sufficient. Independence is seen as more important than having a cozy home.

 

Are you looking for a professional, native English teacher online?

Two Free English LessonsGet a native English speaker online in seconds at italki.

Lindsay and Gabby recommend italki as our #1 English-learning solution online. Choose from more than 400 teachers to work on your business English or to pass your next big exam.

Get our special offer before it runs out! Go to italki and claim 10USD to go toward a FREE English lesson!

 

How long do adult children live at home in your country?

Do you still live at home?

Tell us about it in the comments section below!

Sometimes English gets confusing, right?

The verbs seem so similar.

It’s hard to know which verb to use when.

It’s especially hard with these two verbs: “Figure out” and “Find out.”

Well today I am going to end your confusion and I am going to show you exactly how to use these verbs in a natural, real American English conversation!

 

“Figure out” versus “Find out”

What’s the difference?

Get the answer in this video!

 

GET 10USD TO PRACTICE WITH A NATIVE TEACHER NOW

 

Now you have a chance to practice these verbs with a native teacher!

If you go to italki now, you’ll get 10 free USD to apply toward a lesson with native English teacher.

Go to italki and get your 10USD now

 

 

 

 

 

Is it important to spend time with others who appreciate your dreams?

Today, we talk about why it’s a good idea to hang out with people who can do and dream, and one action you can take to build a supportive social circle!

 

A great tactic for overcoming fears is to surround yourself with positive people. Doers, dreamers and those who can see greatness within you are naturally supportive and can make you a stronger person.

Avoid people who block or ridicule your dreams. Instead, look for mentors and like-minds.  They’ll help you and you’ll help them.

 

Do you surround yourself with doers and dreamers?

How does it make a difference in your life?

Tell us about it in the comments section below!

Do you link your English studies to your big goals?

Today, learn about one All Ears English listener who has an incredible goal and dream for his English – and why it’s making all the difference in his life!

 

Sergen is an All Ears English listener in Turkey. He listens to English conversations 4-8 hours every day!

His goal is to become an actor and move to Hollywood.  That may sound like an ambitious dream, but it is possible.

Dreaming big is the only way to achieve big things.  And it’s important to have a goal that you care about.

What you’re doing must inspire you and hold your attention.  Find what you want to do in life, not just what you should do!

 

Do you have any big dreams or goals connected to learning English?

Tell us all about them in the comments section below!

Do you make something, or do you do it?

Today, in #3 of our Top 15 Fixes, we talk about the difficulty of distinguishing when to use these two verbs!

 

Many English learners have difficulty using do and make, often because they are directly translating from their own language. But native English speakers make it even more difficult.  Even though there are some basic rules for using these verbs, native speakers tend to break them.

 

Make usually means to create something, from the ground up. Some examples include:

  • Making food, a drink, or anything requiring ingredients
  • Making friends (creating friendships)
  • Making the bed or table (putting things together)
  • Making a phone call, or making mistakes

 

Do usually relates more to a responsibility, an action or a job. Some examples include:

  • Doing dinner, coffee or drinks (something you do together, with others)
  • Doing homework, or doing the dishes (doing a job or work)
  • Doing someone a favor
  • Doing your best

 

Roleplay

Michelle and Lindsay are on a Caribbean cruise and are discussing some of the activity options.

Lindsay: Can you do me a favor? Help me pick some activities from this list.

Michelle: There are so many options! I heard there are tennis courts on the ship. Have you seen them?

Lindsay: No, but that’s definitely something I want to do. Maybe tomorrow morning!

Michelle: And there’s a cooking class scheduled for tonight- let’s do that!

Lindsay: Yes! It looks like we’re going to learn how to make cream puffs. My pastry skills could definitely use some work!

Michelle: Same! I love making cookies, but pastry dough is way harder!

Lindsay: What else do you want to do? There’s so much on this list!

Michelle: Seriously! It’s hard to choose. And there’s so much extra time when we don’t have to make dinner or do the dishes.

 

Other Entries in the 15 Fixes Series:

 

What do you make?

What do you do?

Let us know in the comments section below!

What do you need to know?

Today, we discuss one little part of making it in the Big Apple!

 

Kristy has lived in New York for awhile.

She knows that New Yorkers aren’t always patient.  But she also knows that they’re usually friendly and open to meeting new people – maybe more so than where you live.

 

Here are Christie’s 3 top tips for meeting new friends in New York:

  • Know that you’re not alone! Many New Yorkers are transplants – they were born somewhere else and moved to the city. That means they’re as open to meeting new friends as you are.
  • Explore online community groups and meet-up events. With so many people in one place, there are likely to be many others you can connect with.
  • If you sense a connection, don’t be afraid to invite the person to do something. Go for coffee or check out some part of the city together. This might seem odd where you live, but it’s normal in a city full of transplants!

 

Is it easy to meet new friends where you live?

Are people there like New Yorkers?

Let us know in the comments section below!

What are you afraid of?

Today is Halloween!

Tonight all of the ghosts and goblins will be out in Boston.

But it’s not the ghosts that I am afraid of.

I am afraid of things like failure, making too many mistakes, and looking silly.

What about you?

What are you afraid of?

Watch today’s video to find out how to look past your fears and focus on your vision to achieve your goals in English and in life.

 

 

 

 

So tell us in the comments below.

What are your fears?

What’s your vision?

How will you use your vision to overcome and step past your fears?

 

Do you know how to celebrate Halloween like an American?

Today, we discuss how Americans celebrate this strange holiday, and how learning English will allow you to celebrate Halloween all year!

 

Halloween is a popular traditional American holiday. For many Americans, it is their favorite holiday.

Among the many activities Americans engage in, the most important for celebrating Halloween is dressing up in a costume.

Adults might dress up for parties, and kids might dress up for trick or treating. This is a chance to be somebody different and to reinvent yourself!

Learning a new language can also allow you to take on a new personality. A new culture and language might mix with your unique personality to make you into someone ‘different’.  Speaking a new language is thus like Halloween all year!

 

Do you celebrate Halloween in your country?

What do you do?

Tell us all about it in the comments section below!

Today, we talk with Steve Kaufmann, founder of LingQ.

He shares expertise on how your English learning goals are closer than you think!

 

Steve’s an expert language learner – he speaks 14 different languages. So he knows it’s possible for you to learn English.  With modern technology he believes it’s easier than ever before.

 

Presentation1All Ears English Transcripts!

Get the transcripts for this episode!

Use the transcripts to move your English from intermediate to advanced.

Learn native pronunciation and vocabulary.

Click here now to get the transcripts.

 

 

Here are Steve’s tips:

  • Learning depends on you, not your teacher or school. Be motivated.  Language learning takes time, so stick with it!  Your attitude is 80% of the battle.
  • Put your emphasis on comprehension. If you can speak but you can’t understand, you don’t know enough.  Do lots of listening and reading.  Transcripts of audio are helpful because there’s less pressure.
  • Don’t be hard on yourself. You’re pushing you’re limits, so it shouldn’t be easy!  But tension and pressure are the enemy of success, so be persistent, not stressed.

Do you think learning English is up to you?

Where do you put your emphasis?

Let us know in the comments section below!

 

Steve Kaufmann is a graduate of L’Institute D’Etudes Politiques in France (1966) and a former Canadian Diplomat and forest industry executive.

He is co-founder (with his son Mark) of LingQ.com, an online language learning system and community.

Steve speaks 14 languages, has written a book called, The Way of the Linguist, a Language Learning Odyssey, and has a You Tube channel under the name of lingosteve.

Click here to Try LingQ now!

Don’t miss our interview with ESL expert Amy Gillett!

Learn 3 easy ways to speak English like an American with Amy Gillett

 

 How did you like today’s episode?

Please leave a comment for us or ask a question!

What did you learn from Steve? Let us know!

Today, in #4 of the Top 15 Fixes series, we discuss using the words ‘much’ and ‘many’ when discussing quantities!

 

It’s important to think of the meaning of the words much and many, and how each is used differently in counting.

 

If you’re counting something as a mass that can be spilled on the table so that it goes everywhere, you would use the word ‘much’. Examples include:

  • Grainy or powdery substances like sugar or flour
  • Liquids, semi-liquids or semi-solids like milk, honey or butter
  • Money (when considered abstractly, as in “too much money”)

 

If you are counting individual pieces, use the word ‘many’. Examples include:

  • Grains such as sugar counted individually
  • Groups of items, like chocolate chips, marshmallows or berries
  • Countable units, such as cups, teaspoons or bags

 

Roleplay

Aubrey and Lindsay are grocery shopping, and discussing amounts needed for a chocolate chip cookie recipe.

Lindsay: How much flour do we need?

Aubrey: The recipe calls for 2 cups, so that small bag will work.

Lindsay: Ok, perfect. And how many teaspoons of vanilla? I have a tiny bit left, but it might not be enough.

Aubrey: We need 2 teaspoons, so let’s buy a new bottle.

Lindsay: This recipe calls for both baking powder and baking soda, right?

Aubrey: Yes. How much of each?

Lindsay: It looks like 1 1/2 teaspoons of baking powder and 1 teaspoon of baking soda.

Aubrey: You probably have salt, right? How much do we need?

Lindsay: Just 1 teaspoon. Yes, I have plenty of salt at my place.

Aubrey: Ok, so just chocolate chips. How many do we need?

Lindsay: 2 cups, so one bag should do it.

Aubrey: We’re all set- let’s go make cookies!

 

Other Entries in the 15 Fixes Series:

 

Do you have any examples for using much and many in your baking or cooking?

Share with us in the comments section below!

Do you want to know how to speak with an American accent?

Today, learn 3 ways to sound a little more like an American when you speak English!

 

Author and English teacher Amy Gillett believes in working to perfect your American English accent.  According to her, the more you put into it, the better your accent will be.

 

Here are Amy’s 3 tips to sound more like an American:

Build vocabulary by learning idioms. Because idioms cannot be translated directly, they must be learned in chunks.  This is an opportunity to both sound more natural in the language you use, and to learn new words.

Work on you American pronunciation. Practice forming your mouth so that you can imitate native speaker’s vowels and consonants.  Also, pay attention to the rhythm of native English speech patterns.

Practice! Get out and talk to people, and let others know you want to be corrected.

 

Presentation1All Ears English Transcripts!

Get the transcripts for this episode!

Use the transcripts to move your English from intermediate to advanced.

Learn native pronunciation and vocabulary.

 

Click here to get the transcripts

 

Have you tried to speak English more like an American?

What’s worked for you?

Tell us about it in the comments section below!

 

agillett-photoAmy Gillett is the author of the best-selling ESL books Speak English Like an American, Speak Business English Like an American and several other books on speaking conversational American English. She teaches business English to international executives, most recently for ICBC, the world’s largest bank. She has taught at Charles University in Prague, Cornell University, and the University of Michigan. Find her at Language Success Press.

 

You have been studying English for years, right?

Are you fluent yet?

Are you confident yet?

If you answered “no” to these questions then why not?

It’s because you aren’t learning “natural” English.

Today I’m going to show you 3 strategies to speak natural English, the way that natives speak it.

Watch the video to learn more!

 

3 Ways to Speak Natural English

 

Go to italki to speak with a native and get $10 for free

 

 

3 Ways to Speak Natural English

 

  • Link Your Words: Native speakers don’t pronounce every word evenly. They link words together. Try to mirror the way that natives speak. Don’t try to say what you read in your textbook.

 

  • Listen Every Day: You need to listen to good English material but you don’t have to listen to ESL podcasts. You can listen to podcasts and radio shows in English about any topic that you love.

 

  • Speak with Natives: You know why this is important! Today you can get 10USD in free credits to speak with a native if you go to italki

 

Claim your $10 free now because this offer runs out in a few days!

Go to italki and start speaking now!

 

 

Do you run your day, or does your day run you?

Today we discuss how planning your day can help you accomplish your priorities!

 

If you don’t decide how you’ll manage you time, someone else will. It’s simple to understand but easy to forget.

 

Here are some tips for planning a day focused on your priorities:

  • Spend time planning for tomorrow. Consider your priorities, write them down, plan ahead how you will achieve what you want the next day.
  • Set up a work space that is conducive to your priorities. Prepare what you need and keep the area clean so you can focus.
  • If you’re trying to finish reading a book in English, leave it out where you can see it. This way, you are reminded to read it.
  • Reduce the number of decisions you need to make on small things. Save your mental energy for bigger, more important decisions.

 

Preparation sets you up for success.   Take initiative over your time so that you can accomplish what you want.

 

Do you run your day?

What do you do right, and what could you do better?

Tell us in the comments section below!

 

If you take the bus or train, what do you say when you discover it has already come and gone without you?

“I lost the bus,” is a common mistake.  The problem with saying this is that it suggests you owned the bus, but no longer know where it is.  A person can lose their keys or their wallet, but they can only lose their bus if they’re a bus driver!

 

The correct statement is, “I missed the bus,” or “I missed the train.”

It is important to understand that “to miss” someone or something can mean two things. As with buses and trains, it can mean you didn’t arrive on time to get a ride.

But another meaning of “to miss” is to have an emotional regret at the absence of someone or something.  An example of this is, “I miss my sister,” or “I miss having a car.”

 

Two Free English LessonsAre You Ready to Practice? Get a Private, Native English Teacher Now!

Try italki to learn to speak like a native.

You’ll get your English mistakes corrected immediately!

For a limited time you’ll get 10UD to use towards private English lessons on italki.

Visit italki now to claim your 10USD in free English lessons.

 

Do you take the bus or the train?

Do you ever miss it?

Tell us a story in the comments section below!

How do you talk about people in English?

Is the word “people” plural or singular?

Today, in #5 of the Top 15 Fixes, we discuss a mistake you might be making when you translate your native language into English – and how to fix it!

 

In some languages, the word for “people” is singular. But it’s important to remember that, in English, this word is plural.

  • People are interesting.
  • NOT: People is interesting.

 

The singular term for “people” is “person.” This is similar to the situation with the words “children” and “child.”

  • The children are good.
  • The children are energetic.
  • The child is good.
  • The child is energetic.

 

Roleplay

Lindsay and Aubrey are discussing a fundraiser they are planning.

Aubrey: How many people are attending?

Lindsay: About 2,500 have purchased tickets, so we’ll definitely have a good turnout!

Aubrey: We should talk about the entertainment.

Lindsay: Yes, we’ll have a lot of kids there and we want to make sure the children are having fun!

Aubrey: I think we have plenty of booths set up for them, but we may want to add a few more staff members to help out if needed.

Lindsay: Great idea. Anytime a lot of children are present, it’s a good idea to have extra help.

Aubrey: Definitely! And when the kids are happy and engaged, people are able to look over the silent auction items.

Lindsay: For sure. Ok, that sounds like a plan!

 

Other Entries in the 15 Fixes Series:

 

 

 

Have you had trouble with the plural and singular of these words?

Does it come from translating from your own language?

Let us know in the comments section below!

Today, we talk with Tony from italki.com about 3 outside-the-box ways to improve your English!

 

Tony’s had a lot of experience learning and teaching languages. His experience has convinced him that language learning is a natural process best approached the way children learn their native languages.

 

Here are Tony’s 3 tips for improving your English:

Ask yourself, What do I want to say? And to whom?  It’s easy to become overwhelmed by vocabulary, so keep it simple.  Start by learning what you need – not by trying to learn every single word.

Learn a little, Use a lot. Practice using small phrases with many different people and learn from the responses you get.  Connect your new vocabulary naturally.  This is the opposite of rote memorization.

Language teaches itself. It is easier to learn grammar from language, than language from grammar.  Grammar patterns will become apparent when you begin learning, so don’t try to learn every grammar rule in the beginning.  Learn to speak first, and the grammar will come.

 

Have any of these tips worked for you in learning English?

Tell us about it in the comments section below!

Welcome to 2 Minutes to Confidence with All Ears English!

Do you ever wonder what you should say when someone invites you out to a party or to take part in an activity?

In today’s edition of 2 Minutes to Confidence with All Ears English, I am going to show you 3 ways to accept an invitation.

Check out the video below!

 

 

 

 

Have you used any of these phrases in English before?

Do you know any other phrases to use to accept an invitation?

Please leave your comment below! Let’s have a conversation!

 

Today we talk about how spending 15 minutes on one specific action could save you hours of work later!

 

Reflection is critical to growth and development. It could also save you a lot of time in learning English.

Even though life is busy and it doesn’t always feel like we have time to stop and reflect, investing in reflection could save you much more time later.  Through reflection, you can become more efficient by discovering what is not working, and how to improve what is working.

 

Some questions for reflection:

  • How did my English learning go this week?
  • What is going well?
  • What is not going well, and what can I do to improve it?
  • What help or resources do I need?

 

Do you reflect on learning English, or life in general?

Does it help?

Let us know in the comments section below!

Today, learn what poses can make you more comfortable and powerful!

 

Social psychologist Amy Cuddy says body language affects how we think, and how others think about us. When people are slouched and closed-in on themselves, they not only feel less powerful, but they appear less powerful to others.

Consider: Are your shoulders  slouched?  Or are they back, with your chest open?  Are you spreading yourself out physically?  Are you smiling?  Is your body upright?

 

Are you looking for a professional, native English teacher online?

Get a native English teacher online in seconds at italki!Speak English Now (2)

We recommend italki as our #1 English-learning solution online. Choose from more than 400 teachers to work on your business English or to pass your next big exam.

Get our special offer before it runs out! Go to italki and claim 10USD to go toward a FREE English lesson!

 

Tips for power-posing your way to confidence:

  • Stand with your arms up, legs spread out, shoulders back and chest out.  Take up space and breathe deeply!
  • If you can’t do this at the moment, imagine you’re doing it, or do it in the bathroom before your important interview or presentation.  You can even do it while talking on the phone.
  • Yawn! By yawning, we are naturally bringing oxygen to our brain, which makes us feel more alert and confident.

 

Get Amy Cuddy’s TED talk here: Your Body Language Shapes Who You Are

 

Have you tried power posing?

Has it worked for you?

Tell us your story in the comments section below!

Today, in #6 of the Top 15 Fixes, we discuss the correct way to tell others what you want to do, whether in the immediate future or many years from now!

 

 

Presentation1All Ears English Transcripts!

Check your understanding of today’s episode.

Learn the sounds of American English and new vocabulary words.

Click here to download the transcripts now.

 

“Will” and “going to” are interchangeable in meaning, but native English speakers tend to use them for slightly different purposes.

 

Will is often used in the context of a big plan or dream, often in the far future:

  • I will get married, eventually.
  • “Someday, people will live on Mars.”

 

However, Will can also be used if you have just spontaneously made a decision, at this very moment, or for promises:

  • “Maybe I will go out to lunch.”
  • “I will always love you.”

 

Going to is used for more specific decisions about your immediate future:

  • “I’m gonna (going to) go biking tomorrow.”
  • “She’s going to call later tonight.”

Roleplay

Lindsay and Michelle are talking about their upcoming plans.

Michelle: What are you going to do this weekend? Anything fun?

Lindsay: Yes! I’m going to a music festival all day Saturday. I think it will be really fun.

Michelle: Oh, wow! What kind of music?

Lindsay: It’s a bluegrass festival. I haven’t been to one in awhile so I’m super pumped!

Michelle: Are you going to spend the whole day there?

Lindsay: No, I doubt it. We’re going to catch a couple of bands in the afternoon. We’ll probably grab lunch there, too.

Michelle: I love festival food! They usually have some amazing food trucks.

Lindsay: Yeah, I’m excited for that. We’re definitely going to check out the food trucks.

Michelle: So fun! I want to hear all about it after!

Lindsay: I will absolutely let you know how it went.

 

Other Entries in the 15 Fixes Series:

 

What will you do in the future?

What are you going to do?

Tell us about it in the comments section below!

Today, we discuss what you should and shouldn’t ask Americans about money!

 

Americans tend to think it rude to discuss personal finances and financial decisions.

This may be due to the basic American value of faith in an egalitarian society.

But whatever the reason, money is a touchy subject, and questions about it alienate or even upset an American.

 

Presentation1All Ears English Transcripts!

Check your understanding of today’s episode.

Learn the sounds of American English and new vocabulary words.

Click here to download the transcripts now.

 

When talking about money, be careful that you are not asking for personal information with these questions:

  • How much did it cost? Asking how much a person paid for something is generally viewed as bad manners in America.
  • How much do you make? Though some Americans might answer this question for you, again, many will find it bad manners to ask.
  • How much do you have in the bank? This question will likely be considered both rude and intrusive.

 

It is okay to talk about money in other ways. If you are clear that want to buy something, then it is acceptable to ask the cost.  The difference is that it is not a question of personal financial information.

 

How can people talk about money in your culture?

Is it anything like American culture?

Let us know in the comments section below!

Welcome to today’s edition of 2 Minutes to Confidence with All Ears English!

Are you planning to go out for dinner this weekend with a native English speaker?

Maybe you are worried about awkward silences!

Are you wondering how to fill those silences in English?

We are here to help you with that today.

 

2 Minutes to Confidence with All Ears English

 

 

 

Do you want to learn more phrases to connect with American people?

We are re-launching our course, The Keys to Connecting with Americans!

Learn how to start conversations and connect with native speakers at a restaurant, at a baseball game, at a networking event or at a party!

Find out how to respond to common questions that Americans ask

Get confident and comfortable for your next event in English!


Are you a perfectionist when it comes to learning English?

If you are, then you are not alone!

Today we have an awesome guest! Today Jun from Hapa Eikaiwa is here to talk about how you can beat this problem.

Do you feel like you are afraid of making mistakes or that everything that you say has to be perfect?

Jun has found that a lot of his students rehearse their sentences in their heads and can’t jump into a conversation and express themselves because of perfectionism.

Do you think more than you talk?

 

Jun’s Tips for Beating Perfectionism:

  • Remember that you are learning English as a second language and you are going to make mistakes. People won’t judge you for that. People aren’t waiting to judge you. People are worried about their own mistakes, not yours.
  • Learn from your mistakes
  • If you are a perfectionist, be aware of it and try to get rid of that feeling of fear by speaking more and more every day

 

Jun from Hapa Eikaiwa

Visit Jun’s site at Hapa Eikaiwa

Hello! My name is Jun Senesac.

I run a language school in Orange County.

I am a writer, blogger, entrepreneur, but a teacher at heart.

I love to travel, meet and interact with new people and explore new things.

 

Share your thoughts in the comments!

Are you a perfectionist?

How do you plan to overcome this challenge?

 

Are you an English amateur or a pro?

Today we talk about the work from author Steven Pressfield and what it means for your English learning.

 

Who’s a Pro?

The pro artist or English learner or entrepreneur will show up every day and will do the work.

He will move past the thoughts that tend to make him get side-tracked.

The pro is present in his studies and his work. He doesn’t repeat negative thoughts or make excuses.

Are you a pro when it comes to learning English?

 

Who’s an Amateur?

He  might make excuses for not being fluent in English.

The amateur might decide that his lack of English skills is because he doesn’t have a good teacher, or good resources, or the right opportunities.

Are you an amateur English learner?

 

 

Can’t find native speakers to practice English with you?

Two Free English LessonsCan’t get corrected your English corrected by your native-speaking friends?

Get a professional, native English teacher in seconds at italki.

For a limited time, italki is offering 10 USD in free English lessons. Click here to get your 10USD in italki credits before this offer runs out!

 

 

Tell us in the comments!

Are you an English amateur or an English pro?

Why?

Can you share a strategy to help other AEE listeners “turn pro”?

Do you know who pays for lunch when you go out with English speakers?

This might be a source of serious confusion for you if you are making the mistake of translating the word “invite” from your native language to English!

Today you’ll learn how to avoid one of the most awkward possible misunderstandings when you go out for lunch!

Today is number 7 of our Top 15 Fixes to tune up your English!

 

What does it mean when you “invite” someone out for dinner or for lunch?

The verb “invite” just means to extend an invitation to someone to go out and do something together. It does NOT mean that you will pay for the person’s meal.

Are you translating this verb and its meaning from your native language into English?

A lot of people make this mistake!

In English when we invite someone to dinner we aren’t sure who is going to pay.

 

If you do want to pay for someone you can say:

  • “I’ve got this”
  • “I got this”
  • “Let me get this”
  • “This one’s on me”
  • “I’ll take this”
  • “My treat”
  • “Don’t worry about it. I’ve got this”

Roleplay

Michelle invited Lindsay to dinner, and the check has just arrived.

Lindsay: It was so nice to meet for dinner. We should do this again sometime soon!

Michelle: I agree! It was lovely to catch up. It’s been way too long.

Lindsay: I know- it’s so easy to let life get in the way and suddenly it’s been months since we’ve chatted.

Michelle: Let me get this. My treat!

Lindsay: That’s so nice of you! I’ll get the next one.

 

Other Entries in the 15 Fixes Series:

 

 

How do you deal with paying for the bill in your culture?

Is it ok to refuse when someone offers to pay for you or should you accept?

How do you think your culture is different from American culture in this sense?

Leave us a message in the comments and let’s have a conversation!

Do you want to maximize your English learning and get fluent in English faster?

Today you’ll learn how to maximize your English learning by using spreadsheets with Jane Lawson from Daily Step!

You’ll also learn two other very cool tips to speak English like a native.

 

 

Presentation1Get the transcripts for this episode!

Use the transcripts to move your English from intermediate to advanced.

Learn native pronunciation and vocabulary.

 

Click here to get today’s transcripts!

 

 

How to Maximize Your English Learning:

  • Learn to Think in English:  Talk to yourself aloud or in your head while you are walking around the house, walking down the road, or watching TV. Describe exactly what you are doing each day in English. This is a great way to highlight any gaps or missing pieces in your vocabulary.  Talk to yourself about your plans and what you are going to do that day. This is a great way to keep your mind at the right speed to speak with natives. Eventually you will start to dream in your native language!
  • Get Transcripts: Get the words if you are listening to an audiobook or if you are listening to a podcast get the transcripts. Speak along while you read the words on the script. Look at the words that you aren’t pronouncing clearly but are actually in the conversation. Get the transcripts for All Ears English here!
  • Keep a Record of What You Learn: Use a spreadsheet. Copy and paste the words that you have already learned into the spreadsheet. Categorize them according to grammar topic, type of vocabulary, etc. This will help you build momentum and will keep you motivated. This will also help you see what your active vocabulary and what your passive vocabulary is.

 

Bio for Jane Lawson from Daily Step

Jane Lawson

Jane is a London-based teacher, with over 20 years of experience teaching English to all levels and in a range of specialist subjects. Jane started her website, Daily Step to try to bridge the gap in level between the reading and writing skills of her students, and their speaking and listening skills, which were often much lower.

She saw that even advanced students who did well in exams could often not fully join a real conversation between native speakers. Jane’s philosophy is that it’s better to learn a little each day and remember it clearly. We all need a sense of achievement and most of us are too busy to spend a long time each day studying.

Visit Jane at Daily Step!

 

Let’s have a conversation in the comments section!

Have you tried thinking in English today? What’s your biggest challenge with that?

Have you tried using spreadsheets to mark what you have already learned? How did it go?

Would you like to sound more American when you speak English?

Today we talk about four common slang combinations you can use to sound more like a native!

 

As with other people and languages, Americans tend to bridge words and speak quickly.

This can have the effect of shortening and even creating entirely new words.

 

Here are four slang combination-words that you are likely to hear when around Americans:

  • wanna (want to): “I wanna go out tonight.”
  • shoulda (should have): “I shoulda told the truth.”
  • gonna (going to): “He’s gonna go to a movie later.”
  • gotta (got to): “She says she’s gotta work.”

 

Presentation1All Ears English Transcripts

Check your understanding of today’s episode.

Learn the sounds of American English and new vocabulary words

Click here to get the transcripts now!

 

It’s important to understand that these terms are more casual and should not be used in formal situations.

The best way to gauge how to use these or any other slang terms is to listen to native speakers and mirror their usage.

 

Learn more about American communication styles.

Get the key differences between American and British English.

 

Have you used wanna, shoulda, gonna or gotta?

There are other words like them in English — have you heard any of them?

Let us know in the comments section below!

 

Today, we discuss why this might be a mistake!

 

Language exchanges are a big topic in language learning.

They’re popular because they’re both fun and free.  But they do have some downfalls and sometimes a real teacher is better.

 

Here are three aspects of language exchange that could cause you trouble:

Training: The average native speaker of English may be able to speak the language, but they may not be able to clearly explain the difference between Past Perfect tense and Simple Present.

Time: A short-term arrangement may be good for conversation exercise, but it is not ideal for something like a grammar review.

Intention: What is the intention of the native speaker?  Are they just doing it for fun?  Their intention may not be to give you the serious, scheduled help that you really want and need.

 

This isn’t to say that language exchange is bad, or that you can’t learn from it!  But you do need to understand that it is no substitute for what a qualified teacher and a structured course can provide.

 

Have you ever done a language exchange?

What was your experience?

Share it with us in the comments section below!

Today, in #8 of our countdown of the Top 15 Fixes in English series, we’ll be talking about the difference between these two similar verbs!

 

You don’t want to let grammar get in the way of giving to or getting from your friends.  But the verbs borrow and lend are tricky because they both mean to temporarily give — and yet they are different.

 

The key to using these verbs is understanding that they follow perspective.  Consider who is doing the giving, and who is doing the receiving.

  • Lend focuses on the one who is giving (the one doing the action).
  • Borrow focuses on the one receiving (the one upon whom the action is done).

 

Here are some examples:

I asked her if I could borrow some money.

I asked her if she could lend me some money.

Did you borrow it from her?

Did she lend it to you?

Roleplay:

Lindsay and Aubrey are college roommates, and Aubrey needs to borrow Lindsay’s car.

Aubrey: Hey Lindsay, I need a favor!

Lindsay: Sure, what’s up?

Aubrey: I need to borrow your car again! I need to pick up my mom from the airport.

Lindsay: Sure, I can lend you my car. When is she flying in?

Aubrey: Thank you! She gets here Friday night. I think last time I borrowed your car it was a Friday night, too. Random!

Lindsay: I don’t even remember that! When did I lend it to you?

Aubrey: This was a few months ago. I borrowed it to pick up groceries.

Lindsay: Oh yeah, that’s right. I don’t mind lending it to you- I trust you to take care of it.

Aubrey: For sure. And I’ll return it with a full tank of gas! I try to do that when I borrow a car.

Lindsay: Thank you! I appreciate that.

 

Other Entries in the 15 Fixes Series:

 

Have you had trouble with borrow or lend?

Tell us your story in the comments section below!

 

Does small talk always have to be boring?

Today we talk with Chris Colin about how you can generate interesting small talk!

 

Many of us are afraid of small talk.

We fear it will be dull or pointless, or just another conversation that we’ll have to muddle through.

But Chris says it doesn’t have to be that way.

He believes we should view small talk is an opportunity for something interesting to happen.

 

Presentation1

All Ears English Transcripts!

Check your understanding of today’s episode.

Learn the sounds of American English and new vocabulary words.

Click here to download the transcripts now.

 

 

Here are Chris’s top three tips for making small talk interesting:

  • Don’t “mirror” the person you’re talking to. Answering and then repeating the exact same question is a mistake. Instead, try responding with another question, like “How did you get here?” or “”What do you think of this place?”
  • Ask for stories, not answers. Don’t ask “Where are you from?”   Instead, ask “How did you get to be where you’re from?” This enables an opportunity to share more than just a place name.
  • Be curious! Be quiet and listen actively to the other. A great question you can ask to show your interest is “And then what?”

 

Next, find out why your English language exchange isn’t working.

 

Chris ColinChris Colin is the author most recently of What to Talk About, as well as What Really Happened to the Class of ’93 and Blindsight, named one of Amazon’s Best Books of 2011.

He’s also written about chimp filmmakers, ethnic cleansing, George Bush’s pool boy, blind visual artists, solitary confinement, the Yelpification of the universe and more for the NewYorker.com, the New York Times Magazine, Wired, Mother Jones, McSweeney’s and Afar, where he’s a contributing writer.

He lives in San Francisco.

Do you have trouble with small talk?

Have you used any of Chris’s tactics?

Tell us how it went in the comments section below!

Can you get success by asking for it?

 

Don’t assume that you can’t have everything in life. A lot of times, you might be surprised what you can get by just asking.

A good strategy is to find ways to negotiate a win-win situation out of something you want.  Everything is negotiable and nothing is set in stone.

Of course, what you’re asking for has to be reasonable, and you need to be able to support your request. If you are asking for something fair and not too bold, you may be surprised to get what you want.  And if not, the very worst that can happen is you receive a No!

Three times to ask for help

#1 Help with English

Don’t hesitate to ask for help with your English. You can ask a colleague to look over emails or slides for a presentations.

Natives do this as well, getting a second set of eyes for proofreading or grammar mistakes.

#2 Lead a project at work

Don’t assume that because you’re a language learner, you can’t lead a project!

Ask to be the lead instead of a team member.

#3 Better work schedule

You may be struggling with the demands of your schedule, and your supervisor doesn’t even know it!

Don’t be afraid to ask for a change.

If a more flexible or different schedule would help, ask for it!

Roleplay:

Lindsay: I was hoping to talk to you about the project I’m working on.

Aubrey: Sure, what’s up?

Lindsay: I know this is due Friday and I really want to make that deadline, but I’ve run into some snags!

Aubrey: Ok

Lindsay: I’d like to ask if I can have a little additional support.

Aubrey: Sure! What do you have in mind?

Lindsay: If we could add a couple of team members to the project so I can delegate a few of these tasks, that would be extremely helpful.

Aubrey: That is a great idea. I think Mark has some bandwidth this week.

Lindsay: He would do a great job. I can assign him to create some of the videos.

Aubrey: Who else would be able to help?

Lindsay: How about Samira? I could use help prepping the Q&A and I think she’d do a great job.

Aubrey: You got it. I’ll email them both today.

Lindsay: Thank you!

Next, find out what to do if you never get to speak English.

Have you ever achieved success by just asking?

Tell us about it in the comments section below!

How about improvement in 24 hours?

Today, we talk about how you can go from zero to a million in English in only 24 hours!

 

We all want to be fluent and sound like a native speaker. But we all want it fast! What can you do to get you closer to your goal in only 24 hours?

One thing is to break you bigger goal into smaller, actionable steps that you can actually accomplish. Think about all the little things related to your goal, and what you can do to make them work for you.  Think small, but think hard. There are opportunities for improvement everywhere.

Think also about how you can connect, whether it be to people or the language itself. What small connections can you find or make in a very short time?

 

How will you get closer to your goal in 24 hours?

Any ideas?

Share them with us in the comments section below!

Today, in #9 of our countdown of the Top 15 Fixes in English series, we’ll be discussing how to handle past experiences and accomplishments in English!

If somebody says, “I have done that,” how is it different from saying “I did that?”  The difference can seem tricky but the key is the context.

Here is a simple way to think about this:

  • When using have done, you are zooming out, outside of yourself and to a big picture.  You might be talking about your entire lifetime, or the distant past. What is more important is what happened rather than when it happened.
  • When using did, you are zooming in to something more recent and maybe more simple.  You may also be talking about a specific time period that is now over. The time is more important here.

Presentation1All Ears English Transcripts!

Check your understanding of today’s episode.

Learn the sounds of American English and new vocabulary words.

Click here to download the transcripts now.

Here are some more examples:

  • “I did go to Paris last week.”
  • “I didn’t watch any TV yesterday.”
  • “I have been to Paris, but not since childhood.”
  • “I have watched a lot of TV in my lifetime.”

Roleplay

In this roleplay, Lindsay and Michelle are chatting about their bucket lists.

Michelle: What is something you have done that was on your bucket list?

Lindsay: I always wanted to get certified to scuba dive, so I did that last year.

Michelle: I have done that too- it was amazing!

Lindsay: I thought it might be frightening to be in such deep water, but I didn’t feel scared at all.

Michelle: I have thought about trying base jumping. Have you done that?

Lindsay: Yes, I did go base jumping! I went a couple of years ago. It was scary though- now that I have done it, I’m good.

Michelle: I have been afraid of heights since I was a kid so that would probably scare me.

Lindsay: I did feel scared, even though I don’t usually have a fear of heights.

Michelle: I’ll have to try it!

Other Entries in the 15 Fixes Series:

Tell us some of your experiences or accomplishments in the comments section below!

What does it take to be happy?

Today, we talk with Michael Miller about what you can do to live every day like a vacation!

There are many ideas about how to achieve happiness.

Getting in touch with yourself, others, or higher powers is often suggested.

So is living a conscious life, being aware of your own thoughts and feelings so that you live in the moment.

But these are a little abstract.  Michael, an expert on happiness, has some concrete actions that you take to find more happiness every day.

 

Michael’s Tips for Happiness:

  • Practice Being Present.  Try doing nothing for at least ten minutes every day.  If you don’t want to meditate, get out into nature, or simply go for a walk.
  • Play Once a Day.  Don’t focus totally on work.  Allow your “inner child” to play, so you can avoid burnout.
  • Make an Integrity List.  Write out your thoughts, words and actions about what you want to do.  Then, see if they are in alignment and look for negatives.  For example, if you think about and want to do something, but don’t do it, that is negative.  Until you have alignment, you do not have integrity in this part of your life.

 

Michael Miller is an author, professional life and executive coach, and motivational speaker. He lives in NY and has lived in Suzhou, China, Hong Kong and has traveled to over 30 countries.

Check out The Vacation Never Ends and take a look at Michael’s coaching service!

Michael also wrote a book called “Four Weeks to Your American Dream Job” and you can check that out on his site called Culture Adapt.

 

 

What do you do to achieve happiness?

Tell us your tips in the comments section below!

Or are you waiting for us to give you better English skills?

Today we talk about how improving your English is about what you do, not what we do!

A teacher can only support you and give you the tools you need to help yourself. But improving your English is your responsibility!

Never say “I hope you can improve my English.”

Instead ask yourself, “How can I use All Ears English as a tool to improve my English?

 

Presentation1All Ears English Transcripts!

Check your understanding of today’s episode.

Learn the sounds of American English and new vocabulary words.

Click here to download the transcripts now.

 

Three things to consider:

  • Be active. There is no time to be passive.
  • Have a positive mindset. Don’t say things like “my bad English,” because this focuses on limitation and failure.
  • Thoughts create reality. Henry Ford said, “Whether you think you can, or think you can’t, you’re right.”

 

Next learn how to rescue your English telephone calls.

 

What are you doing to help yourself learn English?

Is it working?

Let us know in the comments section below!

Today we chat with Drew Badger, host of English Anyone, about 3 tips to help you achieve fluency!

We become fluent in our native language by connecting to others.

Drew believes we should use the same behavior to get fluent in other languages.

In other words, be a speaker, not just a learner!

 

Presentation1All Ears English Transcripts!

Check your understanding of today’s episode.

Learn the sounds of American English and new vocabulary words.

Click here to download the transcripts now.

 

Drew’s three tips to help achieve fluency:

  • Listen to native content. Try to find something which you understand 80%, then work on learning the other 20%. Learning like a native is building upon what you already know.
  • Practice new constructions with words. Don’t repeat the same phrases all the time – mix things up! Use repetitive events like introducing yourself as an opportunity to expand your language usage. This puts you in control and builds confidence.
  • Get out into the community.  Don’t spend all of your time on English-learning forums if you can meet and talk to real people right outside your door!

Now check out another great guest episode about how to use Facebook groups to learn English!

 

drewgravatar

Drew Badger is an author, English fluency and speaking confidence expert with more than 10 years of experience, teacher-training.  He’s also the co-founder of Englishanyone.com and creator of Shaberry Sensei.

His more than 200 online videos lessons have been viewed over five million times, and he’s been featured by some of the biggest companies in language education. He lives and continues to teach English to the world from Nagasaki, Japan. You can find Drew on Facebook, YouTube and Twitter.

 

What are you doing to be a speaker and not a learner?

 Tell us about it in the comments section below!

 

What’s the difference between “interested” and “interesting” in English?

Today, in #10 of our countdown of the Top 15 Fixes in English series, we’ll be discussing when to use the -ed and -ing endings! 

To be interested is not the same as being interesting.  The same applies to other English phrases such as bored and boring, or excited and exciting.  Here is a general rule to help you remember the difference:

  • When talking about yourself or your feelings, use the –ed ending.  “I am interested in music.”
  • When talking about others or something outside yourself, use the –ing ending.  “That music is interesting.”

 

Presentation1Get today’s transcripts!

Ready to use this episode to become fluent in English?

Make sure you understood every word we said on the podcast!

Download the transcripts instantly

 

Here are some more examples:

  • “She’s excited by travel.”
  • “Travel is exciting.”
  • “They’re bored by soccer.”
  • “Soccer is boring.”

 

Roleplay

In this roleplay, Lindsay and Michelle are discussing their hobbies.

Michelle: So Lindsay, I know you are a very interesting person. What do you like to do in your free time?

Lindsay: I love playing tennis, hiking, camping and just being outdoors. I’m also very interested in psychology and I love to read!

Michelle: What is a hobby that you find very boring?

Lindsay: I’m not very interested in sewing or crocheting. I would be bored doing anything like that.

Michelle: What is something exciting that you’d like to do someday?

Lindsay: Maybe cliff jumping. I get excited and nervous just thinking about it, but I think I’d be up for it.

 

Other Entries in the 15 Fixes Series:

 

What do you find interesting, boring or amazing?

What isn’t interesting, boring or amazing?

Tell us in the comments section below!

Do you have so many learning resources you’re overwhelmed?

Today we discuss why you need to stop trying to do it all and start creating an English plan!

 

We live in a time when there are so many resources to help you learn English — and that’s great!

But it’s easy to get distracted when you don’t have a plan to guide you.

 

Presentation1All Ears English Transcripts

Check your understanding of today’s episode.

Learn the sounds of American English and new vocabulary words

Click here to get the transcripts now!

 

A good plan includes:

  • Your Goal: This is where you want to be.  It should be ambitious, but reasonable. Try to choose one goal and go deep.
  • A Deadline: Deadlines give you a sense of urgency and accountability.
  • Focus: Think of any distractions you can eliminate so that you can focus more clearly on your goal.

 

What’s your current English-learning goal?

Do you have a plan to achieve it?

Tell us all about in the comments section below!

Is your life controlled by all of the work, responsibilities and people you know?

Today we talk with Stephen Warley from Unstuckable about how take back your life by getting unstuck!

Sometimes life can make you feel “stuck” when you don’t have the time or energy to do what you want to do.  Stephen says it doesn’t have to be this way, if you know how to get unstuck.

Three tips for getting yourself unstuck:

  • Spend Time with Like-Minded People: An old American saying goes, “You are the company you keep.” Being around people who you wan to be like (online or offline) can naturally motivate you to make changes.  They can also support you in ways your family maybe can’t.
  • Awareness: Recognize when you complain during the day.  After paying attention for a week, identify what makes you unhappy, and think about how you can change it.  Or, if you just need time to think or calm down, take a walk!  A walk is a way to hear your own voice and process thoughts.
  • Take Control of Your Morning: Get up early and focus on the thing you really want to get done. Don’t go directly to your email!  Doing that only allows others to control what you want to do first.

 

Stephen WarleyStephen Warley is the co-founder of Unstuckable, a podcast uncovering the habits that help people find their path and work on their terms.

His podcast is available on iTunes and Stitcher.

New online courses to help get you unstuck are coming soon at Unstuckable.co

 

 

How do you get unstuck?

Do you use any of Stephen’s tips?

Tell us all about it in the comments section below?

Today we talk with successful New York entrepreneur Kristy Oshita about how starting a business  can compare to learning English!

Entrepreneurs must to work at least as hard as English learners for success.  They have to know how to use their time, focus their energy and maintain their sanity.

 

Kristy’s three entrepreneurial tips to help improve your chances for English success:

  • Know how to find your happy place. A “happy place” is where you go to rest and recharge. It can be both a physical and mental place, but the important thing is that you relax so you don’t burn out.
  • Find out what works. Stop and ask yourself, which way did I learn fastest? To improve clarity and efficiency, try focusing on one goal at a time.
  • Build and Strengthen Your Team. It is very important for language learners to connect with people. Think about all of the people you are connected to as you learn English, and invest time in those who can help you.

 

Kristy cover photo sq2

Kristy’s mantra is to be a beacon of love while building something great.

A serial entrepreneur she strives to do this through creating businesses that help people. In her first business, BumbleBee Tennis, she drew upon her background as a competitive tennis player, and brought affordable tennis lessons to the tennis players of NYC.

In addition to being a real estate investor she is currently in the startup phase with Alana Life and Fitness. The vision for Alana is to be a peaceful and loving health club for women to reconnect with themselves and feel ready to take on the world.

Her message to you is, “We can do this. It’s scary but we can.”

 

How have you learned English like an entrepreneur?

Do you have any tips?

Share them below in the comments section!

 

Today, in #11 of our countdown of the Top 15 Fixes in English series, we’ll be discussing the most common mistake with the future tense of English!

When you want to talk in English about something you will do in the future, remember that one “will” is enough.

If you are going to meet your friend tomorrow, and you want to tell them you will call them when you arrive, you should not say, “When I will be there, I will call you.”  This is too many “wills”, but also two separate ideas.

The rule for a sentence like this is: Present Tense + Future Tense.  A correct version of the sentence would read, “When I arrive, I will call you,” or “When I am there, I will call you.”

Roleplay

In this roleplay, Lindsay and Michelle are discussing what they will make for dinner.

Michelle: I think I will make some pasta tonight. Does that sound good to you?

Lindsay: I actually had pasta last night when I went out with friends. I will eat it again if you want, but I’d rather not.

Michelle: No worries! I will make something else. What about a Thai salad with grilled chicken and peanut sauce dressing?

Lindsay: That sounds amazing! It will be a lot of work, though! Are you up for it?

Michelle: Yeah, I can do it if you will help chop veggies!

Lindsay: I will for sure help. While you grill the chicken, I will prep the vegetables.

Michelle: Perfect! When I’m at the grocery store, I will call you to see if we need anything else.

Other Entries in the 15 Fixes Series:

Have you had any trouble with the future tense of English?

Tell us about in the comments section below!

Today we discuss six common ways native English speakers mistakenly speak their own language!

Language creates culture, and people talk the way they want to be seen.

Sometimes this means being loose with the language, whether using slang or speaking in a way that is more comfortable than right.

 

Here are six rules that native English speakers break all the time:

  • Double Negatives: As in the phrase, “I can’t get no satisfaction.” Though it isn’t intended, a double negative would actually mean a positive! “I don’t want no more coffee” is the same as saying “I want more coffee.”
  • “Got” instead of “Have”: You might hear someone say, “Yeah, I got a car,” or “I got no money.” These are wrong because they use “got” to replace “have.”
  • “Ain’t”: Americans are usually told as children that “ain’t” is not a word, but many of us use it anyway. If someone says “I ain’t going,” or “I ain’t sure about that,” they usually mean to say “I’m not.”
  • “If I Was/Were”: In most cases, this should be “If I were,” but not always. When someone says “If I was wrong, I apologize,” the statement says the speaker accepts that he or she was wrong. But when someone says “If I were wrong, I would have apologized,” the speaker is saying that would have apologized if they were wrong, but they weren’t!
  • Past participle avoided: When someone says “I have went to all those countries,” they are using the simple past form of “went.” The correct form would be “I have been to all those countries.”
  • “Would Have” in a Past Conditional: It is wrong to say “If I would have had more money, I would have gone,” because Would Have cannot be used in a past conditional. Instead, the correct form is “If I had had money, I might have (or could have) gone.”

 

Have you ever heard native English speakers use grammar incorrectly?

Does it happen in your own language?

Tell us about it below in the comments section!

Are there strategies you can use to improve productivity in language learning?

Today we talk with productivity expert Thomas Frank about three ways to learn English faster!

Thomas believes a big part of success in learning a language has to do with how you manage your time.

By using certain strategic behaviors, he says that you can get more and better learning, faster.

 

The top 3 three tips for improving English learning productivity:

  • Induce Momentum: Start with small and easy things. Successfully accomplishing minor tasks will warm you up for larger, more difficult tasks.
  • Use Mini-Missions: Give intense focus to improving on specific areas by treating them as “missions” that must be accomplished by a certain time.
  • Increase Motivation with the Procrastination Equation: The Procrastination Equation is Motivation = (Expectancy x Value) / (Impulsiveness x Delay). In other words, the expectations and value you place on a goal are always going to be divided by all potential distractions and delays between you and your goal, so you need to make a habit of choosing the right goals and avoiding things that will slow you down.

 

face2Thomas Frank is the writer, podcaster, and productivity nerd behind College Info Geek, a web resource that helps students be awesome at college.

When he’s not working, reading, or trying to convert his life into a video game, you can probably find him climbing a tree or enjoying good whisky (not simultaneously).

You can connect with him on Twitter here.

 

Do you use any of these strategies to increase your English learning productivity?

How does it work?

Let us know in the comments section below!

 

Video GameCan you learn English like a game?

Can it be fun and addictive rather than just work?

Today we talk with Geremie, an entrepreneur who says that gaming can show us how to make learning English more interesting and enjoyable!

Geremie says we can learn from the psychological incentives that video games give us to keep playing, and that these lessons can help with motivation and ultimate success in learning English.

 

Three lessons that gaming provide us about motivation and learning are:

  • Find a way to make it fun: This is a key to motivation as well as seeing English learning as something pleasurable, not exhausting.
  • Immerse yourself in something you’re interested in: This will not only keep your attention, it also has the practical benefit of teaching you how to talk about yourself.
  • Use a system of advancement: As in a game, or even the martial arts, find a way to acknowledge your progression to mastery of English.

 

Do you use any of these to learn English like a game?

How do you do it?

Tell us about it in the comments section below!

 

GeremieGeremie is an entrepreneur and media professional with extensive experience across education, movies, music and gaming.  Geremie’s passion is applying engaging content and game intelligence to education.

 

Today, in #12 of our countdown of the Top 15 Fixes in English series, we’ll be discussing what is polite (and not so polite) about doing this in America!

In some cultures it is important to know another person’s age, but an old American saying is “Never ask a woman her age or weight.”

It’s often unusual and unnecessary to ask about age, and doing so might raise suspicions that you are really asking about something else.

But this cultural aspect is not the only thing that can go wrong.  There’s also a common grammar issue!

Many English learners use the verb to have for age, and often this comes from a direct translation from their native language.

But in English, we use to be for age, as in, “I am 30 years old” or “He is 30 years old.”

 

Presentation1All Ears English Transcripts!

Check your understanding of today’s episode.

Learn the sounds of American English and new vocabulary words.

Click here to download the transcripts now.

 

It’s also interesting to note that in English we use the verb “turn” with age.

  • I turned 30 last year.
  • She turns 28 next year.

Roleplay

In this roleplay, Lindsay and Aubrey are planning a friend’s 40th birthday party.

Lindsay: I can’t believe James is 40! Time really flies.

Aubrey: I know! When he turned 39, we all started feeling ancient!

Lindsay: Is he the oldest of our friends?

Aubrey: Well, let’s see. Jane is 37 and Martha is 38. What about Brooke?

Lindsay: I think she’s 38 too. And Sam turned 38 this year as well.

Aubrey: Oh I didn’t know that! I thought he was younger!

Lindsay: He graduated from high school the same year as my brother.

Aubrey: Gotcha, so they’re both 38. What about Simon?

Lindsay: Simon and Melanie both turned 39 this year.

Aubrey: Looks like we’re going to have quite a few 40th birthday parties to plan!

 

Other Entries in the 15 Fixes Series:

 

How do you talk about age in your language?

How do you talk about it in your culture?

Tell us all about it in the comments section below!

Singer Lydia Lyon does not speak Arabic.  But when she sings in Arabic, she sounds just like a native speaker.

Today we talk to Lydia about how she learned the pronunciation without knowing the language!

Like with many language learners, Lydia’s interest in Arabic began as a passionate interest connected to Arab friends and culture.  Though she learned many words, she never became fluent, but that didn’t stop her from singing.

Lydia says some specific habits helped her to improve her accent, as well as her ability to speak the language with authority.  These include:

  • Imitate and repeat: Immerse yourself in the culture and try to imitate how native speakers say things.
  • Learn in chunks: Attach meanings to entire phrases, not just single words.
  • Activate your emotions: Feel what is being said, and how it comes out when you say it.
  • Give yourself learning deadlines: Urgency adds a pressure to learn.

Have you tried any of these tactics for improving your pronunciation?

How have they worked?

Let us know in the comments section below!

 

Nature's ArtDo you know how to craft your art through English?

Have you thought about what your legacy will be?

Today we talk about how your learning English a part of how people will remember you when you’re gone.

An average human life is 28,000 days long.  That’s a long time to develop yourself and define who you are.  But it’s not forever.

Your art is not only what you create (as in music or painting), but also what you do — how you treat people and how you will be remembered.

Learning English is part of your art.

It is important to think about how connecting with others in a different language can be a positive part of your individual legacy.

Not only that, it’s urgent!  You only have 28,000 days — or maybe less!

Do you think of learning another language as part of the art of living your life?

How so?

Share your thoughts in the comments section below!

Today, we talk with Shayna Oliveira from espressoenglish.net about three levels to start thinking your way to fluency!

Many language learners believe that you must be advanced or even fluent before you can think in that language.  Shayna believes you can start developing that skill when you are a beginner.

The way it works is by habit — training your mind to become used to connecting English to the world around you.

 

 Presentation1

Get today’s transcripts!

Ready to use this episode to become fluent in English?

Make sure you understood every word we said on the podcast!

Get today’s transcripts now!

 

 

Here are Shayna’s three levels for thinking in English:

  1. First, start thinking in individual words.  Take a moment to look around you and see what objects you can name in English.  This will connect the language to reality, and will also show you some of your vocabulary gaps — items you see in life but can’t yet name in English.
  2. Second, form very simple sentences, such as “That car is red.”  The sentences do not need to be complicated or perfect.  The point is to be working with English in your mind.  Again, this will show you what vocabulary or verb forms you are missing.
  3. Third, start turning your normal internal thoughts into English.  This is not translating your thoughts so much as trying to use English to say them to yourself.

These steps may not be easy in the beginning.  However, over time, they are likely to help your English be more smooth and natural.

Have you tried thinking in English?

 How well has it worked?

Tell us all about it in the comments section below!

 

Shayna Oliveira is the creator of EShaynaspresso English, where you can improve your English even if you don’t have much time to study- the lessons are short and sweet!

Students love Shayna’s pleasant voice and practical teaching style.

Shayna is originally from the U.S. and how lives in Salvador, Brazil.

 

 

 

Wish and Hope in English are similar, but not exactly the same. What is the difference between these two words in English?

Today, in #13 of our countdown of the Top 15 Fixes in English series find out how to correctly use the verbs Wish and Hope!

Check out our most recent episodes in this series:

Wish is usually used before a verb in the past tense.  It often talks about regrets or wants.

  • “I wish I hadn’t made that mistake.”
  • “I wish I had started sooner.”
  • “I wish I had a dog.”

We use it to express that we want something to happen, but we have no control over it.

  • Is your dad going to buy you a new car?
  • I wish!

In fairy tales and children’s stories, some form of magic makes wishes come true.

Knowing this helps you to remember to use “wish” when you can’t control the outcome or about something in the past you can’t change.

 

Hope works more for future tense, though it can also be used for the present tense.  It often focuses on aspirations.

  • “I hope to find love.”
  • “I hope I get a good TOEFL score.”
  • “I hope you enjoyed the show.”

Pro-tip: If we don’t know the outcome of something, we use hope. Once we know the outcome and we can’t change it, we use wish.

  • I hope I get a good score on my exam.
  • I wish I had gotten a good score on my exam.

Roleplay

In this roleplay, Lindsay and Aubrey are students working together on a group project.

Lindsay: Ok, the deadline is Friday. What do you hope to accomplish in the next few days?

Michelle: I wish we had started earlier! I’m such a procrastinator!

Lindsay: I was absent the day this was assigned. I wish I had been in class that day!

Michelle: No use worrying about that now. I’m hoping we can finish the artwork and most of the slides by tomorrow.

Lindsay: Sounds good. I asked to borrow my friend’s laptop because mine is broken. I hope he says yes!

Michelle: Maybe you’ll get a new laptop for Christmas!

Lindsay: I wish!

What are your wishes?

What are your hopes?

Tell us in the comments section below!

Transcript

Lindsay McMahon :

This is an All Ears English podcast episode 173, wish versus hope in English. What’s the difference? Welcome to the All Ears English podcast, where you’ll finally get real native English conversation and fluency for business and life. We believe in connection, not perfection when it comes to learning English. Now, here are your hosts, Lindsay McMahon, the English adventurer and Aubrey Carter, the IELTS whiz coming to you from Arizona and Boston, USA.

Michelle :

In this episode, Lindsay and Michelle show you the next most common mistake in our top 15 mistake series. What is the difference between wish and hope and how do you know which one to use? Find out today.

Lindsay McMahon :

Hey Michelle. How’s life in New York today?

Michelle :

Hey Lindsay. Hey Lindsay. It is good. It is good. I hope the weather stays nice for a while though.

Lindsay McMahon :

I know. I know. Yes. The weather is always the key in New York. Life in New York is so exciting, but it’s so much better when it’s warm and sunny.

Michelle :

Yeah. I kind of wish that like, it would be winter, but only for the months of December and January. Maybe like end of November, December, a little bit of January, and then it’s done.

Lindsay McMahon :

Yeah, totally.

Michelle :

I like some cold, but that’s pretty much it for me.

Lindsay McMahon :

I understand what you mean. Because it’s a real subway culture, right, in New York, a lot of walking and it’s hard to through the snow.

Michelle :

It is. It is. Yes. You don’t want to have to do that, but whatever.

Lindsay McMahon :

Yeah, no, no, no. But another thing that our listeners don’t want to do is make the most common mistakes in English, right? We want to avoid these big mistakes. I just did a little transition. Did you see what I did there? I’m not sure how successful that was.

Michelle :

I what you did. No, you did. It was wonderful.

Lindsay McMahon :

I don’t know, but we’ll move on anyway. So guys, we’re in a series here of the top 15, most common mistakes and you’ve heard me and Aubrey record a couple of episodes about the first two. And now we’re counting down. We’re on number 13 out of 15. So what is the common mistake that we’re talking about today, Michelle?

Michelle :

Okay. Today we’re talking about the words wish and hope. Now I just used them. I don’t know if you realized what I was doing.

Lindsay McMahon :

Oh my God. I was too busy trying to make my transition,

Michelle :

Oh, you actually didn’t?

Lindsay McMahon :

And I didn’t even hear you use them. What did you say?

Michelle :

Oh, maybe. Oh, so maybe you were like, why are you like, what are you doing? Well, first I said, I hope that the weather stays nice.

Lindsay McMahon :

Oh, you did.

Michelle :

And then I said, I wish that it would be cold only for a couple months.

Lindsay McMahon :

Yeah.

Michelle :

Oh, you didn’t realize. Oh, see I was so sneaky.

Lindsay McMahon :

No, it went right over my head. It went right over my head. That’s my fault. That’s my fault. That’s a good one. Clever though.

Michelle :

Thank you. Thank you.

Lindsay McMahon :

Let’s pick apart that example then, right? You said, I wish. What was it again? You said, I wish.

Michelle :

I said, I wish that it would only be cold in New York for a couple months.

Lindsay McMahon :

Okay. Yes. And then I hope.

Michelle :

I hope that the weather is nice for a long time, basically.

Lindsay McMahon :

Yeah. Okay. So what is the typical, if you just think real quick, Michelle, as a native speaker, what is the difference between wish and hope?

Michelle :

Okay. Well wish is more like a specific thing that it may be likely to happen, like I wish to have three wishes, like in fairy tales or whatever. Right. And hope is I think more realistic.

Lindsay McMahon :

Yeah. Yeah. Yeah. And then another thing that I think, I think the biggest angle I would say is that wish is usually used more so for something in the past. Right. I mean, you said, I wish it wouldn’t snow or I wish that it would not be winter. There would not be so much winter in New York is basically what you said. Right. And that’s good too. That’s a hypothetical.

Michelle :

Right.

Lindsay McMahon :

I wish there weren’t so much winter in New York.

Michelle :

Something Like that. Right. But you’re right. So we do have kind of like that fairytale feeling for wish. Oh, If I had three wishes, the first one would…

Lindsay McMahon :

Yeah.

Michelle :

But also, if you’re looking for another, I mean that was like a very broad explanation I gave, but if you’re really looking for a succinct one yes, often it’s used in the past tense. Right. So you can’t say, I hope about the past.

Lindsay McMahon :

No, you really can’t at all. So this is the clear dividing line between the two, right? No. Yeah. You definitely can’t. You can’t say, like let’s give some examples about how to use wish in the past.

Michelle :

Right. Okay. So like I wish I hadn’t made that mistake.

Lindsay McMahon :

Exactly. So you would never say, I’m not even going to say it because it doesn’t make sense. We don’t want to teach you guys poor English. So can’t use hope in that example. You just can’t. It’s not functional. I wish I had started studying sooner. Right. Because the exam is tomorrow. Definitely can’t use hope. Right, Michelle?

Michelle :

Right, right, right. No.

Lindsay McMahon :

And now here’s the kind of the fairy tail thing that you were pointing to before. This is like a dreamy thing.

Michelle :

Yeah.

Lindsay McMahon :

Right. What do you wish you had? Do you wish you had any pets?

Michelle :

Oh yeah. I wish I had a dog. I really do.

Lindsay McMahon :

Yeah, because you had a dog as a kid, right? You had a beagle. You told us.

Michelle :

Right. I had a beagle named Petey.

Lindsay McMahon :

Aww so cute. Beagles are really cute. Sometimes they’re kind of like yippity though. Aren’t they? They bark a lot or no?

Michelle :

They bark and they bite. Well at least mine did. He bit.

Lindsay McMahon :

Oh my gosh. Oh, was he a bad dog? No, just nervous.

Michelle :

I think he had like, he was a rescue dog.

Lindsay McMahon :

Okay.

Michelle :

And we think that he had had like, when they rescued him, he was only four pounds.

Lindsay McMahon :

Oh no.

Michelle :

No, no, no, he was, well, it was actually, all right, well now there’s a whole story, but he was like at the shelter and it was going to be his last day. And then this woman came to rescue him and he was four pounds at the pound. So I don’t know how much he weighed when they got him, but.

Lindsay McMahon :

Okay.

Michelle :

Anyway, the moral of the story is I loved having him, but he had some troubles, but I adored him.

Lindsay McMahon :

Oh yeah. You got to love your family dog. I love that. Yeah. I mean, I wish I had two dogs. I have one. I wish I had two, but I can’t. They’re expensive. Having two dogs is a lot. It’s a lot.

Michelle :

Yeah. I am sure.

Lindsay McMahon :

Yeah. Yeah. Yeah. And then there’s, just to finish off wish guys, I hope you’re taking notes here. This is really good stuff. There is one other way that we use I wish in a very emphatic way. What would that be Michelle?

Michelle :

Well, let’s do a little role play.

Lindsay McMahon :

Okay. Is your dad going to buy you a new car?

Michelle :

I wish.

Lindsay McMahon :

I love your intonation there. It’s very clear. So what are you trying to say with that intonation and using, I wish here?

Michelle :

It’s like, oh, I would love that, but it’s very unlikely.

Lindsay McMahon :

Yeah, exactly. Exactly. So generally what’s the general rule here with wish Michelle, would you say?

Michelle :

The general rule is it can be used in the past tense or in a fairytale kind of emphatic expression.

Lindsay McMahon :

Yeah. And talking about the past, things you can’t change that have already happened, when you don’t control the outcome. Or again it’s something you really want, but you know is never going to happen. I wish. Right.

Michelle :

Right. I wish.

Lindsay McMahon :

Yeah.

Michelle :

It’s fun to say that.

Lindsay McMahon :

I think I hear teenagers say that kind of thing a lot. Are your parents going to extend your curfew? I wish.

Michelle :

I wish. Yeah, for sure.

Lindsay McMahon :

Yeah. Yeah. Okay. Let’s go to hope now. Let’s flip it over to hope. What is hope, I hope?

Michelle :

Hope is also, I mean, in general, it’s better for future tenses. I have something in my head as like an exception, but,

Lindsay McMahon :

Oh, sure.

Michelle :

In general, it is better for the future. You don’t really, like in those we gave, hope just wouldn’t work. So it focus on more of like aspirations.

Lindsay McMahon :

Yeah.

Michelle :

And it can be used also for the present tense, but again, it works more for the future tense. So like I hope to find love. So this is talking about the future.

Lindsay McMahon :

Yeah. So now we’re future focused, future or present focused. Before with wish we were focusing on the past and the things we can’t control. Now we’re focusing on the future and the present. So another one is I hope I get a good TOEFL score or I hope to get a good TOEFL score. Both would be okay, right?

Michelle :

And then this one, so this is an exception.

Lindsay McMahon :

Yeah. Oh, those exceptions, they just kill us. We try to set a rule and then we have the exception right in front of us right, Michelle?

Michelle :

Right. Guys, we’re focusing on the basic general way of thinking of these things. So we’ll give you the exception, but don’t freak out. Right. It just happened. I hope you enjoyed the show. That’s kind of a good chunk. But today we want you to focus on this idea of future and past. So that’s what we want to focus on. Obviously there are going to be times when there are exceptions, because I don’t know that there is ever a moment in English where there isn’t an exception. Okay.

Lindsay McMahon :

Exactly. So I think one really good pro tip that could kind of make this really clear guys, is this, if you don’t know the outcome of something use hope. Right. Because it’s uncertain. It’s unsure. But if you know the outcome and it can’t be changed, use wish. Because wish has a sense of, oh, there’s not really anything I can do about it.

Michelle :

Oh I wish. Yes, yes, yes.

Lindsay McMahon :

No control.

Michelle :

That’s a good point.

Lindsay McMahon :

Yeah. No agency.

Michelle :

That is a good pro tip. Yes, exactly. I like it. Well, let’s do this role play Lindsay.

Lindsay McMahon :

Okay. Yeah.

Michelle :

And we’ll go through it.

Lindsay McMahon :

Okay. Let’s do it. So, all right. So, okay. The deadline is Friday. What do you hope to accomplish in the next few days?

Michelle :

Oh, I wish we had started earlier. I’m such a procrastinator.

Lindsay McMahon :

I was absent the day this was assigned. I wish I’d been in class that day.

Michelle :

Well, there’s no use worrying about that now. I’m hoping we can finish the artwork and most of the slides by tomorrow.

Lindsay McMahon :

Sounds good. I asked to borrow my friend’s laptop because mine is broken. I hope he says yes.

Michelle :

Well, maybe you’ll get a new laptop for Christmas.

Lindsay McMahon :

I wish.

Michelle :

Okay.

Lindsay McMahon :

So by saying I wish there, I’m basically saying I’m probably not going to get one, right?

Michelle :

Right, right, right. Exactly.

Lindsay McMahon :

It’s important. Right. Because that’s important to say that too. Right. So this is coming back to the lack of agency. If I had said yeah, I hope I do. It’s a possibility and it’s probably a real likelihood. Right, Michelle?

Michelle :

Right, right, right. And I did want to bring something about hope, right, again, like we said, it can be used in the present tense. So actually the example of, I hope you enjoyed the show. You are still hoping in the present tense.

Lindsay McMahon :

Exactly.

Michelle :

So I just wanted to make that point to clarify.

Lindsay McMahon :

Yeah. That’s a good point, because right now you’re hoping, even though the show happened before, it’s right now that you have the emotion of hope.

Michelle :

Yeah. So I wanted to just make that point.

Lindsay McMahon :

That’s a good point, Michelle. Let’s go back to this role play and just rehash it a little bit for our listeners. So the first thing I said was what do you hope to accomplish in the next few days? Again, forward looking. That’s a perfect example.

Michelle :

And then I said, I wish we had started earlier, right? I wish, thinking about the past. Right. I couldn’t say, I hope we had started earlier. That wouldn’t work.

Lindsay McMahon :

Perfect. So again, things you don’t have control over anymore because they’re done and looking backwards. And then I said again, I’m looking backwards and I can’t change it now. I’m saying, I wish I had been in class that day. Can’t change it. Right, Michelle?

Michelle :

Right, right, right, right. You can’t change it. And then I said, I’m hoping we can finish the artwork and most of the slides by tomorrow. So that’s more future looking.

Lindsay McMahon :

Exactly. I love that. And then I said, I asked to borrow my friend’s laptop because mine’s broken and I hope he says yes. Right. I hope again, forward looking guys, looking ahead. He probably, he might, there’s a good chance. So I hope.

Michelle :

And then I said, well maybe you’ll get a new laptop for Christmas. And you said, I wish.

Lindsay McMahon :

Yeah.

Michelle :

It’s like, that would be great. But there’s very little chance of that.

Lindsay McMahon :

Yeah. This is a great role play because I like how at the end we use that example of the, how sometimes teenagers will use that, right, when they don’t think there’s a chance of something. So that’s really good. Very cool. This has been good, Michelle. So this has again, number 13. Guys, there’s 13 more top mistakes, all right, that we’re going to or 12 more. So make sure you hit follow on All Ears English. Right, Michelle? Because they don’t want to miss these.

Michelle :

Don’t miss it. Why would you do that?

Lindsay McMahon :

Yeah, don’t miss it. Don’t miss it. So we’re looking forward to the next one. And Michelle, thanks for hanging out and talking about wish versus hope. Good topic.

Michelle :

All right. Thanks. I hope to talk to you again soon.

Lindsay McMahon :

I hope so too.

Michelle :

All right. Bye Lindsay.

Lindsay McMahon :

All right. Take care. Bye.

Michelle :

Bye.

Homophones are tricky!

Understanding them can help push your English to the next level.

Today we chat with Tim Torkildson, an ESL blogger who loves teaching about homophones!

A homophone is a word that has the same pronunciation as another word, but a different spelling and meaning.

English has a lot of these!

 

Presentation1All Ears English Transcripts!

Check your understanding of today’s episode.

Learn the sounds of American English and new vocabulary words.

Click here to download the transcripts now.

 

Homophones can be confusing for non-native English speakers because they might follow two different rules of spelling.

The reason for these differences is that English comes from many distinct languages, including French, Latin and old Celtic and Germanic languages.

Here are some examples of common English homophones:

  • Ant; Aunt
  • See; Sea
  • Pause; Paws
  • Air; Err; Heir
  • Wrapped; Rapt; Rapped

Have you encountered other examples of homophones while studying English?

Share with us in the comments section below!

 

Tim TTim Torkildson was born and raised in Minneapolis, Minnesota.  He first went to Thailand in 1974 as a missionary, and returned there again in 2004 as an English teacher for 5 years.  You can find out more about him here:  http://www.gofundme.com/cmbn6w

Today we talk to food blogger Grace Lentini about the food of New England, and how to eat it!

We’ll also talk about American eating habits.

When in New England, you’ve got to try the seafood.  Boston had a huge fishing industry, Maine is famous for lobster, and Rhode Island is a great place to find calamari.

You want to try all of these, but if you don’t want to gain weight while doing it, Grace says to consider three things:

  1. Portion Sizes: Restaurants in the U.S. will sometimes bring an overwhelming amount of food to your table.  Think about sharing a portion with a friend, ordering a half-portion, or taking some of your meal to go.
  2. Fried Food is Fattening: It might be better to order a meal that has been baked, boiled, broiled or grilled.
  3. Raw Seafood: Experience local seafood raw if possible!  Oysters on the half shell are a New England favorite.

 

Next, learn how to get better at English the way a chef gets better at cooking.

 

Have you ever tried any of these?

What would you order in a New England Restaurant?

Tell us about it in the comments section below!

Grace Lentini is a food blogger, editor, photographer and a lover of all things nature.  She writes the blog Graceful Dining (www.gracefuldining.blogspot.com) and can be found on Twitter (@gracie_nomnom).

Two things Grace loves most in this world are science and food. She went to school for science (BS in Wildlife and Conservation Biology) and started a food blog (www.gracefuldining.blogspot.com). After writing Graceful Dining for about a year, a local magazine, Providence Monthly, caught onto her blog and she started writing cover stories for them about food. Then, an editor position opened up, she interviewed, and got the job. Now, she is an editor for four lifestyle magazines. This life is crazy and you never know where you’re going to end up. Her advice to you is to do what you love, and hold on to the ride!

Do you approach your English like a doctor would?

Today we share five tips to keep your English healthy by thinking like a doctor!

A good doctor has many qualities.  Here are five that can be applied to learning English:

  • Triage: Doctors have to prioritize problems, or triage. Similarly with English, you have to figure out what your biggest challenges and problems are, and focus on them first.
  • Diagnose: Once you have your problem, you have to examine it closely. If your problem is speaking, is the main cause pronunciation, confidence, vocabulary, or opportunities to speak with others?
  • Regular Checkups: Check up on your English improvement every few months to see if you are progressing. Create an action plan to overcome problems and improve even more. Reflect on where you are and your goals.
  • Think on Your Feet: Be spontaneous, make decisions with a clear head under pressure. When speaking, you must be able to respond to others thoughtfully – not memorized.
  • Find Appropriate Treatment: If you are unable to correct your own mistakes, look for help. Sometimes you can self-correct, but other times you need a referral.

Next, find out why you should learn English the way a chef prepares a meal.

Do you use any of these in your English learning?

Tell us about it in the comments section below!

Today, in #14 of our countdown of the Top 15 Fixes in English series, we’ll be discussing how to correctly use the verbs Speak, Talk, Tell and Say, and how to think about them so you don’t mix them up!

Speak, Talk, Tell and Say all mean almost the same thing: to communicate verbally.  But even though they seem to be interchangeable, their meanings are different.  It’s important to use them correctly!

 

 

Presentation1All Ears English Transcripts!

Check your understanding of today’s episode.

Learn the sounds of American English and new vocabulary words.

Click here to download the transcripts now.

 

To Speak: This is the most formal of these verbs.  A person might say, “May I speak to you?”  Often this verb talks about language, as in “Do you speak English?”

To Talk: This is less formal and usually refers to conversation, such as “Let’s talk about it,” or “Talk to me.”

To Tell: This verb is used to inform or tell a story, but can also be used to command.  A person might say “Tell me what happened,” or “I told you to call me.”

To Say: Usually this verb is used to quote someone or something, as in “What did she say?” or “What did the President say he would do?”

Can you come up with sentences that correctly use all four of these verbs?

Show us what you’ve got in the comments section below!

Do you know how to socialize in English?

Have you been to any social events lately?

Today, we discuss three phrases that will help you be a smooth communicator at your next social event!

Socializing is an art.   It’s important to be smooth and confident, but also to say the right thing.  Here are three common phrases to help you get started:

  1. “So, are you planning any trips this summer?”  This is a great question to ask because travel connects to so many other subjects.
  2. “How do you know the host/hostess?” Answers to this might include, “We met in college,” or “We met at work.” If you’ve known somebody a long time and are very familiar with them, you might answer, “We go way back.”
  3. “So, how do you keep yourself busy?” or “What do you do in your free time?” This is a broad and casual question that asks about hobbies, lifestyle and work.

Have you had any experiences socializing in English?

How did it go?

Tell us in the comments section below!

If so, why do we feel so vulnerable when we admit them?

Today we talk about why your brain is still stuck in caveman days, and how it affects your English success!

Brene Brown researches vulnerability and how it comes up in the process of learning something like a new language.

Teachers sometimes use shame to make their students work harder.  Shame can motivate.  But it doesn’t allow you to take risks and grow as a person.

Mistakes aren’t shameful – they’re powerful opportunities to learn.

They are memorable and allow us to grow.  Focusing on the negative part of shame comes from the primitive part of the brain.  It is a fear response to a threat.

But if we recognize this, we can use shame to help us remember and learn.

Do you think it’s harder for men to see their mistakes/shame as power?

Are there expectations in society or in families that make this difficult?

Tell us what you think in the comments section below!

 

Today we discuss 3 ways your apartment can make you successful in the U.S.

Dr. Anne Copeland studies what makes international professionals and families successful when they live abroad.  Her research study “At Home Abroad” looked at 130 people living in 48 countries to see how changes in the physical layout of where they lived affected their happiness and relationships.

Architecture has a lot to do with use of space and feelings of privacy.  Anne found that homes with more rooms, more televisions, and more space tended to push people apart.

However, smaller homes with fewer rooms tended to encourage people to spend time together – and people who lived in homes like this were happier.

Anne also found:

  • It is important for a home to have a central room for its inhabitants to connect.
  • Connecting with neighbors can make a person feel happier in their home.
  • Hanging pictures in a new home can make it easier to adjust to.

Next, learn what to do when you return home after some time abroad with Cate Brubaker.

Do you think the layout of a house affects the people who live there?

How so?

Tell us what you think in the comments section below!

 

Dr. Anne Copeland is a licensed Psychologist focusing on cultural transitions and clinical psychology and is the founder of The Interchange Institute.

She provides cross- cultural training programs for international professionals and their families to prepare for assignments abroad.

She also offers training programs to prepare new cross-cultural trainers to enter the field.

Anne has written several books, newsletters, and publications including the Newcomer’s Almanac as well as more than 90 research articles.

 

Today, in #15 of our countdown of the Top 15 Fixes in English series, we’ll be discussing the difference between listen and hear, and how to think about them so you don’t mix them up!

Listen and hear seem to mean the same thing.

They can be used interchangeably and still make sense, but their meanings are slightly different.

When you understand the difference between these similar words, you can push your English to the next level.

You’ll be able to get a higher score on exams such as TOEFL or IELTS and you’ll be able to use your English at work.

Hear is more about your senses.  It’s passive and suggests your ears are working.  You hear sounds even if you aren’t paying attention to them.

Listen is more of an action.  You are actively hearing, with intention.  You are focused and trying to understand or give thought when you are listening.

Here are some examples:

  • “Do you like to listen to music?”
  • “Did you just hear that fire truck?”
  • “Is he still listening to the radio?”

What kind of music do you like to listen to?

Are there any sounds you don’t like to hear?

Tell us below in the comments section!

Dining is a great time to socialize and connect.

But you can’t just listen to yourself chewing food – you have to be active and engaged with others!

But what do you talk about?

How should you start?

 

Here are three great phrases to create conversation while dining:

  1. “Have you eaten here before?” This is a great way to begin. If the other person has eaten there before, you might follow up with, “What do you recommend?”
  2. “Do you know what you’re going to have?” Say this after you have received the menu, to help keep the conversation moving.
  3. “How’s your meal?” You can use this phrase after the food has arrived and you have had a chance to taste it. If your food is good, you might offer, “Would you like to try some?”

Have you had experiences dining in English?

How did it go?

Tell us about it in the comments section below!

Today we talk about the five qualities of a chef, and how you can apply these to learning English.

A great chef develops his skills over many years of hard work – much like a student of English.

Here are five other ways chefs compare to English learners:

  • Chefs aren’t afraid to mix in new ingredients! Don’t be afraid to try new things with your English. Inspiration often comes from trying something different.
  • New chefs start with recipes! A structured English course might help give you a foundation for learning English. After you become more confident, then you can improvise.
  • Chefs have good taste! The way the food is presented on the plate is very important. It is also important for an English learner to know how to present themselves with their words.
  • Chefs like to share their skills! Share your English skills. The more people you speak to, the more practice you’re getting.
  • A great chef focuses on quality! Quality takes time and effort. Just like with learning English, success requires the best ingredients and the skill to put them together.

Next, learn how to improve your English by acting like a salesman.

How do you mix it up like a chef while learning English?

Tell us in the comments section below!

Today we talk about this interesting question, and new research presented in Wired Magazine that says it may be possible!

Scientists conducted an experiment with German students who were studying Dutch.

The students studied a series of Dutch words.

Then, half of the students went to sleep and the words were played back to them while they slept.

The other half of the students had to stay awake and listen as the same words were played back to them.

In the morning, the students who went to sleep early remembered the new words better than the students who had stayed awake.

Presentation1Get today’s transcripts!

Ready to use this episode to become fluent in English?

Make sure you understood every word we said on the podcast!

Get our transcripts now

 

It would be nice to think we can learn a new language while we sleep!

  But the lesson from the experiment is probably that it is better to study enough, but also get enough sleep.

You probably aren’t learning while you’re sleeping.  The thing to remember is that your brain simply works better when you get your 6-8 hours of sleep!

How do you balance studying and sleeping?

Do you think it’s possible to learn while you sleep?

Tell us below in the comments section!

Do you worry about losing control when the question and answer session comes up?

Are you worried that you won’t be able to understand the questions from the audience?

For non-native English speakers, the question and answer period of your presentation can be the most difficult part.

Today we discuss five tips to help you take control – and stay in control – while taking questions during a presentation.

Four tips for control:

  • Tell people when they can ask questions (at the end of the presentation, anytime)
  • Tell them how they can ask questions (maybe you want them to submit written questions, or to send email or Twitter questions to you)
  • Anticipate what might happen and be proactive (think about what you can control).
  • If you’re having difficulty hearing a question, ask the person to “Speak up” or “Speak a little louder.”

What if you hear the question but don’t understand it?  Try these:

  • “I’m not sure I understand.”
  • “Could you repeat/rephrase that?”
  • “Could you clarify?”
  • “Could you be more specific?”
  • “Could you give an example?”

If you try and still can’t understand, move on!

Tell the person “Please contact me later.”

Remember, you’re in control, and other people in your audience might also have questions.

 

Have you ever given a presentation in English and taken questions from the audience?

How did it go?

Tell us below in the comments section!

Do you go to networking events?

What do you say after “Hi, how are you?”

Networking can be difficult in any language.  Today we talk about some phrases you can use to make networking in English easier.

Here are 3 phrases that can help you start a discussion:

  • “What are you working on right now?”
  • “Fill me in on what’s going on in your career right now.”
  • “How did you end up in your current position?”

Any of these phrases can be followed up with other questions, such as “Tell me more about that.”

Have you experienced difficulty networking in English or speaking English in the business world?

Have you had success?

Tell us about it in the comments below!

Do you have no energy?

Today we talk about three ways to become a more motivated English speaker!

A recent Time Magazine article says that feelings are important to motivation.

So, to stay motivated in learning a new language, your emotions must support it.

You must make it personal and be passionate!

One way to do this is to connect the language to something you already love: music, cinema, literature or friends.

Here are three more ways to help you stay motivated:

  • Get positive!: Focus on being happy as you study English. The more optimistic you are, the more you are likely to learn.
  • Reward yourself: If you do something good, give yourself a treat. Buy yourself a gift, go out to dinner, or just give yourself some free time.
  • Use peer pressure: Let the people around you reinforce your goals! Spend time around people you want to be like.
  • Set a practical goal: Take an exam such as the IELTS or the TOEFL to keep yourself motivated and continue pushing to the next level.

How can you motivate yourself to be a better English learner?

What do you plan to do?

 Tell us in the comments section below!

Kevin_Ninja, how to use Facebook groups to become fluent in English

Learning a new language is not easy!  Books and classes can help.  But without real conversation, you might work very hard to make slow progress.

This is because our brains learn language naturally through conversation.  Conversation is the key!

Today we talk with Kevin, who helps people learn HOW to learn English in more effective ways.  Kevin has been teaching English in Brazil for several years.

Integrating his background in Psychology with teaching, he seeks to improve the student’s relationship with English.

He believes that once one discovers how to enjoy the process of learning, progress comes naturally.

Kevin’s three ways to connect with people for real English conversations, no matter where you live:

  • Facebook Groups: Join a Facebook group with an interest in something you love (photography, cooking, sports, travel). This is an opportunity to connect with something you have in common. You could also join an expatriate group and meet other foreigners who live in an English-speaking country. Like you, they want to practice speaking English! Also in our IELTS course called 3 Keys IELTS Success System we have a lively and support Facebook group. Some of the members even practice English conversation together there.

 

  • Italki.com: If you are looking for a teacher, it is important to find a teacher that works for your needs. This website connects English teachers and non-native speakers from all around the world who work with all levels of English. Think about what you want and need. There are many choices here.

 

  • Practice with yourself: Listen to conversations you hear in English. Repeat them in your head, when nobody else is around. Repetition and review are a way your brain internalizes the language.  Don’t be afraid to talk to yourself in English!

 

Check out another awesome guest episode with AEE and AJ Hoge.

 

What are you going to do to connect with real people for genuine conversation?

Have you tried any of these?  What happened?

Leave us a comment below!

 

Every Tuesday from August until November, we will talk in-depth about one of these mistakes. 

We will discuss why it is a problem and give you the tools you need to fix it.  Our weekly discussions of the top 15 biggest mistakes in English will focus on these topics:

  1. Using the verbs “listen” and “hear”
  2. Whether to use “say” or “tell” or “speak” or “talk”
  3. Using “wish” or “hope”
  4. Do you use “to have” or “to be” to tell your age?
  5. Using the verb “will” correctly when talking about the future
  6. Are you “bored” or “boring?”
  7. Should you say “I have been” or “I was?”
  8. Do you “lend” or “borrow?”
  9. What does it mean to “invite over?”
  10. “I will” or “I’m going to?”
  11. “People is” or “People are?”
  12. When to use “much” and when to use “many”
  13. The difference between “make” and “do”
  14. Are you “by yourself” or “on your own?”
  15. When to use the article “the”

 

Have you had problems or made mistakes with the words or phrases above?

 What have you done to make your English run better?

Tell us about it in the comments below!

Do you like to watch sports?

Do you want to be able to talk about sports with your English-speaking friends?

If you are taking an exam such as the IELTS you may want to work on building some vocabulary to describe your favorite sports.

It’s great to be able to discuss this topic if a question about sports comes up in the IELTS Speaking test.

Today we introduce three useful English phrases for talking about sports.

Sports are international.  They can help you connect with people from anywhere.  But you need to know how to talk about them!

Here are three great phrases to help start your conversation:

  • “Have you been to a Red Sox game before?” – Change the team name to any you like.
  • “What sports and teams do you follow?” – This asks about a general interest in sports.
  • “Did you play any sports growing up?” – This is a great way to get to know more another person.  Follow up with the question, “How about now?”

Are you interested in sports?  Do you watch or play any?

Tell us about it below in the comments!

Today we talk to Joe Menninger, host of the StartupRadio podcast!

Joe is an entrepreneur from Germany who studied in Texas and China.  Living in three very different countries has given him many experiences.  These experiences have helped him as an entrepreneur.

Joe’s top three tips for learning a new language and culture:

  • You can learn more outside the classroom, so include yourself in the community.
  • Observe cultural behaviors – don’t assume behaviors in one cultural have the same meaning in another culture!
  • Remember that idioms from your language might not translate, so always speak in plain English.

 

Do you have any advice about learning a new language or culture?

Have you had experiences like Joe’s?

Tell us about it in the comments below!

What’s the biggest mistake you can make in English without even talking?

English is not something you can buy.  You must work for English skills and your English success.

In today’s episode we talk about thinking of English as part of life, not a commodity.

It’s easy to purchase a certificate course for English.  But if your heart and mind are separated from your learning, the certificate means nothing.

In the end, your skills in English are what is important – not the certificate!

You must be responsible for learning a language if you are to have any power over it.

Here are two strategies for learning English through living:

  • Go out with English-speaking colleagues after work
  • Use your other interests to explore English

When you meet a native speaker, do not think of them as an English practice object.

Instead, think of them as a potential friend!

 

Next, get the top 15 mistakes in English.

 

What can you do to change the way you think about learning English?

How have you tried to live the language instead of trying to own it?

Share your experiences in the comments section below!

Stop translating your idioms!

Today we’ll be talking about some of the dangers of translating “false friends.”  These are words that sound the same between two different languages, but aren’t.

We’ll also talk about translating idioms.  They can cause huge problems!

Many big businesses have made big mistakes translating English idioms into foreign languages. Here are two examples:

  • “Turn it loose” or “Let loose”: in English, this means “to completely relax”. A direct translation of this idiom into Spanish means “to suffer from diarrhea”!
  • “Finger-licking good”: in English, this means “delicious”. A direct translation into Chinese means “Eat your fingers off”!

Here are many more examples.

 

It is impossible to directly translate idioms, so don’t try!  But if you do make this mistake, it’s okay to laugh!

Have you made any mistakes using “false friends” or translating idioms? 

Tell us how in the comments below! 

Are people who study or work abroad smarter?

A recent Time magazine article says yes!

 Today you’re going to learn how living in a different culture can make you more intelligent.  You will also learn some ways to do this in your own country!

 

How can living in another culture make you smarter?  What are the benefits to your mind?

According to the article, it can make your thinking more:

  • Creative
  • Flexible
  • Complex

 

How can you get these benefits without going abroad?  What can you do where you live?

  • Host a foreign student
  • Look for a group of people to practice speaking English
  • Find music, movies or television to immerse yourself in another culture
  • Practice talking to yourself in English when alone

 

Caution: Going abroad is not what makes you smarter!  Experiences living in a different culture make you smarter.

 

Are you going to try living in a different culture?

Are you going to make yourself smarter?

Has living in another culture already made you smarter?  Tell us how in the comments below!

 

Do you like to tell jokes at parties?

Would you like to be able to tell a few jokes in English?

Today you’ll learn how to play with words and have a lot of “pun”!

What is a pun?

It’s a creative use of the language, usually using the literal meaning of the language and then a more creative, idiomatic use of the word.

 

Pun #1

What is acupuncture? Acupuncture is a “jab” well done?

“To jab someone”: to poke someone

“A job well done”: You did a great job

 

Pun #2

Once you’ve seen one shopping center, you’ve seen the mall

“You’ve seen them all”: They are all pretty similar

“You’ve seen the mall” : The mall is the shopping center

 

Pun #3

Bakers trade recipes on a knead to know basis

“On a need-to-know basis”: An exclusive secret, something that is not told to everyone, only those who need the information

“To knead”: To work with dough

 

What English puns do you know?

Share them here in the comments!

 

http://www.buzzfeed.com/patricksmith/really-really-bad-puns?bffb

Today you’ll learn how to let go of your grammar mistakes and your obsession with perfection and you’ll learn how to finally speak like a native!

Today we have Idahosa Ness who is the founder of the Mimic Method and he helps learners reach fluency through song lyrics and mimicking the language.

 

What does it mean to “mimic” English speakers?

To “mimic” means to copy.

When you learn English, don’t learn from the written word. Learn from what you hear.

Try to surround yourself with the language and repeat back what you hear.

Don’t think about conjugating verbs in your head or making a mistake.

When you focus too much on conjugating, it restricts your ability to take in new sounds in your head.

There will be no space in your mind.

 

What are the mistakes that learners make when they learn?

They approach the language through the written language., not the spoken language.

The problem is, we actually communicate through sound, not writing.

English is different in paper than in real life.

Idahosa created the Mimic Method to learn his own new languages because he was frustrated with the old methods of learning languages on paper.

 

What if you can’t travel to an English- speaking country?

Consume as much media as you can.

Media include TV and movies.

You can also connect with native speakers online while you are in your home country.

 

What if you do want to learn academic English?

Start with “street English” using the mimic method and then it’s easy to move into learning academic English.

 

Listen to another episode about learning English grammar!

 

Idahosa’s Bio:

Idahosa Ness is an educator, entrepreneur and founder of The Mimic Method– a language-learning program where you can master the pronunciation of English and other languages through song- training and personalized feedback.

Idahosa speaks five languages fluently (Spanish, French Portuguese, English, and Mandarin) and is currently learning his sixth one- Japanese- by making friends and “mimicking” people in Tokyo.

Check out Idahosa’s videos on YouTube.

 

 

What do you guys think? Have you tried mimicking a native speaker?

How did it go?

Do you think this could work for you? Let us know!

 

Yesterday we asked the question, “should you apologize?” and we asked you if you are apologizing and saying sorry too much.

Today we want to give you some practical, alternative phrases for saying “I’m sorry” if you decide that you are in the right place and situation to offer an apology.

Why should you learn different ways to say the same thing?

It makes you a more flexible and natural English speaker and it will get you a higher score on exams such as the IELTS or the TOEFL.

You’ll see a comparison of 3 typical ways to apologize and 3 creative, new ways to apologize.

 

Presentation1Get today’s transcripts!

Ready to use this episode to become fluent in English?

Make sure you understood every word we said on the podcast!

Get the transcripts now!

 

Situation 1: You are late

  • “I’m sorry I’m late.”
  • “I got held up.”
  •  “I didn’t realize it was already so late.”

 

Situation 2: You make a mistake

  • “Sorry I messed up.” or “Sorry I made a mistake.”
  • “There was an error.” (this is useful if the mistake wasn’t yours)

 

Situation 3: You make someone upset

  • “Sorry you’re upset. It’s my fault”
  • “I see you’re upset.”
  • “I understand you’re upset.”
  • “What can I do?”
  • “How can I make it right?”

 

What other ways do you use to say sorry?

Let us know in the comments!

Let’s talk!

 

In today’s episode you’ll find out why you might not want to always say “sorry” and you’ll hear from Lindsay and her co-host about their different opinions on how and when to say sorry.

Do you use the word “sorry” often in your native language?

 

Common reasons to use “sorry” in English:

  • If you accidentally hurt someone (if you step on their foot)
  • If you are late to an important meeting (Gabby and Lindsay disagreed on this- listen to the episode to get more details)
  • If you made a mistake or sent the wrong information in an email
  •  If you upset someone or made them feel bad

 

 

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rzL-vdQ3ObA&feature=kp

 

 How about you?

When it is appropriate to say sorry in your culture?

Can you find power in your English mistakes? Find out here.

Today you’ll hear our personal examples and find out what this means for your English learning.

If something is not amazing in your life then you should let it go and wait for something better to come along.

This can be hard.

It can be scary to sit in the open space after you let something go.

Here is today’s quote:

“If you are not willing to risk the unusual, you will have to settle for the ordinary.”

-Jim Rohn

 

Lindsay’s example:

She had been working with someone and getting some coaching and she had hit a wall with this person.

She realized that it was time to move on.

Now that she has moved on, she feels that there is a lot of open space in her life for the next great thing to come along.

 

What does this mean for you?

Maybe it’s time to move on to a new teacher, new materials, or a new class.

It’s ok to let go even if you don’t have anything to move on to.

Sit in the empty space and be ok with that.

 

Next, here are 4 mistakes you are making with your emails in English.

 

Tell us your story!

Do you have something that you need to let go of that is “good” for something that is “great”?

Do you agree with us in this podcast episode?

We want to talk with you in the comments!

Let’s find out today with our special guest Turgay Evren.

Turgay is an English instructor from Turkey and also an author of more than 60 best-selling ESL books.

Turgay is going to tell us about the differences between learning English in a traditional classroom versus learning English online.

Consider the location:

  • Are you going to be in a traffic jam commuting to your class? When you learn online you don’t need to sit in traffic to get to a physical school. Sitting in traffic can be a waste of time. You can also consider this when it comes to test preparation such as IELTS or TOEFL.
  • Choose your location based on your everyday needs and your life.

 

Does online learning work better in terms of psychology?

  • If you feel shy or awkward when you are learning with a teacher in person then maybe online education is a better option for you. You will feel more confident.
  • If you learn online you can visit different websites or podcasts. You’ll have more access to real English.

 

Learn more about Turgay

Turgay EvrenTurgay Evren is a lecturer, editor, poet, songwriter, translator and author who has written, retold, edited, or translated over 55 storybooks, 5 textbooks, several songs and many poems and essays.

His stories and poems have been read and recorded by several famous story- tellers and authors from different countries. Some of his songs have been arranged and sung by Jason R. Levine, the American RAP singer.

He has worked in various colleges and universities as an English teacher in Ankara, Istanbul, Toronto and Montreal. He has a bachelor’s degree in the field of English Language Teaching and a master’s degree in English Language and Literature with a focus on Post- colonial Literature. The online contents Turgay Evren has created are followed, shared, and used by thousands of ESL learners and teachers across the world. Visit him online at  turgayevren.wordpress.com  or youtube.com/turgayevren.

 

 

What do you think? Let us know in the comments!

Do you prefer to learn online or in person?

Which do you think is better for your life and your personality?

Send us a comment!

It’s time to stop and fix this common error with “yes/no” questions.

Today you’ll hear a real conversation between Lindsay and her co-host where they use “yes/no” questions and answers and you’ll see how to do it right in English.

If someone asks you this: “Do you have any other questions?”

The incorrect way to respond: “Yes I don’t have any other questions”

The correct way to respond: “No I don’t have any other questions.”

 

Here’s the general rule:

Say “yes” or “no” to match the answer, not to match the question.

 

More examples:

Q: Do you have any other questions?

A: No I don’t.

 

Q: You can type 100 words per minute, right?

A: Yes I can/No I can’t.

 

Q: Hey you listen to the AEE podcast? Don’t you love it?

A: Yes I love it.

Q: You don’t want to listen every day?

A: Actually I do. Yes.

 

One more tip:

Use the words “actually” or “really” or “in fact” to redirect the question and give a different answer than the person is expecting.

Don’t translate from your native language!

 

Are you making mistakes with your emails in English?

 

Talk to us in the comments!

Have you ever made this mistake?

Was today’s tip helpful?

Let us know!

Today Josh Plotkin from Brazilian Gringo is going to show you how copying a celebrity and creating an English character can help you improve your English.

You’ll also learn how to learn more about the culture as well as the language when you try to become fluent in English.

If you want to get fluent in a language you have to think about the people with whom you’ll be using the language.

Josh’s tips for learning culture and language:

  • Think about the culture within the larger culture: Do you want to understand office culture or dance culture or hip-hop or entrepreneurial culture within the United States? Don’t just learn “American culture” but break it down into small cultures that you need to learn and communicate within.
  • Look for materials made by people within the sub-culture that you have chosen: If you are an entrepreneur and you want to learn enough English to do business in the United States you should download podcasts and get materials that discuss entrepreneurship in the US.
  • Model someone in your target language:  Choose a TV or movie character that you can relate to. Stop being your normal self in the new language and become the character that you are modeling. This is also helpful when you switch between languages.

 

Don’t be afraid to play with your personality and develop new characters to feel more confident when you speak a new language.

You could also try this trick in the IELTS Speaking test.

By pretending to be someone else, you can reduce some of the pressure and self-consciousness that you might be struggling with.

 

 

Josh PlotkinJosh’s Bio:

Josh is a language teacher from California who is fascinated with exploring other cultures.

He helps the world discover Brazil and learn Portuguese with his site: Braziliangringo.com

Say hi if you’re planning on going to Brazil.

 

 

Let us know your opinion!

Have you tried using a celebrity character when you speak English?

Do you think it could work for you?

Which celebrity would you choose?

Today you’ll learn how to respond to a typical Fourth of July invitation and you’ll find out what most Americans usually do on the Fourth of July.

What is special about July 4, 1776?

It was the day that we signed the Declaration of Independence to become independent from Great Britain.

What do Americans usually do?

  • Barbecues: It’s common to have a barbecue all summer but especially on the 4th of July.
  • The beach: Even in Boston we have beaches.
  • Fireworks: Every US city has fireworks. Find out where they’re showing them and invite your friends. Bring a blanket and choose a specific meeting place to meet up with your friends.
  • Go to a parade: This usually happens during the day
  • Special menus or events at restaurants or bars
  • Camping and hiking: It’s a great opportunity to take a 3-day weekend this year because the Fourth of July is on a Friday.

 

How do you respond to a typical Fourth of July Invitation?

G: I’m going to catch the parade tomorrow do you want to come?

L: Really? That would be cool. What time does it start?

G: Let’s meet at 11am.

L: That sounds great where should I meet you?

G: Let’s meet near the MIT bridge.

 

Next, learn about St. Patrick’s Day in the US.

 

What are you doing tomorrow for the Fourth of July?

Are you going to celebrate?

Do you have any questions for us? Ask us here!

In this episode you will hear a role play between Lindsay and her co-host where they have a misunderstanding when it comes to scheduling a time to practice English online.

Here are some mistakes that you are making when you try to meet Americans online:

  • You aren’t setting a specific time: If you aren’t setting a specific time with someone then you are saying to the person that you are rude and that you don’t actually care about practicing. It also makes you appear flaky. Flaky means that you are not reliable. Only schedule a time that you KNOW you can meet the person and that there won’t be any other conflicts.
  • You aren’t giving enough advance notice: Are you emailing your English partner to ask them to help you only one hour in advance? This is completely rude. It’s disrespectful. Instead, give the person at least 24 hours of advance notice for scheduling and for cancelling any appointment.
  • You are treating a Skype meeting as different from meeting in person: Remember that across the screen there is a real person who has given up something else to meet with you. Treat them well. Cancel in advance or if there is an emergency contact them as soon as possible. The worst thing you could do is not show up and not let them know.

 

Success means understanding what your colleagues, friends, and partners are thinking even if they are from another culture.

Success comes from empathy!

Think about your cultural point of view when it comes to time.

Tell us in the comments!

How do you handle scheduling in your culture? How do you think it’s different from the US?

Learn how to politely end a boring conversation in English today!

Here are some phrases that you should NOT use:

  • “Ok bye.”
  • “See you later.”
  • ” I have to go to the bathroom.”

 

Presentation1All Ears English Transcripts

Check your understanding of today’s episode.

Learn the sounds of American English and new vocabulary words

Click here to get the transcripts now!

 

 

Here are some phrases to get out of the conversation:

  • “Ya know what? I really gotta get going.”
  • “I’d love to hear more but I gotta run.”
  • “I have to be somewhere.”
  • “It was great talking to you but I want to talk to someone else over there.”

 

Keep building your English conversation skills!

Find out how to use “by the way” in English.

 

Talk to us in the comments!

Have you tried to use these phrases?

Did you successfully get out of the conversation? Tell us what happened!

Do you know how to start your presentation in English?

Today you’ll find out 3 awesome tips from our guest Carl Kwan!

Carl has been on our show a few times this year!

He is a presentation expert and he told us why it’s important to know your audience when you present and how to end your English presentation.

Today he’s here to show you how to get your presentation started!

3 Ways to Start your Presentation in English:

  • Start with a surprising fact: After you state the interesting or surprising fact, tell people what they should do with it. This gets their attention and this makes it easy for you to show them what they are going to learn. This is a more effective way to start than saying your name or “thanks for coming to my presentation.”
  • Use a story: Talk about what you were doing at a specific time when you thought about your presentation topic. For example, “Recently I was having a conversation with a friend when she told me about a really interesting method she is using to learn English.” With this strategy you should use a time reference. Talk about a situation and the action that was going on at the time. Use the word “when.” Using “when” is a good way to introduce the topic that you are about to talk about. This will get your audience interested.
  • Use a question to talk about a problem and your solution: Start by asking “have you ever…?” Then say, “well, here’s…” Here is an example from Carl: “Have you ever wondered how you can use CNN to learn English? Well here’s a 5-step process for using CNN to learn English.” To do this you have to know your audience and your question has to speak to them.

Carl’s Bio:

Carl was born in Hong Kong and immigrated to Vancouver, Canada at age 3. Like many immigrants, his parents always struggled with English.

This eventually led him to pursue teaching English to help people like his mom and dad.

Since 2009 he has produced presentations videos. Currently, his YouTube Channel has more than 120 videos on presentations.

Carl lives in Seoul, South Korea with his wife and son. He offers presentations workshops and consulting, he produces live and animated videos for business owners and works as a professional voice actor and radio personality.

He believes that everyone deserves a chance at success. To learn more about Carl, please visit his website at www.carlkwan.com, check out his videos on YouTube or connect with him on LinkedIn.

Talk to us in the comments!

Have you tried any of these techniques?

How did it work? Let us know!

Do you feel confident when you present in English?

In this episode, Michelle shares what she learned when she moved to New York City.

What does it feel like to be in a new and strange place?

Listen in and find out today how she overcame many challenges in this experience.

She also shares four lessons she learned in the transition that helped her successfully move to New York and started a family.

You can take Michelle’s advice today and apply it to your big move if you relocate abroad.

How long has Michelle been living in New York?

Over 10 years ago she made the decision to live in the Big Apple and she is happy to advise on what she did to get through all the difficulties.

Michelle knew only a couple of people in the city when she first moved.

Her idea originally was just to get to the city and stay for the summer.

She gave herself a deadline to get a job by the end of the summer and if that didn’t happen, she’d return home.

Fortunately, she got a job as a temp.

To temp position is to fill in a role of an employee who is on leave in a certain company.

This can be temporary or can eventually turn out to be a permanent job.

Lindsay said this sounds difficult because it seemed that she has to learn about a new office every time.

Michelle agreed that it was difficult but she did have a good experience where she temped at Good Will as an event planner.

She got really close with her co-workers.

Her bad experience was when she worked for a certain brand but then they were very rude to her, so she boycotted them ever since.

The Four Lessons Michelle Learned on Her Move to New York

Lindsay asks Michelle a series of questions to learn how she did so well living in a new place.

Michelle summarizes this advice in four lessons to encourage you to take that risk to go beyond your comfort zone.

She also adds challenges you can expect and how to overcome them.

  • Lesson #1 Take it One Day at a Time

Michelle remembers the first few days in the city when she felt so sad and she called her brother.

She was crying in the corner and told him that she wanted to give up and come home.

She felt that coming to New York was a mistake. Her brother said just get through the year. He was sure everything would turn out better for her if she could do that.

This was one year in New York and now she has been living there for more than a decade.

Michelle says that you shouldn’t let your feelings each day weigh you down.

There will be challenges and it will be lonely at the start.

If you move to a new place you must be open to considering moments of adjustments and it will be hard to adapt.

A bad day can be a week, a month, or even longer but bear in mind that you will come out the other side stronger.

Give it time, apply yourself, and never make a decision because of intense emotions.

  • Lesson #2 Lean on Your Support System

Speak up and share what you are going through with people who are in your support system.

At times, it lightens the burden to get those bad emotions out.

Go to the people who you know you can depend on and you can be honest with.

You don’t have to be strong all the time. It’s good to acknowledge what you are going through and find strength in the people who care for you.

It doesn’t mean you moved to a new place that you have to take it all on your own.

  • Lesson #3 Anticipate the Ups and Downs

Michelle says that you should know that there will be bad days.

You should be open to yourself that there will be times that will challenge you and push you to surrender.

Be mindful.

Don’t keep thinking that you will be positive and power through.

It’s better to look forward to times that will slope down and give you difficulty so you are better prepared.

  • Lesson # 4 Put Yourself Out There

Try to meet new people and make new friends.

Michelle at the beginning had a room to herself and a shared bathroom in a dorm.

She would go to her job then eat something and then go straight home and binge watch Sex in the City.

It is hard to make friends and build relationships when you are in a new place.

Looking back, Michelle does not know how she got to where she is now with a husband and son living in New York.

It is a process, you just need to start.

You meet one person and you meet the people they know and like a domino, everything else follows.

Michelle’s mom would say it is one whole experiment where you are just finding everything out and exploring.

Takeaway

The main theme of this episode is to be mindful.

Lindsay has felt the same where she is in a foreign place and all she does is just move from home and work all the time because it’s difficult to adjust.

There are things you can do to help yourself when you are faced with the challenges of moving.

Be aware that you will get through it no matter what.

Michelle leaves us with a quote: “Your highs are never as high as you think they are and your lows are never as low as you think they are.”

Don’t get too psyched when things are perfect and don’t put yourself down when you feel down.

Hopefully, you find comfort in this.

When you are in the hard part of the transition of your move to a new country, know that you are not alone.

You can do it.

There will come a time when you get to the point that everything works out for you and you can share your own success story and help someone else.

Go here for more insider tips about life in New York City.

Do you have your own tips for moving to a new place?

Share it in the comments down below and give encouragement to the rest of our listeners and subscribers.

Today we have Ana Luiza from Ingles Online.

She is going to offer you three tips to make it work from home.

 

3 Ways to Learn English from Home:

  • Don’t only read, start with audio: Don’t invest too much time in just reading if you don’t know the sounds of English. It’s common for people to start with just reading but they don’t use the audio to go with what they are reading. These students end up having strange pronunciation because they use the sounds of their native language. If you do this, it will be a huge waste of time.
  • Listen to things that you understand: Start with English audio that you understand but can’t use quite yet. Don’t focus your time on English that you don’t understand. Once you understand something once, you need to see it again and again and review it. You need to see it used in different contexts and see it being used by different people. It takes time to acquire the language. It’s a process.  Don’t jump ahead and skip over words that you think you already know.
  • Start small: If you are busy and don’t have a lot of time consume English in small chunks. Fifteen minutes a day is great.  Take small steps. Listen to English while you are doing something else like cooking.

 

Ana Luiza has shown us that it is possible to get better at English even if you can’t travel to an English-speaking country.

Go get started with some of these tips and techniques today!

Check out another great guest episode from ESL Hip Hop.

 

Ana Luiza’s Bio:

Ana Luiza Bergamini is the founder of http://www.inglesonline.com.br,  a website that teaches English to Portuguese speakers with a focus on comprehension and speaking, and features weekly tips and a podcast, and a multimedia course of basic English.

Ana has taught English for over ten years and she now lives in London, UK.

 

 

Talk to us in the comments!

Have you tried using any of these tips?

How did they work?

Today you’re going learn a few phrases, questions, and vocabulary words that you can use in any conversation to make people enjoy your company more.

 

 

 

Presentation1All Ears English Transcripts!

Check your understanding of today’s episode.

Learn the sounds of American English and new vocabulary words.

Click here to download the transcripts now.

 

Phrases to make people like you:

  • “How about you?”: This is better in the middle of a conversation. People want to talk about themselves and share their opinion on a topic so give them a chance to do it. This shows that you are interested in the person and that’s why they’ll find you interesting.
  • Use the person’s name: This shows that you care enough to remember the person’s name. Use their name to show that you care. Try to insert their name at the beginning or the end of a conversation. Don’t be afraid to ask for their name again if you forget it.
  • Do NOT use “sir” or “ma’am” in the US: This is too formal in the Northeastern United States or on the West Coast (Boston, NY, Portland, Washington State). It can also make you sound submissive or like you are putting yourself below the person.
  • “You’re welcome” instead of “no problem”: When you say “no problem” you are saying that what you just did for that person was easy and it didn’t mean anything to you. “You’re welcome” doesn’t make a judgment about what you have done for the person. It’s simple and polite.
  • “What would you like me to do?”: This allows the person to be direct if they are trying to hint at something and it gives you a chance to help someone.

Some of these phrases might also help you get a higher Speaking score on the IELTS Exam.

Click here to learn more about the IELTS Exam.

 

Have you tried any of these phrases?

If so, how did it go? Do you know another phrase that will make you more likeable?

Let us know in the comments section!

 

Source: Inc Magazine 19 Words That Will Make People Like You More

Lisa is from the Pacific Northwest region of the United States.

Lisa is going to introduce us to Seattle and the Pacific Northwest and she is going to show us 4 things that are different or unique about her region.

4 Things That Are Unique About the Pacific Northwest:

  • People enjoy the outdoors: People are focused on the environment and spending time outdoors. Even though it rains a lot, people like to get out and when it’s nice out, people spend a lot of time sailing, boating kayaking, hiking, etc. The temperatures are mild throughout the year and it’s not “painful” to be outdoors.
  • They value local, organic food: A lot of people in this area value organic and local food, grass-fed beef, etc. There are a lot of farmers’ markets that people go to regularly. There is a huge market for this kind of natural food.
  • A vibrant coffee culture: Starbucks started here! Starbucks brought the coffee culture to Seattle but in Washington there are tons of local coffee roasters and local cafes. The local shops often roast their own blends and have followers. If you are visiting the US, it’s a great idea to go into a cafe or the same cafe every day for several days. You can meet real local people at these places. Try starting a conversation with them.
  • A progressive political culture: A lot of people value things like the environment, gay marriage, and other social issues. Medical marijuana is now legal. The minimum wage has just been increased from $9 per hour to $15 per hour. This is considered a “living wage.”

 

 

Bonus vocabulary term: “Crunchy”

This term can be used as an adjective and it means that people like to spend time in nature.

It’s an American English slang term.

 

Lisa BiskupLisa’s Bio:

Lisa Biskup is the founder of English Fluency Now, Inc. and the creator of the English Fluency Now podcast.

She works as a private English language coach, helping motivated adult learners reach their fluency goals.

Her audio immersion program “Success with Stories” trains learners to become powerful English speakers, so that they can speak English with confidence and ease. Lisa is a certified Bilingual/TESOL teacher who has enjoyed working with English learners for over 20 years.

Visit Lisa’s website at http://www.englishfluencynow.com

 

Have you visited the Pacific Northwest? What did you like about it?

Could you live there? Does the culture match your personality?

Let us know in the comments!

You work hard to accomplish that goal every day.

But what is the final thing that is holding you back? Why haven’t you reached your goal yet?

Is it fear of failure? Maybe not.

We think it’s fear of success!

Do you struggle with fear of success? It’s good to talk about your fears!

We’ll help you with this in today’s episode.

 

A lot of you guys have said you want to sound like a native speaker.

But what happens when you start to sound that way?

You might start to feel like you are losing your identity!

Your actions, your gestures, your way of life might change when you become fluent in English.

 

Presentation1Get today’s transcripts!

Ready to use this episode to become fluent in English?

Make sure you understood every word we said on the podcast!

Download the transcripts instantly!

 

How do you know if you are afraid of success?

  • You procrastinate with English learning: You might have an opportunity to join a language club, to go abroad, or to work with a great teacher but you put it off. You sabotage your success because maybe you feel that you don’t deserve that opportunity. You don’t set up a proper study plan for your IELTS or TOEFL exam.

 

  • You enroll in classes and then you quit: You don’t follow one English course from step A to Z. Instead you skip around. You work with different teachers, take different courses, but you never go very deep into any of them. You are always second- guessing the course or the teacher. You know that if you followed one course from the beginning to the end, you might have a better chance of success and that’s scary.

 

How can you get past this?

  • You can have two identities if you speak two languages. Enjoy the different identities. Play with this concept for a while and see if it works for you.
  • Make yourself accountable: Create a system where people will check in with you to see if you are progressing toward your English goal. Don’t keep your goals private. Make them public if you want a better chance of reaching them.

 

Source: Thanks to Internet Business Mastery Podcast for the inspiration for this episode.

 

Are you afraid of success? How do you know?

How do you plan to overcome it?

Let us know in the comments below.

Throw away your typical way of learning pronunciation and listen up!

This special tip will also help you get a 7 or higher on the IELTS Speaking test.

Learn where to pause!

Today we’re looking at tongue twisters and we’re going to show you how to use rhythm and tone and pauses to pronounce a really tough phrase.

The phrase for today:

She sells seashells on the seashore.

The shells she sells are seashells I’m sure.

For if she sells seashells on the seashore,

Then I’m sure she sells seashore shells.

 

Presentation1Get today’s transcripts!

Ready to use this episode to become fluent in English?

Make sure you understood every word we said on the podcast!

Get the transcripts now!

 

You also need to learn how to correct your own pronunciation.

Listen to the episode to see how we demonstrated chunking and pausing in this episode.

Give this a try and let us know how it works for you!

Today we have special guest Stephen Mayeux on the show.

Stephen teaches English through hip hop and he’s here today to share some of his best ideas with us!

 

3 Songs You Can Use to Get Better at English:

  • “Push It” by Salt-n-Peppa: This song is good because you won’t have to remember too many lyrics. It’s repetitive and it’s fun. This song has energy. Enjoy it!
  • “I Left My Wallet in El Segundo” by A Tribe Called Quest: This song has great lyrics and is great for storytelling and is also repetitive so it’s great for learning.
  • “Sound of da Police” by KRS- One: This song is great to learn the difference between “F” sound and “V” sound. You can get more materials to learn this on Stephen’s website. In this song KRS-One tells a story. He shows his anger at the police by weaving in messages about the way that he saw abuse from the police in his music. He makes a comparison between the police and slave “overseers”.

Remember, when you use music to learn, only focus on a few vocabulary words or sounds.

You don’t need to be able to understand every word in the song.

What do you think?

Do you have any favorite hip-hop songs to learn English and practice your pronunciation?

Which songs do you use? Tell us in the comments.

 

 

 

steve (4)Stephen Mayeux is the founder of ESLhiphop.com.

 

Today we will show you how to do it.

Today you’ll find out what NOT to do if you don’t want to look like a tourist.

  • Don’t go to Times Square: If you MUST see it, run through it in 15 minutes and then go to local spots like West 4th or the East Village near St. Mark’s Place. Definitely don’t eat there! You will get expensive food that is not typical of New York.
  • Check out Brooklyn: Brooklyn has become a hot spot. Check it out to meet local people.
  • Check out Queens: Queens is so diverse! Take the 7 Train to Flushing. You will experience so many different cultures just in Queens.
  • Don’t get scared of the grittiness of New York: Parts of New York are dirty. There are rats in the subway. There are garbage bags on the street all of the time.  People don’t move to New York to have a “clean” and “neat” lifestyle. New York is gritty! It’s messy. Get used to it and see it for what it is!
  • Don’t ask for a “piece” of pizza: Instead ask for a “slice” of pizza. This will make you sound much more like a local than a tourist. Learn more about this here.
  • Realize that New Yorkers don’t pay much attention to the rest of the US: When someone moves to New York, they often don’t leave unless they get a great job or need to move for education or some other really compelling reason to leave. Understand the mentality of a typical New Yorker to connect with him or her.

 

What do you think?

Have you ever visited New York?

Did you go to all of the touristy places or did you find some local spots?

Let us know!

Today you’ll learn how to avoid embarrassing situations when you are not sure whether to hug, handshake, or wave.

We had a question from a Chinese student.

She wasn’t sure how to greet American men.

It’s common for young American women or men to hug you as a greeting.

This student can’t hug a guy because of her culture.

What should she do?

Presentation1Get today’s transcripts!

Ready to use this episode to become fluent in English?

Make sure you understood every word we said on the podcast!

Download the transcripts instantly!

 

Here are some things to think about when you decide on a greeting:

  • Where are you?
  • Who are you greeting?
  • How close are you to the person?

 

We usually don’t hug people when we greet each other for the first time.

We shake hands when we meet someone for the first time.

After spending a few hours with the person you can give the person a casual hug to say goodbye.

 

What should you do if this is strange in your culture?

Just give a “light” hug and keep it distant.

Also try to watch the other person and follow their lead.

 

It also depends on the location/situation.

In a formal situation we might not hug the person.

Context is key.

We don’t hug clients, colleagues, managers, bosses, students, etc.

 

Don’t take it too seriously.

Don’t tighten up if you aren’t comfortable with the hug.

Stick your hand out first to initiate the handshake to avoid the hug.

You could also wave.

This would be a good way to keep some distance between you and the other person and to avoid the hug.

 

Learn how to talk about money in American culture!

 

Leave us a comment!

Have you ever been in an awkward hug situation?

What happened and how did you handle it?

Let us know in the comments below! We want to chat with you

 

Mau Buchler is here to give is some hints and ideas.

Mau thinks that traveling is the best way to learn English.

But before you travel you need to prepare and you can use online tools to get ready.

Mau’s Tips:

  • Prepare: Mau’s platform is called Tripppin and it can help you get ready for your trip by learning the language and about the culture.
  • Don’t go to big chain hotels: You will not be able to connect with local people if you stay at these hotels. You can use couchsurfing.com to find people to stay with. You can also use meetup.com to find local groups and meetups.
  • Volunteer when you are abroad: This is a great way to stay busy, meet local people, and practice your English. This is a way to see a new aspect of the country that you wouldn’t see otherwise.
  • Go to internet cafes: At an internet cafe you’ll find a lot of people who are willing to be social and make friends at these places.

 

Can’t travel abroad? Learn how to get better at English without traveling abroad.

 

MauMau’s Bio:

Mau has been teaching all levels of English, around the world, for 20 years. He’s also an instructional designer, conference speaker, and the creator of http://www.tripppin.com

 

 

 

What are your strategies for starting conversations while you are traveling?

Let us know in the comments below

Do you want to know some great strategies?

Today we have TOEFL expert Bruce Stirling.

Bruce will show you the thinking techniques that separate the winners from the losers on the TOEFL.

 

Bruce’s Tips- What Makes Someone Do Well on the TOEFL?

  • They prepare: Those who get high scores have taken courses, have bought books, and have prepared. You should not be surprised by what’s on the test because of your preparation.
  • They know it’s not a vocabulary test: The TOEFL is an argument- based test. Those who get high scores can develop and analyze arguments in the speaking, and writing sections.
  • They know how to manage their time: The TOEFL is all about time management. You need to practice time- management strategies in addition to practicing the test content.
  • They can write a good independent essay: The secret is being able to write an independent opinion essay. If you can write an essay you will have the foundation that you need to construct an argument in the speaking section and other sections.

 

Click here to learn about the differences between TOEFL and the IELTS and which one should you take.

 

Bruce Stirling is an American university professional with 30- years teaching experience at the BA, MBA, and non credit ESL and ESP levels in the United States and Japan.

He has published nine books, including four TOEFL books.

 

Let Bruce Help You Pass the TOEFL Now!

Do you want to get a high score on the TOEFL?

Do you need great practice and a smart strategy to do it?

Bruce Stirling knows how to lead you to success on the TOEFL.

Why should you get this book?

  • Get speaking and writing strategies that will give you the extra points that you need
  • Learn the strategy of “argument mapping” and how to use it to succeed
  • Learn how to think like a TOEFL rater so that you can pass the exam
  • Get step-by-step help with speaking and writing

What is your TOEFL experience?

What is the most challenging thing about the TOEFL for you?

Please share it with us in the comments!

 

Do you want to be able to pronounce your English words like a native but are you not sure how to do it?

Today you’ll meet Mandy Egle from Pronuncian!

Mandy is a pronunciation expert and she is going to help you find out if you have a pronunciation problem in English!

Mandy has three tips for you today.

 

Mandy’s tips:

  • Do an inventory of the sounds of English: This allows you to self correct more often. This will help you to be a more independent learner. You need to recognize when you have a pronunciation problem.
  • Use a minimalistic method of creating a sound: Don’t try to exaggerate when you practice saying the sounds of English. Instead, learn to make the sound in a minimalistic way. This will help avoid embarrassment and will help you start to speak more naturally and with confidence.
  • Get a native rhythm: Learn how to reduce sounds that should be reduced. We don’t pronounce every sound with the same emphasis. It’s important to study natural rhythms and know how certain syllables need to be stressed and how they fit in with other syllables that are not stressed.
  • Don’t be afraid of sounding like someone else: A lot of students feel nervous when they hear themselves speak naturally, like a native. They seem to lose a sense of identity. They are afraid that people will look down on them. This is an example of being afraid of success. Don’t let it happen to you!

 

Get more episodes about American English pronunciation here!

 

MandyMandy’s Bio:

Mandy has been teaching English as a Foreign Language with a focus on pronunciation and accent reduction since 2005 at Seattle Learning Academy, an English language school she founded in Seattle Washington, USA. Her courses and teaching materials are used by Fortune 100 companies and individuals worldwide. She is also the teacher behind the highly ranked American English Pronunciation Podcast. She uses her experience with intermediate to advanced students to create podcast topics that most affect students living and working in the United States and can help them communicate better and more clearly.

 

 

What do you think?

Have you ever been afraid to sound like a native speaker?

Is pronunciation a big challenge for you?

Let us know!

 

Don’t be lonely when you travel in the United States!

Today we’ll give you 4 phrases to use when you come to the US and you want to make some American friends.

One of our listeners asked us this question so please send in your questions if you have one!

 

Situation 1- We are at a cafe:

Key phrase: “Have you tried the ____?”

Please listen to the episode to get the full conversation!

 

Situation 2- You are at a local party:

Key phrase: “Hey I’m new to Boston. What should I see while I’m here.”

Listen to the episode to get the conversation

 

Situation 3- We are on a day tour:

Key phrase: “What brings you to Boston.”

Listen to the episode to get the conversation

 

Situation 4- At a bed and breakfast:

Key phrase: “What or where have you been exploring?” “Do you have any suggestions?”

Listen to the episode to get the conversation

 

 

Leave a comment!

Which phrase have you tried using while traveling?

How did it go?

Let us know your strategies for starting a conversation while traveling!

A lot of Americans tend to see the “bright side” of things.

Why is this?

Where does optimism show up in American English?

Where does it show up in our intonation and our expressions?

Optimistic expressions in English:

  • To look on the bright side: “Hey don’t be sad. Look on the bright side, at least you are healthy.”
  • To stay positive: “Things are tough right now but let’s stay positive”
  • Chin up: “Come on, chin up, everything is going to be ok”
  • At least… : “You lost your job but at least you still have your house.”
  • To see the world with rose-colored glasses: “This guy sees the world with rose- colored glasses.”

 

Optimism is sometimes connected with comfort with ambiguity.

Hofstede is a Dutch researcher who studied uncertainty avoidance in different cultures.

Uncertainty avoidance means that you don’t feel comfortable with not knowing what’s going to happen or with an unclear situation.

 

Presentation1All Ears English Transcripts!

Check your understanding of today’s episode.

Learn the sounds of American English and new vocabulary words.

Click here to download the transcripts now.

 

Hofstede’s findings on uncertainty avoidance:

1- Japan (high uncertainty avoidance, most comfortable with clear and certain situations) = 92

2- France

3- Brazil

4- Italy

5- US

6- China

7- Singapore

 

Here is a quote for today:

“The pessimist complains about the wind. The optimist expects it to change. The realist adjusts the sails.”

– William Arthur Ward

 

What do you think? Are you optimistic or pessimistic?

Where does your culture fall on the uncertainty avoidance scale?

Let us know- let’s have a conversation!

 

Citation: Geert Hofstede

Do you ever ask this question?

Today you’ll find out how to figure out your English level and you’ll hear what we have to say about the importance of knowing your level.

We got this question from one of our listeners.

Remember you can ask your question too! Please leave a question at the bottom of any blog post.

So how do you know your level? It’s a tough question because you need to remember WHY you are learning and why you are wanting to know your level or your test score.

Presentation1All Ears English Transcripts!

Check your understanding of today’s episode.

Learn the sounds of American English and new vocabulary words.

Click here to download the transcripts now.

 

But why are you actually learning?

If you’re like most people, you are learning for the purpose of communicating and connecting and not just to pass a test.

Language can’t always be based on level.

You start as a beginner and you need some basic skills but after you reach the intermediate level, your growth becomes organic.

It’s not a direct path to improvement.

The bottom line is, how well can you communicate in a given situation.

You might know a lot of vocabulary words or phrasal verbs but can you use the right words at the right time?

That is the thing that you should be trying to measure, not your test score or any number or level.

Remember that level and scores are relative to your situation and you are NEVER a number. You are much more than that.

Focus on connecting with people and developing your speaking and communication skills.

Also, focus on learning based on the situation. Can you order a coffee in Starbucks? Great, now can you use more advanced and sophisticated and natural expressions to order that same coffee?

Our advice is this: Don’t focus on your level or your score. Focus on what you can do THROUGH or WITH your English skills.

 Learn how to become a more self-disciplined English learner.

Please leave a comment for us.

What is your opinion about this topic?

Do you think test scores and levels are important? Why or why not?

Please let us know! We want to hear from you.

Today Chad from Real Life Radio Podcast is here!

Chad is going to show us how to live English and not just learn it.

Chad has three keys to real life English fluency that he is going to share with us today.

Listen to this interview with Chad to change the way you learn English.

Three keys to real life English fluency:

  • Don’t just learn the language but live it: Don’t just take an English class. Don’t make it separate from your life. Don’t make it a school subject. Connect your English learning to your life. Chad did this when he was learning Portuguese and he started learning Capoeira and he got active in the community. He had to sing in Portuguese. It made the learning process easier and more fun.
  • Don’t focus on grammar: Build vocabulary first and start using the language. Don’t make grammar the main focus of your studying. Don’t get paralyzed. Don’t make it right or wrong. Make your goal to communicate rather than get the grammar 100% correct. Get into a routine of listening to real, natural English the way that natives speak it. Also be comfortable with not understanding everything. Even native speakers don’t understand 100% of what they hear.
  •  Have a community that can support you: You could create a community of colleagues or other English listeners on the internet or in real life. Try to connect with both English learners and native speakers. Don’t be afraid to speak English with them if you are not in a class. You have to take your English learning outside of the class.

 Chad’s Bio:

Chad was born in Perth Western Australia but currently lives in Belo Horizonte Brazil. He has been a qualified English teacher and language learner for the past 10 years.

He is also the co-founder of RealLife English which is an English learning experience that connects people through English, both online and in-person.

Find out more about the RealLife Community at their website (realifegobal.com) where you can also see their vast range of articles, videos, and podcasts. Aw Yeah!!

In the United States, we spend a lot of time with our phones when we are out in public like on the train, on the street, or in a cafe.

How can you start a conversation in the United States? Eye contact is the first step and then you have to move fast.

You have to hold the eye contact for another second and then start the conversation.

How can you start a conversation if you have your ear buds in or if you are starting at your email on your phone?

How would your life be different if you had one conversation with a new person each day?

Remember, there is a time to use your device for learning but there is also a time to connect with people.

Don’t forget your bigger goal.

It’s not to learn English.

Your goal is to connect with people!

 

 

Next, learn about the American workplace taboos.

 

Remember, we need 50 iTunes reviews before the end of June! Can you help us!??

Please click here to leave us a review in iTunes! What do you think of our show?

Let us know and then tell us that you left a review in the comments section below.

Today you’ll meet Luke from Luke’s English Podcast!

Luke is a funny guy and a comedian and he’ll teach you how to be funny in English.

Learn three different kinds of humor in English and how to avoid the embarrassment of telling a bad joke in English.

How to execute a joke in the US versus England:

  • In the United States we use a lot of sarcasm and upbeat humor. We like to “stay positive” and “put on a happy face.”
  • In England it’s common to make fun of yourself when you are making a joke. British humor is sometimes hard for Americans to read. A British person might seem quite serious when he is actually joking. There is ambiguity in the jokes. They like to give each other some space for the joke to succeed or fail. Humor is used to make sure no one gets offended in different situations.

Presentation1Get today’s transcripts!

Ready to use this episode to become fluent in English?

Make sure you understood every word we said on the podcast!

Click here to get the transcripts now.

Luke’s advice on how to tell jokes in English:

  • Be careful about telling jokes in social situations
  • Know when it’s appropriate to tell a joke. Sometimes there might be an informal joke-telling situation with your friends. That’s a great time to try your joke.
  • Be careful about the subject of the joke. Don’t make jokes about race, age, weight, gender or sexual orientation (especially in the United States)
  • Try to tell a spontaneous joke rather than a preplanned joke. The joke is more of an attitude than a specific joke. Instead, develop an attitude that is funny and lighthearted.
  • Make sure that you know the joke well when you are telling the joke so that you don’t forget the punchline.
  • Keep it short and sweet.
  • It should sound natural.
  • Don’t laugh too much at your own joke.
  • Be prepared if your joke doesn’t work, but don’t worry about it too much.

Check out another English teacher who uses humor and jokes when he teaches here.

If you want to learn how to tell jokes in English, go out to comedy clubs and learn about how a good joke is told. Enjoy the comedy scene!

Luke’s Bio:

Luke's English Podcast

Hello! I’m Luke from “Luke’s English Podcast”.

I’m from London and at the moment I’m living in Paris.

I love teaching English, meeting people from around the world, and recording episodes of my podcast.

I’ve been teaching for 12 years, and I’ve been doing the podcast for 5 years now. I’m also a stand-up comedian, so I like to use humour in my English teaching.

I’m really pleased to be featured on Gabby & Lindsay’s podcast, and I hope you enjoy the interview. Cheers! Click here to visit my website – http://teacherluke.wordpress.com

Do you like to tell jokes in English?

Tell us your best joke in the comments section below!

They don’t have the same meaning!

In today’s episode you’ll learn the difference between these two English vocabulary words and you’ll learn how to use them like a native.

Fun versus Funny:

  • Fun: Something enjoyable, exciting, a walk with a friend, a good conversation
  • Funny: Something that is comedic, something that makes you laugh

 

Presentation1Get today’s transcripts!

Ready to use this episode to become fluent in English?

Make sure you understood every word we said on the podcast!

Get the transcripts for this episode!

 

It is also important to pay attention to intonation.

If you use a specific intonation, it could mean “weird” or “off.”

At the beginning of the episode, Lindsay said, “You seem funny today.”

Lindsay meant that her co-host appeared strange and she was asking if something was wrong.

Pro tip: You can call someone fun and/or funny but the two words don’t mean the same thing.

 Get more common English mistakes here.

Do you know anyone in your life who is both fun and funny?

What’s funny to you?

What’s fun?

Tell us in the comments!

AJ Hoge explains how to learn English with emotionDo you know why it’s important to learn English with emotion?

Today we have a special guest on the show who is going to show you a new way to learn English to finally succeed!

AJ Hoge is the founder of Effortless English.

AJ believes that you need three things to make your English learning work.

You need to learn with emotion, you need to listen as much as possible, and you need to use REAL English materials. AJ is one of many awesome guests that we have had on AEE.

AJ’s tips today are great for anyone who wants to reach a level of confidence in English conversation or anyone who wants to increase their score on the IELTS or the TOEFL.

AJ’S Tips for Success:

  • Learn with emotion: AJ thinks that emotion is 80% of success. You can’t be passive when you learn. You need to bring your mind to life and put some energy and power into your English learning by using emotions. What should do if you feel embarrassed? Use your body and stand up straight, breathe deeply, and speak louder. These are the first steps to get active and emotional with your learning!
  • Start with listening: AJ reminded us that you need to listen before you speak. Babies learn by listening for months before they ever try to say a word. Let your brain absorb the sounds of English. Listen to people around you. Listen to podcasts, TV shows, movies, and other real materials. Don’t pressure yourself to use what you hear right away. It’s ok if your listening ability is higher than your speaking ability. Just keep listening!
  • Listen to REAL English: Don’t focus on the small, grammatical points of the language. Focus on real American English and listen to people who are talking about topics that grab your interest. Don’t rely on textbooks. You will never have a conversation with someone about grammar points. No one wants to talk about that. Look on You Tube and iTunes for interesting listening material. Focus on your own interests and hobbies.

Presentation1Get today’s transcripts!

Ready to use this episode to become fluent in English?

Make sure you understood every word we said on the podcast!

Get today’s transcripts- available for instant download!

“You have to take control. Instead of letting a textbook company give it to you, just go search and find it yourself.”

– AJ Hoge

AJ’s Bio:

A.J. Hoge is the founder of Effortless English and host of The Effortless English Show and Podcast.  

He is known for creating powerful English speakers who become successful international leaders…

…. without using boring grammar books, textbooks, or old school methods.

A.J. Hoge has a Masters degree in TESOL and has been teaching English as a Foreign Language since 1996.

Visit Effortless English at: http://www.effortlessenglishclub.com

Do you know what to say to your friends when they need some motivation and some help?

Today you’ll get 6 ideas that you can use today.

 

Here are the phrases that you need:

1- “Get out there and do it”

2- “You can do it”

3- “Do the best you can”

4- “Do your best”

5- “Break a leg” (this doesn’t mean that we want the person to actually break their leg)

6- “You’ll do great” or “You’ll be awesome” or “You’ll be great”

 

Next, get 6 phrases to buy yourself time in English.

 

Please give us your opinion in the comments!

What do you want to learn on Thursdays?

Do you want a quote to motivate or inspire you or do you want to learn phrases and listen to role plays (more like a Teaching Tuesday)??

Please leave your comment below!

 Thanks! We can’t wait to get your feedback!

Do you feel like you’ll never be able to learn or remember new grammar or vocabulary words?

Well, when you feel this way, you need to remember that it’s all about science!

Today you’ll learn three things that you need to do to train your brain to learn English.

You need to make a pathway, connect, and use the language.

 

Presentation1All Ears English Transcripts!

Check your understanding of today’s episode.

Learn the sounds of American English and new vocabulary words.

Click here to download the transcripts now.

 

1. Make a pathway:

Build a bridge between the receptors in your brain.

Imagine having two cliffs that are separate and you want to build a bridge to bring the two cliffs together.

This is not easy because you have old thinking patterns but you need to keep working hard to create the pathway.

How should you create the neural pathways? Think about your learning style and use the 80/20 rule.

How do you learn best?

Do you learn by listening?

Then spend your time listening! Do you learn through physical movement? Do more of that while you are learning English.

 

2. Make connections

Connect what you learning in English with someone else that you know well.

Create a mnemonic device.

A mnemonic device is something that you use like an abbreviation to remember words.

Everyone creates their own mnemonic devices in their own way. It might take more time initially, but you’ll save yourself a lot of time in the end.

 

3. Use what you are learning

Don’t just listen or read. You need to write, speak, and use the language.

You need to analyze what you are learning. Don’t focus on English just to use English.

Use English to learn about something else going on in your life.

 

Remember, build the pathways, connect, and use the English that you want to learn!

What do you think about this advice?

Have you used this advice in your learning? How has it worked?

Let us know and let’s talk about it.

Today you’ll learn 8 phrases to start a conversation in English with someone new about their pet.

Yesterday we talked about why Americans are crazy about their pets.

To start a conversation with someone new, you can make a comment about their pet if you see them walking their dog.

This is a very common and easy way to start a conversation with someone and maybe make an American friend.

 

Presentation1Get today’s transcripts!

Ready to use this episode to become fluent in English?

Make sure you understood every word we said on the podcast!

 

Click here to download the transcripts now!

 

Here are some phrases to use:

  • “Oh how cute!”
  • “Oh how adorable!”
  • “How old is he?”
  • “When did you get him/her?”
  • “How long have you had him?”
  • “Is he friendly?”  or “Can I pet him?” (it’s important to ask the owner for permission if you want to pet the dog)
  • “What breed is he?” or “What kind of dog is she?”

After you have started the conversation about the dog, you can transition into other topics.

 

Quiz for today!

What is one question that you should NEVER ask a dog owner (when you first meet the person)

A- “How much did he cost?”

B- “Where did you get him?”

C- “Is he trained?”

 

Please write your answer in the comments!

Have you noticed that Americans love their pets and spend a lot of money on them?

They even consider them a part of the family. Luckily, this makes the topic of pets a great way to start a conversation in English with an American person!

Today you’ll learn about American pet trends and why Americans are so close to their pets!

Presentation1All Ears English Transcripts!

Get the transcripts for this episode!

Use the transcripts to move your English from intermediate to advanced.

Learn native pronunciation and vocabulary.

Click here now to get the transcripts.

 

How do Americans feel about their pets?

They are just like a family member.

The dog is not considered a farm animal that is separate from humans.

Most pets live inside the house in the United States or at least they spend the night inside the house. The pet might go out during the day.

Some people in the US might feel lonely.

Maybe that’s why they like to have a pet around the house to keep them company.

We also use dogs as service dogs for blind people.

People in big cities also use their dog as a way to start a conversation with other dog owners, especially in a large city.

 

What is a designer dog?

Designer dogs are bred to be a combination of certain types of dogs. Some people have “puggles.”

A puggle is a combination of a beagle and a pug. Some people have “labradoodles.”

A labradoodle is a combination of a labrador and a poodle.

These dogs are expensive. Some people pay between $500 and $1,000 for a designer dog.

 

Americans like to dress their dogs up

We put sweaters, boots, and even raincoats on our dogs sometimes.

We also dress our dogs up for Halloween.

Some people buy health insurance for their dog.

Some people send their dog to “doggie daycare.”

 

There are no wild dogs in the US

Most dogs have a home in the US.

If there is a wild dog (very rare), the animal control professionals come and take the dog to a shelter.

 

What is the attitude toward dogs in your country?

Please share your point of view in the comments?

Let’s have a conversation!

Do you say mean things to yourself such as “I can’t believe I just made that mistake in English” or “I am so stupid that I’ll never learn English”?

Do you say these things to yourself?

Today we want you to ask yourself, what would your friends say about your English?

A good friend would never say the mean things that you say to yourself, right?

So why do you do it to yourself?

 

What can you do if you have this problem? (everyone has this problem)